Home

User Manual - GTX Corporation

1. 413 gCELEV Type Menu Availability GCE or GCELEV GTX Vector Clean gt Contour Elevation GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon i S gCELEV sets the elevation of a series of PLINE objects in increments Instructions Set the base or starting elevation Set the Contour Interval the increments by which elevation is changed Press OK Stop lt Pick Contour gt Select the polyline to assign the starting elevation Stop lt Pick Contour gt Select the polyline to assign consequent elevations When done type S 414 gCHANGE Type Menu Availability GCH or GCHANGE GTX Raster Edit gt Change GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon 6 gCHANGE stretches raster lines arcs and circles Change the radius of an arc by moving its circumference and endpoint Change the radius of a circle by moving its circumference Change the length and orientation of a line by moving one endpoint This command also merges or smoothes fragmented and irregular lines or arcs To smooth choose the raster entity and redraw it without changing its geometry To smooth or merge entire sections of a drawing use the gSMOOTH command In the following illustrations dashed lines portray rubber banding lines Options Object Type Options Line Select a line to be changed Arc Select an arc to be changed Circle Select a circle to be changed Instructions 1 Select gCHANGE Select raster lt LINE gt 2 The original default
2. O M M M M 3P_APP_EDIT NO M When set to YES ICAD will not perform transparent saving ofREM edited ster images 515 EM Useful when another 3rd party application will also be performingREM ransparent saving EM Default is NO P APP _SAVING NO M M A raster image attached with the gattach command willREM automatically the active image gactive when the parameter M is set to YES M Default is YES CTIVE_ON_GATTACH YES J HO V W D gt m m o m m Q EM Keep the following setting at YES to prevent EM holes from forming in the warped image ARP_CORNER_PTS YES AX Configuration Entry Descriptions The configuration file entries are explained below and valid entries are given Any items not included in the file or not given a value will use the default values Basic Configuration Parameters DrawingUnits This entry has two functions It defines whether configuration values should be inches or millimeters and also how the World Coordinate Units should be applied to the raster image The raster image can be either 1inch or 1mm the other linear measurements in the configuration file will be in the same unit i e if you specify mm the RasterWidth parameter will express millimeters and the value should be adjusted accordingly The DrawingUnits value defines what inch or 1 mm on the raster image maps to in CAD units The value entered must b
3. asterisk less than and greater than symbols gt lt forward and back slashes 1 vertical bar quote or back quote C Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes which can be edited in the Details area Details Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings Name Displays the selected linetype name which can be edited The linetype name can include up to 255 characters Linetype names can contain letters digits blank spaces and the special characters dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma colon equal sign question mark asterisk less than and greater than symbols gt lt forward and back slashes 1 vertical bar quote or back quote 173 Description Displays the description of the selected linetype which can be edited Use Paper Space Units for Scaling Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically Useful when working with multiple viewports PSLTSCALE system variable Global Scale Factor Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes LTSCALE system variable Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object s scale factor CELTSCALE system variable ISO Pen Width Sets the l
4. IOP AutoClean GTXScanClean are trademarks of GTX Corporation U S Patent No 7 016 536 AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Flexera is a registered trademark of Flexera Corporation CQuanizer O is copyright of Jeff Proise 1996 1997 FLEXENABLED is a trademark of Flexera Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners O Copyright 2011 GTX Corporation All Rights Reserved Release Version 14 15333 North Pima Road Unit 8 Cedarwood Chineham Park Suite 155 Crockford Lane Scottsdale Arizona 85260 Basingstoke Hampshire United States of America RG24 8WD United Kingdom Tel 480 889 8600 Tel 44 0 1256 814444 Fax 480 889 8610 Fax 44 0 1256 364887 Email info gtx com Email info gtx co uk WWW GTX COM Table of Contents INTRODUCTION 8 iss scecsssescceussesstssisctececvsnssesssstsuecussasntcadonsseesesnshosssabedeeassasnesgsonscsscvsnsbessedsescsesinsbodassacceeassnsasace 11 GTXIMAGE CAD A NN 11 GTXIMAGE CAD FLUS NN 12 MASTERING THE GT XIMAGE CAD SERIES vaincre tarini aineas esek ieii AEEA SE EEES AEN NES EEEE R iE 12 User S Manu al as acc Roa 12 Other S rces of HID reinig i oe 12 Technical Support oi bo ii 12 installing the SOMWAIE cios dape A 13 ICA 0 6 010 b ta as do Ia deta aorta es or E 13 OY Cd ENYA E A A EN a a E S ENO ed e Oi 13 FIE ROMA A E A A EP RE O E AN MA 13
5. Loading a Raster File The image is attached at 0 0 and at the orientation specified by the AUTOROTATE configuration parameter Raster Resolution If the GTXRAST CFG setting is FILE the file s resolution will be used but if a specific resolution is set in GTXRAST CFG it will override that of the file Color Images There is a difference in the way the gATTACH handles amp opens color or black amp white binary images If you use the gATTACH command to open a color image you will additionally be asked how you wish to pre process the color image GTX Color Grayscale Commands x Commands to process color grayscale images GREDUCE Reduce the number of colors in the image to a more manageable number Usage For color or grayscale drawings scanned with scan software that generated more colors than the original drawing contained GSEPARATE Separate specified colors to new bitonal images Usage For color or grayscale images that need to be converted to bitonal images which can be used for raster editing or converting to vector GBITONAL Automatically convert the image to a single bitonal image Usage For bitonal drawings scanned in color or grayscale image formats C Cancel Take no action Does not execute a color command The best command to use depends mainly upon the number of colors that your image has gBITONAL If you wish to automatically reduce a color image down to a simple binary image you ca
6. Next Displays the next eight attribute values If the block contains no additional attributes Next is unavailable ATTEXT Extracts attribute data informational text associated with a block into a file Command line attext The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed If you enter attext at the Command prompt ATTEXT displays prompts on the command line Specifies the file format for the attribute information the objects from which you want to extract information and the template and output file names for the information File Format Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data Comma Delimited File CDF Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file Commas separate the fields of each record Single quotation marks enclose the character fields Space Delimited File SDF Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file The fields of each record have a fixed width therefore field separators or character string delimiters are not appropriate DXF Format Extract File DXX Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference attribute and end of sequence objects DXF format extraction requires no template The file name extension dxx d
7. lac 1 aa CEE uae yy vv vvy Image rotated through 90 gCUT a section from a rotated image gCUT produces the cut data as a new image which is at a 270 orientation just like the source raster file 22 Image rotated at 30 gCUT from a rotated image gCUT produces the cut data as a new image which is at a 0 orientation not at 30 like the source image entity The border is larger than that specified during the gCUT command because it was cut at an angle Images oriented at angles other than 0 and 90 behave consistently In this example an image was inserted at a 30 orientation and gCUT is used to create a new image The cut image is taken from the source image at 0 not at 30 23 Converting Between Raster and Vector The GTXImage CAD series provides many commands that will convert data between CAD and raster formats These commands are found under the GTX Convert menu For more information see the references for the following commands Vector to Raster Commands gRASTER BURN olle E ALC Es xl Raster to Vector Commands gCONVRT gECONVRT gTRACE gVECTOR Vector Cleanup The commands under the
8. 254 Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify When you select Window the Window button becomes available Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted or enter coordinate values Specify first corner Specify a point Specify other corner Specify a point Plot Offset Specifies an offset of the plot area relative to the lower left corner of the printable area or to the edge of the paper depending on the setting made in the Specify Plot Offset Relative To option Options dialog box Plot and Publish tab The Plot Offset area of the Plot dialog box displays the specified plot offset option in parentheses The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected output device and is represented by a dashed line in a layout When you change to another output device the printable area may change You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y offset boxes The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the paper Center the Plot Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper This option is not available when Plot Area is set to Layout xX Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option Y Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option Plot Scale
9. Connect Broken Lines This spans gaps in broken lines including dashed lines When active lines with gaps smaller than the Maximum Line Gap are merged into single lines When inactive lines with gaps including dashed lines generate individual lines Maximum Line Gap When Connect Broken Lines is active lines with gaps smaller than the Maximum Line Gap are merged into single continuous lines Output Settings The Output Format Settings dialog has three panes DXF CGM and IGES DXF Settings Hollow Polygons When active Hollow Polygons causes AutoCAD Solid entities such as arrowheads to be displayed as hollow When inactive this causes solids to be solid Line Widths When active Line Widths specifies that conversion should retain line widths Inactive Line Widths setting indicates that all lines will translate with zero width When this is active GTX OSR also translates lines arcs and circles as polylines with width Scale Specifies the scale factor positive real number used to multiple both X and Y dimensions CGM Settings Coordinate Integer or Real values Precision Specifies the word size in bits If Coordinate is set to Integer valid entries are 16 or 32 If Coordinate is set to Real valid values are 32 or 64 IGES Settings System ID Sets the system id value for IGES output 529 Hollow polygons When active filled polygons translate into closed polygons When inactive they translate into
10. Icon gRASTER converts selected vector entities into raster data with a designated line width The line style will be preserved Options Width Options Table Use the width settings according to color as set in the Width Table Box Define a value graphically to be used for the width of the vector selected to be converted to raster Value Type in a value in inches or millimeters to use for the width of the vector selected to be converted to raster Notes If there is no active image gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gRASTER If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which raster data can be created Only entities within the raster limits can be rasterized Those selected outside the limits will be ignored or erased When entities are partially outside the part inside is rasterized the part outside is erased GTXImage CAD will not rasterize AutoCAD 3D objects GTXImage CAD will not rasterize hatches with gradient fill pattern colors Instructions x Dialog tel Tabs pa 1 Invoke gRASTER The following prompt will appear Select objects En 2 Select the vector entities to be converted When all entities to be converted are highlighted press Fined midh RETURN The Rasterize Setup dialog will appear 3 To specify line width you can enter a Fixed line width gave vec specify it graphically by drawing a Box or use a Table of vector color to raster line widt
11. Imports a user defined page setup into a new drawing layout E Command line psetupin The Select Page Setup From File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the drawing dwg template dwt or drawing interchange format dxf file whose page setups you want to import If FILEDIA is set to 0 zero and you enter psetupin at the Command prompt PSETUPIN displays prompts on the command line When you select the drawing file that you want to use the Import Page Setups dialog box is displayed PSPACE Switches from a model space viewport to paper space ES Command line pspace The program switches from model space to paper space when you are working on a layout tab 274 HHS HEH paper space model space On the layout tab use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for printing As part of designing your layout you create layout viewports which are windows containing different views of the model By switching from paper space to model space see MSPACE you can edit the model and views within the current layout viewport You can make a viewport current by double clicking inside it You can switch to paper space by double clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not within a viewport You can also switch between model space and paper space by choosing Model or Paper on the status bar PURGE Removes unused named items such as block definitions an
12. The Appendix Glossary of Terms Defines special terms used in this manual which are printed in boldface Configuration File Describes the configuration file and its parameters Raster Formats Lists supported raster import and export formats Keyed Entry The GTXImage CAD Series supports keyboard entry of commands The RETURN and Space key can be used interchangeably to end a command sequence or close a selection The Esc key cancels commands GTXImage CAD commands allow transparent commands to run while another command is running i e a Transparent Zoom is done by typing an apostrophe before the command name ZOOM or Z Software Configuration The GTXImage CAD Series receives many of its default values from a configuration file called GTXRAST CFG This file can be edited with any ASCII text editor such as Notepad or WordPad See Appendix A2 at the end of this manual for more information about the configuration file Raster Files The raster files you will use with the GTXlmage CAD Series are created with a scanner Proper scanner calibration and following the scanner s instructions will generate better images The better the image the less cleanup is necessary File Format For a list of accepted raster file formats see Appendix A3 Raster Formats on page 520 Image Size Some raster file formats allow a maximum size of 32 768 32K pixels in both the X and Y directions If your drawing size is large you may
13. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements D gt x lt es 86 Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes Angle Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 Ta DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension 1 0 Dimension toolbar 0 Dimension menu Arc Length EE Command line dimarc Select arc or polyline arc segment Use an object selection method Specify arc length dimension location Or Mtext Text Angle Partial Leader Specify a point or enter an option Arc Length Dimension Location Arc Length Dimension Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction of the extension lines 87 Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To ad
14. Width Specifies the width of the paper roll for a roll fed source Automatic Enables the printer to specify the appropriate paper source Size Displays a list of available paper sources and both standard and custom paper sizes Printable Bounds Displays the print boundaries Media Type Displays a list of the media types supported by the plotter configuration Duplex Printing Determines double sided printing and binding margin Binding margin options are available only for plotters that support duplex printing None Indicates no double sided printing Short Side Places the binding margin on the short side of the paper Long Side Places the binding margin on the long side of the paper Media Destination Displays a list of available media destinations for the configured plotter such as collating cutting and stapling These options are available only for plotters that support this function Physical Pen Configuration Node for Pen Plotters Only Controls the specific pens in the pen plotter The lower pane of the Device and Document Settings tab displays a table used to describe the color width and speed of each pen in the plotter Note The physical pen information cannot be detected automatically you must provide this information for your pen plotter under Physical Pen Characteristics Pen Configuration Specifies settings for pen plotters Prompt for Pen Swapping Use more than one pen while plottin
15. You are prompted for the new location of the dimension text Specify new location for dimension text or Left Right Center Home Angle Specify a point or enter an option amp a dimension text with left dimension text dimension text and right justification positioned by cursor positioned by angle Updates the location of the dimension text dynamically as you drag it To determine whether text appears above below or in the middle of the dimension line use the Text tab in the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog box Left justifies the dimension text along the dimension line This option works only with linear radial and diameter dimensions 105 reer before Left after Left Right justifies the dimension text along the dimension line This option works only with linear radial and diameter dimensions ae 7 before Right after Right Centers the dimension text on the dimension line Moves the dimension text back to its default position mA aa before Home after Home Changes the angle of the dimension text Enter text angle 7 E AS before Angle after Angle 0 deg The center point of the text does not change If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated the orientation set by the text angle is retained Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation DIST Measures the distance and angle between two points 0 Inquiry toolbar 0 Tools menu
16. methods within active raster entities The following table lists each raster snap option Icon Name Keyboard Bicol E E A A a AR Endpoint activates as running snap under AutoCAD s End AutoSnap raster entities Intersection activates as running snap under A a S AutoCAD s Intersection AutoSnap object Nearest activates as running snap under FAO ee OS AutoCAD s Nearest AutoSnap Edge redge Snaps to the edge of the nearest raster A ES me E api Edge activates as running snap under AutoCAD s Node AutoSnap by three raster points JO rtan Snaps to the point that with the previous point makes a line tangent to a circle or arc defined by three raster points The first point defines the side of the circle or arc for the tangent L raster points S by the endpoints and a circumference point he rper Snaps to a point where the present entity being drawn will intersect perpendicular to a line defined by two points Perp Arc rpera Snaps to the point perpendicular to an arc defined by three raster points 396 Command Definitions This section defines each command The GTXImage CAD variables control the use of dialog boxes or prompts for many commands FILEDIA controls dialogs for file commands and CMDDIA controls dialogs for other commands Setting these variables to 1 enables the dialogs Setting the variables to 0 disables dialogs and causes these commands to use GTXImage CAD command lin
17. 397 gADESKEW Type Menu Availability GAD or GADESKEW GTX Enhance gt Auto Deskew GTXImage CAD GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon H Drawings are often scanned in slightly rotated yDESKEW straightens selected raster by rotating it to align with the X or Y axis JDESKEW rotates selected raster so a selected line on the drawing becomes square The AutoDeskew configuration parameter causes the gATTACH command to automatically deskew upon loading a new raster image Instructions 1 To deskew entire image select JADESKEW 2 The deskew will take place based on long raster lines found in the margin of the raster image If no such lines are found they will not deskew 398 gARC TYPE MENU AVAILABILITY gArc GTX Raster Edit gt Raster Arc GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon Draws a raster arc in the current raster image Instructions From point Select or type the first endpoint To point Select or type a second endpoint To point Select or type a third endpoint The arc appears after the third point is specified Note If there is no active image gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gARC If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which raster arc can be drawn 399 Type Menu Availability GAR or GARRAY GTX Raster Edit gt Array GTXlmage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon ae gARRAY copies raster data in rectangular or polar arra
18. 436 gDETACH Type Menu_ __ Availability GDETACH GTX Imaging gt Detach Raster Image GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon Removes the selected image definition from the drawing database and erases an image object from the drawing and from the display If there is only a single image object defined in the drawing it will be removed in a single step The GTX Image Selection control is presented if there are more than one image objects defined in the drawing A single image must be selected for detachment GTX Image Selection ES Select the image by either selecting the Image name from the list below or interactively by clicking on the Select image on screen button Select image on screen Path CEE e03a cqt acadtest ACADTest_C drive Program Files GTX Raster CAD PLU e06 e06 cg4 Y Wacadtest A4caDTest_C drivelProgram Files GTx Raster CAD PLU coca 437 DrawOrder Back Type Menu CCC Availability GDRO_BK GTX Imaging gt Modify Images gt Send Images to Back GTXlmage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon DrawOrder Back Moves all raster image entities draworder to back 438 gECONVRT Type Menu_ _ Availability GEC or GTX Convert gt Vectorize Edge GTXImage CAD PLUS GECONVRT gECONVRT converts raster data to CAD vector geometry Icon Options Contour When checked raster contours are converted into polyline entities which are good for designating contours When thi
19. AO Fill mode on Turns off Fill mode Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted Changing Fill mode 126 affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting AO qa Fill mode off FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects O Modify toolbar F 0 Modify menu Fillet me a EE Command line fillet Current settings Mode current Radius current Select first object Or Undo Polyline Radius Trim Multiple Use an object selection method or enter an option First Object 127 First Object Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or selects the edge of a 3D solid to round or fillet the edge rro first selecied abject second selected result object Select second object or shift select to apply corner Use an object selection method or hold down SHIFT and select an object to create a sharp corner If you select lines arcs or polylines their lengths adjust to accommodate the fillet arc You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a value of 0 If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline they can be adjacent or separated by one other segment If they are separated by another polyline segment FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the fillet More than one fillet can exist between arcs and cir
20. Angle to Fill the related fields are available for specifying values the Angle Between Items field is not available Total Number of Items Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant array The default value is 4 Angle to Fill Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array A positive value specifies counterclockwise rotation A negative value specifies clockwise rotation The default value is 360 A value of 0 is not permitted Angle Between Items Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array Enter a positive value The default direction value is 90 Note You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle Between Items Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array ARRAY prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the drawing area Pick Angle Between Items Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array ARRAY prompts you to select a 49 point relative to another point in the drawing area Rotate Items as Copied Rotates the items in the array as shown in the preview area
21. Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units The default scale setting is 1 1 when plotting a layout The default setting is Fit to Paper when plotting from the Model tab Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale Inch and Units boxes Scale Defines the exact scale for the plot Custom defines a user defined scale You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches or millimeters equal to the number of drawing units Note You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT Inch es mm Pixel s Specifies the number of inches millimeters or pixels equal to the specified number of units Inch mm pixel Specifies inches or mm for display of units in the Plot dialog box The default is based on the paper size and changes each time a new paper size is selected Pixel is available only when a raster output is selected Units 255 Specifies the number of units equal to the specified number of inches millimeters or pixels Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of plotted objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale Preview Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper by executing the PREVIEW command To exit the print preview and return to the Plot dialog box press ESC press ENTER or
22. Records temporary lines as permanent and does not change the pen s position Reports the number of lines using the following prompt nnn lines recorded Erases any portion of a temporary line and raises the pen if it is down Select end of delete Lowers the pen to continue a sketch sequence from the endpoint of the last sketched line or last Erase Connect Move to endpoint of line Lowers the pen draws a straight line from the endpoint of the last sketched line to the pen s current location and returns the pen to the up position 301 SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals Status bar Snap Command line snap or snap for transparent use Specify snap spacing or ON OFF Aspect Rotate Style Type lt current gt Specify a distance enter an option or pressENTER Snap Spacing Snap Spacing Activates Snap mode with the value you specify On Activates Snap mode using the current resolution rotation and style of the snap grid Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings Aspect Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions This option is not available if the current snap style is Isometric Specify horizontal spacing lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER Specify vertical spacing lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER 302 Rotate Sets the origin and rotation of the snap grid The rotation angle is measured relative to the current
23. Selecting New starts the New Layer Creation dialog piemel arer soroan Type the name and choose the color for a new dialog Press OK when done The new layer becomes current 487 gSLICE From point Availability GSLICE GTX Edit gt Slice All Products cont GSLICE separates raster objects that should not be joined A two pixel wide gap is created along a pick line selected by a starting point and an ending point Instructions 1 From Point Select or type the first endpoint Z TO Point Select or type the other endpoint 3 From Point Select or type the first endpoint 4 To Point Select or type the other endpoint The gSlice command continues prompting for the starting point of the next slice until you select RETURN To point 488 gSMOOTH Availability GSM orgSMOOTH GTX Enhance gt Smooth GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Ls Icon HE gSMOOTH smoothes raster objects in a selected portion of the raster data gSMOOTH can also make raster lines orthogonal or parallel to a specified angle combine fragmented raster lines gSMOOTH can smooth raster linewidth to a fixed value or snap raster linewidth to a series of user defined linewidths By smoothing raster JSMOOTH can reduce the file size by up to 30 percent Instructions Dialog Conversion Type indicates the type of raster to vector conversion being used to smooth the raster CAD interprets raster as lines arcs and circles Contour interp
24. Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ lt 1 gt Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate MIRROR Creates a mirror image copy of objects AN 0 Modify toolbar 0 Modify menu Mirror E Command line mirror Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror line Specify a point Specify second point of mirror line Specify a point 2 Cv LO objects selected 1 The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are mirrored For mirroring in 3D this line defines a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system UCS containing the mirror line Erase source objects Yes No lt N gt Enter y or n or press ENTER SO Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects TE a ES original objects deleted No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects SO original ol retained 185 To manage the mirror properties of text objects use the MIRRTEXT system variable The default setting of MIRRTEXT is 1 on which causes a text object to be mirrored just like any other object When MIRRTEXT is off 0 text is not reversed Ra ER R3 a vere AAS Hne 10K
25. The CGM CFG file is for conversion to CALS compatible Computer Graphics CGM format and has only two entries The setting will generally depend on the requirements of the program in which the file will be used Table 8 Default CGM CFG File Contents Reais isu a The terms are explained below Coordinate Valid entries are Real Integer Real means that coordinates are translated as decimal floating point values Integer means that coordinates are translated as fixed integer values Precision Specifies the word size in bits If Coordinate is set to Real valid entries are 32 64 If Coordinate is set to Integer valid entries are 16 32 The larger the number of bits the larger the range possible Command Line Entries When the program is invoked the command line must include the input and output file names Except for RLC input files which must have the RLC extension raster file names can have any extensions The application will auto detect the input raster file format type from its header The output format can be indicated either by the extension to the file name or by using the vof option 536 The command line entries to be used are as follows osrc exe Required to invoke the program filename1 A name or a UNIX pipe is required to designate the input raster file filename2 A name or a UNIX pipe is required to designate the output vector file vof lt format gt optional to design
26. that textwin or textline IOP methods are allowed to select Text IOP separates raster text from touching raster geometry i e text with 494 a touching or intersecting raster underline Text IOP needs to know the typical size of text characters so it can tell them apart from their surroundings It also selects the minimum and maximum size raster that gl CONVRT will attempt to recognize as text Entities larger or smaller than these values will not be selected by text IOP or will be ignored by text conversion if another selection method was used Min Char Size Sets the smallest size of raster that text IOP will select or that gJTCONVRT will attempt to recognize The default value is set by the CharMinSize parameter in GTXRAST CFG Max Char Size Sets the largest size of raster that text IOP will select or that JTCONVRT will attempt to recognize The default value is set by the CharMaxSize parameter in GTXRAST CFG Note Set the Min Char Size between the sizes of speckles and of typical period full stop raster characters That way speckles are not converted but small text characters are converted Also if there are many touching Characters you may want to double or triple the Max Char Size so that gl CONVRT does not ignore touching raster text String Formation Controls how gTCONVRT merges separated raster strings by inserting spaces in recognized text how it breaks colinear text into separate CAD text entitie
27. 0 Dimension toolbar Ale e Dimension menu Ordinate E Command line dimordinate Specify feature location Specify a point or snap to an object Specify leader endpoint or Xdatum Ydatum Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option Uses the difference between the feature location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y ordinate dimension If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater the dimension 99 measures the X ordinate Otherwise it measures the Y ordinate Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed where you can specify the endpoint ia i 0 41 0 00 Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed where you can specify the endpoint 0 33 B11 0 06 Ydatum Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets The c
28. 149 The Select Image File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Once you select an image file the Image dialog box is displayed Locates inserts names and defines the parameters and details of attached images Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach either from the Select Image File dialog box an unattached image or from the list of previously attached images To add another instance of an image file that is already attached select the image name from the list and click OK Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box If Show Preview is selected a preview of the selected file is displayed Found In Displays the path where the image file was located Saved Path Displays the path specified when the image file was attached to the current drawing Path Type Specifies one of three types of folder path information to save with an attached image an absolute path a relative path and no path Full Path Specifies the absolute path to the image file Relative Path Specifies a relative path to the image file No Path Specifies only the image file name The image file should be located in the folder with the current drawing file Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected image Specify On Screen is the default The default insertion point is 0 0 Specify On Screen Directs input to the command line or the pointing
29. About to regen proceed If you click OK the drawing is regenerated If you click Cancel the last action is cancelled and the drawing is not regenerated REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object Q e Draw toolbar 9 0 Draw menu Region EE Command line region Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Regions are two dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops Closed polylines lines and curves are valid selections Curves include circular arcs circles elliptical arcs ellipses and splines Closed 2D and exploded planar 3D polylines in the selection set are converted to separate regions and then converts polylines lines and curves to form closed planar loops outer boundaries and holes of a region If more than two curves share an endpoint the resulting region might be arbitrary The boundary of the region consists of end connected curves where each point shares only two edges All intersections and self intersecting curves are rejected If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of PEDIT the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline The polyline is not converted to a spline object REGION deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0 If the original objects were hatched hatch associativity is lost To restore a
30. Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport Angle CEnter CLose Direction Line Radius Second pt Undo Endpoint of arc lt Endpoint gt Enter an option or press ENTER For a description of the options for creating arc segments see the Arc option in PLINE Close Closes the boundary If you press ENTER after specifying at least three points the boundary is closed automatically Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment If the previous segment is an arc the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport Restore Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command Enter viewport configuration name or lt ACTIVE gt Enter enter a name or press ENTER Specify first corner or Fit lt Fit gt Specify a point or press ENTER First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method the viewports are fit into the selected area Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area 201 2 Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal size Enter viewport arrangement Horizontal Vertical lt Vertical gt Enter h or press ENTER Specify first corner or Fit lt Fit gt Specify a point or press ENTER 2fvertical First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method the viewport
31. Angular Command line dimangular Select arc circle line Or lt specify vertex gt Select an arc circle or line or pressENTERto create the angular dimension by specifying three points After you define the angle to dimension the following prompt is displayed Specify dimension arc line location Or Mtext Text Angle Arc Selection Arc Selection Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three point angular dimension The center of the arc is the angle vertex The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension lines 7 En EF angle venex i The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line Circle Selection Circle Selection Uses the selection point 1 as the origin of the first extension line The center of the circle is the angle vertex Specify second angle endpoint Specify a point 2 The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle angle vertex 85 Line Selection Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines Select second line The program determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned extension li
32. Arrow tab of the Leader Settings dialog box determines the number of leader points you are prompted to specify The prompt that is displayed next depends on settings selected on the Annotation tab in the Leader Settings dialog box If Mtext and Prompt for Width are selected on the Annotation tab the following prompts are displayed Specify the width lt current gt Specify the multiline text width by creating a text boundary or entering a value If you set the text width value to 0 00 the width of the multiline text is unlimited Enter first line of annotation text Enter the first line of text Press ENTER once to enter another line of text or press ENTER again to complete the command If Copy an Object is selected on the Annotation tab the following prompt is displayed Select an object to copy Select a text object block reference or tolerance object feature control frame The object is attached to the leader If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab the Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed Use the dialog box to create the tolerance feature control frame When you choose OK the feature control frame is attached o the leader If Block Reference is selected on the Annotation tab the following prompts are displayed Enter block name or Enter the name or enter to display a list of blocks defined in the drawing Specify insertion point or Scale X Y X Rotate PScale PX PY PZ PRotate Specify the block insertion poi
33. Enter name of block to insert Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object Yes No lt Y gt Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to or collinear with the divided object at the dividing points No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation Enter number of segments Enter a value from 2 through 32 767 The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block consisting of a vertically oriented ellipse LA y Ke 0 A x Ra block not aligned block aligned DONUT Draws filled circles and rings Draw menu Donut Command line donut Specify inside diameter of donut lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER If you specify an inside diameter of 0 the donut is a filled circle Specify outside diameter of donut lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify center of donut or lt exit gt Specify a point 1 or press ENTER to end the command inside diameter HH 1O outside diameter The location of the donut is set based on the center point After you specify the diameters you are prompted for the locations at which to draw donuts A donut is drawn at each point specified 2 How the interior of a donut is filled depends on the current setting of the FILL command 108 DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed Command line dragmode or dragmode f
34. GAUTOSNAP Snaps gt Raster Auto Snap GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon STX gAUTOSNAP enables GTXImage CAD s AutoSnap options within an active image Details Instructions GAUTOSNAP lt 0 gt 1 1 Type 1 to raster enable AutoSnap 2 Invoke OSNAP command The dialog includes a Select Settings section 3 Select the snap modes you wish to enable The Endpoint Intersection Intersection and Node settings activate GTX raster snaps Because GTXImage CAD does not provide Edge snapping its Node snap is used to activate running edge raster snap CAD Object Snap Raster Snap Endpoint Endpoint Select OK The aperture box will appear around the crosshairs and the marker will snap to raster features Note AutoSnap uses glyphs symbols to represent the snap type GTX running snaps use ToolTip labels to identify the snap being used Snaps work instantaneously even though the ToolTips appear after a short delay 404 gAUTOCLEAN Type Menu Availability GACL GTX Enhance gt Auto Clean GTXImage CAD GACLEAN Raster GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon X gAUTOCLEAN automatically deskews the image and removes noise and speckles without forming a selection set it is completely automatic Another command GCLEANIOP is interactive forming a selection set that can be modified before erasing the noise Instructions Issue the Clean IOP command The program will automatically deskew the image and delete noise Note If you are
35. Hatch Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation Some hatches such as brick patterns need to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary By default all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin Use Current Origin Uses the setting stored in the HPORIGINMODE system variable The origin is set to 0 0 by default Specified Origin Specifies a new hatch origin Click this option to make the following options available Click to Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the hatch Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center HPORIGINMODE system variable Store as Default Origin Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable Origin Preview 140 Shows the current location of the origin Controls the operation of islands and boundaries Islands Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost boundary If no internal boundaries exist specifying an island detection style has no effect Because you can define a precise set of boundaries it is often best to use the Normal style Island Detection Controls whether internal closed boundaries called islands are detected Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary If HATCH encounters an internal island it turns off hatching or filling until it
36. Inquiry Distance EE Command line dist or dist for transparent use Specify first point Specify a point Specify second point Specify a point Distance calculated distance Angle in XY plane angle Angle from XY plane angle 106 Delta X change in X Delta Y change in Y Delta Z change in Z The true 3D distance between points is reported The angle in the XY plane is relative to the current X axis The angle from the XY plane is relative to the current XY plane DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value The distance is displayed using the current units format de a X a s arpaan E ee a ear i r r l angle from AY plane w a i F a r a angle in XY plane DIVIDE Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object Draw menu Point Divide E Command line divide Select object to divide Use an object selection method Enter number of segments or Block Enter a value from 2 through 32 767 or enter b Number of Segments Number of Segments Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts Point Display mode PDMODE has been set such that the points can be seen select polyline divided into five pans 107 Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object
37. Lines marking the raster work area move to the new boundaries Existing data retains the same coordinates as before Warning When resizing an image consider the drawings scale Raster images will normally be about the same size as paper media Ensure your image remains within a normal paper size and then scale it against your vector data You do not want to create a raster image the size of a house or a map it will take a long time if it works at all 474 gROTATE Availability GR or GROTATE GTX Raster Edit gt Rotate GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon O gROTATE rotates selected raster data You will define the center point and a rotation angle to specify the new orientation for the data The rotation angle may be selected by entering a value or by picking two points to indicate the angle graphically gROTATE can also be used to deskew a specified section of a drawing Options Rotation Angle Specify the rotation angle with respect to the X axis Reference Angle Draw a new base line and indicate the desired angle for this line Instructions 1 Select gROTATE Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster data to be rotated When everything you want to be rotated is highlighted press RETURN to continue the command Base point 3 Select a point on the entity to be used as the center point for the rotation process The entity will turn about this anchor point as it rotates It will also
38. REDRAWALL Refreshes the display in all viewports View menu Redraw Command line redrawall or redrawall for transparent use When BLIPMODE is on marker blips left by editing commands are removed from all viewports before REDRAWALL after REDRAWALL REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in place editing of a reference an xref or a block Tools menu Xref and Block In Place Editing Save Reference Edits or Xref and Block In Place Editing Y Close Reference Shortcut menu With no objects selected during in place reference editing right click in the drawing area and choose Close Refedit Session E Command line refclose Enter option Save Discard reference changes lt Save gt 284 Saves back to the xref source drawing or to the block definition in the current drawing all changes made to objects in the working set If you remove an object from the working set and save changes the object is deleted from the reference and added to the current drawing The Save Back Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing changes A Discard Reference Changes Discards the working set the source drawing or block definition is returned to its original state Any changes you make to objects in the current drawing not in the xref or block are not discarded If you delete any object that is not in the working set the object is not restored even if you choose to discard
39. Select mode the window option only adds speckles that are entirely inside the window and PWindow selects speckles that are entirely or partially inside the area In the Remove mode either window option removes data up to the window boundary 6 Continue to create a selection set using Add and Remove to define the area to process When you are satisfied with the area selections press RETURN The highlighted speckles or holes in the display will be processed 493 gTCONFIG Availability GTCFG or GTCONFIG GTX Convert gt Text Config GTXImage CAD PLUS RT Icon 2 gTCONFIG sets up parameters for text IOP and the text conversion commands gTCONVRT and gTRAIN Instructions Text Configuration dialog has four panes Raster Input Character Recognition Word Recognition and Text Output This is the order in which GTX Intelligent Character Recognition ICR functions 1 ICR analyzes the selected raster text filters out raster that is too large or small to be text and gathers string formation information to assist in the detection of space characters 2 Ifa piece of raster appears to be two or more touching characters that raster is broken down into its component characters Raster text is compared to samples recorded in character recognition ICR files A guess is made as to each character s identity Each guessed character is assigned a confidence level If only character recognition is bei
40. Select the vector entities to be converted When all entities to be converted are highlighted press RETURN Raster width Box lt Table gt 01 3 There are three ways to respond to this prompt You can 1 type in a value as the width to be used for all vector lines to be rasterized for plotting 2 use the LineWidth Configuration Table to correlate CAD color numbers with line widths or 3 use the Box option to specify a standard linewidth graphically Fixed Line Width a You can type in a value in mm or inch as the width to be used for all the vector lines to be rasterized The value in parentheses is the default value or one previously used If you enter a value it will remain the default line width during this editing session Note If you defined the width earlier in the session that value will appear as the default You can press RETURN to accept this value or enter a number to represent the new width The selected entities will all be converted to raster with the designated width Using the LineWidth Configuration Table a If you type in T or Table the LineWidth Configuration Table appears The listing correlates color numbers and line widths expressed in current units b If you defined the width previously in this session with a typed value or the box option that value will appear as the default You can press RETURN to accept this value or enter a number to represent the new width The selected ent
41. Sets the default object snap for specifying extension line origins The following prompt is displayed Associative dimension priority Endpoint Intersection The program returns to the previous prompt QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation e Dimension toolbar S e Dimension menu Leader E Command line qleader Use QLEADER to quickly create leaders and leader annotation You can use the Leader Settings dialog box to customize the command so that it prompts you for the number of leader points and the annotation type suited to your drawing needs You can use QLEADER to Specify leader annotation and annotation format Set the location where leaders attach to multiline text annotation Limit the number of leader points Constrain the angle of the first and second leader segments If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC the leader start point can be associated with a location on an object If the object is relocated the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches but the text or feature control frame remains in place 277 Specify first leader point or Settings lt Settings gt Specify the first leader point or press ENTER to specify leader settings First Leader Point Specify next point Specify the next leader point Specify next point Specify the next leader point or press ENTER to specify the leader annotation The Number of Points setting on the Leader Line amp
42. Sets the included angle of the selected arc Specify total angle lt current gt Specify an angle or pressENTER Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command pa total angle object selected Dynamic 170 Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints The other end remains fixed Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command LIMITS Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or layout tab Format menu Drawing Limits EE Command line limits or limits for transparent use Specify lower left corner or ON OFF lt current gt Specify a point enter on or off or pressENTER LINE Creates straight line segments e Draw toolbar Pa e Draw menu Line EE Command line line Specify first point Specify a point or pressENTER to continue from the last drawn line or arc Specify next point or Close Undo Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn line before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER If the most recently drawn line is an arc its endpoint defines the starting point of the line and the line is drawn tangent to the arc _ before pressing ENTER a er pressing ENTER 171 Ends the last line segment at the beginnin
43. The command you start is called a transparent command Two right angle brackets gt gt precede prompts for transparent commands Command line Specify first point grid gt gt Specify grid spacing X or ON OFF Snap Aspect lt current gt on Resuming LINE command Specify first point In the Command Reference the command access sections identify commands that you can use transparently Suppressing Dialog Boxes Many commands provide both command line and dialog box interfaces In most cases when both a command line and dialog box interface are available the command line version is preceded with a hyphen character For example the command line version of GROUP is Group Responding to Prompts If a command does not immediately execute GTXImage CAD either displays a dialog box or displays prompts on the command line requesting more information Command line prompts are structured as follows Command commandname Current settings Setting1 Setting2 Setting3 Instructional text Option1 oPtion2 opTion3 lt default option or value gt The optional current value line displays the current settings for the command or for system variables related to the command The succeeding prompts identify the type of input required to complete the command and when applicable list the available options in straight brackets and a default option or value in angle brackets In some cases GTXImage CAD determines default options and valu
44. UCS You can specify a rotation angle between 90 and 90 degrees A positive angle rotates the grid counterclockwise about its base point A negative angle rotates the grid clockwise Specify base point lt current gt Specify a point or pressENTER Specify rotation angle lt current gt Specify an angle or pressENTER Style Specifies the format of the snap grid which is Standard or Isometric Enter snap grid type Standard Isometric lt current gt Enters enter i or pressENTER Standard Displays a rectangular grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS X and Y spacing may differ Specify snap spacing or Aspect lt current gt Specify a distance enter a or pressENTER Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately Specify horizontal spacing lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER Specify vertical spacing lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER Isometric Sets an isometric grid in which the grid points are initially at 30 degree and 150 degree angles Isometric snap can be rotated but cannot have different Aspect values Specify vertical spacing lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER lef isoplane top isoplane fight isoplane ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane 30 and 150 degree angles the left isoplane 90 and 150 degree angles or the ri
45. When you release the pick button zooming stops You can release the pick button move the cursor to another location in the drawing and then press the pick button again and continue to zoom the display from that location To exit zooming at the new position press ENTER or ESC 379 Raster Command Reference This section defines the GTXlmage CAD series commands and features The first few pages include new and changed commands a set of overview tables listing each command and feature with icon and brief description Read detailed command descriptions through the rest of the section indexing along the top margin of the page to find each command name Command Overview gACLEAN L oD EY BO SP gACTIVE gADESKEW gARC gARRAY gATTACH GTX gAUTOSNAP gt gBITONAL gBURN gCALIKE GACL GAC GAD GAR GA GAS GBIT GBU GCA Automatically deskews and deletes noise in the active image Prepares a selected image as the active image ready for raster editing or conversion Automatically rotates the current raster image to align raster to an orthogonal orientation Draws a raster arc in the current raster image Creates a circular or rectangular array from selected raster data Quickly loads raster images Enables AutoSnap options within active image entities Automatically reduces a color image to a binary 1 bit image Converts all vectors to raster burning them into the current ra
46. character that was scanned poorly and is either missing a part or is attached to some geometry select No before accepting or correcting it This way character recognition is not trained on misleading raster text Word Recognition Instructions To recognize words rather than individual characters set the mode switch to Word on the Text Output pane of the text configuration dialog See gT CONFIG page 494 Word recognition otherwise works very similarly to character recognition except that a word verification dialog appears instead of the character verification dialog You are given the opportunity to change the word before it is converted into CAD text You can set a dictionary file to train during conversion This adds new words to the training dictionary which is really just an ASCII text list of words that are likely to be in your drawings Open BASE DCT or USER DCT in Notepad for an example 499 Availability GTEXT GTX Edit gt Raster Text GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon A Type raster text in the current image aided by the Text Formatting control Instructions Command gtext 1 Specify start point of text The start point is the bottom left point of the first character in the text string 2 Specify height Enter a numeric value for the height of the text characters 3 Specify rotation angle of text Text can be entered at any orientation angle that is specified The default angle is zero degrees After sel
47. closed areas with fill property Filled circle flash When active filled circles translate into flash entities When inactive they translate into circles with fill property Filled circle circle When active filled circles translate into circles When inactive they translate into circles with fill property Default delimiters on 4 When active default delimiters and are output in string format IH and IH in the global section of IGES files When inactive delimiters are ignored Units Units can be set to Inch or Millimeters Specifies units of measurement for parameters CALS Class CALS Class specifies what CALS compliance is required by IGES files Record Length Record lengths are 80 or 82 If set to 82 CR and LF are appended to each record Vector Entity Translation The GTX OSR conversion process creates different entities depending on the capacity of the final output format Table 3 Vector Entity Translation No Width Width Arc Arc Circular Arc Center Arc Circle Circle Circle with hollow Circle Donut interior 530 Filled Circle Circle with solid interior polyline polyline Circle with with with width property width or flash entity without fill property Filled Closed Polygon with fill solid solid solid Polygon polyline or polygon set with fill polygon polygon or linear solid or polyline path polyline with width with or with no without wid
48. dimension styles and text styles Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns Web based content Custom content developed by third party applications From the content area you can insert blocks or hatch patterns or attach external references in a drawing by dragging by double clicking or by right clicking and choosing Insert Block Attach Xref or Copy You can drag or right click to add other content to drawings such as layers dimension styles and layouts You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool palettes Note You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut menu by right clicking in the tree view or the content area Load Displays the Load dialog box a standard file selection dialog box Use Load to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web and then to select content to load in the content area Back Returns to the most recent location in the history list Forward Returns to the next later location in the history list Up Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container Stop DC Online tab Stops the current transfer Reload DC Online tab Reloads the current page Search Displays the Search dialog box where you can specify search criteria to locate drawings blocks and nongraphical objects within drawings Search also displays custom content saved on your desktop Favorites Displays the cont
49. right click the selected object and choose Hyperlink The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks If you enter hyperlink at the Command prompt HYPERLINK displays options on the command line including an option to define an area to associate with a hyperlink Attaches hyperlinks to graphical objects Text to Display Specifies a description for the hyperlink This is useful when the file name or URL is not helpful in identifying the contents of the linked file The Insert Hyperlink dialog box includes the following tabs under Link To Existing File or Web Page View of This Drawing E mail Address View of This Drawing Tab Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box View of This Drawing Tab Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Specifies a named view in the current drawing to link to Select a View of This Displays an expandable tree view of the named views within the current drawing from which you can select one to link to 144 E mail Address Tab Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box E mail Address Tab Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Specifies an email address to link to When the hyperlink is executed a new email is created using the default system email program E mail Address Specifies an email address Subject Specifies a subject for the email Recently Used E mail Addresses Lists recently used email addresses from which you can select one to use for the hyperlink HYPERLINKOPTIONS Controls the d
50. s start point and endpoint are the same this option makes the spline tangent continuous at both points pe E El y i langent i i continuity i a E z he A open spline closed spline Open Opens a closed spline If the spline s start point and endpoint were the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points the Open option returns the spline to its original state The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity 309 smoothness If the spline was open its start point and endpoint were not the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous where the start point and endpoint meet this option returns the spline to its original open state and removes tangent continuity El no tangent E i i continuity gt a iis ia a closed soline open spline Delete Removes fit points from a spline and refits the spline through the remaining points Specify control point lt exit gt Specify a control point or pressENTER Move Moves fit points to a new location Specify new location or Next Previous Select Point eXit lt N gt Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER New Location Moves the selected point to the new location you specify The previous prompt is repeated a ar l li o El e pam El Next Moves selection to the next point Previous Moves selection to the previous point Select Point Selects a poin
51. t List Styles in Xrefs When selected suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings in the Styles list Preview Shows a graphic representation of the style selected in the Styles list Description Describes the style selected in the Styles list relative to the current style If the description is longer than the space provided you can click in the pane and use arrow keys to scroll down Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current The current style is applied to dimensions you create 104 New Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box in which you can define a new dimension style Modify Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box in which you can modify dimension styles Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box Override Displays the Override Current Style dialog box in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box Overrides are displayed as unsaved changes under the dimension style in the Styles list Compare Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box in which you can compare two dimension styles or list all the properties of one dimension style DIMTEDET Moves and rotates dimension text 0 Dimension toolbar 4 O Dimension menu Align Text EE Command line dimtedit Select dimension Select a dimension object
52. those that were listed as Ambiguous in the gTCONFIG dialog Character Validation character recognition thought this D was an 0 Depending on the results of character recognition accept or correct the character 498 Using the Character Validation Dialog Program s Guess Action Correct Press Return Wrong Type the correct character s and press RETURN Spurious Select Ignore The raster is not Character will not be trained and will be really a character recognized as a character 7 Characters whose confidence is above the Auto Convert Threshold are automatically converted to CAD text bypassing the Character Validation dialog 8 gTCONVRT ends To edit or change resulting text use the Edit Properties or Change commands Options Ignore Ignores the current character Use this if a single character is represented by two separate pieces of raster ignore one half and correct the other so the correct text is written Cancel Ends recognizing all raster in the selection set Returns to command prompt No text entities result Train CR Setting a recognition file for training in gl CONFIG activates a Train CR section in the lower left corner of the Character Verification dialog If training a recognition file the Character Verification dialog will train on each character that appears If the raster that appears is a poor representation of that character for example a
53. use Custom Properties You can add delete and edit your paper size Each plotter has a maximum printable area determined by where it grips the paper and how far the pen shuttle can reach If you are creating a paper size that is larger than the paper 266 sizes offered in the Plotter Configuration Editor verify that the plotter is capable of plotting the new dimensions Add Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard When you add a paper size you can either create a new paper size from scratch or create a new one based on the listing of available paper sizes for the selected configured plotter The new paper size is a user defined size not a standard size Delete Deletes the selected custom paper size from the list e Edit Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard where you can modify the selected paper size You can change any of the custom paper size settings Note For Windows system printers you can change the paper size settings and create custom paper sizes only in the Custom Properties dialog box Modify Standard Paper Sizes Adjusts the printable area for standard paper sizes to match the printer s capabilities You can t create custom paper sizes for Windows system printers using the Plotter Configuration Editor List of Standard Paper Sizes Displays the available set of standard paper sizes Modify Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard You can modify Printable Area and File Name The new paper size is a user def
54. view is restored the program zooms to the extents of the view Relative To Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic view By default the world coordinate system WCS is the base coordinate system UCSBASE system variable The UCSBASE system variable controls the orientation of orthographic UCSs relative to the WCS or to named UCSs Changing this setting also changes the orientation of the predefined orthographic UCSs A warning message is displayed when you change the value of the UCSBASE system variable Restore Orthographic UCS with View Restores the associated UCS when you make an orthographic view current This option sets the UCSORTHO system variable VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport EE Command line viewres Do you want fast zooms Yes No lt Y gt Press ENTER Fast Zoom is no longer a functioning option of this command and remains for script compatibility only Enter circle zoom percent 1 20000 lt current gt Enter an integer from 1 to 20 000 or press ENTER The model is regenerated VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles arcs ellipses and splines using short vectors The greater the number of vectors the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc For example if you create a very small circle and then zoom in it might appear to be a polygon Using VIEWRES to increase the zoom percentage and regenerate the drawing updates and smooths the circ
55. 295 Scale Factor Scales the selected text objects based on a reference length and a specified new length Specify scale factor or Reference Specify a scale factor or enter r Scale Factor Scales the selected text objects using the numeric scale factor that you enter Reference Scales the selected text objects relative to a reference length and a new length Specify reference length lt 1 gt Enter a length to serve as a reference distance Specify new length Enter another length in comparison to the reference length The selected text is scaled by a ratio of the values that you entered for the new length and the reference length If the new length is less than the reference length the selected text objects are reduced in size SCRIPT Executes a sequence of commands from a script file Tools menu Run Script E Command line script or script for transparent use The Select Script File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the file name of a script to run that script When FILEDIA is set to 0 zero SCRIPT displays the following prompt on the command line Enter script file name lt current gt SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set EE Command line select Select objects Use an object selection method A small box called the object selection target replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor object selection E targel GINO o 4 AMARA 7 Objects must
56. 299 SHAPE cuarta id aa daa dados 300 SKETCH ii A dao 300 SNAP Sui A E ra iaa 302 PEE ui A ao 304 SPLINE oa dd A 305 SPLINE DIT oahi a aR AE LE EEE ERE LEE AO ERECTA Ra 308 STATUS i a ER E E E E EET TETE A A T 314 STRETCH ierta a TREE E E T TA T E EET TA 316 STVU NS TETA RON 316 STYLESMANA GER O 319 SYSWINDOWS iati E E E ETET ACTA TEATA EE E RET A A 323 TEXT roe EN ANO 324 TEXTSOR i e E TO E T EEEO TEENE TAE AEE A EE ES 328 MME 00d TEE AT EAN E OTA OAIE EE ETEA 329 TOLERANCE soc NA E A TEA E AT EEEO TE E LOTA E TEE AEE EAE 329 TOOLBAR oint E AART TEE AT REAN E TA TAIE E EEE 331 TOOLPALE PIES iria E EAEE EE TEE EEOAE E EEE AAE E EA 331 TOOLPALETTESCLOSE cinismo A E E EE A E 333 TRACE curar e SEEE EE RENEA E ER A TEEN E RERNA 333 TRANSPARENCY zeechent dia LERE E KN EEEN e REA 333 TREESTA Tr tentera A NEEE R E E T ERL I TR AR 334 TRIM tada e R EEEE A gies K NE td TONE 334 cta E E E T ESEE E EE EE T E E 339 UGS E E E EE E E E ON EE 339 UCSICON netere nie o e E EAEE doi 345 UCSMAN tcs IA ria E E EE iia 346 UNDO sariren R E E AEE E a 349 UNIS isos rie AEE R E diia 351 VIEW uan A E OR a 353 VIEWRES sinini anomia o h A a a i e EE A DE R A E E SEE 355 WPCLIP NA 356 VPLAYER irnia heii ct svscosenosivescatessentcckis role iii dro ai EA eare 356 A NN 358 VPORT D vstccoconncrnricciocind ia cir drid leo leida dolce 360 WBLOCK A AE RNA 362 WMEIN o cios coarnctsceccssvssbetevtses anian E ESE R A E E EEE darle dicci n 364 WMFOPT S oeisio ninian eiti
57. 3 0 or later or Microsoft Internet Explorer installed CAL Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions E Command line cal or cal for transparent use CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point vector real or integer expressions The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN END and INS You can insert AutoLISP variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any command that expects points vectors or numbers CAL topics CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects 0 Modify toolbar dl 0 Modify menu Chamfer EE Command line chamfer TRIM mode Current chamfer Dist1 current Dist2 current Select first line or Undo Polyline Distance Angle Trim mEthod Multiple Use an object selection method or enter an option 62 First Line Specifies the first of two edges required to define a 2D chamfer or the edge of a 3D solid to chamfer Select second line or shift select to apply corner Use an object selection method or hold down SHIFTand select an object to create a sharp corner If you select lines or polylines their lengths adjust to accommodate the chamfer line You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current chamfer distances with a value of 0 If the selected objects are line segments of a 2D pol
58. 39 AREA 43 ARRAY 46 ATTACHURL 51 ATTDEF 52 ATTDISP 54 ATTEDIT 54 ATTEXT 55 ATTREDEF 56 AUDIT 56 BASE 57 Batch raster conversion gOSR 459 BLIPMODE 57 BLOCK 57 BLOCKICON 59 BMPOUT 59 BOUNDARY 59 BREAK 60 BROWSER 62 Burn to raster See gBURN gRASTER 407 C CAL 62 CHAMFER 62 CHANGE 66 Change raster 415 Character recognition See Converting Raster text 498 CHPROP 68 CIRCLE 71 Clipping Boundary 397 CLOSE 73 COLOR 73 Color Images Reduction to Bitonal 397 COMPILE 73 Converting Polylines vs Line Arc Circle 422 Raster text gTCONVRT 498 gTRAIN 503 Raster to vector gECONVERT 439 gVECTOR 506 Raster to Vector gCONVRT 422 gTRACE 501 Vector to raster gRASTER 465 CONVERTPSTYLES 73 COPY 74 COPYBASE 75 COPYCLIP 75 COPYHIST 76 Copying raster gARRAY 400 gCOPY 425 gCUT 433 gOFFSET 458 gPASTE 460 COPYLINK 76 Creating new raster images gCREATE 426 Cropping raster gCROP 427 CUSTOMIZE 76 CUTCLIP 77 Cutting and pasting raster gCUT 433 gPASTE 460 DDEDIT 77 DDPTYPE 78 DDVPOINT 79 538 Deskewing raster Auto deskew 398 gDESKEW 435 Despeckling gSPECKL 492 494 DETACHURL 80 DIM 80 DIMALIGNED 82 DIMANGULAR 85 DIMARC 87 DIMBASELINE 89 DIMCENTER 91 DIMCONTINUE 91 DIMDIAMETER 92 DIMDISASSOCIATE 93 DIMEDIT 94 DIMLINEAR 95 DIMORDINATE 99 DIMOVERRIDE 101 DIMRADIUS 101 DIMREASSOCIATE 102 DIMREGEN 103 DIMSTYLE 104 DIMTEDET 1
59. 505 gVECTOR 506 gVSKEW 507 gWARP 508 HATCH 138 HATCHEDIT 142 Help gHELP 443 HELP 144 HYPERLINK 144 HYPERLINKOPTIONS 145 I ICR Plus 503 ID 145 IMAGE 145 Image Frame 447 Image Transparency 448 IMAGEADJUST 151 IMAGEATTACH 149 IMAGECLIP 152 IMAGEFRAME 153 IMAGEQUALITY 154 IMPORT 154 INSERT 155 INSERTOBJ 156 Inverting raster images gINVERT 451 ISOPLANE 157 JPGOUT 158 JUSTIFYTEXT 158 LAYER 159 LAYOUT 165 LAYOUTWIZARD 166 LEADER 166 LENGTHEN 169 LIMITS 171 LINE 171 LINETYPE 172 LIST 174 LOAD 174 Loading raster gPASTE 460 LOGFILEOFF 175 LOGFILEON 175 LTSCALE 175 LWEIGHT 175 MATCHPROP 177 MEASURE 178 MENU 179 MINSERT 180 MIRROR 185 Mirroring raster gMIRROR 456 gREFLECT 472 MLEDIT 186 MLINE 193 MLSTYLE 195 MODEL 196 MOVE 196 Moving raster gMOVE 457 MREDO 197 MSPACE 197 MTEXT 198 MULTIPLE 199 540 MVIEW 199 MVSETUP 203 Negative images gINVERT 451 NEW 203 OFFSET 204 Offsetting raster gOFFSET 458 OOPS 205 OPEN 206 OPTIONS 208 ORTHO 229 OSNAP 229 OSR 459 PAGESETUP 229 PAN 231 PARTIALOAD 232 PARTIALOPEN 236 PASTEBLOCK 237 PASTECLIP 237 PASTEORIG 237 PASTESPEC 238 Pasting raster gPASTE 460 PCINWIZARD 238 PEDIT 239 perpendicular 396 PLINE 252 PLOT 252 PLOTSTAMP 259 PLOTSTYLE 260 PLOTTERMANAGER 261 PNGOUT 268 POINT 268 POLYGON 269 PREVIEW 271 PROPERTIES 272 PROPERTIESCLO
60. An xref referenced by another xref or block cannot be detached Reload Marks one or more xrefs for reloading This option rereads and displays the most recently saved version of the drawing Unload Unloads one or more xrefs Unloaded xrefs can be easily reloaded Unlike detaching unloading does not remove the xref permanently It merely suppresses the display and regeneration of the xref definition to improve performance Bind Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box The Bind option makes the selected xref and its dependent named objects such as blocks text styles dimension styles layers and linetypes a part of the current drawing Open Opens the selected xref for editing in a new window The new window is displayed after the Xref Manager is closed 375 Xref Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected xref This is where the xref is actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path Browse Displays the Select New Path dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can select a different path or file name Save Path Saves the path as it appears in Xref Found At to the currently selected xref ZOOM Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport e Standard toolbar al 0 View menu Zoom Shortcut menu With no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to zoom in real time EE Command line zoom or zoom
61. Dialog Displays the OLE Text Size dialog box when OLE objects are inserted into drawings Show All Warning Messages Displays all dialog boxes that include a Don t Display This Warning Again option All dialog boxes with warning options are displayed regardless of previous settings specific to each dialog box Beep on Error in User Input Sounds an alarm beep when an invalid entry is detected Load acad Isp with Every Drawing Specifies whether the acad sp file is loaded into every drawing If this option is cleared only the acaddoc sp file is loaded into all drawing files Clear this option if you do not want to run certain LISP routines in specific drawing files ACADLSPASDOC system variable Allow Long Symbol Names Permits long names to be used for named objects in the drawing definition table Object names can be up to 255 characters and include letters numbers blank spaces and any special character not used by Windows and this program for other purposes Long names can be used for layers dimension styles blocks linetypes text styles layouts UCS names views and viewport configurations This option is saved in the drawing EXTNAMES system variable Startup Controls whether the Startup dialog box or no dialog box is displayed when starting this program or creating a new drawing Live Enabler Options Specifies whether the program checks for object enablers Using object enablers you can display and use custom ob
62. Enable Grip Tips Displays grip specific tips when the cursor hovers over a grip on a custom object that supports grip tips This option has no effect on standard objects GRIPTIPS system variable Object Selection Limit for Display of Grips Suppresses the display of grips when the initial selection set includes more than the specified number of objects The valid range is 1 to 32 767 The default setting is 100 GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable 228 ORTHO Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction Status bar Ortho Command line ortho or ortho for transparent use Enter mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or press ENTER In the illustration a line is drawn using Ortho mode Point 1 is the first point specified and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is specified 2 2 o Ortho off Griho an Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two points using a pointing device In Ortho mode cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS and the current grid rotation angle Ortho mode is ignored in perspective views Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as being parallel to the Y axis ORTHO adjusts to the current snap rotation regardless of the UCS OSNAP Sets running object snap modes 0 Object Snap toolbar n 0 Tools Menu Drafting Settings Shortcut m
63. Enabled Turns on demand loading and improves performance Select the Enabled setting to enhance the loading process when working with clipped xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index When this option is selected other users cannot edit the file while it is being referenced Enabled with Copy Turns on demand loading but uses a copy of the referenced drawing Other users can edit the original drawing Retain Changes to Xref Layers Saves changes to layer properties and states for xref dependent layers When the drawing is reloaded the properties currently assigned to xref dependent layers are retained This setting is saved in the drawing VISRETAIN system variable Allow Other Users to Refedit Current Drawing Determines whether the current drawing file can be edited in place if it is being referenced by another drawing or multiple drawings This setting is saved in the drawing XEDIT system variable ObjectARX Applications Controls settings that relate to AutoCAD Runtime Extension applications and proxy graphics Demand Load ObjectARX Apps Specifies if and when a third party application is demand loaded if a drawing contains custom objects created in that application DEMANDLOAD system variable Disable Load on Demand Turns off demand loading Custom Object Detect Demand loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects This setting does not demand load the application when you invoke
64. File Location Specifies the path to locate sheet set template files used by the Create Sheet Set wizard Default Template File Name for QNEW Specifies the drawing template file used by the QNEW command Default Template for Sheet Creation and Page Setup Overrides Specifies the default template file that is used for creating new sheets and to store page setup overrides that can be applied to Publish operations from the Sheet Set Manager Tool Palettes File Locations Specifies the path for tool palette support files Authoring Palette File Locations Specifies the path for the Block Authoring Palettes support files Block Authoring Palettes are used in the Block Editor and provide tools for creating dynamic blocks Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File on the Open and Save tab LOGFILEPATH system variable Plot and Publish Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file that is created if you select the Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log option on the Plot and Publish tab 211 Temporary Drawing File Location Specifies the location to store temporary files This program creates temporary files and then deletes them when you exit the program If you plan to run the program from a write protected folder for example if you are working on a network or opening files from a CD specify an alternate location for your temporary files The folder you specify must
65. GED GE GFR GH GINA Gl GIN GISL GJO GLN Copies selected raster data to a file or buffer Aligns raster data in current raster image to 0 and 90 degrees Removes the selected image Sets all image entities draw order behind other entities Creates a vector edge around selected raster Creates a raster edge around selected raster Removes selected raster data Freezes the layer of a specified object Launches the online help Edits hybrid text Creates vector over GTX drawn raster objects Deactivates the currently active image freeing memory Displays information about the raster database Reverses the raster foreground and background data Useful for raster scanned from negative images Freezes all layers except that of a selected object Joins lines Draws lines on current raster image 382 HoH Wee BE ROG EW F m A FI gLINE2 gMIRROR GMI gMOVE GM gOFFSET GOFF gOSR gPASTE GP gRAHEAD GRAH gRASTER GRA gRECTANGLE gREDUCE GRED gREFLCT GREF gRELIMIT GREL gRESIZE GRE gROTATE GR gROTRECTANGLE gRUB GRU gSAVE GSA Draws multiple separated lines Mirrors selected raster data Moves selected raster data Creates concentric raster circles parallel raster lines and parallel raster arcs Invokes GTX OSR for doing batch raster to vector conversion Pastes raster data from a raster file or a buffer created with gCUT Erases arrowheads solids with three points C
66. GTCONVRT GTX Convert Text Convert GTXlmage CAD PLUS R T Icon gTCONVRT converts raster text to CAD text entities Invokes the text editor window allowing you to systematically check the results of the recognition process This command can perform two tasks elt converts selected raster text to CAD text entities Warning The Character Verification dialog is actually a separate windows application Because of this if you happen to click somewhere within GTXImage CAD s window the text verification dialog will disappear Nothing seems to respond amp it looks like GTXImage CAD has locked up It has not but to free it up use ALT TAB to return to the Character Verification application if this happens elf a recognition file is set for training it can train it on new text characters Character Recognition Instructions 1 2 6 Invoke gTCONVRT If gTCONFIG has not yet been invoked during the GTXImage CAD session gTCONVRT invokes it before beginning Select raster lt WINDOW gt Use the best IOP method for selecting the desired raster text TextWin and TextLine were especially designed for this command though Fence Inside and Window also work gTCONVRT recognizes and assigns a confidence level to each separate raster blob selected in step 3 Two kinds of characters will appear in the Character Verification dialog a those that were recognized at a confidence below the Auto Convert Threshold or b
67. GTXImage CAD Series search path to locate the file specified in File Name You set the search path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box References to Other Sections At the end of most command descriptions you ll find a section called See Also This refers to other GTXImage CAD Series commands and system variables related to the current command Typographical Conventions To orient you to GTXImage CAD Series features as they appear on the screen specific terms are set in typefaces that distinguish them from the body text Throughout GTXImage CAD Series documentation the following conventions are used 33 Table 1 Typographical conventions Text element Example GTXImage CAD Series commands ADCENTER DBCONNECT SAVE GTXImage CAD Series system variables DIMBLK DWGNAME LTSCALE GTXImage CAD Series named objects DASHDOT STANDARD such as linetypes and styles Prompts Select object to trim or Project Edge Undo Instructions after prompt sequences Select objects Use an object selection method File names and file name extensions Readme file dwg file extension Folder or directory names Sample folder c program files gtxlmage CAD V14 sample Text you enter At the Command prompt enter shape Keys you press on the keyboard CTRL F10 ESC ENTER Keys you press simultaneously on the CTRL C keyboard Formal arguments specified in function The string and mode arguments definitions 34 COMMAND OVER
68. HOT 10K before mirroring after mirroring a er mirroring MIRRTEAT 1 MIRRTEXT 0 MLEDIT Edits multiline intersections breaks and vertices Modify menu Object 3 Multiline EE Command line mledit The Multiline Edit Tools dialog box is displayed If you enter mledit at the Command prompt MLEDIT displays prompts on the command line Modifies multiline objects The dialog box displays tools with sample images in four columns The first column controls multilines that cross the second controls multilines that form a tee the third controls corner joints and vertices and the fourth controls breaks in multilines Closed Cross Creates a closed cross intersection between two multilines Select first mline Select the foreground multiline Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The closed cross intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed an in ta l l ha cm I I I Hilo l I I l first mline selected second mline selected result Undo Undoes the closed cross intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Open Cross Creates an open cross intersection between two multilines Breaks are inserted in all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second multiline 186 Select f
69. IMAGESIZE o do e a denia e 13 INSTALLATION aeonit ieten asenso rotnun use cosseestevesnesoovessnencsssvessreteneasveseses enon eneabasueencevssenguvesesve ars OSERE NA ESTER SEVERS 14 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS aieo isare ese a ae iai adas ia la SE ok HS 14 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE cocida iia dedicas 14 PRUNING SE RUF a E A 14 A NS 16 Program Gr ups FO derS mo ir ne A Da ane ivan Ponta eas Bien 16 LICENSING YOUR GTX SOFTWARE scssdesssecslevees cconessssssbssc ecievesehspovescusdsess ESEE KaRa groeve SEENTE SKE SEEE oes S 16 SOFTWARE LICENSE RESOURCE Giner nia iia aa ia RENNER 17 CRITICAL CONFIGURATION FILE PARAMETERS ssceccssesseseseeseeecseesesecaeaeeecaeeaesecaeaeeecaesaeeecaseaeeecaeeaeeneasers 17 UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE fisted asia A ae Rashes 17 USING THE GTXIMAGE CAD SERIES 1 000 ssssssscsecsessesecsessesecsessesecsessesecsessesecsessesecsessesecesseseceeseenens 19 THE PURPOSE OF THIS SECTION costosos rre E A endepaas onsbbvesenap ga endvevbvenendepuesensbbvebonaghans 19 RASTER AND VECTOR a ada 19 PRODUCT FUNCTIONALITY ette e o O od O se e do Aleta 19 Loading Raster Images into GTXImage CAD uu ceeccccececccsceeteesenseseeseeceseeeeseeseeseseeseseeeeeseeeeeeseneeaeens 19 Scaling and Aligning Attached Raster IM Qes ccccccccccsesseseesesseseeseseeseeseseeseeseseeseeeceeseeeeneeseenaes 20 Orienting and Rotating Image Entities 0 0 cece ccecccseseesesseseescseeseeecseeseecseeaesecseeaeecseeseecaenaeeecseeaeaees 20 Cre
70. Icon ot gCUT copies raster data from the active image entity to a raster file or to memory The default filename is set in the configuration file Note 1 Raster data cut from images is oriented relative to the raster file s coordinate system When cutting raster data from a rotated image entity the raster is not necessarily saved as displayed within GTXImage CAD Also when pasting raster data into a rotated image the raster data appears at the image entity s native rotation 2 If the raster limits box does not enclose all of the highlighted raster data the data outside the rectangle will not be saved in the file 3 If the rectangle does not fall entirely within the raster limits the limits will be used instead of the point s selected If you want to save the file with a format other than the one specified in the GTXRAST CFG file type in the extension that defines that format Options Mode Options Copy Copy the data and retain it on the screen Erase Copy the data and erase it from the drawing Destination Options File Copy the data to a raster file Buffer Copy the data to a temporary buffer to be gPASTE d later Instructions 1 Select gCUT Command gCUT Mode lt Copy gt Erase 2 The default value is in brackets Press RETURN to select the default or select the desired mode from the menu or by entering its abbreviation Select raster lt WINDOW gt 3 Select the raster data 4 Pres
71. Lineweight Lists the current lineweight stored by the CELWEIGHT system variable Current Plot Style Lists the current plot style stored by the CPLOTSTYLE system variable Current Elevation Lists the current elevation of the drawing stored in the ELEVATION system variable Thickness Lists the current thickness stored in the THICKNESS system variable Fill Grid Ortho Qtext Snap Tablet Shows whether these modes are on or off Object Snap Modes Lists the running object snap modes specified by OSNAP Free Dwg Disk Space Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for this program s temporary files Free Temp Disk Space Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for temporary files Free Physical Memory Lists the amount of installed memory free on your system Free Swap File Space Lists the amount of free space in your swap file 315 STRETCH Moves or stretches objects 0 Modify toolbar nN 9 Modify menu Stretch EE Command line stretch Select objects to stretch by crossing window or crossing polygon Select objects Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method and press ENTER Individually selected objects and objects that are completely enclosed by the crossing selection are moved rather than stretched gt 2 1 if STRETCH moves only the vertices and endpoints that lie inside the crossing selection leaving those outside unchang
72. NANE AEE 93 DIMED NT egiie int Ee e RE EEEE AAEE EEN E TEER A 94 DIMLINEAR inete AEN EE E R EAE mun dail ag E A E 95 DIMORDINATE oriee r o E EERE E ETA NE E EET RER 99 DIMOVERRIDE sucinta ii ri E E EE diia ia 101 DIMRADU Sisinsicara iio does 101 DIMREASSOCIATE counts ti iii td ii cb as 102 DIMREGEN erteni ioen itota EAEE E EE E E TTEN EEE E E 103 DIMST YLE suscita IA ria A EA E A OE 104 DIMTEDET cas storstsstnecessnadttans neocovombtutaveddeenesuneiet E E TTEN EEEE E 105 A R E N A EER ON AN 106 DIVIDE suecos As 107 DON Tissot ie IA rd dias 108 DRAGMODE iiucrinacancit ida bi 109 DRAW ORDER bescisscsccscscvsceitsicsscs initial ici cdi dales dret ir s 109 DSETTINOS icocoio natcimasiv inc rod ii doit 110 DSVIEWER rccociisiiar cmo rai oline 119 DWGPROPS sarisini sonimda aisi oia iii 120 DXBIN inusitada id idos 120 ELEV hamei NN 120 ELIPSE ccoo hO rea E dido AOE EEE E EE 121 ERASE viescsccccscvscsessssssescacvsesncnechcsscavevesstavehsss ri e EEE A E E A A a a EE p ahea 121 EXPLODE iaoi miini on omie eno hO eeo ves ic idol E AOE EEA SEEE 122 EXPOR sevscscsssscscsscsssescacvscsncneshcsscavevesstasshsss hoaa ia ie i AE E A A E E AEE 123 EXTEND viciosa codi rociar Eee EEEE AI E AE EEA S EEE 123 A NN 126 HE Di Ai do E dd A ad NA vests 127 FLETE IA AAA ITA One da 131 FIN Dat A AAA AI OA ride 133 GOTOURE curado EE EAS a R AA ada 134 GRAPHS CR T EREE RE RN ERRE ER R RE A EEEN aint 134 GRID IEA voter TORERE O E EAE E 135 HATO Haddad dde
73. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select replaces them with single straight line segments and returns to Edit Vertex mode If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is an arc Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode To remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then to extend the straight segments until they intersect use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0 Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode Spline Curve Fits a 3D B spline curve to its control points The SPLFRAME system variable controls the accuracy and display of the control points for the 3D B spline whose curves can be approximated only by line segments Negative values for spline segments are ignored original 3D polyline 3D polyline after curve fitting 248 Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests If you edit a spline fit polyline with a command such as BREAK or TRIM you cannot use the Decurve option Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session 3D Polygon Mesh Selection 249 3D Polygon M
74. Select Box Select first corner of box b Select a point Select opposite corner of box c As you move the cursor a rubber banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected Move the cursor until the box is the desired width and the length exceeds the width Select the point The best way to use this feature is to pick a point on the edge of an existing horizontal or vertical raster line and stretch the box along the line You can then easily match the width The length of the rectangle can be any size that is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width measurement A reference rectangle is used instead of a square to make it easier to see As soon as the second point has been selected the rasterization takes place Note The next time you use this command the value of the width you used will be displayed as the default fixed linewidth The highlighted entities will be converted to raster Some residual vector markings overlay the raster until you redraw the image Using Pick a Select a vector entity b Select the Pick option Select raster lt width gt c Next select a raster entity or enter a width A dialog box will appear with a fixed width value of the raster entity selected d Select OK 466 The vector entity selected will be converted to line width of the previous raster that was selected using the Pick command GTXImage CAD Prompts 1 Select gRASTER Select objects 2
75. Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Otherwise the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session If the base dimension is linear or angular the following prompt is displayed Specify a second extension line origin Or Undo Select lt Select gt Specify a point enter an option or press ENTERto select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate the following prompt is displayed Specify feature location or Undo Select lt Select gt To end the command press ENTER twice or press ESC The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text Second Extension Line Origin 91 Second Extension Line Origin Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the first extension line origin of the next dimension The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text After you select a continued dimension the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed To end the command press ESC To select another linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension press ENTER Select continued dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Select a base dimension or press ESC to end the command Feature Location Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued dimension you are prompted for the next feature locati
76. Select connected raster objects that are completely contained by a polygon selected by three or more vertices ES RCrossing Select raster that is completely contained by or crossing the edge ofa 386 rotatable rectangular window selected by two baseline points and a height point Rinside Select raster objects completely contained by a rotatable rectangular window selected by two baseline points and a height point BF RWindow Select all raster within a rotatable rectangular window selected by two baseline points and a height point W Fence Select connected raster objects that are intersected by a polyline of two or more pick points IN N Object Select contiguous raster data within the current view by a single pick point a ARc Select raster arcs under a reference arc defined by three pick points oF Pick Circle Select raster circle using a 2 point reference circle circle Select raster arcs or a circle under a reference circle defined by three pick points A Select raster lines under a reference line defined by two pick points f PRevious Pick the objects in the previous selection set BB segment Selects a linear raster segment in both directions from a single pick point until it stops or finds an acute angle or a branch 123 l A rex Selects all text and text like raster in the image below the height defined in the GTX Text Configuration maximum character size Note This can also be used to remove text f
77. When you have finished selecting objects press ENTER to redisplay the dialog box Apply To is set to Current Selection If Append to Current Selection Set is selected the filtering criteria is applied to the entire drawing Select Objects Temporarily closes the Quick Select dialog box so that you can select the objects to which you want to apply the filter criteria Press ENTER to return to the Quick Select dialog box The Apply To box is changed to show Current Selection The Select Objects button is available only when you select Include In New Selection Set and clear Append to Current Selection Set Object Type Specifies the type of objects to include in the filtering criteria If the filtering criteria are being applied to the entire drawing the Object Type list includes all object types including custom Otherwise the list includes only the object types of the selected objects If an application such as Autodesk Map was used to add a feature classification to an object you can select a classification Properties Specifies the object property for the filter This list includes all searchable properties for the selected object type The property you select determines the options available in Operator and Value If an application such as Autodesk Map was used to add a feature classification to an object you can select a classification property Operator Controls the range of the filter Depending on the selected property
78. Z lt 0 0 0 gt Origin Defines a new UCS by shifting the origin of the current UCS leaving the direction of its X Y and Z axes unchanged Specify new origin point lt 0 0 0 gt Specify a point Specify a new origin point relative to the origin of the current UCS If you do not specify a Z coordinate value for the origin this option uses the current elevation UCS al new origin i To before afier Z Axis Defines a UCS with a particular positive Z axis Specify new origin point lt 0 0 0 gt Specify a point Specify point on positive portion of Z axis lt current gt Specify a point Specify a new origin and a point that lies on the new positive Z axis The Z axis option tilts the XY plane 3 Point Specifies the new UCS origin and the direction of its positive X and Y axes The Z axis follows by applying the right hand rule You can use this option to specify any possible coordinate system Specify new origin point lt 0 0 0 gt Specify a point 1 Specify point on positive portion of X axis lt current gt Specify a point 2 Specify point on positive Y portion of the UCS XY plane lt current gt Specify a point 3 Fi Fi 2 1 The first point specifies the origin of the new UCS The second point defines the positive X axis The third point defines the positive Y axis The third point can be anywhere on the positive Y portion of the new UCS XY plane Object 340 Defines a new coordinate system based on a
79. and press RETURN Enter width lt XX gt d Enter the value for the width in the units being used and press RETURN The Width Table will reflect the changes e Select another color number to change its width or press 0 and RETURN to continue the command Note The width settings you change will remain in effect until you change them or you exit GTXImage CAD The vectors will be burned to raster with the table s widths Note Polylines and other non filled entities that have a width attribute will be drawn with the GTXImage CAD width attribute Rasterization of certain entities may take a while to process Rasterizing text and ellipses takes longer than lines for instance Select less data at a time to improve rasterization speeds You may need to zoom in to see line styles This command does not work for 3 D entities 409 gCALIKE Type Menu Availability GCA or GCALIKE GTX Vector Clean gt Calike GTXlmage CAD PLUS con MA gCALIKE modifies the radius of circles or arcs to a specified radius or to match that of a selected circle or arc Options The circles can be changed in terms of a Reference circle or arc a specified Radius or Diameter Instructions Select objects 1 Select one or more circles and or arcs that you will want to set to identical radii Select reference circle or arc 2 Choose a circle or arc with the desired radius Enter Diameter lt Radius gt lt gt 3 The ref
80. and the units of measurement to be used when the block is inserted File Name and Path Specifies a file name and path where the block or objects will be saved Displays a standard file selection dialog box 363 Insert Units Specifies the unit value to be used for automatic scaling when the new file is dragged from DesignCenter or inserted as a block in a drawing that uses different units Select Unitless if you do not want to automatically scale the drawing when you insert it See INSUNITS WMFIN Imports a Windows metafile Insert menu Windows Metafile EE Command line wmfin The Import WMF dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter a file name The wmf file extension is added automatically In the Import WMF dialog box if you click Tools Options the WMF In Options dialog box is displayed You can also open this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS After opening the selected WMF file the following prompt is displayed an option WMFOPTS Sets options for WMFIN EE Command line wmfopts The WMF In Options dialog box is displayed Controls whether metafiles maintain relative line widths and whether they are imported as wireframes or solid objects Wire Frame No Fills Imports objects as wireframes If you clear this option objects are imported as filled objects Wide Lines Maintains the relative line width of lines and borders If you clear this option lines are importe
81. are plotted Shade plot As displayed Wireframe Hidden Rendered lt As displayed gt Enter a shade plot option As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the current display Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of the current display Rendered Specifies that a viewport is plotted rendered regardless of the current display Select objects Select one or more viewports Lock Lock Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed when working in model space Viewport View Locking ON OFF Enter on or off Select objects Select one or more viewports Object Specifies a closed polyline ellipse spline region or circle to convert into a viewport The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices It can be self intersecting and it can contain an arc as well as line segments Select object to clip viewport Select an object Polygonal 200 Polygonal Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points The prompts are similar to those displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for external references xrefs but you can specify arcs when you create a polygonal viewport boundary Specify start point Specify a point Specify next point or Arc Close Length Undo Specify a point or enter an option Arc
82. area The screen menu font is controlled by the Windows system font settings If you use the screen menu you should set the Windows system font setting to a font and font size that fits the screen menu size restrictions Use Large Buttons for Toolbars Displays buttons in a larger format at 32 by 30 pixels The default display size is 16 by 15 pixels Show Tooltips Displays tooltips when you move the cursor over buttons on the toolbar Show Shortcut Keys in Tooltips Displays shortcut keys when you move the cursor over buttons on the toolbar Colors Displays the Color Options dialog box Use this dialog box to specify colors of elements in the main application window Fonts Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the font for the command window text Layout Elements Controls options for existing and new layouts A layout is a paper space environment in which you can set up drawings for plotting Display Layout and Model Tabs Displays the layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the drawing area Display Printable Area Displays printable area in a layout The printable area is represented by the area within the dashed line and is determined by the selected output device Objects drawn outside of the printable area are clipped or omitted when the drawing is plotted Display Paper Background Displays a representation of the specified paper size in a layout The paper size and plot scale
83. be selected in order to be processed The Select Objects prompt occurs after many commands including the SELECT command itself You can select objects individually with the pointing device by drawing a selection window around them by entering coordinates or by using one of the selection methods listed below These methods can be used to select objects regardless of the command that initiated the Select Objects prompt To view all options enter on the command line 296 Expects a point or Window Last Crossing BOX ALL Fence WPolygon CPolygon Group Add Remove Multiple Previous Undo AUto SIngle Select objects Specify a point or enter an option Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined by two points Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection Specify first corner Specify a point 1 Specify opposite corner Specify a point 2 window selection Selects the most recently created visible object Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points A crossing selection is displayed as dashed or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from window selection Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection First corner Specify a point 1 Other corner Specify a point 2 Tr AO pee crossing
84. be used as the base point for a graphic representation of the rotation angle Rotation angle lt 0 0 gt Reference 4 There are several ways to respond to this prompt You can enter the default value a new rotation angle or use reference angles to graphically designate the rotation Using the Default Angle a The default angle initially zero degrees reflects the value used for a previous gROTATE operation You can accept the default angle by pressing RETURN Delete old objects Yes lt No gt Using Rotation Angle a You can specify the angle with reference to the X axis by typing in a value in degrees or by rubber banding the reference line b When you designate the angle by either method the raster will be redrawn in the new orientation Using Reference Angle a Enter R or select Reference from the menu to use a different base line not the X axis for the graphic angle Reference angle lt 0 0 gt 475 b You can either enter a degree value to define the new base line or define it graphically by selecting a point If you select a point you will be prompted for the second point Reference angle lt 0 0 gt Second point Select the second point to define the line that should be rotated to a particular angle New angle c Type in the value for the angle the new base line should take The selected data will rotate the same amount The angle of rotation will actually be the angle between the reference
85. can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of images associated with the drawing file Details Opens the Image File Details dialog box which displays the image name saved path active path file creation date and time file size and type color system color depth width and height in pixels resolution default size in units and a preview image Image Found At Shows the path where the selected image was found If you select multiple images this field remains blank If the image file is not found in the path in the Saved Path column several other paths are automatically searched for the image file For the list of these paths and the order in which they are searched see Set Paths to Externally Referenced Drawings in the User s Guide Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box The path you select appears under Image Found At Save Path Stores the new path information Press ESC while editing the path to restore the old path If the referenced image cannot be found in the new path the image s status changes to Not Found If you do not click Save Path after editing the path the original image path is used the next time you load the drawing IMAGE Command Line If you enter image at the Command prompt IMAGE displays prompts on the command line pressENTER List Images 147 List Images Lists the images by name in alphabetical orde
86. click any tool palette and choose Customize Command line customize The Customize dialog box is displayed Provides an interface for customizing tool palettes and block authoring palettes Creates modifies and organizes palettes Imports and exports palette files Palettes Lists all available palettes Click and drag a palette to move it up or down in the list Right click a palette in the list to rename delete or export the palette When you export a palette it s saved to a file with an xtp extension Right click in the Palettes area to import a palette or to create a new blank one Palette Groups 76 Displays the organization of your palettes in a tree view Click and drag a palette to move it into another group Right click a palette group and then click Set Current on the shortcut menu to display that group of palettes The shortcut menu also provides options to Create a new group Delete an existing group Rename an existing group Remove a tool palette from a group Export a group as an XPG file Import a group Current Palette Group Displays the name of the palette group currently shown Displays All Palettes when all available palettes are shown CUTCLIP Copies objects to the board and removes the objects from the drawing e Standard toolbar e Edit menu Cut Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Cut E Command line cutclip
87. comma delimited block names or wild card characters For example enter b1 2 to specify that block B1 and all two character blocks ending with 2 should be updated After you enter the block names a message is displayed describing the process as it proceeds Press ESC at any time to stop BMPOUT Saves selected objects to a file in device independent bitmap format E Command line bmpout The Create Raster File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the file name in the dialog box Select objects or lt all objects and viewports gt Press ENTER fo select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created The file reflects what is displayed on the screen Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to O Off prompts are displayed on the command line BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area Draw menu Boundary E Command line boundary The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed 59 If you enter boundary at the Command prompt BOUNDARY displays prompts on the command line Defines the object type boundary set and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point Island Detection Controls whethe
88. compressed formats e Improve drawing quality by using image enhancement to clean deskew scale rotate and remove speckles e Selective Vectorization helps you trace raster with AutoCAD vector entities e Output changes to a variety of printers and plotters as a hybrid raster and vector or full raster drawing e GTXIimage CAD can load color images amp has commands to work with colour images to create bitonal reduce colors amp separate colour images into separate binary images 11 GTXImage CAD PLUS GTXImage CAD PLUS includes all the functionality of GTXImage CAD It also provides powerful geometry and text conversion tools for transforming raster images into intelligent AutoCAD drawings e Raster to Vector Conversion converts selected raster data into AutoCAD entities It provides four modes of R2V conversion for CAD Contour Edge amp Text e Text The Intelligent Character Recognition ICR quickly converts raster text which typically comprises 20 of engineering drawings ICR is different than OCR optical character recognition because of its unique training capability that allows you to train the software to recognize new fonts or custom lettering styles Dictionary look up and pattern matching make ICR perfect for recognizing the complicated text such as part numbers e Batch A powerful batch conversion program GTX OSR is included with GTXImage CAD PLUS Mastering the GTXImage CAD Series User s Manual Yo
89. concerned about losing information from your drawing you may use gCLEANIOP instead 405 gBITONAL Type _ Meu Availability gBITONAL gBIT GTX Convert gt Convert Image to All Products Bitonal Icon gt lt gBITONAL automatically reduces a color image to a binary image The gBITONAL command only works when you have one or more color or greyscale images loaded Instructions Issue the gBITONAL command The program will then automatically reduce a multi color image to a binary image If you have no color greyscale images loaded amp you activate the command you will get an error telling you that you don t have a suitable image for gBITONAL to work on If you have more than one color greyscale image loaded you will be offered a dialog box to select the image you wish make bitonal Notes gBITONAL only works if you have a color or greyscale image loaded On large color images the gBITONAL command can take some time to process The gBITONAL algorithm has been optimized to operate on a broad range of color images As such the command works well where an image has a clear cut distinction between dark amp light data However the gBITONAL threshold may not give the exact results that you desire by including or omitting important data from the binary image In these instances it may be better to use the gSEPARATE command where you have greater control of the color separation amp threshold 406 gBURN Typ
90. controlled by the LIMITS command Grid X Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the X direction If this value is 0 the grid assumes the value set for Snap X Spacing GRIDUNIT system variable Grid Y Spacing 111 Specifies the dot spacing in the Y direction If this value is 0 the grid assumes the value set for Snap Y Spacing GRIDUNIT system variable Snap Type amp Style Controls Snap mode settings Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid When you specify points the cursor snaps along vertical or horizontal grid points SNAPTYPE system variable Rectangular Snap Sets the snap style to standard Rectangular snap mode When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on the cursor snaps to a rectangular snap grid SNAPSTYL system variable Isometric Snap Sets the snap style to Isometric snap mode When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on the cursor snaps to an isometric snap grid SNAPSTYL system variable PolarSnap Sets the snap type to Polar When Snap mode is on and you specify points with polar tracking turned on the cursor snaps along polar alignment angles set on the Polar Tracking tab relative to the starting polar tracking point SNAPTYPE system variable Polar Tracking Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box 112 Polar Tracking Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Controls the AutoTrack settings Polar Tracking On Turns polar tracking on and off You can also turn polar trackin
91. for the word mode verification level WordVerifyLevel 100 REM Sets the initial value for the word mode force fit level WordForceLevel 0 REM Q means touching character recognition is OFF 1 means ON TouchingCR 0 REM 0 means word mode CR 1 means character mode CR CRMode 1 REM Character similarity file for word recognition REM SimFile c program files gtximage cad series V14 gtxtext sim REM dictionary file for word recognition REM WordFile c program files gtximage cad series V14 base dct REM WordFile c program files gtximage cad series V14 User dct REM sets the default GAP JUMP size REM GAP SIZE TO JUMP 50 REM sets the layer name to be created during hatch recognition HATCH LAYER NAME HatchLayer REM sets the layer name to be created during linestyle recognition LINESTYLE LAYER NAME LinestyleLayer 514 RE RE EX BE Pe PC Be Bc Pc Pc Pc Bc PC PE BE PC Pc Pc Pc RE th RE sc Pc RE Pr RE en RE Ze RE se RE ag RE Ha RE RE Ha RE ot Re RE RE De RE RE RE Ra RE RE RE RE RE ra M Line Width Configuration M Defines the rasterized vector width for particular colors Can use any color om 0 255 olor 1 0 010 olor 2 0 020 olor 3 0 030 olor 4 0 040 olor 5 0 050 olor 6 0 060 olor 7 0 070 olor 8 0 080 olor 21 0 090 olor 23 0 100 olor 30 0 110 olor 41 0 120 olor 63 0 130 olor 153 0 140 olor 191
92. for transparent use Note You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW or while ZOOM PAN or VIEW is in progress Specify corner of window enter a scale factor nX or nXP or All Center Dynamic Extents Previous Scale Window Object lt real time gt Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current viewport In a plan view All zooms to the grid limits or current extents whichever is greater In a 3D view ZOOM All is equivalent to ZOOM Extents The display shows all objects even if the drawing extends outside the grid limits before ZOOM All after ZOOM All In the illustration LIMITS is greater than the extents of the drawing Because it always regenerates the drawing you cannot use ZOOM All transparently Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification value or height A smaller value for the height increases the magnification A larger value decreases the magnification Specify center point Specify a point 1 Enter magnification or height lt current gt Enter a value or press ENTER 376 before ZOOM center after ZOOM center magnification increased Zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing with a view box The view box represents your viewport which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing Positioning and sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the image inside the view box aul view Dox The panning view box
93. forms the first corner of a box defined by the Box method Auto and Add are the default methods Switches to the Single method selects the first object or set of objects designated rather than continuing to prompt for further selections SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables 299 O Tools menu Inquiry Set Variable I Command line setvar or setvar for transparent use Enter variable name or lt current gt Enter a variable name enter or pressENTER Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set Enter new value for variable_name lt current gt Enter a new value or pressENTER You can also change the value of system variables at the Command prompt by entering the name of the variable and its new value Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current settings Enter variable s to list lt gt Enter a wild card pattern or press ENTER SHAPE Inserts a shape from a shape file that has been loaded using LOAD Command line shape Enter shape name or 2 Enter a name or enter Loads the shape Specify insertion point Specify height lt current gt Specify a height or pressENTER Specify rotation angle lt O gt Specify an angle or pressENTER If a shape belongs to an external reference xref attached to the current drawing the shape file is identified as externally dependent Externally dependent shapes cannot be used in the current drawing unless they are reload
94. from the command line using MVSETUP Using the settings you provide a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits On a layout tab you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the layout and the drawing on the Model tab The Model tab is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting you can also use the Page Setup dialog box which is automatically displayed when you select a layout in a new drawing session NEW Creates a new drawing File menu New E Command line new The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the Startup setting on the System tab in the Options dialog box Show the Startup Dialog Box NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog box Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box NEW displays the Select Template dialog box a standard file selection dialog box 203 If the FILEDIA system variable is set to O instead of 1 a prompt on the command line is displayed If you set FILEDIA to 0 this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting OFFSET Creates concentric circles parallel lines and parallel curves 0 Modify menu Offset 0 Modify toolbar EE Command line offset Current settings Erase source curren
95. grid will occupy Select first corner for cell size Select one corner to define the cell size This might be the same point as the base point 508 Select opposite corner for cell size 4 Select the other corner of the cell to define its overall size The grid will fill up with cells whose size is defined by the first and opposite corners For each grid point generated by steps 1 4 the following prompt will appear New source point on the drawing 5 Aline will be rubber banding from one of the grid points Select the raster point nearby that is supposed to be representing this real point in space When all the grid destination points have prompted for their respective source points the Image Warp dialog will re appear showing the entire list of point pairs in the Coordinate List Table Save List The Save List button saves the list of point pairs in an ASCII text file The default filename is warp txt Delete Point Pair Deletes the selected point pair in the Coordinate List Table Modify Point Pair Re enters the selected point pair in the Coordinate List Table Clear All Points Erases ALL point pairs in the Coordinate List Table Prompt Instructions When CMDDIA 0 the following prompts are issued instead of command dialogs Enter number of warp points Enter the number of warp points for gWARP to create Source point on the drawing 1 Select or enter the coordinates of the first source point This
96. is displayed f gt w Es 3 gt E q 2 My i telephone selected telephone removed from group If you remove all the group s objects the group remains defined You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option Note When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the same drawing session they are returned to their previous position in the numerical order of the group Add Adds objects to the selected group Select objects Use an object selection method The selected objects are added to the group The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed 137 chair selected chair added to group Note Group names are displayed in alphabetical order Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Identification Re Order Displays the Order Group dialog box in which you can change the numerical order of objects within the selected group Objects are numbered in the order in which you select them for inclusion in the group Reordering is useful when creating tool paths For example you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern You can either change the numerical position of individual group members or ranges of group members or reverse the order of all members The first object in a group is number 0 not number 1 Description Updates the selected group s description to the name that you en
97. is already residing on the desired destination layer If you selected a sample object the selected objects are moved to the same layer as the sample If you selected dialog continue reading the following instructions The Manual Layer Selection dialog appears 3 Select the destination layer name from the list or select New Layer to define a new destination layer for the selected objects 4 When done select OK The selected objects are moved to the specified layer 417 gCIRCLE Type Menu_ __ Availability GC or GTX Raster Edit gt Raster Circle GTXImage CAD GCIRCLE GTXImage CAD PLUS con bod Draws a raster circle in the current raster image Instructions Center Point Select or type the centerpoint of the circle Radius Diameter Select or type the radius or type D and then specify the Diameter The circle appears after the radius or diameter is specified Note If there is no active image gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gCIRCLE If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which raster line can be drawn 418 gCLEANIOP Type ___ Menu_ Avaailabiility GCLEANIOP GTX Enhance gt Clean IOP Raster GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS 4 Icon K gCLEANIOP deskews the image and removes noise and speckles gCLEANIOP creates a selection set of all noise You can use ADD and REMOVE in combination with other IOP methods to refine the selection set
98. is selected lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel Clear Display Lineweight if performance slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing This option does not affect how objects are plotted Default Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers The initial DEFAULT lineweight is 0 01 inches or 0 25 mm LWDEFAULT system variable Adjust Display Scale Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab On the Model tab lineweights are displayed in pixels Lineweights are displayed using a pixel width in proportion to the real world unit value at which they plot If you are using a high resolution monitor you can adjust the lineweight display scale to better display different lineweight widths The Lineweight list reflects the current display scale Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time If you want to optimize performance when working in the Model tab set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether 176 MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects e Standard toolbar ra Modify menu Match Properties E Command line matchprop or painter or matchprop for transparent use Sele
99. is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints Select objects Use an object selection method If you previously selected multiple objects using the Multiple option the following prompt is displayed Enter fuzz distance or Jointype lt 0 0000 gt Enter a distance or j Jointype Sets the method of joining selected polylines Enter a vertex editing option Enter join type Extend Add Both lt Extend gt Enter e a orb Extend Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming the segments to the nearest endpoints Add Joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints Both Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming if possible Otherwise joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints 240 a Gi EA PA e A i A j i selected open polyline other objects selected palyline and objects joined Width Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline Specify new width for all segments You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting and ending widths of a segment varying width uniform width Edit Vertex Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen If you have specified a tangent direction for this vertex an arrow is also drawn in that direction The following prompt is displayed Next Previous Break Insert Move Regen Straighten T angent Width eXit lt curre
100. is the only tree view option that is displayed For Windows system printers most of the device specific settings are made in this dialog box For more information about the custom properties settings for your device choose Help in the Custom Properties dialog box Initialization Strings Node for Non System Plotters Only Sets pre initialization post initialization and termination plotter strings If you are plotting to an unsupported plotter in emulation mode you can specify ASCII text initialization strings that prepare the plotter for printing set device specific options and restore the plotter to its original state Initialization strings should be used by advanced users only Pre Initialization Forces a plotter to emulate another plotter by sending a pre initialization string to the plotter before it is initialized The text string is sent literally except for a back slash A back slash followed by a number for example 27 is interpreted and sent as a single character whose value is 27 The number 27 is the escape character For example 27 12345X PJL ENTER LANGUAGE PostScript 10 sends an HP PJL command to a dual language laser printer before it s initialized and switches the printer into PostScript mode The 127 sends an escape character and the 10 sends a line feed character The remainder of the text string is sent literally Post Initialization Sets a device specific option that is not supported elsewhere in the
101. menu Lineweight Shortcut menu Right click the Lwtbutton on the status bar and choose Settings ES Command line Iweight or lweight for transparent use The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed 175 If you enter lweight at the Command prompt LWEIGHT displays prompts on the command line Sets the current lineweight sets the lineweight units controls the display and display scale of lineweights in the Model tab and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value for layers Lineweights Displays the available lineweight values Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER BYBLOCK and DEFAULT The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable which has an initial value of 0 01 inches or 0 25 mm All new layers use the default setting The lineweight value of O plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space Current Lineweight Displays the current lineweight To set the current lineweight select a lineweight from the lineweight list and choose OK Units for Listing Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable Millimeters mm Specifies lineweight values in millimeters Inches in Specifies lineweight values in inches Display Lineweight Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing If this option
102. method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects Enter clipping option ON OFF Clipdepth Delete generate Polyline New boundary lt New gt Select an option or press ENTER 367 O n Displays the clipped portion of the xref or block in the host drawing oi O ff Displays all of the geometry of the xref or block in the host drawing ignoring the clipping boundary Clipdepth Clipdepth Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block Objects outside the volume defined by the boundary and the specified depth are not displayed Specify front clip point or Distance Remove Front Clip Point Creates a clipping plane passing through and perpendicular to the clipping boundary Specify back clip point or Distance Remove Distance Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and parallel to the clipping boundary Specify distance from boundary The previous prompt is displayed Remove Removes both the front and back clipping planes Delete Delete Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block To temporarily turn off a clipping boundary use the Off option Delete erases the clipping boundary and the clipdepth The ERASE command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries Generate Polyline Generate Polyline Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary The polyline assumes the current layer linetype lineweight and color settings Use this opti
103. mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar by pressing F9 or by using the SNAPMODE system variable Snap Controls an invisible grid that restricts cursor movement to specified intervals Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction The value must be a positive real number SNAPUNIT system variable Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction The value must be a positive real number SNAPUNIT system variable Angle Rotates the snap grid by the angle specified SNAPANG system variable X Base Specifies an X base coordinate point for the grid SNAPBASE system variable Y Base Specifies a Y base coordinate point for the grid SNAPBASE system variable Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap increment distance Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type amp Style If this value is 0 the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and or object snap tracking If neither tracking feature is enabled the Polar Distance setting has no effect POLARDIST system variable Grid On Turns the grid dots on or off You can also turn grid dots mode on or off by clicking Grid on the status bar by pressing F7 or by using the GRIDMODE system variable Grid Controls the display of a dot grid that helps you visualize distances Note The limits of the dot grid are
104. no geometry from the selected view is loaded either because no layer geometry in that view or in the entire drawing is loaded Xref dependent layers are displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list only if the selected drawing was last saved with the VISRETAIN system variable set to 1 Any layers created in the xref since the xref was loaded into the selected drawing are not displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open drawing Note When a drawing is partially open named objects are still loaded into the file along with the specified geometry from the selected layers All layers are still available in the partially open drawing but only geometry from the layers specified to load appears in the drawing Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing Load Geometry Loads geometry from the layer when the drawing is opened Load All Loads geometry from all layers when the drawing is opened You can right click and use the shortcut menu to load geometry from all layers into the drawing Clear All Loads no geometry from any layer when the drawing is opened No geometry at all is loaded including geometry specified to load from a view You can right click and use the shortcut menu to load no geometry into the drawing Index Status Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index INDEXCTL controls whether layer
105. not included in the new block definition are deleted AUDIT Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors File menu Drawing Utilities Audit Command line audit Fix any errors detected Yes No lt N gt Enter y orn or pressENTER For easy access AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set However editing commands affect only the objects that belong to the current paper space or model space If you set the AUDITCTL system variable to 1 AUDIT creates an ASCII file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same directory as the current drawing with the file extension adf 56 If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix use RECOVER to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing Draw menu Block Base ES Command line base or base for transparent use Enter base point lt current gt Specify a point or press ENTER The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings this base point is used as the insertion base point BLIPMODE Controls the display of marker blips E Command line blipmode or blipmode for transparent use Enter mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or press ENTER When Blip mode is on a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign a
106. not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer Thaw Clears Current VP Freeze for layers in the filter In the current viewport objects on the layer are displayed and plotted and hide other objects when you use HIDE This option does not thaw layers that are set to Off or Frozen in the drawing Isolate Group Turns off all layers not in the selected filter The layers that are visible are the layers in the filter e All Viewports In all viewports in a layout sets Current VP Freeze for all layers that are not in the selected filter In model space turns off all layers that are not in the selected filter Active Viewport Only In the current layout viewport sets Current VP Freeze for all layers that are not in the selected filter ln model space turns off all layers that are not in the selected filter New Properties Filter 161 Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box where you can create a new layer filter based on layer names and settings for example on or off color or linetype New Group Filter Creates a new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1 and adds it to the tree view Enter a new name Select the All filter or any other layer filter in the tree view to display layers in the list view and then drag layers from the list view into the new layer group filter in the tree view You can use standard selection methods Hold down CTRL to select more than
107. of colors Or you can reduce to a bitonal image Number of unique colors in the image 256 Enter the number of colors the reduced image should have 4 256 C4 Ce Cis 32 64 C 128 C 256 Enter number Automatically convert image to bitonal 1 bit using gBitonal 470 Notes gREDUCE only works if you have a color or greyscale image loaded You cannot use the command to increase the number of colors 471 gREFLCT Availability GREF or gREFLCT GTX Enhance gt Reflect All Products Icon gREFLCT reflects the raster within an image about the X or Y axis This command can be useful if an image was scanned through the back of transparent media Instructions 1 Select gREFLCT Select axis to mirror data about lt Xaxis gt Yaxis 2 Select X or Y or press RETURN to select the default value The entire image is flipped about the chosen axis and the raster limits are rotated to the new orientation 472 gRELIMIT Availability GREL or GRELIMIT GTX Vector Clean gt Relimit GTXImage CAD PLUS z Icon R gRELIMIT combines the effects of both the TRIM and EXTEND commands for vector lines Instructions Select line end point 1 The End AutoSnap becomes enabled to help select endpoints Select the end of the line you want to trim or extend Select Object 2 Select the boundary line The line will lengthen or shorten to meet the boundary If the line cannot shorten or l
108. one of the application s commands Command Invoke Demand loads the source application when you invoke one of the application s commands This setting does not demand load the application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects Object Detect and Command Invoke Demand loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects or when you invoke one of the application s commands Proxy Images for Custom Objects Controls the display of custom objects in drawings PROXYSHOW system variable Do Not Show Proxy Graphics Specifies not to display custom objects in drawings Show Proxy Graphics Specifies to display custom objects in drawings Show Proxy Bounding Box Specifies to show a box in place of custom objects in drawings Show Proxy Information Dialog Box 217 Specifies whether a warning is displayed when you open a drawing that contains custom objects PROXYNOTICE system variable Plot and Publish Controls options related to plotting and publishing Default Plot Settings For New Drawings Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format Use As Default Output Device Sets the default output device for new drawings and for drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format The list displays any plotte
109. option all subsequent actions become part of this set until you use the End option Entering undo begin while a group is already active ends the current set and begins a new one UNDO and U treat grouped actions as a single action If you enter undo begin without undo end using the Number option undoes the specified number of commands but does not back up past the begin point If you want to go back to before the begin point you must use the End option even if the set is empty The same applies to the U command A mark placed by the Mark option disappears inside an UNDO group Mark Back Mark Back Mark places a mark in the undo information Back undoes all the work done back to this mark If you undo one operation at a time you are informed when you reach the mark You can place as many marks as necessary Back moves back one mark at a time removing the mark If no mark is found Back displays the following prompt This will undo everything OK lt Y gt Enter y orn or press ENTER Enter Y to undo all commands entered in the current session Enter N to ignore the Back option When you use the Number option to undo multiple actions UNDO stops if it encounters a mark UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision Format menu Units E Command line units or units for transparent use The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed If you enter units at the Command prompt UNITS displays UNITS Command Line pro
110. options may include Equals Not Equal To Greater Than Less Than and Wildcard Match Greater Than and Less Than are not available for some properties Wildcard Match is available only for text fields that can be edited 279 Value Specifies the property value for the filter If known values for the selected property are available Value becomes a list in which you can choose a value Otherwise enter a value How to Apply Specifies whether you want the new selection set to include or exclude objects that match the specified filtering criteria Select Include in New Selection Set to create a new selection set composed only of objects that match the filtering criteria Select Exclude from New Selection Set to create a new selection set composed only of objects that do not match the filtering criteria Append to Current Selection Set Specifies whether the selection set created by QSELECT replaces or is appended to the current selection set Note QSELECT supports custom objects objects created by another application and their properties If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD properties the custom object s source application must be running in order for the properties to be available to QSELECT QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects Command line qtext or qtext for transparent use Enter mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or press ENTER When QTEXT Quick T
111. or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command delta length ee S object selected Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle Enter delta angle lt current gt Specify an angle or pressENTER Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command object selected elta angle 169 Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length Percent also changes the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total included angle of the arc Enter percentage length lt current gt Enter a positive nonzero value or pressENTER Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle Specify total length or Angle lt current gt Specify a distance enter a positive nonzero value enter a or pressENTER n total length iC A A object selected Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point Select an object to change or Undo Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command Angle
112. or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 90 degrees enter 90 P before Angle after Angle Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions Specify dimension line location or Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option 25 LA Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line After you specify the location the dimension is drawn Mtext Text Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command Vertical Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions Specify dimension line location or Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option 0 75 Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line After you specify the location the dimention is drawn Mtext Text Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands See th
113. point of the selected xref Specify On Screen Displays prompts on the command line and makes the X Y and Z options unavailable The descriptions of the options displayed on the command line match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point in INSERT X Specifies the X coordinate value for the point at which an xref instance is inserted into the current drawing The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in the BASE command in the referenced file Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the point at which an xref instance is inserted into the current drawing The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in the BASE system variable in the referenced file Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the point at which an xref instance is inserted into the current drawing The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in the BASE system variable in the referenced file Scale Specifies the scale factors for the selected xref Specify On Screen Displays prompts on the command line and makes the X Y and Z Scale Factor options unavailable The descriptions of the options displayed on the command line match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point in INSERT X Scale Factor Specifies the X scale factor for the xref instance Y Scale Factor Specifies the Y sca
114. point to scale the entities about it will not change its location It also serves as the first point for the scale rectangle if you use the graphic method of scaling Scale factors lt 1 0 1 0 gt Fit The value in the brackets is the default value either the initial default of 1 0 1 0 scale by 1 in both X and Y directions or any values previously used with the gSCALE command 4 There are several ways to respond to the prompt You can use the default value or enter the numerical scaling factors for X and Y You can also indicate the size graphically be selecting Fit Using the Default Scaling Factors Scale factors lt 1 0 1 0 gt Fit a The default scaling values reflect the scale factors used for a previous gSCALE operation or 1 0 1 0 if the command has not been used You can accept the default scale factors by pressing RETURN Entering Numerical Scaling Factors Scale factors lt 1 0 1 0 gt Fit a Enter two values separated by a comma to indicate the X and Y scale factors respectively To enlarge the image enter scale factors greater than 1 To shrink the image enter scale factors between 0 and 1 Entering 2 2 doubles each dimension and increases the area by a factor of 4 Entering 5 5 cuts each dimension in half and decreases the image to 1 4 its original size Using Fit Scale factors lt 1 0 1 0 gt Fit a After selecting the base point select Fit from the menu or enter F A rubbe
115. polyline Select 2D polyline The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline Chamfers become new segments of the polyline If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance those segments are not chamfered selected polyline result Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge Specify first chamfer distance lt current gt Specify second chamfer distance lt current gt If you set both distances to zero CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point Angle 64 Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line Specify chamfer length on the first line lt current gt Specify chamfer angle from the first line lt current gt chamfer distance first selected pia aaa J Trim Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints Enter Trim mode option Trim No trim lt current gt Note Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1 No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0 If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1 CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line If the selected lines do not intersect CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do If TRIMMODE is set to 0 the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines Method Controls whether CHAMFER use
116. program Specify a post initialization string that is sent to the plotter after it is initialized Termination Restores the printer to its original state after plotting Specify a termination string that is sent to the plotter after plotting is complete User Defined Paper Sizes amp Calibration Node Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file calibrates the plotter and adds deletes revises or filters custom paper sizes You can also modify standard paper sizes This node accesses the Plotter Calibration and Custom Paper Size wizards If the plotter you are using has been calibrated a Plotter Model Parameter PMP file contains that calibration information If the PMP file is not already attached to the PC3 file you are editing you must create that association so you can use the PMP file If the plotter was calibrated from within the Add a Plotter wizard while creating the current PC3 file the PMP file is already attached Use the PMP File Name option under User defined Paper Sizes amp Calibration to attach a PMP file to or detach the PMP file from the PC3 file you are editing Custom Paper Sizes Nonsystem Printers Only Creates a customized paper size or changes the printable area of a standard or nonstandard paper size With the Custom Paper Size wizard you can create a new paper size or select from a list of available paper sizes from a PMP file if the plotter is not a Windows system printer If the plotter is a Windows system printer
117. prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed q E eee ee es sal 1 first mline selected second mline selected result Undo Undoes the closed tee intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Open Tee Creates an open tee intersection between two multilines The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline pr first mline Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The open tee intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result Undo Undoes the open tee intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Merged Tee Creates a merged tee intersection between two multilines The multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline 10 188 Select first mline Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The merged tee intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Secon
118. rectangle can be any size that is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width measurement A reference rectangle is used instead of a square to make it easier to see As soon as the second point has been selected the rasterization takes place The highlighted entities will be converted to raster Some residual vector markings overlay the raster until you redraw the image Notes 1 The next time you use gRASTER the value of the width you used will be the default fixed line width 2 If the width value is less than 1 pixel the raster width will automatically be reset to 1 pixel regardless of the way the width was set 3 Polylines and other non filled entities that have a width attribute will be drawn with the CAD width attribute 4 Rasterization of certain entities may take a while to process Rasterizing text and ellipses takes longer than lines for instance Select less data at a time to improve rasterization speeds 5 gRASTER does not convert 3 D entities CALS Plotter Driver An alternative method for rasterizing vector data is to use the Raster File Format HDI plotter driver This can be configured using the Autodesk Plotter Manager from the Windows Control Panel 468 gRECTANGLE Availability GRECT GRECTAN or GTX Edit gt Draw Rectangle All Products GRECTANGLE con All gRectangle draws a raster rectangle in the current raster image Instructions Command grectangle Line width lt 0
119. select another linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension press ENTER Select base dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Select a base dimension or press ESC to end the command Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session Select Prompts you to select a linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension After you select a base dimension the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed DIMCENTER Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs e Dimension toolbar e Dimension menu Center Mark EE Command line dimcenter Select arc or circle Use an object selection method You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the dimension style See DIMSTYLE You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable center mark centerlines DIMCONTINUE Creates a linear angular or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension a Dimension toolbar H 0 Dimension menu Continue EZ Command line dimcontinue If no dimension was created in the current session you are prompted to select a linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension Select continued dimension
120. selected 3D object The new UCS has the same extrusion direction positive Z axis as that of the selected object Select object to align UCS Select an object E GES select object new UCS established The following objects cannot be used with this option 3D solids 3D poly lines 3D meshes viewports mlines regions splines ellipses rays xlines leaders and multiline text For objects other than 3D faces the XY plane of the new UCS is parallel to the XY plane in effect when the object was drawn However the X and Y axes can be rotated differently The new UCS is defined as shown in the following table Object Method of determining UCS Arc The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin The X axis passes through the arc endpoint that is closest to the selection point Dimension The midpoint of the dimension text becomes the new UCS origin The direction of the new X axis is parallel to the X axis of the UCS in effect when the dimension was drawn The point becomes the new UCS origin The first point of the solid determines the new UCS origin The new X axis lies along the line between the first two points 3D face The new UCS origin is taken from the first point the X axis from the first two points and the Y positive side from the first and fourth points The Z axis follows by application of the right hand rule Face Aligns the UCS to the selected face of a solid object To select a face click within the bound
121. selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending 7 p O D Selects all objects that cross the selection fence The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points The selection fence does not form a closed loop Specify first fence point Specify the starting point of the selection fence Specify next fence point or Undo Specify the next point of the selection fence or enter u Specify next fence point or Undo Specify the next point of the selection fence enter u or press ENTER Crossing Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points Specify first corner Specify a point Specify opposite corner Specify a point at a diagonal from the first point Note Some crossing selections of objects to be extended are ambiguous EXTEND resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in a clockwise direction from the first point to the first object encountered 124 Project Specifies the projection method used when extending objects Enter a projection option None Ucs View lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER A ae selected ZE THS to boundary extend None Specifies no projection Only objects that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space are extended are not intersecting with boundary e
122. selection method and press ENTER A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 Off prompts are displayed on the command line JUSTIFYTEXT Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations 0 Text toolbar 0 Modify menu Justify Text 0 Modify menu Object Text Justify E Command line justifytext 158 Select objects Use an object selection method and pressENTERwhen you finish You can choose single line text objects multiline text objects leader text objects and attribute objects Enter a justification option Left Align Fit Center Middle Right TL T C T R ML MC MR BL BC BR lt Existing gt Specify a location to serve as the new justification point The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT command The justification point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text except that the Align Fit and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom left BL multiline text attachment point LAYER Fi 0 Layers toolbar A T 0 Format menu Layer E Command line layer or layer for transparent use Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties You can add delete and rename layers change their properties or add descriptions Layer filters control which layers are di
123. sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance 180 X Sets the X scale factor Specify X scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Specify rotation angle lt 0 gt The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance Y Sets the Y scale fac
124. setting is ignored Dithering is usually turned off in order to avoid false line typing that results from dithering of thin vectors Turning off dithering also makes dim colors more visible When you turn off dithering the program maps colors to the nearest color resulting in a smaller range of colors when plotting Dithering is available whether you use the object s color or assign a plot style color Convert to Grayscale Converts the object s colors to grayscale if the plotter supports grayscale If you clear Convert to Grayscale the RGB values are used for object colors Dithering is available whether you use the object s color or assign a plot style color Use Assigned Pen Number Pen Plotters Only Specifies a pen to use when plotting objects that use this plot style Available pens range from 1 to 32 If plot style color is set to Use Object Color or you are editing a plot style in a color dependent plot style table you cannot change the assigned pen number the value is set to Automatic If you specify O the field updates to read Automatic The program determines the pen of the closest color to the object you are plotting using the information you provided under Physical Pen Characteristics in the Plotter Configuration Editor Virtual Pen Number Specifies a virtual pen number between 1 and 255 Many non pen plotters can simulate pen plotters using virtual pens For many devices you can program the pen s width fill patt
125. style to use for the multiline Enter mline style name or Enter a name or enter Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that s defined in a multiline library MLN file you ve created List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles MLSTYLE Creates modifies and manages multiline styles Format menu Multiline Style Command line mlstyle Displays the Multiline Style dialog box Creates modifies saves and loads multiline styles The multiline style controls the number of elements and the properties of each element MLSTYLE also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline Current Multiline Style Displays the name of the current multiline style to be used for subsequently created multilines Styles Displays a list of multiline styles that are loaded in the drawing The list of multiline styles can include externally referenced multiline styles that is multiline styles that exist in an externally referenced drawing xref Externally referenced multiline style names use the same syntax as other externally dependent nongraphical objects Description Displays the description of the selected multiline style Preview Of Displays the name and an image of the selected multiline style Set Current Sets the current multiline style for subsequently created multilines Select a name from the Styles list and choose Set Current Note You cannot make a mult
126. the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view options Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives including My Computer and Network Neighborhood You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file name directory location or network path in the DesignCenter tree view See ADCNAVIGATE Open Drawings Displays all drawings open in the current work session including drawings that are minimized History Displays a list of the files that you opened most recently in DesignCenter With the history displayed right click a file to display information about the file or to delete the file from the History list DC Online Accesses the DesignCenter Online web page When you establish a web connection two panes are viewed on the Welcome page The left side displays folders containing symbol libraries manufacturer sites and additional content libraries When a symbol is selected it is displayed on the right side and can be downloaded into your drawing ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file folder or network path EE Command line adcnavigate Enter pathname lt current gt The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the DesignCenter Folders tab At the prompt you can enter a path in any of the following formats e Folder path c project files electrical Folder path and a file name c project files electr
127. the final position for the new base line by entering a value You can also indicate the rotation angle graphically if you chose the original base point the center of rotation as the first point of the new base line The selected data will rotate the same amount The angle of rotation will actually be the angle between the reference line positions For example if the desired rotation would bring a certain line to a vertical position you could draw the base line over that line and then type 90 for the new angle The default angle then will be 90 minus the angle of the base line e As soon as the rotation angle has been specified the highlighted data will rotate about the base point The highlighting will be removed Move Rotate Scale You can select another option to change or press RETURN to terminate the command Using Scale 1 If you enter s or select Scale from the menu the pasted data will be highlighted and you can change the size of the image The default value is initially set to X 1 Y 1 Base point 2 Select the point about which the raster will be scaled This point will not change its location It also serves as the first point for the scale rectangle if you use the graphic method of scaling Scale factors lt 1 0 1 0 gt Fit 3 The data is scaled from the base point You can type the numerical values by which to scale the X and Y dimensions or select Fit and change the height and width graphicall
128. the text window contents and closes the log file You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on Use the Files tab to change the location of the log file Each drawing saves a log file with the extension og that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow LOGFILEON Writes the text window contents to a file EE Command line logfileon The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF command You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on Use the Files tab to change the location of the log file Each drawing saves a log file with the extension og that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow LTSCALE Sets the global linetype scale factor EE Command line Itscale or Itscale for transparent use Enter new linetype scale factor lt current gt Enter a positive real value or pressENTER Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated LTSCALE 1 LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight lineweight display options and lineweight units Format
129. this style Entering a height greater than 0 0 sets the text height for this style TrueType fonts can be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting Note The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase letters in TrueType fonts supplied with this program Use Big Font Specifies an Asian language Big Font file Use Big Font is available only if you specify an SHX file under Font Name Only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts 317 Effects Modifies characteristics of the font such as its height width factor and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down backwards or vertically aligned Upside Down Displays the characters upside down Backwards Displays the characters backwards Vertical Displays the characters aligned vertically Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts Width Factor Sets the character spacing Entering a value less than 1 0 condenses the text Entering a value greater than 1 0 expands it Oblique Angle Sets the obliquing angle of the text Entering a value between 85 and 85 italicizes the text Note TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output Fonts are plotted as specified by applied character formatting Preview Display
130. to return to the dialog box When you select objects Search In displays Current Selection Options Displays the Find and Replace Options dialog box in which you can define the type of objects and words that you want to find Find Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find Text String If you have not entered text in Find Text String this option is not available Found text is displayed in the Context area Once you find the first instance of the text the Find option becomes Find Next which you can use to find the next instance Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find Text String and replaces it with the text in Replace With The Search In setting controls whether to find and replace text in the entire 133 drawing or text in the current selection The status area confirms the replacements and indicates the number of replacements that were made Select All Finds and selects all loaded objects containing instances of the text that you enter in Find Text String This option is available only when you set Search In to Current Selection When you choose Select All the dialog box closes and a message on the command line indicates the number of objects that it found and selected Note that Select All does not replace text any text in Replace With is ignored Zoom To Displays the area in the drawing that contains the resul
131. tracking paths for acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on POLARMODE system variable Track Using All Polar Angle Settings Applies polar tracking settings to object snap tracking When you use object snap tracking the cursor tracks along polar alignment angles from acquired object snap points POLARMODE system variable Note Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and object snap tracking on and off 113 Polar Angle Measurement Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system UCS Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn Object Snap Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box 114 Object Snap Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Controls running object snap settings With running object snap settings also called Osnap you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object When more than one option is selected the selected snap modes are applied to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box Press TAB to cycle through the options Object Snap On Turns running object snaps on and off The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on OSMODE system variable Object Snap Tracking On Turns object snap tracking on and off With object snap tracking the cursor can track along alignment path
132. u You must specify at least three points to define a polygon If the image already has a clipping boundary defined the following prompt is displayed Delete old boundary No Yes lt Yes gt Enter n or press ENTER If you choose Yes the entire image is redrawn and the command continues if you choose No the command ends Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners The rectangle is always drawn parallel to the edges of the image Specify first corner point Specify a point Specify opposite corner point Specify a point IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted e Reference toolbar 0 Modify menu Object Image Frame Command line imageframe Enter image frame setting 0 1 2 lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER Image frames are not displayed and not plotted Image frames are both displayed and plotted Image frames are displayed but not plotted 153 IMAGEQUALITY Controls the display quality of images 0 Reference toolbar Eil 0 Modify menu Object Image Quality E Command line imagequality Enter image quality setting High Draft lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER The quality setting affects display performance high quality images take longer to display Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing Note Images are always plotted using a high quality setting High
133. unit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance XYZ Specify X scale factor or Corner lt 1 gt Specify a nonzero value enter e or press ENTER You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering a scale factor value or by specifying a corner point If you specify a corner point the specified point and the block insertion point determine the X and Y scale factors for the block Enter Z scale factor lt use X scale factor gt Enter a value or press ENTER fo use the same scale factor Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance 183 PScale Sets the scale factor for the X Y and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ lt 1 gt Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match those of the co
134. update associative dimensions if the associated external reference geometry has been modified DIMSTYLE 0 Styles toolbar 4 0 Format menu Dimension Style 0 Dimension menu Style E Command line dimstyle Creates new styles sets the current style modifies styles sets overrides on the current style and compares styles Current Dimstyle Displays the name of the dimension style that is current The default dimension style is STANDARD The current style is applied to dimensions you create Styles Lists dimension styles in the drawing The current style is highlighted Right click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style rename styles and delete styles You cannot delete a style that is current or in use in the current drawing The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed To make a style current select it and click Set Current Unless you select Don t List Styles in Xrefs dimension styles are displayed in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally referenced named objects Although you cannot change rename or make current externally referenced dimension styles you can create new styles based on them List Controls the display of styles in the Styles list Select All Styles if you want to see all dimension styles in a drawing Select Styles in Use if you want to see only the dimension styles currently used by dimensions in the drawing Don
135. variable Note When PLOT PLOT PUBLISH and PUBLISH are used ina script SCR file the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable value is ignored and PLOT PLOT PUBLISH and PUBLISH are processed in the foreground 218 Plot and Publish Log File Controls options for saving a plot and publish log file as a comma separated value CSV file that can be viewed in a spreadsheet program This log file contains information about plot and publish jobs such as Job ID Job name Sheet set name Category name Date and time started and completed Sheet name Full file path Selected layout name Page setup name Named page setup path Device name e Paper size name Final status Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log Specifies that a log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved Save One Continuous Plot Log Specifies that a single log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved Save One Log File Per Plot Specifies that a separate log file is created for each plot and publish job General Plot Options Controls options that relate to the general plotting environment including paper size settings system printer alert behavior and OLE objects in a drawing Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible Uses the paper size specified in the Page Setup dialog box as long as the selected output device can plot to this paper si
136. you can enter myspool bat s to spool plot files to myspool bat and have a unique plot file name automatically generated Printer Support File Path Specifies search path settings for printer support files Print Spooler File Location Specifies the path for print spool files Printer Configuration Search Path Specifies the path for printer configuration files PC3 files Printer Description File Search Path Specifies the path for files with a omp file extension or printer description files Plot Style Table Search Path 210 Specifies the path for files with an stb or ctb extension or plot style table files both named plot style tables and color dependent plot style tables Automatic Save File Location Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the Open and Save tab SAVEFILEPATH system variable Color Book Locations Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors in the Select Color dialog box You can define multiple folders for each path specified This option is saved with the user profile Data Sources Location Specifies the path for database source files Changes to this setting do not take effect until you close and restart the program Template Settings Specifies the drawing template settings Drawing Template File Location Specifies the path to locate drawing template files used by the Start Up wizard and New dialog box Sheet Set Template
137. you encounter problems loading a DXF file you create try increasing the precision The only disadvantage of higher precision is increased file size Lower precision is useful for specialized purposes but is not recommended in general SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects proportionally in the X Y and Z directions 50 Modify toolbar pe Modify menu Scale Shortcut menu Select the objects to scale and right click in the drawing area Click Scale E Command line scale Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point Specify a point The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same location as the selected objects change size and thus move away from the stationary base point Specify scale factor or Copy Reference Specify a scale enterc or enter r Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the objects You can also drag the cursor to make the object larger or smaller 294 Creates a copy of the selected objects for scaling Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a specified new length Specify reference length lt 1 gt Specify a beginning length from which to scale the selected objects Specify new length or Points Specify a final length to which to scale the selected objects or enter p to def
138. you selected will disappear from the original location and be displayed in the new location in the raster color 457 gOFFSET Availability gOFFSET GTX Raster Edit gt Offset GTXImage CAD gOFF GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon gOFFSET creates a copy of a selected line arc or circle parallel or symmetrical to the original This command is similar to the CAD OFFSET command Instructions Having prepared an image for editing 1 Invoke gOFFSET Offset distance or Through lt Through gt 2 Either enter a distance or use the mouse to indicate the distance through which copies will be offset Select raster lt LINE gt 3 At this point you enter C for circle A for arc or click two points on a raster line Line Click two points along the raster line Arc Circle Click three points along the circumference of the arc or circle Offset Side to offset 4 Click a point to one side of the line arc or circle You can click inside or outside a circle A copy of the original entity will be placed at the specified offset distance on the indicated side 458 gOSR Availability GOSR GTX Convert gt OSR Batch Convert GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon E Function gOSR launches the GTX OSR batch vectorization program This requires that you have a license for either GTXImage CAD PLUS as well as a license for GTX OSR Instructions 1 Invoke gOSR If the directory containing GTX OSR normally in C program fil
139. 0 150 olor 161 0 160 M Set PclrUnit 0 if you want to multiply your pcolor setting by the CAD scale of e Image M Set PclrUnit 1 if you do NOT want to multiply your pcolor setting by the CAD ale of the Image lrUnit 1 M Product level Settings include ICAD ICADPLUS oductLevel ICADPLUS Demomode NO M If equal to 0 it sets zero width polylines to be rasterized just as all other tities M If set to 1 all plines will be rasterized as 1 pixel wide ro_Pline 0 M Determines the number of minutes of idle time the GTXImage CAD series license rver M will allow before de activating an inactive license and making it available anst M Value must be at least 60 spTimeOut 120 M Specifies the type of HASP security key being used Possible settings include M DEFAULT JAPAN NEC JAPAN IBM sp Type DEFAULT M Set RefDelLoad 1 if ref file needs to be deleted on doing a gATTACH set to 0 herwise fDelLoad 0 M Images are placed on this layer when attaching M The current layer is used if no layer name is listed faultRasterLayer Raster M Defines the layer color for the layer named in the M DefaultRasterLayer config parameter M Can use any color from 0 255 sterColor RED Set to YES when another 3rd party application will also be editing raster images This will cause more overhead to keep keep ICAD in sync with the 3rd party application raster edits Default is NO
140. 010 gt Box Pick 1 Select first corner of window Select or type the first corner point 2 Select opposite corner of window Select or type the second corner point To point From point k 469 gREDUCE Availability gREDUCE GTX CONVERT gt Reduce Color Image All Products gRED ojo jo 1101 Icon gREDUCE reduces the number of colors in an image to a more manageable number of colors between 4 to 256 colors The gREDUCE command only works when you have one or more color or grayscale images loaded Instructions Invoke the gREDUCE command If you have no color grayscale images loaded amp you will get an error telling you that you don t have a suitable image for gREDUCE to work on If you have more than one color greyscale image loaded you will be offered the Image selection dialog box You can then either select the image by name or you can pick it interactively using the Select Image on Screen button 60x beer sobote ee xij Select tha raga ertty by edecting tte mage nasa ce cih on the Sdect raga cbpect buttan to sect the mege ariy onthe screen wath the pata Select magaan wran race Teak Lobo Fiessutean_256 oF Colo lesiones 25614 Once the Image has been selected the system will display the color reduction dialog You can select the numbers of colors you wish to reduce to from a preset list in the range of between 4 to 256 colors Or you can specify the exact number
141. 05 DIST 106 DIVIDE 107 DONUT 108 DPI 450 Maximum Pixels 426 DRAGMODE 109 Draw order 438 Drawing Multiple Lines 455 Drawing raster gLINE 454 DRAWORDER 109 DSETTINGS 110 DSVIEWER 119 DWGPROPS 120 DXBIN 120 Editing raster gACTIVE 397 ELEV 120 ELLIPSE 121 ERASE 121 Erasing raster Despeckling gSPECKL 492 494 gCROP 427 gEDGE 440 gERASE 441 gRUB 478 EXPLODE 122 EXPORT 123 EXTEND 123 File Writers 479 FILL 126 FILLET 127 FILTER 131 gACTIVE 397 gADESKEW 398 gARC 399 gARRAY 400 gATTACH 402 gAUTOCLEAN 405 gAUTOSNAP 404 gBITONAL 406 gBURN 407 gCALIKE 410 gCARC 411 gCCIRCLE 412 gCCIRCLE2P 413 gCELEV 414 gCHANGE 415 gCHGLAY 417 gCIRCLE 418 gCLEANIOP 419 gCLINE 420 gCONCEN 421 gCONVRT 422 gCOPY 425 gCREATE 426 gCROP 427 gCTEXT 428 gCUT 433 gDESKEW 435 gDETACH 437 gECONVRT 439 gEDGE 440 gERASE 441 gFRZLAY 442 gHELP 443 gHTEXT 444 gHYBRIDMODE 446 gINACTIVE 449 gINFO 450 gINVERT 451 gISOLAY 452 gJOIN 453 gLINE 454 539 gLINE2 455 gMIRROR 456 gMOVE 457 gOFFSET 458 gOSR 459 GOTOURL 134 gPASTE 460 gRAHEAD 464 GRAPHSCR 134 gRASTER 465 gRECTANGLE 469 gREDUCE 470 gREFLCT 472 gRELIMIT 473 gRESIZE 474 GRID 135 gROTATE 475 gROTRECTANGLE 477 GROUP 136 gRUB 478 gSAVE 479 gSCALE 481 gSEPARATE 483 gSETLAY 487 gSLICE 488 gSMOOTH 489 gSPECKL 492 494 gTEXT 500 gTRACE 501 gTRAIN 503 gTURN
142. 478 gSAVE Availability GSA or GSAVE GTX Imaging gt Save Raster File GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS ger Icon Cm gSAVE saves changes made to a raster image A filename can be up to 256 characters long If the extension is not included the default raster format and its extension such as TIFF or CG4 will be used TIFF subformats uncompressed G4 etc default to the TIFFFORMAT setting in GTXRAST CFG Instructions 1 Invoke gSAVE The SAVE Raster File dialog appears 2 Select the output format from the List Files of Type box Enter the File Name and press OK 3 If the file name already exists you will be prompted to overwrite the file or cancel the save new fis Mog Eye Bayes 06 hte CALS Ga Mal 004 OPAC NLANG 9 Ema The drawing is saved Renaming an Image If you saved the image to a new name note that the image entity still points to the originally attached raster file If you want the drawing to point to the new filename you must do the following 1 Select Insert gt Raster Image to invoke the IMAGE command 2 Select the GTXARCH image Above under the Saved Path column you can see the original raster filename At the bottom of the dialog you can see an Image Found At text box which points at the recently saved filename 3 Select Save Path This tells GTXImage CAD that you want the changed filename as the one to which the image points Notes The lo
143. A DI IS 457 QOPF SED acco acess a ONU Di As 458 DOS ii A A E 459 RARE Do cards 464 JRASTER o a e e Daal sg 465 JRECTANGEE e de eon i ei eee eS 469 GQREDU GE viro na aR hd cacy aed Ceaa te alee eee lee dbs Sa edad beea tg ute tales 469 GREDU CE do 470 REC e a 472 JRELIMIE 0 tetheoe widen Beatie hdd pany iets MRE aN he arte oh Mo ined aa VEE 473 ORESILE a pia do aa a ei e e 474 IROTATE et Ra del oh A eed eae ete 475 GROITRECTANGEE coca isa 477 ROB i eh ss att ct AA E da Pad ode Meche ede aie na ite ent errado oe ado 478 OSA VE A O teehee cute Arete eae its Mandar de gt sel ceca Ne ele eas ten ets ne A eh oat 479 JSCALE S adas ee a OE ALE ata ea celo dale ee 481 ISERARA TES cade vara ed ted ta tdt cord as detal eal qeria mar ctrl A 483 JS mat A O 487 6 fs LICEA ee rene E ae eee re eee O 488 NI E au aaa 489 OA E OR re ee e aes 492 GONE unta dad ts rl cated es teeta a ela ns teat eh tate td E ata 494 GON AA A I E E cadet atts ON 498 SA he ea tates ss Near a ah headteacher ies A A dee cence tea acl atari ate ou tata 500 ONRACES acatar ech he i ae eta da OE sa ae Ae artesana dde Nero 501 OTRAI ii e E a a a A 503 O TORI a e ia a a A a an ts Cente Aske Soa 505 OVSKE Went a r e A een ae e It 507 QWARP rat ces e a E A ibas be ela 508 APPENDIX 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMS cccssscssscesssscssccecseccssccecseccssccesseccssceecsescsseeeessscssececsscessees 510 APPENDIX 2 CONFIGURATION e eseesseesoessoesooesoesseessessoeeeoeeeoeseoes
144. ATE cesses chee pro ld ce led cities decos 38 ABERTURE Saa de eb ere lines Los codecs sean 39 ARE EE ela EEEE A EE e lleno do all AEN 39 AREA a elit cacenad haute ES 43 O NR NN 46 ATTACHURL a E E EEE E E E E les ol p too 51 ATTDER EE EE E EEE EEEE A TEE ell EET AE tt 52 A EE E E E S E E E E los ett eastaahoness 54 A RR A 54 ATTE ta les ol a dl o ah 55 PCIREDER aL e o 56 AUD Tisivinita a as 56 BASE vu apa E E 57 BEIPMODE ui a ias 57 210 r E E E as 57 BLOCKICON ucraniana 59 BMPOU Tenistas 59 BOUNDARY en rn a EE OEE TE AEE ias 59 BREA Rovira 60 BROWSER coin a ia 62 GAD ici EE E events cuatenennn otecenv mueslovenesorereiad 62 CHAM PER outs EE ants TOE E EN TERE beta EEEE ERES OER 62 GHANGE ue 66 CHOPRO Pvc A A A O 68 CIRCO Exiuni a Ai 71 CLOS Es EAS AA A A RRRS 73 COLOR A AAA A 73 CONVERTERS TY ES us aaa aia 73 COPY A RE NN EN OR E 74 COPY BASE uta di aaa 75 CORVO Pi idad saab nna 75 COPY ita ad iO iii 76 COPYEIN Kia dd E ON dit 76 CUSTOMIZE it daa 76 CUTCH n E E aaa diia 77 DDED a aria 77 BID a A A SE AAEE E E S E E S 78 DDVPOINT p inside LITE E E EREA O IE E NEEE 79 DETACHUR citar tintas 80 BINT E tad A E 80 DIMALIGNED veinte as 82 DIMANGULAR a RE EEN EEEE ETE TI EEE ANE EAE 85 DIMARO oe EE R satan E AEE AE ETE TE T N 87 DIMBASELINE e ate RE AEE EE EEE EET IEEE AN E ORE 89 DIMCENTER oie EE A EEEE AEE AE q diia E 91 DIMCON TINU E RN 91 DIMDIAMETER aae eE A EEE AEEA E ETE E T E T A 92 DIMDISASSOCIATE irra e EEE E EEE ETRE T IEEE
145. Cascade Cascade Overlaps windows leaving title bars visible Tile Horizontal Tile Horizontal Arranges windows in horizontal nonoverlapping tiles Tile Vertical Tile Vertical Arranges windows in vertical nonoverlapping tiles Arrange Icons Arrange Icons Arranges the window icons 323 TEXT Creates a single line text object Draw menu Text Single Line Text E Command line text Current text style current Current text height current Specify start point of text or Justify Style Specify a point or enter an option If TEXT was the last command entered pressing ENTER at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for height and rotation angle The text that you enter in the In Place Text Editor for single line text is placed directly beneath the previous line of text The point that you specified at the prompt is also stored as the insertion point of the text The In Place Text Editor for single line text consists of a bounding box that is the height of the text and expands as you type Right click to select options on the shortcut menu Each line of text is a separate object To end a line and begin another press ENTER To exit TEXT press ENTER twice You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings and control codes Use TEXT to honor the TEXTEVAL system variable Start Point Start Point Specifies a start point for the text object Specify height lt curr
146. Color Book name Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as PANTONE If you enter a color book name you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book Enter color name Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as PANTONE573 Layer Sets the layer of the component objects after you explode them The default option is to inherit the current layer rather than the layer of the exploded object Enter new layer name for exploded objects lt current gt Enter an existing layer name or press ENTER LType Sets the linetype of the component objects after you explode them Enter new linetype name for exploded objects lt BYLAYER gt Enter a linetype name or press ENTER You can enter the name of any linetype that is loaded in the drawing Entering bylayer causes the component objects to inherit the linetype of the exploded object s layer Entering byblock causes the component objects to inherit the linetype of the exploded object Inherit from Parent Block Sets the color linetype lineweight and layer of the component objects to that of the exploded object if the component objects color linetype and lineweight are BYBLOCK and the objects are drawn on layer 0 Explode 373 Breaks a compound object into its component objects exactly as the EXPLODE command does Globally Globally Applies changes to all the selected objects Enter an option All Color LAyer LType Inherit from paren
147. Command line time or time for transparent use TIME displays the following information Current time Wednesday December 31 2003 at 9 54 51 406 AM Times for this drawing Created Friday December 12 2003 at 1 21 36 203 AM Last Updated Wednesday December 31 2003 at 9 49 19 208 AM Total Editing Time O days 06 44 10 520 Elapsed Timer on O days 00 07 05 312 Next Automatic Save In 0 days 01 59 15 570 Enter option Display On OFF Reset Enter an option or press ENTER TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances ja e Dimension menu Tolerance 0 Dimension toolbar EZ Command line tolerance The Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame After you select geometric characteristic symbols the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed Enter tolerance location Specify a location The feature control frame is placed at the specified location Sym Displays the geometric characteristic symbol which you select from the Symbol dialog box The dialog box is displayed when you select one of the Sym boxes Tolerance 1 Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame The tolerance value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate from a perfect form You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it First Box Inserts a diamet
148. Current Plot Style dialog box is displayed If a selection set exists the Select Plot Style dialog box is displayed If you enter plotstyle at the Command prompt PLOTSTYLE displays a prompt on the command line Specifies the plot style for new objects Current Plot Style Displays the current plot style Plot Style List Displays the available plot styles that can be assigned to an object including the default plot style NORMAL A plot style is a collection of overrides for color dithering gray scale pen assignments screening linetype lineweight end styles join styles and fill styles Active Plot Style Table 260 Sets the plot style table attached to the current layout A plot style table is a collection of plot style definitions Editor Displays the Plot Style Table Editor in which you modify the plot styles in the plot style table Attached To Displays the tab Model tab or layout tab that the plot style table is attached to PLOTTERMANAGER Displays the Plotter Manager where you can add or edit a plotter configuration File menu Plotter Manager E Command line plottermanager The Plotter Manager is displayed where you can perform the following tasks Double click the Add a Plotter wizard to add and configure plotters and printers Double click a plotter configuration PC3 file to start the Plotter Configuration Editor Modifies a PC3 file s plotter port connections and output settings including med
149. D polyline that you can edit You can use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline When the PEDITACCEPT system variable is set to 1 this prompt is suppressed and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline Multiple Enables selection for more than one object 2D Polyline Selection 239 2D Polyline Selection If you select a 2D polyline the following prompt is displayed Enter an option Close Join Width Edit vertex Fit Spline Decurve Ltype gen Undo Enter an option or press ENTERto end the command If the polyline you select is a closed polyline Open replaces the Close option in the prompt You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS Close Creates the closing segment of the polyline connecting the last segment with the first The polyline is considered open unless you close it using the Close option ff in rn A j gt a i Fi oe Boe before Close afer Close Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline The polyline is considered closed unless you open it using the Open option Join Adds lines arcs or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve fitting from a curve fit polyline For objects to join the polyline their endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT prompt In this case you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz distance
150. DIA and FILEDIA are set to 1 many GTXImage CAD Series commands use dialog boxes If these variables are set to 0 many GTX commands will use command line prompts The lessons will describe the commands as they run with these variables set to 1 Editing a Raster File A typical editing session begins with enhancements that operate on most or all of the drawing Next make more detailed changes Finally focus on the overall picture to make sure the sections are properly matched and aligned The GTXImage CAD Series cannot modify images until you prepare them for editing gACTIVE Get rid of meaningless or unwanted raster to reduce memory requirements and to clean the image gCROP gSPECKL gERASE Because documents are usually scanned at a slight angle deskew raster drawings before proceeding gyDESKEW Next perform editing functions that involve the whole drawing or large areas of the drawing gMIRROR gCUT gPASTE Completely edit the image in one area before moving on to another area Insert missing objects 28 and correct distortions with GTXImage CAD commands Leave new entities in vector format or rasterize them using gRASTER Use Raster Snapping methods to select points on raster geometry just as you do using object snaps 6 Create and edit text If using GTXlmage CAD PLUS use gTCONVERT to convert raster text into AutoCAD text entities 7 Look at the whole drawing and make any required changes gCOPY gMOVE g
151. ESKEW straightens selected raster by rotating it to align with the X or Y axis The gADESKEW Auto Deskew command may be faster and easier with drawings that have titleblocks The deskew uses reference line that is rotated to horizontal or vertical whichever is closer Pick points as far apart as possible Use transparent zoom or raster snapping features to draw the reference line precisely The lower left corner is used as the rotation point Processing time depends on image size and resolution and available memory Instructions 1 Select gDESKEW Command gDESKEW 2 press RETURN Select raster lt WINDOW gt 3 Select the raster data to deskew If deskewing the entire drawing type ALL Press RETURN Select one end of reference line 4 Select a point on a raster line that should be perfectly horizontal or vertical A rubber banding reference line will extend from it to the cursor Select other end of reference line 5 Move the cursor to the second point on the line and select it The deskew will take place based on the reference line you indicated You will see a message De skewing XX XXXXXX degrees Do you wish to displace deskewed raster Y lt N gt 6 If the raster is located correctly press RETURN The command will be completed If you wish to move the deskewed raster type Y Base point or displacement There are two ways to respond You can either select the first of two points that will show the move
152. GENCTL for more information Regen When Switching Layouts Regenerates the drawing each time you switch tabs Cache Model Tab and Last Layout For the Model tab and the last layout made current saves the display list to memory and suppresses regenerations when you switch between the two tabs For all other layouts regenerations still occur when you switch to those tabs Cache Model Tab and All Layouts Regenerates the drawing the first time you switch to each tab For the remainder of the drawing session the display list is saved to memory and regenerations are suppressed when you switch to those tabs dbConnect Options Controls options that relate to database connectivity Store Links Index in Drawing File Stores the database index in the drawing file Select this option to enhance performance during Link Select operations Clear this option to decrease drawing file size and to enhance the opening process for drawings with database information 221 Open Tables in Read Only Mode Specifies whether to open database tables in Read only mode in the drawing file General Options Controls general options that relate to system settings Single Drawing Compatibility Mode Limits the program to one open drawing at a time If you clear this option you can open multiple drawings at once If multiple drawings are open this option cannot be turned on until the additional drawings are closed SDI system variable Display OLE Text Size
153. GTXImage CAD Series Version 14 GTX Corporation Rev 02 11 Copyright Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in this document please report them to us in writing GTX does not warrant that this document is error free and is not liable for errors in this document or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this document This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright law All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of GTX THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF DESIGN MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE IN NO EVENT SHALL GTX BE LIABLE FOR ANY ACTUAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE GTX GTXRaster CAD and Intelligent Paper to CAD Solutions are registered trademarks of GTX Corporation Intelligent Object Picking
154. GTXVClean menu aid in req e up ce after conversion from raster For more information on each command refer to the light blue backed icons in the Command Reference section VERO DRESS Snapping to Raster GTXImage CAD provides many transparent raster snap methods that help you select points precisely within raster images But these raster ES a E raster or vector CAD entities as well Raster AutoSnap The GTXImage CAD also has an AutoSnap feature in which a ToolTip appears to indicate the type of raster snap being employed The GTX command gAUTOSNAP controls whether AutoSnap will work within an image Refer to the gaUTOSNAP command reference for more information Es x Z 1 eet OXER 24 Saving Images The GTXImage CAD Series provides several ways of saving modified images In addition to saving DWG files GTXImage CAD s SAVE command will also save any changed images The gSAVE command lets you change the filename and image name of an image SAVE Saves DWG and any modified images SAVE AS Allows saving in DWG DXF or DWF and any modified images GSAVE m QUIT or EXIT When quitting GTXImage CAD unsaved images can be saved After which the DWG is prompted to be saved GTXImage CAD Series Performance Factors Saves the current image Because raster images can be so large certain operating parameters affect system performance In Minimum Requirements we described the m
155. ILEMODE system variable to 1 and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing Once you ve completed your drawing you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or between the Model tab and a layout tab use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable to control how the display list is updated MOVE Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction 0 Modify toolbar O Modify menu Move Shortcut menu Select the objects to move and right click in the drawing area Click Move E command line move Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish 196 Specify base point or Displacement lt Displacement gt Specify a base point or enter d Specify second point or lt use first point as displacement gt Specify a point or press ENTER The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point prompt the first point is interpreted as a relative X Y Z displacement For example if you specify 2 3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt the objects move 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position Displacement Specify displacement lt ast value gt Enter coordinates to represent a vector The coordinat
156. If not you will get an error message 426 Type Menu Availability GCRO orGCROP GTX Enhance gt Crop GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon ul gCROP Deletes all raster data outside of a specified rectangular window For instance you may use it to get rid of dirty edges or an unwanted frame Instructions 1 Select the gCROP command Select first corner of window 2 Select a point for one corner of the window Select opposite corner of window 3 A rectangular window will rubber band from the first point selected Position it to include all the raster data you want to save Press SELECT to select the point Note If your drawing is skewed or rotated use gDESKEW first To reduce the raster limits by eliminating the outside area use gRESIZE or use the gCUT command to create a new file The raster data outside the window will disappear The raster limits stay the same 427 gCTEXT Type Meu Availability GCTEXT GTX Edit gt Change text GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS 113 The change text feature begins by framing an area of the current raster image that contains raster text data that is to be replaced by new rastertext The framed area is defined by a baseline at any orientation angleand the replacement raster text will be drawn at that angle The replacement text is entered with the aid of the Text Formatting control Icon Instructions 1 Select insert point of baseline The point cho
157. If you press ENTER without specifying a point the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line arc or polyline Specify second point of arc or CEnter End Second Point Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc s circumference The first point is the start point 1 The third point is the endpoint 3 The second point 2 is a point on the circumference of the arc Specify end point of arc Specify a point 3 2 Va You can specify a three point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise 3 Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part Specify center point of arc Specify end point of arc or Angle chord Length End Point Using the center point 2 draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the third point 3 The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point as shown in the illustration Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 using a center point 2 with a specified included angle If the angle is negative a clockwise arc is drawn Specify included angle Specify an angle included angle i 2 Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and e
158. Instructions Select line startpoint Select the endpoint of the line you wish to join with another line Select object Select the first line whose endpoint you selected Select object Continue selecting lines until all lines you wish to join have been selected Press RETURN All selected lines are merged into one line 453 Availability GLN or GLINE GTX RASTER Edit gt Raster Line GTXlmage CAD GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon Y gLINE draws a raster line in the current raster image Instructions From point Select or type the first endpoint To point Select or type the other endpoint The command continues allowing you to continue entering point coordinates To point Note If there is no active image gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gLINE If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which the raster line can be drawn Enter the endpoint for the next line or press RETURN to end the command 454 gLINE2 Availability GLINE2 GTX Edit gt Draw Line2 All Products q GLINE2 draws multiple raster lines in the current raster image Instructions Command gline2 Line width lt 0 010 gt Box Pick From point Select or type the first endpoint To point Select or type the other endpoint From point Select or type the second endpoint To point Select or type the other endpoint The command continues allowing you to continu
159. MOMODE is set to NO To resolve this acquire a HASP hardware key or Flex software license from GTX or set the DEMOMODE variable to YES 3 The product version and DEMO mode status may be manually altered by editing variable values in the GTXRAST CFG file This file is to be found in the main GTX Image CAD program folder Configure GTXImage CAD Series V14 0 Do you want to install a Licensed or Demonstration version of the product Unicensed program installs will revert to basic demonstration mode Licensing Mode Software Hardware Demonstartion Select the product level of GTXimage CAD Series V14 0 you have purchased and wish to install f Product Level Image CAD PLUS image CAD Select the preferred drawing units you wish to use Drawing Unts C Metric metres milimetres imperial feet nches Cancel Help Finish 15 SETUP will also prompt you for the Product Level the actual name of the software you purchased and the required Drawing Units you wish to work in Select the appropriate product level name and drawing units then select Next This sets the ProductLevel configuration parameter and the DrawingUnits 1Inch or 1mm 1 configuration parameter in gtxrast cfg Note If you select the wrong product level then your software will not run correctly Be sure to enter the correct product name GTXImage CAD or GTXImage CAD PLUS Readme README PDF contains any changes to
160. More Less Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off When you choose More additional options are displayed and the name of this button changes to Less Object Base Point Specifies a new reference base point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed To construct a polar array ARRAY determines the distance from the array s center point to a reference base point on the last object selected The point used depends on the type of object as shown in the following table Object type Default base point Arc circle ellipse Center point Donut line polyline 3D polyline ray spline Starting point Construction lines Midpoint Set to Object s Default Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object To manually set the base point clear this option Base Point Sets anew X and Y base point coordinate Choose Pick Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and specify a point After you specify a point the Array dialog box is redisplayed Note To avoid unexpected results set the base point manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not want to rotate the objects Select Objects 50 Select Objects Specifies the objects used to construct the array You can select objects before or after the Array dialog box is displayed To select objects when the Array di
161. OLE Controls the display of raster images and OLE objects when you use Realtime PAN and ZOOM Clear this option to optimize performance If dragging display is turned on and you select Pan and Zoom with Raster and OLE a copy of the object moves with the cursor as you reposition the original Dragging display controls whether an outline of the object is displayed while you drag it The DRAGMODE system variable controls dragging display RTDISPLAY system variable Highlight Raster Image Frame Only 214 Controls the display of raster images during selection If this option is selected only the frame of the raster image is highlighted when selected Select this option to optimize performance IMAGEHLT system variable Apply Solid Fill Displays solid fills in objects You must regenerate the drawing for this setting to take effect This setting is saved in the drawing Clear this option to optimize performance FILLMODE system variable Objects affected by FILL include hatches including solid fill two dimensional solids wide polylines multilines and traces Show Text Boundary Frame Only Displays the frames for text objects instead of displaying the text objects After you select or clear this option you must use REGEN to update the display This setting is saved in the drawing Select this option to optimize performance QTEXTMODE system variable Show Silhouettes in Wireframe Controls whether silhouette curves of 3D solid objec
162. PARENCY Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque FJ k 0 Reference toolbar 0 Modify menu Object Image Transparency Shortcut menu Select an image right click in the drawing area and click Image Transparency ES Command line transparency Select image s Enter transparency mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER 333 On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible Note The PALETTEOPAQUE system variable controls whether dockable windows can be made transparent TREESTAT Displays information about the drawing s current spatial index Command line treestat or treestat for transparent use The program indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space The result is called a spatial index The spatial index is tree structured and has branching nodes to which objects are attached The index has two major branches The paper space branch is called a quad tree and treats objects as two dimensional The model space branch is called an oct tree and treats objects as either two or three dimensional The model space branch can also be changed to a quad tree when you are working on two dimensional drawings TREESTAT displays information about each branch The most important information is in the first two lines of the report number of nodes numb
163. PT system variable Drafting Tooltip Appearance Displays the Tooltip Appearance dialog box 118 DSVIEWER Opens the Aerial View window View menu Aerial View EE Command line dsviewer The Aerial View window is displayed Displays the entire drawing the current view is marked with a wide outline box View Menu Aerial View Window Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window the Zoom Out menu option and button are unavailable When the current view nearly fills the Aerial View window the Zoom In menu option and button are unavailable If both of these conditions exist at the same time such as after using ZOOM Extents both options are unavailable All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right clicking in the Aerial View window Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming in by a factor of 2 centered on the current view box Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2 centered on the current view box Global Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the Aerial View window Options Menu Aerial View Window Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the drawing All
164. Produces a high quality display of the image Draft Produces a lower quality display of the image IMPORT Imports files in various formats 0 Insert toolbar ap E Command line import The Import File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed In Files of Type select the format type to import In File Name select the file to import The file is imported into the drawing The following input types are available WMF Windows metafile see WMFIN SAT ACIS solid object file see ACISIN 3DS 3D Studio file see 3DSIN For the WMF file type choosing Options from the Tools menu in this dialog box displays the WMF In Options dialog box You can display this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS If FILEDIA 0 the following prompt is displayed Enter import file name Enter path and file name 154 INSERT Places a drawing or named block into the current drawing e Insert toolbar e Insert menu Block EE Command line insert The Insert dialog box is displayed If you enter insert at the Command prompt INSERT displays prompts on the command line Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the default block for subsequent uses of INSERT The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS Name Specifies the name of a block to insert or the name of a file to inser
165. ROTATE and gSMOOTH 8 Place new border and title block if needed 5 Save the file SAVE gSAVE gCUT Please visit the following link to access the Tutorials http Awww gtx com documents TutorialsGTXRasterCADV12 pdf 29 General Command Reference General Information The Command Reference a comprehensive guide to the GTXlmage CAD commands lists all commands in alphabetical order In addition to the command listings the Command Reference covers several topics in the appendixes the GTXImage CAD Series configuration file system variables dimension variables supported raster formats as well as other useful information For detailed information on Raster specific functionality of GTXIlmage CAD please refer to the Raster Command Reference in the next section Using GTXImage CAD Series Documentation In addition to this Command Reference several other resources are available to help you learn and use GTXImage CAD both online and in print You can access it from the Help menu Note For the latest documentation corrections and additions refer to the Readme doc file Using This Reference The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands command options and system variables The explanations reflect the default GTXImage CAD system variable settings and the default prototype drawing If you change system variable settings the prompts on your screen might differ from what you see here Executing Comm
166. Replaces the current word with the word in the Suggestions box Change All 304 Replaces the current word in all selected text objects Add Adds the current word to the current custom dictionary The maximum word length is 63 characters Lookup Lists words similar to the word selected in Suggestions Change Dictionaries Displays the Change Dictionaries dialog box Context Displays the phrase in which the current word was found SPLINE Fits a smooth curve to a sequence of points within a specified tolerance 0 Draw toolbar 0 Draw menu Spline Command line spline Specify first point or Object Specify a point or enter o 305 First Point Creates a spline using points you specify using NURBS nonuniform rational B splines mathematics Specify next point Specify a point Enter points until you have defined the spline curve After you enter two points the following prompt is displayed Specify next point or Close Fit Tolerance lt Start tangent gt Specify a point enter an option or pressENTER AN Next Point Continuing to enter points adds additional spline curve segments until you press ENTER Enter undo to remove the last point specified Once you press ENTER you are prompted to specify the start tangent for the spline curve Close Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as co incident with the first and making it tangent to the joint Specify tangent Specify a point or pressEN
167. SC Dimensioning Mode Commands 80 Dimensioning Mode Commands The following commands are available at the DIM prompt Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt You can also press ESC to exit Dimensioning mode Changes the current text style The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands For information about these Dimensioning mode commands see the equivalent AutoCAD command Dimensioning mode Equivalent command command ALIGNED DIMALIGNED BASELINE DIMBASELINE CONTINUE DIMCONTINUE HOMETEXT DIMEDIT Home LEADER LEADER OBLIQUE DIMEDIT Oblique OVERRIDE DIMOVERRIDE RESTORE DIMSTYLE Restore 81 DIMSTYLE Save DIMTEDIT UPDATE DIMSTYLE Apply VERTICAL DIMLINEAR Vertical DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension e Dimension toolbar 0 Dimension menu Aligned EE Command line dimaligned Specify first extension line origin Or lt select object gt Specify a point for manual extension lines or pressENTERfor automatic extension lines After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines the following prompt is displayed Specify dimension line location Or Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option Extension Line Origin Extension Line Origin Specifies the first extension line origin 1 You are prompted to specify the second one Specify second extension line origin Specify
168. SE 274 PSETUPIN 274 PSPACE 274 PURGE 275 QDIM 276 QLEADER 277 QSAVE 278 QSELECT 279 QTEXT 280 QUICKCALC 280 QUIT 280 Raster files Formats 520 524 Information gINFO 450 Raster Files Limits 450 Raster Formats Saving 479 Raster limits gRESIZE 474 Raster snap tangent 396 Raster snaps 396 center 396 edge 396 end 396 intersection 396 List 396 mid arc 396 midpoint 396 near 396 none 396 perpendicular to arc 396 Running 396 RAY 281 Recognition Files Training 503 RECOVER 281 RECTANG 282 REDO 283 REDRAW 284 REDRAWALL 284 REFCLOSE 284 REFEDIT 285 Reflecting raster gMIRROR 456 gREFLECT 472 REFSET 287 REGEN 288 REGENALL 288 REGENAUTO 288 REGION 289 REINIT 289 RENAME 290 Resizing images gRESIZE 474 541 Resolution 450 Maximum Pixels 426 RESUME 290 ROTATE 290 Rotating raster gDESKEW 435 gROTATE 475 gTURN 505 RSCRIPT 291 Rubber sheeting gWARP 508 SAVE 291 SAVEAS 292 Saving raster gCUT 433 gSAVE 479 SCALE 294 SCALETEXT 295 Scaling raster gSCALE 481 SCRIPT 296 SELECT 296 SETVAR 299 SHAPE 300 SKETCH 300 Smoothing raster gSMOOTH 489 SNAP 302 Snapping See raster snaps 396 Speckle removal gSPECKL 492 494 SPELL 304 SPLINE 305 SPLINEDIT 308 STATUS 314 STRETCH 316 Stretching raster geometry gCHANGE 415 STYLE 316 STYLESMANAGER 319 SYSWINDOWS 323 TEXT 324 TEXTSCR 328 TIME 329 Ti
169. Select objects CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard removing them from the drawing You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC CUTCLIP does not create OLE link information DDEDIT Edits single line text dimension text attribute definitions and feature control frames Eo Text toolbar 0 Modify menu Object W Text Edit Pointing device Double click a text object Shortcut menu Select a text object right click in the drawing area and click Edit EE Command line ddedit Select an annotation object Or Undo Displays the appropriate editing method for the type of text you select 77 Text created using TEXT or DTEXT displays the In Place Text Editor without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler Right click to display options Text created using MTEXT displays the In Place Text Editor Attribute definitions not part of a block definition display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to end the command Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value You can use this option immediately after editing DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects Format menu Point Style Command line ddptype or ddptype for transparent use The Point Style dialo
170. Source Hatch Origin Uses the hatch origin of the source hatch HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or fill 142 0 Modify Il toolbar 0 Modify menu Object Hatch Shortcut menu Select a hatch object to edit and right click in the drawing area Click Hatch Edit Command line hatchedit Select hatch object Use an object selection method The Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed If you enter hatchedit at the Command prompt HATCHEDIT displays prompts on the command line Modifies the characteristics of an existing hatch or fill The Hatch Edit dialog box displays the current properties of the selected hatch or fill object You can modify only the properties in the Hatch Edit dialog box that are available Hatch Tab Modifies the hatch pattern properties For information about these options see the Hatch tab in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Gradient Tab Modifies the gradient fill properties For information about these options see the Gradient tab in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box More Options Modifies the Inherit Options setting that is associated with Inherit Properties All other options are not available For more information see Inherit Properties in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill For more information see the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Options Removes hatch associativity separates a single hatch object that has several separ
171. TER Specify a point to define the tangent vector or use the Tangent and Perpendicular object snap modes to make the spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects A W langent clased spline Fit Tolerance Changes the tolerance for fitting of the current spline curve The spline curve is redefined so that it fits through the existing points according to the new tolerance You can repeatedly change the fit tolerance but doing so changes the fit tolerance for all the control points regardless of the control point that is selected Specify fit tolerance lt current gt Enter a value or pressENTER If you set the tolerance to 0 the spline curve passes through the fit points Entering a tolerance greater than 0 allows the spline curve to pass through the fit points within the specified tolerance SPLINE returns to the previous prompt 306 WA zero tolerance A piike omer Start Tangent Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the spline curve Specify start tangent Specify a point or pressENTER The Specify Start Tangent prompt specifies the tangency of the spline curve at the first point Specify end tangent Specify a point or press ENTER first tangent point The Specify End Tangent prompt specifies the tangency of the spline curve at the last point last tangent point If you specify tangency at both endpoints of the spline you can enter a point or use the Tangent and Perpendicular object sna
172. VIEW ABOUT Displays information about AutoCAD Help menu About EE Command line about or about for transparent use Copyright information and product information is displayed Product information includes the version number and service pack serial number license type and expiration date and the text of the license agreement You can save the product information as a text file ADCCLOSE Closes DesignCenter EE Command line adeclose Closes the DesignCenter window ADCENTER 0 Standard toolbar 0 Tools menu DesignCenter EE Command line adcenter Browses finds and previews content and inserts content which includes blocks hatches and external references xrefs Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and access options When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab the following two panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content Content Area DesignCenter 35 Content Area DesignCenter Displays the content of the container currently selected in the tree view A container is a network computer disk folder file or web address URL containing information accessible by DesignCenter Depending on the container selected in tree view the content area typically displays the following Folders containing drawings or other files Drawings e Named objects contained in drawings named objects include blocks xrefs layouts layers
173. When finished the command deletes the highlighted raster Instructions The image automatically deskews and noise is highlighted Select Raster lt WINDOW gt Add or remove raster using standard IOP methods When done adding and removing raster press RETURN 419 gCLINE Type ___ Menu Avaailabiility GCLINE GTX Edit gt Change Line GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon a The gCLINE command stretches raster lines Change the length and orientation of a line by moving one endpoint This command also merges or smoothes fragmented and irregular lines To smooth choose the raster entity and redraw it without changing its geometry Line selection requires 3 point selection Command _gcline Select one end of reference line point 1 Select other end of reference line point 2 the selection is highlighted Select new endpoint point 3 Select one end of reference line The command is ready for a second line selection Press the return key or escape key to terminate the command 420 gCONCEN Type Menu Availability gCONCEN or GCONC GTX Vector Clean gt Concen GTXImage CAD PLUS gCONCEN moves circles and arcs to be concentric about a location or about the centerpoint of a specified circle or arc Icon Instructions Select Objects 1 Select one or more circles or arcs Pick point lt Select circle arc gt 2 Select another arc or circle about which the previously selected objects shoul
174. Width Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately follows the marked vertex Specify starting width for next segment lt current gt Specify a point enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width for next segment lt starting width gt Specify a point enter a value or press ENTER You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width YA MA gt marked vertex segment widih changed Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode Fit 243 Creates an arc fit polyline a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify L Qo original Fit curve Spline Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points or frame of a curve approximating a B spline This curve called a spline fit polyline passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass through them The more control points you specify in a particular part of the frame the more pull they exert on the curve Quadratic and cubic spline fit polylines can be generated i fy E La i ee gt wd before Spline after Spline Spline fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit option Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point Both of these curves are differen
175. Windows version of GTX Rastrans is the executable i E Rastrans exe located in the GTX directory F Use Original DPI Rastrans main screen Y resolution 1200 Upon running Rastrans the main screen will appear lay a Add Files Remove Files Quit The left side of the Rastrans main screen contains the Input Files List showing all the raster files to be translated Input Files List This list box displays the files to be batch translated to the selected output file format 520 Add Files Select to add raster files to the Input Files List Select any or all files to be translated into the Output File Format Multiple files can be selected by holding Shift or Control while using the left mouse button to pick more than one file at a time Remove Files Removes files from the Input Files List About RASTRANS Displays copyright information Output File Directory Specifies output directory for translated files Selecting Use Input File Directory sends output to the same directory as the source files Output File Format Displays the file format to which input files are to be translated Selecting Print to Your Printer sends the output directly to the current Windows system printer Scale may need to be adjusted to fit a drawing DPI Use Original DPI sets resulting raster output at the same DPI as the input file New DPI specifies an override dpi for output files Resolution Use Original Re
176. a e A RE A a E EAE Aa EE enea 364 WMFOUT seisoin ionii riaki aiino ESE RE A E E EEE AS aA E Es 364 XATTACH nuenian AE NA 365 XBIND icasi i n ei p E a are E ESEE WE A E E EEE dr leida 367 XOLI Pidda a a ses bse e a ia ile E ola dire ia actas 367 XEINE ria E EE T EE E O T TE OR RRE R 369 XPLODE e aE E TEE aren tis EEA RE E E E ERREN e 372 AREA EEO E ET A A RR OREN 374 LO Mist A A R A RE Te 376 RASTER COMMAND REFERENCE qu sssssssssssssesesecessssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssessssssssesesesesesesssesesssesees 380 COMMAND OVERVIEW siecia caretas eeraa sacs cevsaweacadsdeuscascawea OAE EEEE aan de DELE cassava cdasceva deseadas sevens 380 RASTER PICKING OPTIONS neueren ei iian a a ES EEEN EEEN caves EEN caves cavieseasda E 386 WORKING WITH GTX S INTELLIGENT OBJECT PICKING IOP S cccccccescesseseessessesseeeeeseesenseeseesecsecsenaes 388 RASTER OBJECT SNAPPING OPTIONS ceccccssessssesseseeceseeseeceneesecceneseseensesesceneesessenseseseeneesecseneeseesensersns 396 COMMAND DEFINITIONS orci cosccvise das stadcosiesa cag Eai coves a EAS AEEA EARS coven sua dag ARS ca edea dag snes CEEE aiii 397 gACTIVE Active lmag sssssusnnnonniinranivi nonin daa EE EENES TN NEE onak 397 GADE SKEW coi a aad eae E r A TE NE eS 398 DAR OE EE E T A ETE RCs E E E 399 GARRAN sain n ea a a aa a error ren e teeter ee 400 OAT aN E a EEE T ET E T O 402 GAUTOCLEAN co dida 405 OBITONAL e e las tte cic Mn cia hate ates eto e LE 406 SO A A EN 407 JCAEIK ES 2 cn ca
177. a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex Specify location for new vertex Specify a point 1 marked vertex 7 Bo before Insert after Insert Move Moves the marked vertex Specify new location for marked vertex Specify a point 1 marked vertex A before Move after Move Regen Regenerates the polyline before Regen after Regen Straighten 242 Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0 Enter an option Next Previous Go eXit lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER x before Straighten after Straighten Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select replaces them with single straight line segments and returns to Edit Vertex mode If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker the segment following that vertex is straightened if it is an arc Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode Tangent HS A i A Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve fitting The following prompt is displayed Specify direction of vertex tangent Specify a point or enter an angle
178. a point 2 Object Selection Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object Select object to dimension For polylines and other explodable objects only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference If you select a line or an arc its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes see DIMSTYLE This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable offset from origin res lA stored in DIMEZO object selected dimension line location designated If you select a circle the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines After you specify the location the DIMALIGNED command ends Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets lt gt To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement enter the prefix or suffix
179. a polyline with only the fit spline which is consistent with fit curves where the curve fitting is permanent e EXPLODE deletes the frame and generates lines and arcs to approximate the spline fit polyline OFFSET generates a polyline with only the fit spline which is consistent with its behavior with fit curves e DIVIDE MEASURE and the Object option of AREA and HATCH see only the fit spline not the frame 244 STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is stretched The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original and any added polylines Once the Join operation is complete you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the frame of the spline whether visible or not The Break option discards the spline The Insert Move Straighten and Width options automatically refit the spline The Tangent option has no effect on splines Object snap uses only the spline fit curve itself not the frame If you want to snap to the frame control points use PEDIT to recall the polyline frame first The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approximated Setting SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B spline Setting SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a cubic B spline pL PA quadratic B spline cubic B splin
180. aa diia 138 PHATE CHE DI ua dd dada ada 142 HELP ai dista 144 HAYRERLINK a ea E E RAE N cus bestuverapets dhussetsde evan E RE N 144 HAYPERLINKOPTION Sucia A E E IRT E N RE TR 145 Ie ests Sop EE E E E E E S E E 145 IMAGE cuarta E AE R Oia NA OEN E 145 IMAGEATTAC varita N E A TOI ONR a 149 IMAGEADIUS T artist ann r E E E A O I E ANA NR 151 IMAG EGE Pin n AE AET E N A ENNE 152 IMAGEFRAME siie Aa RR TRT EE AAE E REE IR E RE 153 IMAG EQUALITY onai E TEE EE A AA E A E A AE TE 154 IMPOR Tis cinc A R TTE OEE E RET RE A EE 154 INSER Tesei e AAE A TA T EEO TEAOR TEE EE RE 155 INSERT OBJ itii e SA RTTE E A EET EA OT OAIR AE i toda 156 ISOPLANE goaita e aea A TA E AT EE TTE NOTAE T EE E 157 JPGOUT ie EN OAIE E EE 158 JUSTIFY TEXT oe E T E AT EEEO TAE E NETA AEE A EE TRE 158 LAYER soviet E TE OAE A EERE ET IEEE NE TREE 159 LAYOUT act ahi E aR A E EAEE E ET TE E E TE EEE 165 CAYO UTW IZARD o Pu i AEE ERA E EE ETE IEEE E E 166 LEADER seson irin a tE Ee iE EEIE A E EEN TE EAEE 166 LENGTHEN escorias E IN EE E E E E A ARET 169 Music AA A RER 171 E N rated ria EE A EE E E E senate 171 LINETYPE cocina sa 172 A TT NO ANA 174 LOAD music o 174 LOGFILE O EEcuviinranit e AEREE E E EE teownws A AE ries TOREA 175 LOGFILEON serisinin itero oa 175 ETSGALE vostre IA ra E E EE iia 175 LWElGA Disaster sites Gbspaebenge E EEEE EEES 175 MATCHPRO Piscina tea A Adi ses 177 MEASURE Sosa Ad qa 178 A SN 179 MINSERT coc cociic na adri oi dali 180 MIRROR sonia menia omien h ar
181. age CAD Options 90 Rotate the raster data counterclockwise 90 degrees 180 Rotate the raster data counterclockwise 180 degrees 270 Rotate the raster data counterclockwise 270 degrees Instructions 1 Select gTURN Specify rotation angle lt 90 gt 180 270 2 Enter the angle or press RETURN for the default The image raster data is rotated 505 gVECTOR Availability GV or GVECTOR GTX Convert Draw Vectors GTXlmage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon a Function gVECTOR traces raster with lines arcs or circles like gTRACE Unlike gTRACE gVECTOR erases originating raster data 506 gVSKEW Availability GVS or GVSKEW GTX Vector Clean Skewline GTXImage CAD PLUS p Icon gVSKEW straightens skewed lines so they become orthogonal at a 0 or 90 degree angle Instructions Select objects Select lines to deskew Enter tolerance angle 1 10 lt 1 00 gt Enter the degrees of tolerance for deskewing lines Lines within that tolerance of 0 or 90 degrees are straightened 507 gWARP 3 Availability GW or GTX Enhance Warp GTXImage CAD GWARP GTXlmage CAD PLUS m Icon gWARP corrects distortion in a raster image by stretching the image data between source and destination points Options The Image Warp dialog establishes warp source and destination point pairs These point pairs define the way the image is to be stretched Add Point Pairs creates one pair at a time Generate Grid
182. ailable if the Control option has turned off or limited the UNDO feature Enter UNDO Auto mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or press ENTER Control Limits or turns off UNDO Enter an UNDO control option Al None One Combine lt All gt Enter an option or press ENTER All Turns on the full UNDO command None Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any UNDO command information saved earlier in the editing session The Undo button on the Standard toolbar is unavailable The Auto Begin and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect If you attempt to use UNDO while it is turned off the following prompt is displayed Enter an UNDO control option All None One lt All gt One Limits UNDO to a single operation The Auto Begin and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect The main prompt for the UNDO command changes to show that only a Control option or a single step of the UNDO command is available when the One option is in effect Control lt 1 gt If you enter C the previous prompt is displayed Enter an UNDO control option All None One lt All gt Combine Controls whether multiple consecutive zoom and pan commands are combined as a single operation for undo and redo operations Combine zoom and pan operations Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y orn or press ENTER Begin End 350 Begin End Groups a sequence of actions into a set After you enter the Begin
183. al references into the drawing No Loads all external references into the drawing 234 View Loads the geometry from the specified view into the current drawing Enter view to load or lt Extents gt Enter a view name enter or press ENTERto load the Extents view View to Load Loads the geometry from the specified view into the partially open drawing Enter layers to load or lt none gt Enter a layer name enter or press ENTER Layers to Load Loads geometry from the layer or layers into the current drawing To load geometry from multiple layers into the drawing use a comma between layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter yes no external references are loaded into the drawing If you enter no all external references are loaded into the drawing List Layers Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing Enter one or more layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y orn or press ENTER If you enter yes no external references are loaded into the drawing If you enter no all external references are loaded into the drawing List Views Displays a l
184. ale the image entities using the Scale command For example when creating a new image you cannot make a raster image equivalent to a piece of paper the size of a city block Instead create a raster image the size of a large sheet of paper E or AO size Then scale the image entity with the Scale command This way you can avoid attempting to create oversized raster images Cropping Raster Data Two commands are useful for erasing raster outside a rectangular area gCROP erases raster data outside a rectangular box The raster image stays the same size Reo oe 2 gRESIZE removes the portion of the raster image outside a selected box Raster data outside this box is erased because the raster image no longer occupies that space iaa comodo Modifying Images gACTIVE loads the image into the GTX editor making it the current image for editing If there is no active image raster editing commands will invoke gACTIVE before proceeding When there are multiple images attached gACTIVE command will require you to select the image to prepare If there is only one image attached in GTXImage CAD gACTIVE will automatically prepare it gINACTIVE releases the image recovering memory 40 ia BORO 21 Cutting and Pasting Raster The GTXImage CAD Series displays raster image entities which can be attached at any scale or orientation Because of this the gCUT and gPASTE commands may behave differently than you expect
185. alog box is displayed choose Select Objects The dialog box temporarily closes When you finish selecting objects press ENTER The Array dialog box is redisplayed and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button Note If you select multiple objects the base point of the last selected object is used to construct the i o lt Preview Area Preview Area Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the dialog box The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to another field after changing a setting Preview Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing EE Command line attachurl Enter hyperlink insert option Area Object lt Object gt Enter a or press ENTER o o Creates the URLLAYER layer draws a polyline on that layer and attaches a URL to the polyline First corner Click in the drawing to indicate the lower left corner of the area Other corner Click to indicate the upper right corner of the area Enter hyperlink lt current drawing gt Enter a URL The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to URLLAYER The default color is red When you move the cursor over the area in the drawing the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL i
186. amed views and orthographic views The View dialog box includes the following tabs e Named Views e Orthographic and Isometric Views Named Views Tab View Dialog Box 353 Named Views Tab View Dialog Box Creates sets renames modifies and deletes named views Current View Displays the name of the current view When the View dialog box is first displayed it lists the current view as CURRENT View Names Lists the named views in the current drawing and the information that is stored with each named view A pointer indicates the current named view The following information is stored with a named view Category The category in which the named view is listed on the View List tab in the Sheet Set Manager Location The Model tab or the name of the layout tab on which the named view was saved VP Whether the named view is associated with a viewport on a sheet in a sheet set Layers Whether layer visibility settings are saved with the named view UCS The name of the user coordinate system UCS that is saved with the named view Perspective Whether the named view is a perspective view Set Current Restores the selected named view You can also restore a named view by double clicking its name in the list or by right clicking its name and clicking Set Current on the shortcut menu New Displays the New View dialog box Update Layers Updates the layer information saved with the selected named v
187. an Displays the pan cursor a hand cursor that you can use to pan the preview image Hold down the pick button and drag the cursor in any direction The pan cursor stays active until you click another option on the shortcut menu 5 pan cursor Zoom Displays the zoom cursor a magnifying glass cursor that you can use to enlarge or reduce the preview image To enlarge the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the top of the screen To reduce the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of the screen Or Zoom cursor Zoom Window Zooms to display a specified window Zoom Window works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor Zoom Original Restores the initial full sheet preview Zoom Original works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects 0 Standard toolbar Er O Tools menu Properties Shortcut menu Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify right click in the drawing area and click Properties pe Pointing Device Double click most objects 272 ES Command line properties The Properties palette is displayed The Properties palette lists properties of the selected object or set of objects You can also view or modify properties of third party application objects that are based on AutoCAD application programming interface API standards There are eight general properties common t
188. ance is set to a correct value T No extend Erase Deletes selected objects This option provides a convenient method to erase unneeded objects without leaving the TRIM command Select objects to erase or lt exit gt Use an object selection method and press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Undo Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM 338 U Reverses the most recent operation e Standard toolbar Shortcut menu With no commands active and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and click Undo E Command line u You can enter U as many times as you wish backing up one step at a time until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session When an operation cannot be undone the command name is displayed but no action is performed Operations external to the current drawing such as plotting or writing to a file cannot be undone If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command their effects are undone along with the effects of the main command You can also press CTRL Z to undo The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1 UCS Manages user coordinate systems e UCS toolbar 0 Tools menu New UCS EE Command line ucs Enter an option New Move orthoGraphic Prev Restore Save Del Apply World lt World gt 339 New Defines a new coordinate system by one of six methods Specify origin of new UCS or ZAxis 3point OBject Face View X Y
189. and corner indicate that they are colors that have already been selected on another image To help you select the correct colors amp information the dialog automatically displays a view of the selected data on that layer When you have correctly assigned the colors to your respective images layers select the Apply Separation button to create the new binary images 485 Notes gREDUCE only works if you have a color or greyscale image loaded Anti Aliasing Some color images are scanned with the anti aliasing option turned on Anti aliasng can enhance the quality of some images particularly photographs However it is not ideal for images with solid fill color as It tends to mix colors to achieve a more blurred image Whilst the gSEPARATE command will work with anti aliased images the results may not be as good as required As such we recommend that if possible images be scanned with anti aliasing turned off 486 gSETLAY Availability gSETLAY GTX Vector Clean gt Set Layer GTXImage CAD PLUS gSL Icon Z gSETLAY sets the current layer to that of a specified entity Instructions Dialog lt Select object gt 1 Select an object whose layer you wish to make current or type D to use the dialog Select Object The selected objec s layer becomes current The following dialog appears Select the layer you wish to make current and press OK or select New Layer Pressing OK makes the selected layer current
190. and endpoint were the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points the Open option returns the spline to its original state The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity smoothness If the spline was open its start point and endpoint were not the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous where the start point and endpoint meet this option returns the spline to its original open state and removes tangent continuity Move Vertex 311 Move Vertex Relocates a spline s control vertices and purges the fit points Specify new location or Next Previous Select Point eXit lt N gt Specify a point enter an option or pressENTER New Location Moves the selected point to the new location you specify After you specify a new location for the selected point SPLINEDIT recalculates and displays the spline with a new set of control points Next Moves selection to the next point The point marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the spline even if the spline is closed Previous Moves selection to the previous point The point marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the spline even if the spline is closed Select Point Selects a point from the set of control points Specify fit point lt exit gt Specify a point or pressENTER Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt 312 Refine Fine tunes a
191. and line resume or resume for transparent use You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing ESC or BACKSPACE Any error encountered while processing input from a script file causes the script to be suspended If a script is suspended while the program is active you can use RESUME to continue the script ROTATE Revolves objects around a base point 290 0 Modify toolbar 0 Modify menu Rotate Shortcut menu Select the objects to rotate and right click in the drawing area Click Rotate E Command line rotate Current positive angle in UCS ANGDIR current ANGBASE current Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point Specify a point Specify rotation angle or Copy Reference Enter an angle specify a point enter c or enter r Determines how far an object rotates around the base point The axis of rotation passes through the specified base point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS Creates a copy of the selected objects for rotation Rotates objects from a specified angle to a new absolute angle Specify the reference angle lt ast reference angle gt Specify an angle by entering a value or by specifying two points Specify the new angle or Points lt ast new angle gt Specify the new absolute angle by entering a value or by specifying two points When you rotate a viewport object the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the e
192. and redraw it without changing its geometry Circle selection requires 4 point selection Command _gccircle Select point on circumference of circle point 1 Select second point for circle point 2 Select third point for circle point 3 the selection is highlighted Current radius is Enter circle radius point 4 or a numeric value may be typed Select point on circumference of circle The command is ready for a second circle selection Press the return key or escape key to terminate the command 412 gCCIRCLE2P Type Menu Availability GCCIRCLE2P GTX Edit gt Change 2P Circle GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon a The gCCIRCLE command stretches raster circles Change the radius of a circle by moving its circumference This command also merges or smoothes fragmented and irregular circles To smooth choose the raster entity and redraw it without changing its geometry 2 point circle selection requires 3 point selection Command _gccircle2p Select point on circumference of circle point 1 Select second point for circle A vector circle is stretched over the raster circle to point 2 The selection is highlighted Current radius is Enter circle radius point 3 or a numeric value may be typed Select point on circumference of circle The command is ready for a second circle selection Press the return key or escape key to terminate the command F E 2 GA 2 Pi Le El i f i 1 lp
193. and spatial indexes are saved with the drawing file Use Spatial Index Controls whether a spatial index is used when partially opening a drawing A spatial index can be used to locate what portion of the drawing is read this minimizes the time required to open the drawing If a drawing does not contain a spatial index this option is unavailable Spatial Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains an index that organizes objects based on their location is space Layer Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a list of the objects that are on each layer A layer index can be used to locate what portion of the drawing is read this minimizes the time required to open the drawing 207 Unload All Xrefs on Open Unloads all external references when opening the drawing Selecting this option enhances the opening process If you partially open a drawing that contains a bound xref only the portion of the xref that is loaded defined by the selected view is bound to the partially open drawing Open Opens the drawing file loading only combined geometry from the selected view and layers OPTIONS 0 Tools menu Options Shortcut menu Right click in the command window or with no commands active and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Options E Command line options Customizes many settings Drawing Icon Signifies that an option is saved with the drawing An option sa
194. ands The process of executing a command begins by starting the command using one of several methods For some commands such as REGEN no further action is required For other commands you must respond by providing additional information or actions in order to complete the command As you work with commands note that right clicking in the drawing area either acts as ENTER or displays a shortcut menu You can control this behavior in the Options dialog box or with the SHORTCUTMENU system variable Starting Commands You can start a command by doing one of the following e Select the command from a menu toolbar status bar or shortcut menu e Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press ENTER or SPACEBAR In this Command Reference near the beginning of each command description is a command access section listing the specific ways you can start that command 30 Standard toolbar View menu Pan Realtime Shortcut menu With no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Pan Command line pan or pan for transparent use The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of the SHORTCUTMENU system variable The instructions in the command access sections assume that you have made the indicated menu available You can exit a command at any time by pressing ESC Using Transparent Commands In many cases you can start a command while using another command
195. angle brackets enter the new dimension text and then choose OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets Rotates dimension text This option is similar to the Angle option of DIMTEDIT Enter text angle Entering O places the text in its default orientation which is determined by the vertical and horizontal text settings on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes See DIMSTYLE The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this orientation Select objects Use an object selection method to select dimension objects e rotated text Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for linear dimensions Linear dimensions are created with extension lines perpendicular to the direction of the dimension line The Oblique option is useful when extension lines conflict with other features of the drawing Select objects Use an object selection method to select dimension objects Enter oblique angle press ENTER for none Enter an angle or pressENTER DIMLINEAR Creates linear dimensions e Dimension menu Linear e Dimension toolbar EE Command line dimlinear Specify first extension line origin Or lt select object gt Specify a point or pressENTERto select an object to dimension After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension the following prompt is displayed Specify dimension l
196. appearance of point objects PDMODE values 0 2 3 and 4 specify a figure to draw through the point A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed 268 x 0 14 4 3 4 Specifying the value 32 64 or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point in addition to the figure drawn through it Ooo 4 RO 32 33 34 35 36 DO RO 64 65 66 oF 65 00 4 B8 0 96 aT 98 99 100 PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures except for PDMODE values 0 and 1 A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size The size of all points is recalculated when the drawing is regenerated After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE the appearance of existing points changes the next time the drawing is regenerated POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline 0 Draw menu Polygon 0 Draw toolbar E Command line polygon Enter number of sides lt current gt Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press ENTER Specify center of polygon or Edge Specify a point 1 or enter e EN ER Fi 4 i A j a A e ah on a a Me a Ma 7 7 r F 4 i 4 j a 4 a a Neg patygons 269 Center of Polygon Defines the center of the polygon Enter an option Inscribed in circle Circumscribed about circle lt current gt Enter i or e or press ENTER Inscribed in Circle Spe
197. appears 503 Text Training dialog 7 If you leave the Training Characters and Orientations check boxes empty gTRAIN will display every character in the training recognition file The characters to be displayed can be limited to certain characters or orientations 8 To limit the search to only certain characters select Training Characters and select Edit List The Text Training Characters dialog appears Text Training Characters dialog 9 Build a list of individual characters to observe with gTRAIN Enter characters separately Search character Note If you enter a multi character string the command will search for raster characters that have been 4 recognized as that string i e you could type the _Delete An_ All unicode U 2205 to search for the unicode text diameter symbol if you had previously trained that gTCONVRT using 10 To limit the search to characters at specific orientations check the Orientations box and select Edit list The Text Orientations dialog appears Text Orientations dialog 11 Add each required orientation to the list then select OK 12 Back in the Text Training dialog verify that the lists are pene correct then select OK The Character Verification dialog appears Character Verification dialog PrE The dialog will present each raster text sample its trained identity and its orientation i e In 104 the raster is displayed in the top half of the dialog an
198. ary of the face or on the edge of the face The face is highlighted and the UCS X axis is aligned with the closest edge of the first face found Select face of solid object Enter an option Next Xflip Yflip lt accept gt 341 Next Locates the UCS on either the adjacent face or the back face of the selected edge Xflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the X axis Yflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the Y axis Accept If you press ENTER accepts the location The prompt repeats until you accept a location View Establishes a new coordinate system with the XY plane perpendicular to your viewing direction parallel to your screen The UCS origin remains unchanged X Y Z Rotates the current UCS about a specified axis Specify rotation angle about n axis lt 0 gt Specify an angle In the prompt nis X Y or Z Enter a positive or negative angle to rotate the UCS The right hand rule determines the positive direction of rotation around the axis before ater You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X Y or Z axis Lik world coordinate rotation about A rotation about Y rotation about 2 system axis 90 axis 90 axis 90 Move 342 Move Redefines a UCS by shifting the origin or changing the Z depth of the current UCS leaving the orientation of its XY plane unchanged Changing the Z depth moves the UCS along its Z axis ina positive or negative directi
199. ate boundaries into individual hatch objects and changes hatch draw order For more information see the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Inherit Properties Assigns the hatch or fill properties from another hatch object For more information see the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the selected object with the specified properties 143 HELP Displays Help 0 Standard toolbar al e Help menu Help E Command line help or or press F1 or help for transparent use To display Help for a menu open the menu and then press F1 Pressing F1 or entering help while a command is active displays Help for that command Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink Insert menu Hyperlink Shortcut menu To edit a hyperlink select an object that contains a hyperlink right click in the drawing area and choose Hyperlink3 Edit Hyperlink E command line hyperlink Select objects Use an object selection method One of the following dialog boxes is displayed Insert Hyperlink dialog box for graphical objects that do not already contain hyperlinks Edit Hyperlink dialog box for graphical objects that already contain hyperlinks After you insert a hyperlink the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move the cursor over the attached object To open the hyperlink
200. ate a vector output format for a file not having a standard extension Valid formats are IGES or IGS DXF CGM MTF Format designations can be typed in upper or lower case cfg lt filename gt Optional to designate a configuration file to be used instead of the standard OSR CFG or OSRMAP CFG file The input file entry and output file entry must occur in that order after the program name Other entries can follow in any order Separate the option used from the file name or format designation by aspace The file name must be a complete name Each command line can initiate only one conversion operation and can contain only one output file However standard UNIX pipes can be used for instance you may redirect the output file to a translator as in the following example osr infile cg4 vof dxf dxf2cvtrans If any entry in the command line is incomplete or invalid you will see an error message and the command will be cancelled You can indicate the path to the input file If you do not the program will search for it in the current directory and in the directory of the RasterPath setting in the configuration file being used The program will also search for the output location to verify that it is valid If a file of the name you entered already exists there you will be notified that it has been overwritten 537 INDEX ABOUT 35 Active Image gACTIVE 397 gINACTIVE 449 ADCCLOSE 35 ADCENTER 35 ADCNAVIGATE 38 APERTURE 39 ARC
201. ated with gCUT Paste Options Move Move the pasted data to a different location Rotate Specify the desired orientation angle of the image Scale Specify the factors by which to change the X and Y dimensions Fit A Scale option that allows you to show the scale graphically Instructions 1 Invoke the gPASTE command File lt Buffer gt 2 Type F to paste data from a raster file Type B Buffer or RETURN if it is the default as shown above to paste data from a temporary buffer created with gCUT Pasting from a File TERR gPASTE will determine the raster file you wish to paste If CMDDIA is set to 1 the following dialog will AR appear Enter the desired file name and select the appropriate path for the new file on a s 460 If CMDDIA is set to 0 gPASTE will issue the following prompt Command GPASTE Enter raster file name lt cut_data ext gt Type the name of the raster file that you want to paste Cut_data or the last file pasted is the default shown in brackets If no path is entered the program looks for the file in the current directory then for the ACAD path then for the DOS path Pasting from a Buffer gPASTE will paste raster data from a buffer only if you previously performed a gCUT to that buffer After determining the source of the raster data to be pasted the following prompt will appear Insertion point lt 0 0000 0 0000 gt 3 Select the point where the lower left corne
202. ath in the plot stamp information Layout Name Includes the name of the layout in the plot stamp information Date and Time Includes the date and time in the plot stamp information Note The date and time format is determined by the Regional Settings dialog box in the Windows Control Panel Plot stamping uses the short date style for dates Login Name Includes the Windows login name in the plot stamp information The Windows login name is contained in the LOGINNAME system variable Device Name Includes the current plotting device name in the plot stamp information Paper Size Includes the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot stamp information Plot Scale Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information Preview Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and rotation values you have specified in the Advanced Options dialog box You cannot preview the plot stamp any other way This is not a preview of the plot stamp contents User Defined Fields Provides text that can optionally be plotted logged or both plotted and logged at plot time The selected value in each user defined list will be plotted For example you might populate one list with media types or prices and the other with job names If the user defined value is set to lt none gt then no user defined information is plotted Add Edit Displays the User Defined Fields dialog box where y
203. ating Now Raster Images iic cciccscscesssscssnceactscasessessasvassacssussessnsuacsacntecductuswaesactbesducaneuadacesecdusacdeoddet 21 Cropping Raster Data 020 dd tds deta 21 Modifying IMageS visitada aiii ET 21 Cutting and Pasting RASS Ea Aa EAE E E E E EA E A N E AEN 22 Converting Between Raster and Vector esesesesesesesesesesesesesesesrsrsesesestsesesrsesesesesesesesesrseseseststee 24 Vector CIS anu 2 dd bs 24 SNAPPING TO RASTER ta ci 24 Raster AUTO SNAPE dans 24 SAVING IMAGE Snore i e e a e da 25 GTXIMAGE CAD SERIES PERFORMANCE FACTORS cccccssessescsseseescseeaeeceseeaesecaesaeeecaeeaeeecaeeaeeeeaeeaeaeeasers 25 Automatic Save Inteival 0 een A EE E 25 SWAP Spaco iseer nonan na E er adebegtcotes yeh Secs fe acleneteoea tesneed Secs de aoe bien ere ues 25 Aenal VIG Wei ta lr 25 CUITENE VIC W ZO0M ibas 25 Image QUIIY lt a 25 Multiple IMAJgesS cocoa ici Et Sek astern ee debe E rues ES Nat eH ES 25 WORKING WITH COLOR IMAGES conil EE A R E T TER 26 GETING STARTED muinin ana NN 28 USING THE TUTORIALS minnein nE Ear EEEE N E EEREN A EEN ONE EEEN A EEN EEAS 28 FOMOWING the LESSONS ueurerrire ra i aaa eno AnA and ATONE A AA E OTRE AE 28 Standardizing Your Environment for the Tutorials 0 ccccccccesceccsseseesenseseesceeseeseeeseeecnenseeseneeseenaes 28 Editing a Raster Filaire ana tenia T R s 28 GENERAL COMMAND REFERENCE eesesesesesereresesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesese
204. awing When a layer property filter is selected and there are no layers that fit its definition the list view is empty You can use standard keyboard selection methods To modify a property of a selected layer or of all layers in a selected filter click the icon for that property When a mixed icon or Varies is displayed for a layer filter the property is not the same for all layers in the filter Status Indicates the type of item layer filter layer in use empty layer or current layer Name Displays the name of the layer or filter Press F2 to enter a new name On Turns the selected layers on and off When a layer is on it is visible and available for plotting When a layer is off it is invisible and not plotted even if Plot is on Freeze Freezes the selected layers in all viewports You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM PAN and many other operations improve object selection performance and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings Objects on frozen layers are not displayed plotted hidden rendered or regenerated Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods If you plan to switch visibility settings frequently use the On Off setting to avoid regenerating the drawing You can freeze a layer in all viewports in the current layout viewport or in new layout viewports as they are created Lock Locks and unlocks the selected layers Objects on a locked layer cannot be modified Color Chang
205. ay and click on the Show button The Show button may need to be configured to work with a specific viewer Convert The Convert button launches the conversion process using the parameter settings on the right half of the main screen After a conversion is complete the label on the Convert button changes to Restart This clears the input and output lists allowing another conversion session to begin Show The Show button can launch an external viewer to External Viewer display conversion results Viewer Program Name 1 Highlight the desired filename gt 2 Select Show IV View e GTX Raster CAD Plus Cancel The External Viewer dialog appears 3 Specify the external viewer s executable filename 4 Specify any command line arguments required by the viewer 5 Select the raster file vector file or both files 6 Select Show Exit The Exit button closes GTX OSR During conversion this is labeled Halt This button prompts to continue processing the job or to exit Uncompleted conversions will be lost Scheme Save As button opens a dialog that lets you name a scheme in which all configuration settings are saved Delete removes the selected scheme and is useful in maintaining a list of only the desired schemes 526 Basic Pane The Basic and Advanced pane settings are controlled on the right side of the main screen These panes determine which output format is used and how to represent text line widths arr
206. be copied The selected raster will be highlighted 3 When all of the raster to be copied is highlighted press RETURN Base point or displacement There are several ways to respond to this prompt To use the default option either select a reference point or type in how far over the selected data should be copied Since the system does not know whether X Y value typed in this is the base point or the displacement distance the response to the second point clarifies this Using Base Point a Selecta base point either by using the cursor or by typing the coordinates This will be a reference point for the copy process Second point of displacement b Arubber banding line will appear attached at the base point Select a second point to define the relative distance and angle for placement of the copy The copy will appear in the designated location in the display raster color The original raster will be un highlighted The command will terminate Using Displacement a Atthe base point or displacement prompt type in the X and Y value for the displacement in the same format used to enter coordinates You will see the same prompt as above Second point of displacement b Press RETURN to indicate that the original entry was the displacement The raster data you selected will be copied to its new location in the main raster color The original raster will be un highlighted The command will terminate 425 gCREATE Type M
207. before or after the angle brackets Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the angle brackets enter the new dimension text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements 83 Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 before angle After you specify the angle the Dimension Line Location prompt is redisplayed 116 52 after angle 84 DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension e Dimension toolbar 9 Dimension menu
208. c symbol that is displayed when the crosshairs move over a snap point AUTOSNAP system variable Magnet Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off The magnet is an automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks the crosshairs onto the nearest snap point AUTOSNAP system variable Display AutoSnap Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip The tooltip is a label that describes which part of the object you are snapping to AUTOSNAP system variable Display AutoSnap Aperture Box Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box The aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs when you snap to an object APBOX system variable AutoSnap Marker Color Specifies the color of the AutoSnap marker AutoSnap Marker Size Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker Object Snap Options Specifies options for object snaps OSNAP command Ignore Hatch Objects Specifies that object snaps ignore hatch patterns when object snapping is turned on OSNAPHATCH system variable Replace Z Value with Current Elevation Specifies that object snaps ignore the Zvalue of the object snap location and use the Z value of the elevation set for the current UCS AutoTrack Settings Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior which is available when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on see DSETTINGS Display Polar Tracking Vector Displays a vector along specified angles when polar tracking is on With po
209. cale shade plot snap grid and UCS icon visibility and location The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze thaw state of the layers are not transferred to the destination object Hatch In addition to basic object properties changes the hatch properties of the destination object to that of the source object To match the hatch origin use Inherit Properties in HATCH or HATCHEDIT Available only for hatch objects Table In addition to basic object properties changes the table style of the destination object to that of the source object Available only for table objects MEASURE Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object Draw menu PointW Measure EE command line measure Select object to measure Specify length of segment or Block Specify a distance or enter b The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection set so you can choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to the point objects You can then remove the points by entering erase previous The markers are placed in the user coordinate system UCS of the object being measured except for 3D polylines in the current UCS Markers are always placed on the object regardless of the elevation settings If you use point objects for the markers you can make the points easier to see by changing their appearance with th
210. can t output at the highest quality Move the slider to diminish resolution and color TrueType Text On Windows system printers specifies whether to plot TrueType text as a graphic image or as text Plotting as a graphic guarantees that the text is printed as displayed at the expense of slowing down the plotter and using more memory Plotting as TrueType text prints faster and uses less memory the plotter may use a different font for printing TrueType as Text Plots TrueType text as text TrueType as Graphics Plots TrueType text as graphics Merge Control On raster plotters controls the appearance of lines that cross Merge control is not effective if your plotter is configured to plot everything as black or if you are using PostScript language Lines Overwrite Uses the last plotted line to obscure the lines under it Only the topmost line is visible at the intersection Lines Merge Merges the colors of crossing lines Note Merge control may appear as an option for system printers that do not actually support the feature Please check your printer s documentation to determine if merge control is supported 265 Custom Properties Node Modifies the device specific properties for the plotter configuration The settings for each plotter vary If the plotter manufacturer has not included a Custom Properties dialog box for the device driver the Custom Properties option is disabled For some drivers such as ePlot this
211. cannot be removed When you select individual named objects information about why you can t purge the item is displayed below the tree view Tip Displays information detailing why you can t purge the selected item Purge Purges the selected items Purge All Purges all unused items QDIM Quickly creates a dimension 0 Dimension toolbar 0 Dimension menu Quick Dimension E Command line qdim Use QDIM to quickly create or edit a series of dimensions The command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs Select geometry to dimension Select the objects you want to dimension or the dimensions you want to edit and press ENTER Specify dimension line position or Enter an option or press ENTER Creates a series of continued dimensions Creates a series of staggered dimensions Creates a series of baseline dimensions 276 Creates a series of ordinate dimensions Creates a series of radius dimensions Creates a series of diameter dimensions Sets a new datum point for baseline and ordinate dimensions Select new datum point Specify a point The program returns to the previous prompt Edits a series of dimensions You are prompted to add or remove points from existing dimensions Indicate dimension point to remove or Add eXit lt eXit gt Specify a point enter a or press ENTER fo return to the previous prompt
212. changes The Discard Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically discards reference editing changes without using REFCLOSE EN If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE you can still use the UNDO command to return to the reference editing session If you have made unwanted changes to an xref and already saved back the changes use UNDO to undo the unwanted changes then use REFCLOSE to save back changes and restore the xref to its original state Note When you edit and save xrefs in place in a drawing the preview image for the original reference drawing is no longer available unless you open and save the drawing again REFEDIT Selects an external reference or block reference for editing e Refedit toolbar 12 0 Tools menu Xref and Block In place Editing Edit Reference In Place EE Command line refedit Select reference Select an xref or a block in the current drawing The Reference Edit dialog box is displayed If you enter refedit at the Command prompt REFEDIT displays prompts on the command line Specifies the reference to edit To select a reference to edit select an object in the reference If you select an object that is part of one or more nested references the nested references are displayed in the dialog box The Reference Edit dialog box includes the following tabs e Identify Reference e Settings 285 Identify Reference Tab Reference Edit Dialog Box Provides visual aids for id
213. cifies blocks and objects saves them as a file and specifies insertion points Block Specifies an existing block to save as a file Select a name from the list Entire Drawing 362 Selects current drawing as a block Objects Specifies a base point for the block The default value is 0 0 0 Base Point Specifies a base point for the block The default value is 0 0 0 Pick Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing X Specifies the X coordinate value for the base point Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the base point Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the base point Objects Sets the effect of block creation on objects used to create a block Retain Retains the selected objects in the current drawing after saving them as a file Convert to Block Converts the selected object or objects to a block in the current drawing after saving them as a file The block is assigned the name in File Name Delete from Drawing Deletes the selected objects from the current drawing after saving them as a file Select Objects Button Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select one or more objects to save to the file Quick Select Button Opens the Quick Select dialog box which you can use to filter your selection set Objects Selected Indicates the number of objects selected Destination Specifies the new name and location of the file
214. cifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie Specify radius of circle Specify a point 2 or enter a value Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle Circumscribed about Circle Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon Specify radius of circle Specify a distance Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle Edge Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge Specify first endpoint of edge Specify a point 1 Specify second endpoint of edge Specify a point 2 A edge 2 270 PREVIEW Shows how the drawing will look when it is plotted jo 0 Standard toolbar 0 File menu Plot Preview E Command line preview PREVIEW displays a full page preview of the current drawing The preview is based on the current plot configuration as defined by the settings in the Page Setup or Plot dialog box Press ESC or ENTER to exit or right click in the preview area to access the shortcut menu which offers additional preview options The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus and minu
215. circumference of the circle The circle will be overlaid with a vector cir R Usin At cle on the current layer Continue to trace another circle or select another option Press ETURN to exit from the command g Arc the prompt select arc or type it followed by RETURN You will be prompted to select three points as if you were drawing a three point arc Se lect start point of reference arc Select a point at one end of the arc Se lect point on arc Select a point near the midpoint of the arc Se lect end of reference arc Rubber band the arc so that it overlays the arc to be traced and select the point Se Th lect raster lt ARC gt e arc will be overlaid with a vector arc Continue to trace another arc or select another option Press RETURN to exit from the command 502 Availability GTR or GTRAIN GTX Convert Text Train GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon While training files in gTCONVRT mistakes can be made gTRAIN searches through a recognition file and lets you correct or delete mistakes made during training Warning The Character Verification dialog is actually a separate windows application Because of this if you happen to click somewhere outside this dialog in the AutoCAD window it will appear to disappear and lock up AutoCAD If this happens use CTRL ESC or ALT TAB to return to the Character Verification application gTRAIN searches through a training recogn
216. cles Select the objects close to where you want the endpoints of the fillet gt k t l a eed t Roa o selection points result with radius greater than 0 FILLET does not trim circles the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly 128 EN y E a RON CKN a r S X J e a AN Ro a Moe selection points results with radius greater than 0 If you select a 3D solid you can select multiple edges but you must select the edges individually Enter fillet radius lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER Select an edge or Chain Radius Select edge s enter c or enter r Edge Selects a single edge You can continue to select single edges until you press ENTER selecting edges single edge fillets If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii Chain Changes from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges called a chain selection Select edge chain or lt Edge Radius gt Select an edge chain enter e or enterr Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge For example if you select an edge on the top of a 3D solid box FILLET also selects the other tangential edges on the top chain fillets Edge Switches to a single edge selection mode 129 Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edg
217. columns The selected raster is copied Polar If using a polar array you must specify the center point of the array the number of copies the angle to fill and whether or not to rotate the raster data as it is copied around the polar array Center point of array a Select a point that represents the axis around which all selected data will be copied Number of items b Enter the number of items that will fill the angle you will specify 400 Angle to fill ccw cw lt 360 gt c Enter an integer value representing the angle over which the copies will be evenly distributed Rotate objects as they are copied lt Y gt d Respond Y to rotate the objects as they are copied This will keep the raster objects in the same orientation to the center point as they are copied Responding N will keep the raster objects in the same orientation as the original raster object selected The raster data is copied 401 gATTACH Type Menu Availability GA GATTACH GTX Imaging gt Attach Raster All Products File Icon TX gATTACH loads an image into GTXImage CAD with fewer steps than used in the IMAGE command Instructions Select gATTACH The gATTACH file dialog will appear Select the appropriate file type in the List Files of Type combo box select the directory in which the file resides All files of the indicated type will appear in the File Name box Select the file you wish to load and press OK
218. creates a lower left corner an upper right corner and intermediate grid points Instructions Warping requires the definition of source and destination point pairs When CMDDIA is set to 1 the Image Warp dialog allows the creation of individual point pairs or an entire array of them When CMDDIA is set to 0 a series of prompts gathers the same information Add Point Pairs The Add Point Pairs button lets you add individual pairs of source and destination points Source point on the drawing 1 Type or select a point on the image representing a known coordinate Warp point Type or select the real location to which the source point is to be warped or displaced Source point on the drawing 2 Enter another source point or press RETURN to go back to the Image Warp dialog The specified points appear in the Coordinate List Table Generate Grid The Generate Grid button lets you create a rectangular grid of destination points and then for each point enter the source points This is backwards from the prompts for Add Point Pairs but it provides a convenient way of generating a list of known real coordinates and then provides the location of each of those features in the raster image Select base point of grid This point may be the lower left corner of the image or one corner of a grid of known coordinates Select opposite corner of grid Select the corner opposite the base point This defines the total area the
219. cs RLE X TIFF uncompressed TIF X X X TIFF Version 6 Tiled TIF X X X TIFF Packbits TIF X Versatec Block Format VBF X Versatec VDS VDS X DOS Version of GTX Rastrans GTXRastrans is also available as a DOS application Usage Rastrans infilename outfilename lpt1 lpt2 lpt3 rof calsg4 gtxg3 gtxg4 tiffg4 tiffg3 tiffu tiled rnl rlc jdl crf rtl pcl vb f ps opt pcx rle nkk grphtec hpg dpi input resolution 522 Argument Description Infilename raster input filename Input file types are autodetected independent of file extension except b4 c4 rlc Input file types recognized are gtxrnl gtxg3 gtxg4 calsg4 tiffg3 tiffg4 tiff packbit tiff uncompressed tiled tiff rlc rlc2 dsig4 pcx filenet img b4 c4 cit Outfilename the raster output filename optional specifies the output file format type optional input resolution 50 to 10000 optional output x resolution 50 to 10000 optional output y resolution 50 to 10000 a optional output x and y resolution 50 to 10000 optional rotation of 90 180 or 270 523 Appendix 4 GTX OSR V5 0 GTX OSR Open Systems Recognition V5 0 a stand alone batch conversion program is included as part of the GTXImage CAD PLUS products GTX OSR builds a list of raster images and converts them into vector DXF IGES or CGM files GTX OSR installs along with the GTXImage CAD series and runs on the same license No additional installati
220. ct s default properties no plot style applied You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style Name Displays the names of plot styles in named plot style tables Plot styles in named plot style tables can be changed Plot style names in color dependent plot style tables are tied to object color and cannot be changed The program accepts up to 255 characters for style names You cannot have duplicate names within the same plot style table Description Provides a description for each plot style Properties Specifies the settings for the new plot style you are adding to the current plot style table 320 Color Specifies the plotted color for an object The default setting for plot style color is Use Object Color If you assign a plot style color the color overrides the object s color at plot time You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box and select one of the 255 AutoCAD Color Index ACI colors a true color or a color from a color book The color you specify is displayed in the plot style color list as Custom Color If the plot device does not support the color you specify it plots the nearest available color or in the case of monochrome devices black Enable Dithering Enables dithering A plotter uses dithering to approximate colors with dot patterns giving the impression of plotting more colors than available in the AutoCAD Color Index ACI If the plotter does not support dithering the dithering
221. ct source object Select the object whose properties you want to copy Current active settings Currently selected matchprop settings Select destination object s or Settings Enters or select one or more objects to copy properties to Destination Object s Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the properties of the source object You can continue selecting destination objects or press ENTER to apply the properties and end the command Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects By default in the Property Settings dialog box all object properties are selected for copying Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object Available for all objects Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object Available for all objects Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object Available for all objects except attributes hatches multiline text points and viewports Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object Available for all objects except attributes hatches multiline text points and viewports Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination ob
222. cted Select a point to be on the circumference of the new arc Select new endpoint c The rubber banding line will be attached at the second point Select the endpoint for the new arc in any of the usual ways The raster arc will be redrawn through the three points If the original arc was in several pieces they will be selected but the new arc will be solid Using Circle a Select the circle option from the menu Select point on circumference of circle b Specify the raster circle by selecting three points on the circumference After the raster circle has been selected it will be highlighted A rubber banding line from the center of the circle will appear Enter circle radius c Enter a value in current units or select a point to indicate the radius of the new circle The circle will be redrawn with the original center point and the new radius Note If the original circle was broken into arcs or drawn in a dashed line style they will be selected but the new circle will be unbroken 416 gCHGLAY Type Menu Availability GCHL GCHGLAY GTX Vector Clean gt Change Layer GTXlmage CAD PLUS L Icon gCHGLAY changes the layer of objects to that of a specified object Instructions Select Objects to Change Layer 1 Select the objects you want to move to a destination layer Dialog lt Select object on NEW layer gt 2 Either type D to select a layer or to define a new layer or select a sample object that
223. cted by the PICKADD system variable First polygon point Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or Undo Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point Ne MNES ot ot CPolygon selection 298 Selects all objects within a specified group Enter group name Enter a name list Switches to the Add method selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods Auto and Add are the default methods selected object to add ele ey AAA Switches to the Remove method objects can be removed from the current selection set using any object selection method An alternative to Remove mode is to hold down SHIFT while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option Specifies multiple points without highlighting the objects thus speeding up the selection process for complex objects The Multiple method also selects two intersecting objects if the intersection point is specified twice Selects the most recent selection set The Previous selection set is cleared by operations that delete objects from the drawing The program keeps track of whether each selection set was specified in model space or paper space The Previous selection set is ignored if you switch spaces Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection set Switches to automatic selection pointing to an object selects the object Pointing to a blank area inside or outside an object
224. ctures However the new color commands allow extraction and conversion of color images to bitonal images that can then be edited and converted to AutoCAD entities Many color images use a limited range of colors A good example of this is a road map where the data is displayed in a limited number of base colors In this example the roads are shown as black the land contours are brown amp the sea is blue In these instances GTX provides commands to enable you to reduce the colors down to a more manageable range of colors The GTX color related commands to do this are gBITONAL D lt O E jo gREDUCE a gSEPARATE The best command to use depends mainly upon the number of colors that your image has Quick reduction to Binary If you wish to automatically reduce a color image down to a simple binary image you can use gBITONAL The gBITONAL command has been optimized to operate on a broad range of color images 8 works well where an image has a clear cut distinction between dark amp light data However the gBITONAL threshold may not give the exact results that you desire by including or omitting important data from the binary image In these instances it may be better to use the gREDUCE 8 gSEPARATE commands where you have greater control of the color separation amp threshold More than 256 colors If you have an image with greater than 256 colors you can firstly use gREDUCE to bring the 26 image down to 256 colors or
225. current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements Customizes the dimension text on the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 DIMREASSOCIATE Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects Dimension menu Reassociate Dimensions Command line dimreassociate Select dimensions to reassociate Select dimension objects Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed A marker is displayed for each association point prompt If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object the marker appears as an X if the definition point is associated the marker appears as an X inside a box Note The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a
226. current tool palette the tab on a tool palette or a tool to display a shortcut menu The options displayed on each shortcut menu are appropriate to the cursor location All the options on these shortcut menus are listed alphabetically and described below Note Tool palettes can be used only in the version of AutoCAD in which they were created For example you cannot use a tool palette that was created in AutoCAD 2006 in AutoCAD 2005 Allow Docking 331 Controls whether the tool palette docks when you drag it over a docking area at the side of the drawing Clear this option to undock a docked tool palette Auto hide Controls display of the tool palette When this option is selected only the tool palette title bar is displayed when the cursor moves outside the tool palette When this option is cleared the full tool palette is displayed when the cursor moves Close Closes the tool palette window Copy Copies the selected tool to the Clipboard Customize Displays the Customize dialog box Cut Removes the selected tool from the tool palette and places it on the Clipboard Delete Tool Removes the selected tool from the tool palette Delete Tool Palette Removes the current tool palette Move Changes the cursor to a four direction arrow Move Up Moves the selected tool palette up one position Move Down Moves the selected tool palette down one position New Tool Palette Creates a new tool palette Enter a name or pr
227. d 5 Set Save Raster to your preference 6 Select OK to start the conversion 439 gEDGE Type __ Menu_ Availability GED or GEDGE GTX Enhance gt Edge GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon E gEDGE removes the inside of solid raster regions leaving only the edge Removes all raster except a single pixel width contour around the edge of selected raster data Instructions Command Dialog 1 Invoke gEDGE Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster you wish to hollow out Press RETURN 3 The insides of the raster are erased leaving a 1 pixel edge around the outside 440 Type Ss Menu_ __ Availability GE or GERASE GTX Raster Edit gt Erase GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon Y gERASE removes selected raster data from the drawing Instructions Select raster lt WINDOW gt 1 Invoke gERASE 2 Select the raster you want to remove 3 When all the raster data to be removed is highlighted press RETURN The selected raster is then erased 441 gFRZLAY Availability GTX Vector Clean gt Freeze Layer GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon Eg gFRZLAY freezes the layer of a selected object Instructions Dialog lt Select object gt Choose an object residing on the layer you wish to freeze or type D to use the dialog Object The layer of the selected object becomes frozen Dialog A dialog appears Choose the layer or layers to freeze and select OK 442 HELP Availabilit
228. d Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result Undo Undoes the merged tee intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Corner Joint Creates a corner joint between multilines The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection IL Select first mline Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline Select the second half of the corner The corner joint is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed L l l l Li first mline selected second mline selected Undo Undoes the corner joint The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Add Vertex Adds a vertex to a multiline le Select mline Select a multiline A vertex is added at the selected point and the following prompt is displayed 189 Select mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again mline selected result Undo Removes the added vertex The Select Mline prompt is displayed Delete Vertex Deletes a vertex from a multiline ly Select mline Select a multiline The vertex nearest to the selected point is deleted and the following prompt is displayed Select mline or Undo Select another multi
229. d a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements 4 E se Customizes the dimension text at the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes gt 5 2 D Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 Partial Partial Reduces the length of the arc length dimension Specify first point for arc length dimension Specify a point on the arc where the arc length dimensio
230. d become concentric Alternatively type P and select the location itself The selected objects are moved so their centerpoints align about the centerpoint of the target object or about the indicated location 421 ae Type Menu _ s Availability GCO or GCONVRT GTX Convert gt Vectorize GTXImage CAD PLUS ReV Icon gCONVRT converts raster data to AutoCAD vector geometry Instructions Conversion Type xi Conversion Type CAD conversion raster data is converted into CAD C Contour lines arcs circles and arrowheads L triangular SOLID entities This option is best Reetity for mechanical drawings and line diagrams Ortho C Ref C None Contour causes raster data to be converted Vector Color into polyline or spline entities This option is 7 By Width best for maps and other documents containing contours p Advanced Hatches I Linestyles Rectify Arrowheads V Linear Alignments Ortho Improve the drawing by making Gap to jump in pixels Pick Gap cleaner intersections snapping lines to horizontal or vertical Where applicable fillet Contour Settings arcs are snapped to increments of 90 Eolpline Spline degrees producing a high quality filleted A JJ JN s corner Reference snaps lines that are close to a Elevation 0 000000 IV Save Raster specified reference angle to that angle Parallel lines at this angle separated by a distance c
231. d layers from the drawing File menu Drawing Utilities Purge E Command line purge The Purge dialog box is displayed If you enter purge at the Command prompt PURGE displays prompts on the command line Displays items that can be purged View Items You Can Purge Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that you can purge Items Not Used in Drawing Lists the named objects that are not used in the current drawing and that can be purged You can list the items for any object type by clicking the plus sign or by double clicking the object type You purge items by selecting the item to purge Purge Nested Items removes items only when you select one of the following options All Items or Blocks in the tree view The Purge All button Confirm Each Item to Be Purged Displays the Confirm Purge dialog box when you purge an item Purge Nested Items Removes all unused named objects from the drawing even if they are contained within or referenced by other unused named objects The Confirm Purge dialog box is displayed and you can cancel or confirm the items to be purged 275 View Items You Cannot Purge Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that you can t purge Items Currently Used in Drawing Lists named objects that cannot be removed from the drawing Most of these objects are currently used in the drawing or are default items that
232. d the character is recognized as the number 7 at 45 degrees in the lower half If the evaluation is correct as with gTCONVRT press RETURN or select KEEP to accept the identity of the raster text sample and proceed to the next sample If the evaluation is incorrect but is still a good example of that character at its orientation make the necessary corrections to the text id and its orientation then press RETURN or select KEEP to make the change and proceed to the next sample If the evaluation is incorrect and is also a bad example unidentifiable or at least very messy select Discard to remove the text sample from the recognition file To cancel the gTRAIN command select CANCEL All changes made prior to cancelling the command will have been saved in memory To Keep Your Changes gTRAIN does not automatically save changes to the recognition file To write the changes to the file invoke gTCONFIG and save the training recognition file If you choose to keep the recognition file as it was when it was first loaded you can close it without saving changes 504 Availability GTU or GTURN GTX Enhance Turn GTXImage CAD GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon Ls gTURN quickly rotates raster data in the active image by a multiple of 90 degrees This also swaps the image s X and Y raster limits This command is useful when you are working with images that have been scanned sideways and appear sideways when attached within GTXIm
233. d with zero width WMFOUT Saves objects to a Windows metafile EE Command line wmfout The Create WMF standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter a file name A wmffile extension is added Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects The selected objects are saved to a file in Windows metafile format Note If one or more raster objects are attached to the drawing and if the image application ism arx is loaded the maximum resolution of the resulting WMF file is 2K by 2K The image 364 application is loaded the first time you run IMAGE IMAGEADJUST IMAGEATTACH IMAGECLIP IMAGEFRAME or IMAGEQUALITY XATTACH Attaches an external reference to the current drawing E e Insert menu External Reference e Reference toolbar EE Command line xattach The Select Reference File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed The External Reference dialog box is displayed after a file is selected Attaches a drawing as an external reference xref If you attach a drawing that itself contains an attached xref the attached xref appears in the current drawing Like blocks attached xrefs can be nested If another person is currently editing the xref the drawing attached is based on the most recently saved version Name Displays the xref name in the list after an xref is attached When an attached xref is selected in the list its path is disp
234. dary of a selected viewport This option is available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped If you clip a viewport that has been previously clipped the original clipping boundary is deleted and the new clipping boundary is applied VPLAYER Sets layer visibility within viewports 356 E Command line vplayer List Frozen Layers List Frozen Layers Displays the names of frozen layers in a selected viewport Select a viewport The command line window displays the names of any layers that are frozen in the selected viewport Freeze Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports Objects on frozen layers are not displayed regenerated or plotted Enter layer name s to freeze Enter one or more layer names Enter an option All Select Current lt Current gt Enter an option or press ENTER All Applies the changes in all viewports Select Temporarily switches to paper space allowing you to select the viewports where you can apply the layer settings Select objects Select one or more viewports and press ENTER Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only E 2 E E Thaws layers in specific viewports Enter layer name s to thaw Enter one or more layer names Enter an option All Select Current lt Current gt Enter an option or press ENTER All Applies the changes in all viewports Select Applies the changes in selected viewports Select objects Select one or m
235. determine the size of the paper background Display Paper Shadow Displays a shadow around the paper background in a layout This option is unavailable if the Display Paper Background option is cleared Show Page Setup Manager for New Layouts Displays the Page Setup Manager the first time you click a layout tab Use this dialog box to set options related to paper and plot settings Create Viewport in New Layouts 213 Creates a single viewport automatically when you create a new layout Crosshair Size Controls the size of the crosshairs The valid range is from 1 to 100 percent of the total screen At 100 percent the ends of the crosshairs are never visible When the size is decreased to 99 percent or below the crosshairs have a finite size and the ends of the crosshairs are visible when situated at the edge of the drawing area The default size is 5 percent CURSORSIZE system variable Display Resolution Controls the quality of the display of objects If you set high values to improve display quality the impact on performance is significant Arc and Circle Smoothness Controls the smoothness of circles arcs and ellipses A higher number produces smoother objects but more time is required to regenerate pan and zoom the objects You can improve performance by setting this option to a low value such as 100 for drawing and increasing the value for rendering The valid range is 1 to 20 000 The default setting is 1000 This s
236. device If Specify On Screen is cleared enter the insertion point in X Y and Z xX Sets the X coordinate value Y Sets the Y coordinate value Zz Sets the Z coordinate value 150 Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected image Specify On Screen directs input to the command line or the pointing device If Specify On Screen is cleared enter a value for the scale factor The default scale factor is 1 If INSUNITS is set to unitless or if the image does not contain resolution information the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters centimeters inches or feet and the image has resolution information the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image If Specify On Screen is selected you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value on the command line If Specify On Screen is cleared enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box The default rotation angle is 0 Details Displays the Image Information section You can view width and height in pixels the resolution and the size in units such as millimeters centimeters meters kilometers inches feet yards miles unitless and many others The default value for unitless images is unitless The image size is automaticall
237. dge in 3D space arc intersecting with boundary edge in 3D space UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system UCS Objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D space are extended projection of arcs that intersect with boundary edge onto current UCS View Specifies projection along the current view direction lefi viewport righi viewport 125 Edge Extends the object to another object s implied edge or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space Ll E selected boundary selected object to extend Enter an implied edge extension mode Extend No extend lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space a extended No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space cl nal extended Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches two dimensional solids and wide polylines EE Command line fill or fill for transparent use Enter mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or pressENTER Turns on Fill mode For the filling of a 3D object to be visible its extrusion direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction and hidden lines must not be suppressed
238. dges of the drawing area RSCRIPT Repeats a script file RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script for example a script that must run over and over during a trade show or in a showroom If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file the file runs continuously until interrupted by ESC Note Consider turning off UNDO and any log files if you anticipate running the script over a long period otherwise these log files continue to grow and take up increasing amounts of disk space SAVE Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name e E Command line save 291 The Save Drawing As dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Save the drawing under the current file name or enter a different file name to save a copy of the drawing under that name SAVE is available only from the command line The Save option on the File menu or on the Standard toolbar is QSAVE If the drawing is named QSAVE saves the drawing without displaying the Save Drawing As dialog box If the drawing is unnamed the Save Drawing As dialog box is displayed Enter a file name to both name and save the drawing SAVEAS 0 File menu Save As E Command line saveas Sets options for DWG files and for drawing interchange file output The Saveas Options dialog box includes the following tabs e DWG Options e DXF Options DWG Options Tab Saveas Options Dialog Box 292 DWG Options Tab Saveas Options D
239. dth lt Length gt Enter L or w Enter rectangle length lt 10 gt Enter a non zero value or Enter rectangle width lt 10 gt Enter a non zero value Specify other corner point or Area Dimensions Rotation Move the cursor to display one of four possible locations for the rectangle and click the one that you want Dimensions Creates a rectangle using length and width values Specify length for rectangles lt 0 0000 gt Enter a non zero value Specify width for rectangles lt 0 0000 gt Enter a non zero value Specify other corner point or Area Dimensions Rotation Move the cursor to display one of four possible locations for the rectangle and click the one that you want Rotation Creates a rectangle at a specified rotation angle Specify rotation angle or Points lt O gt Specify an angle by entering a value specifying a point or entering p and specifying two points Specify other corner point or Area Dimensions Rotation Move the cursor to display one of four possible locations for the rectangle and click the one that you want 282 Chamfer Chamfer Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle Specify first chamfer distance for rectangles lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify second chamfer distance for rectangles lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The values become the current chamfer distances for subsequent RECTANG commands Elevation Elevation Specifies the elevation of the rectangle Sp
240. duces them to a single binary 1 bit image The command can separate out to multiple binary images with each run of the command The gSEPARATE command only works when you have one or more color or grayscale images loaded Instructions Invoke the gSEPARATE command If you have no color grayscale images loaded amp you will get an error telling you that you don t have a suitable image for gSEPARATE to work on If you have more than one color greyscale image loaded you will be offered the Image selection dialog box You can then either select the image by name or you can pick it interactively using the Select Image on Screen button A 8 4 See de ee ee ee PI ae da me fen meme ete om An meme rah he er ET nane Sere Thee lt e ma I tae amm Dal ot Once the Image has been selected the system will display the Assign Image Layers dialog lassie boe Lores eso 25601 ES Mier of active codes o ns 2 Mandos of bionw meges toca U 1 25 Amo ston mags to Acad leyera Ue currant Acmel larvae F Use user debracdrnaza rara or Acad hyer nuse C Select trans esa Acad lps Bond Drage sp Porra Tagged besya Fit Fortes MF f st cored You can enter the number of binary images you wish to create between 1 to 256 images The binary images created can be assigned to different layers The layering naming can be controlled by selecting one of three options 1 Use current ACAD Layer In this instance
241. e You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline approximation with the SPLINESEGS system variable or you can use AutoLISP The default value is 8 If you set the value higher a greater number of line segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal spline becomes more precise The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and takes longer to generate If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value the program generates segments using the absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit type curve to those segments Fit type curves use arcs as the approximating segments Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified but the curve can take longer to generate 7 e i i pa Paes y A o A 4 r Y a PRL p r E t SPLINESEGS set to 1 SPLINESEGS set to 10 To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline change SPLINESEGS and respline the curve You do not have to decurve it first Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests If you edit a spline fit polyline with a command such as BREAK or TRIM you cannot use the Decurve option Ltype Gen Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline When turned off this option ge
242. e Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edge Enter fillet radius lt current gt Specify a distance or pressENTER The previous prompt is displayed Select an edge or Chain Radius Select one or more edges or enter e or r Undo Reverses the previous action in the command Polyline Polyline Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet Select 2D polyline If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc before a er Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc Specify fillet radius lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints Enter Trim mode option Trim No trim lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER Trim Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints No Trim Does not trim the selected edges 130 Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects FILLET displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command FILTER Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set E Command line filter or filter f
243. e anti aliasing option turned on Anti aliasng can enhance the quality of some images particularly photographs However it is not ideal for images with solid fill color as It tends to mix colors to achieve a more blurred image Whilst the gSEPARATE command will work with anti aliased images the results may not be as good as required As such we recommend that if possible images be scanned with anti aliasing turned off 27 Getting Started 1 Please visit the following link to access the Tutorials http www gtx com documents TutorialsG TXRasterCADV12 pdf Using the Tutorials To get the most from these lessons you should be familiar with GTXImage CAD Series image commands Experiment with the GTXImage CAD Image command to attach images within AutoCAD ImageAdjust ImageQuality Transparency basic drawing and property modifying commands entity drawing commands the Properties command Object Snapping modes Following the Lessons Try performing these exercises twice The first time follow the instructions literally to learn how each command and feature works The second time try to accomplish the same results as fast as possible using the options and techniques with which you are most comfortable Standardizing Your Environment for the Tutorials The lessons invoke GTXImage CAD Series features from menus The GTXImage CAD variables CMDDIA and FILEDIA control whether dialog boxes are used in certain commands If CMD
244. e All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing The image frame of each attached image remains visible Enter list of images to unload Enter a loaded image name or enter to unload all images Attach 148 Attach Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing The Select Image File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters digits spaces and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed A valid image name is generated from the file name and an underscore and number are appended to the name The number changes as necessary to avoid duplicate image names Image file name_1 created from file file name bmp If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing the following prompts are displayed and the image is inserted as a copy Image file name has already been loaded Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition Specify insertion point lt 0 0 gt Specify an insertion point Base image size Width current width Height current height current unit Specify scale factor Enter a value or pressENTER Specify rotation angle lt 0 gt Enter a value or pressENTER If the FILEDIA syste
245. e Menu Avaailabiility GBU or GBURN GTX Convert gt Burn All to Raster GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon 7 gBURN converts all vector entities into raster data with a designated line width Note The raster database must be established before gBURN can be used The database can be established either by loading a raster file or by using gCREATE If the database has not been established you will see a message and gCREATE will be invoked automatically Only entities within the raster limits can be rasterized Those outside the limits will be ignored or erased When entities are partially outside the part inside is rasterized the part outside is erased GTXImage CAD will not rasterize AutoCAD 3d Objects GTXImage CAD will not rasterize hatches with gradient fill pattern colors Options Width Options Table Use the width settings according to color as set in the Width Table Fixed Type ina value or select the width graphically using Box or Pick Instructions Dialog 1 Invoke gBURN The following dialog will appear x 2 To specify line width you can a enter a Fixed line width b e p specify it graphically by drawing a Box or by using Pick to select raster in the drawing of the desired width or c use a j pm Table to correlate the colors of vectors to raster line widths Do Fead midh Fixed Line Width gt l Seve Vector a Select the Fixed radio button Type the raster width to be used in CAD units not pixels or
246. e KS r eE EEC ENEE EEE AOE drid ici 185 MLED Tinoco intrincada do EA AE EAEE 186 MLINE ici gorien ionamin oi id iio iia drid ici 193 MLESTYEE t iocnii na intrincada 195 A avevesssaschses hO ereo RS Eee EEEE ANE EE E AOE EKEREN 196 MOVE cccoccci ioci na riada ie EEE ISE E A A E EAEE 196 MREDO sei aonie meini citrico dido E AOE EKER ESETE 197 MSPACE iiscccscvscsccssssscscacvscsacnechcsssavevesstavehsss ri iii 197 MTEX A NN 198 MULTIPLE coins ari oca ii ic ch rn E E AS E ES r eeii 199 MUTE Wii ido EEEE AR ER TE ERRAR R 199 MV SETUP 2d A Rd E E RR 203 BAN E O E E E A E AAA td 203 OERSED E E EE E E A E E 204 QORS id A IAEA AA AN 205 OPEN tad IEA A a 206 ORTHO ii nia 229 OSNAP cata dea 229 PAGESETUP uta pita 229 PAN aii dd ada 231 PARTIALDAD icon id a 232 PARTHIALOPREN cuota daa 236 PASTEBLO Civitas 237 PASTECU Puan iia ado iaa 237 PASTEOR lO nacida 237 PASTESPE Gn Tiro eann aa IN E OAE N briaa 238 PCINWIZARD cotorra teta duets TIE eaters cananassatueaestans eats een AREA q ER ed 238 PED Tocina E e Ie IA rte EE EE E E 239 PINE cas oiea EE T E TA R E TA beds ERA 252 EON R E AE E E E E EE E 252 PLOTSTAMP cuts tte A EEEE EE EREET IEEE N E RE 259 A rina E OO 260 PEOTTERMANAGER fii sts ici idos A EERE ETE IEEE TNE E 261 PONGO Titi E EE EATE AE ET E TEE TE NET 268 POIN Tierra REER E AEE EAN EE EREET IEEE E sDiseeuvoetauts 268 POLYGON irte EREE EA EEE AEE N ETL E TE E TE 269 PRREMIE Wei tes iessistacthesiot testa t ii ist EAEN EE EEE
247. e PC3 file you are editing 267 Import Imports file information from earlier versions of the program If you have a PCP or PC2 file from an earlier version you can import some of the information in those files into a PC3 file PC3 files store plotter name port information pen optimization level paper size and resolution Save As Saves a PC3 File to a new file name Defaults Restores the settings on the Device and Document Settings tab back to the default settings PNGOUT Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format ES Command line pngout The Create Raster File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the file name in the dialog box Select objects or lt all objects and viewports gt Press ENTER fo select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER A Portable Network Graphics file is created that contains the objects you select The file reflects what is displayed on the screen Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to O Off prompts are displayed on the command line POINT Creates a point object E Eo Draw toolbar gt 0 Draw menu Point E Command line point Specify a point Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects You can specify a full three dimensional location for a point The current elevation is assumed if you omit the Z coordinate value The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the
248. e PDMODE system variable Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object starting at the endpoint 178 closest to the point you used to select the object Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex the first one drawn Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle If the snap rotation angle is 0 then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center on its circumference ee selected object seqment length The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0 5 unit distances along a polyline with the PDMODE system variable set to 35 segment lengths 7 select polylines measure every 0 5 unis Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object Enter name of block to insert Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object Yes No lt Y gt Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter y the block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal lines are aligned with and drawn tangent to the object being measured If you enter n the block is always inserted with a O rotation angle Specify length of segment After you specify the segment length the block is inserted at the specified interval If the block has variable attributes these attributes are not included MENU Loads a customization file E Command line menu The Select Customizatio
249. e Plot Style Table Editor To use your new plot style table the selected options on the Plot and Publish tab of the Options dialog box must be appropriate for the type of plot style table named or color dependent you created You can create a plot style table from scratch use an existing plot style table as a starting point use settings from your AutoCAD Release 14 CFG file or use settings from a PCP or PC2 file You can create a plot style table from scratch use an existing plot style table as a starting point or use settings from a PCP PC2 or CFG file You can create either a named plot style table or a color dependent plot style table With a named plot style table you can add and define plot styles as you like the file name has the extension stb A color dependent plot style table creates 255 plot styles based on color the file name has the extension ctb You can specify whether you want to use a plot style table for new drawings or for pre AutoCAD 2000 drawings when they are saved in a later format Modifies the plot styles in a plot style table If the plot style table is attached to a layout or the Model tab and you change a plot style any objects that use that plot style are affected If the plot style table is color dependent the file extension is CTB If the plot style table is named the file extension is STB Open the Plot Style Table Editor with any of the following methods Double click a CTB or STB file in the Pl
250. e a boundary By default when you use the Add Pick Point option to define a boundary HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents By redefining the boundary set you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects For large drawings redefining the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because HATCH examines fewer objects Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents Selecting this option discards any current boundary set Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New If you have not created a boundary set with New the Existing Set option is not available New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary The default value 0 specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps Enter a value in drawing units from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored and the boundary is treated as closed HPGAPTOL system variable Inherit Options When you create a hatch with Inherit Properties these settings control the location of the hatch origin Use Current Origin Uses the current hatch origin setting Use
251. e a real number RasterPath Defines the default path for saving raster files You can override the directory entered here by entering the full path when prompted for a file name The default is to save the file in the current directory RasterFormat Defines the default storage format of new raster files This is used by gCREATE and when using gACTIVE on color images RasterLoadExt Defines the available raster formats that will be loaded with GTXImage CAD open when a raster file with the same name is in the same directory MaxNumPixels Sets the maximum number of pixels allowed in a new raster image Default setting is 973 440 000 which at 400 dpi is equivalent to 78 x 78 inches or 1990 x 1990 millimeters HighlightColor Defines the default color used to highlight selected raster data Choose a color that can be seen against the raster image and against the background color Valid entries are the same for RasterColor The color can be changed with the gCOLOR or gLAYER commands The default is GREEN RasterWidth Sets the default raster line width to be used when vector entities are converted to raster The entry should be an appropriate real number or T if you want to specify the Line Width Table values The default is 01 This value will be in inches or mm according to the DrawingUnits entry All the values can be reset when you use the gRASTER command BackupRas Yes causes raster save to create a backup raster file No deactiva
252. e button on a sample speckle in the image Raster data of that size and smaller will be considered to be speckles Select first corner of box You may want to window an actual speckle or hole to gauge the proper size Select a point for one corner of the window or box A rubber banding box will appear with one corner attached at the point Select opposite corner of box Drag the box to the desired size and select the second point The largest side of the box will be used as the reference dimension to define maximum speckle hole size After specifying the speckle size the following prompt will appear 492 lt Delete Speckle gt Fill hole 4 This sets the mode of the gSPECKL command Select the desired mode from the menu or type its abbreviation Type D and RETURN for Delete or type F and RETURN for Fill Select raster lt WINDOW gt 5 Select the area of the drawing to be processed with the Window PWindow or View option All of the speckles or holes of the designated size or smaller in the window will be highlighted CAUTION 1 Set the speckle size smaller than punctuation marks such as the period and colon If your speckle size is larger than these they will be erased and valuable information could be lost 2 With large drawings memory demands can be great for this command If you have problems despeckle portions of the drawing saving in between gSAVE 3 In the
253. e by specifying points All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system UCS Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total Specify a point 2 x x5 2 E x a a defining an area and perimeter area defined Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to complete the definition of the perimeter If you do not close the polygon the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first When the perimeter is calculated that line length is added 43 Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object You can calculate the area of circles ellipses splines polylines polygons regions and solids Note 2D solids created with the SOLID command do not have an area reported Select objects If you select an open polyline the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored open polyline area defined selected The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter or length calculations wide polyline 44 Add Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas The Add option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined areas and objects You can use the Subtract option to subtrac
254. e current settings You can accept the default or enter a name and choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new style name Rename Displays the Rename Text Style dialog box The text style listed is renamed when you enter a new name and choose OK You can also use RENAME to change the name of an existing text style If any existing text object uses the old style name the text object takes the new name automatically Delete Deletes a text style Select a name from the list to make it current and then choose Delete Font Changes the style s font Note If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style all text objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all compiled shape SHX fonts in the Fonts folder When you select a name from the list the program reads the file for the specified font The file s character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style You can define several styles that use the same font Font Style Specifies font character formatting such as italic bold or regular When Use Big Font is selected this option changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big Font file name Height Sets the text height based on the value you enter If you enter 0 0 you are prompted for the text height each time you enter text using
255. e entering point coordinates Press RETURN to end the command 455 gMIRROR Availability GMI or GMIRROR GTX Raster Edit gt Mirror GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS com Ad gMIRROR creates a mirror image of selected raster data This is differentfrom reflect which mirrors the entire current raster image You will define a line for the data to be mirrored across You may either retain or discard the original data Instructions 1 Select gMIRROR Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster data to be mirrored The selected raster will be highlighted 3 When you have selected all the items to be mirrored press RETURN First point of mirror line 4 Selecta point for the start of the reference line Second point 5 Select another point to define the reference line Delete old objects Yes lt No gt 6 Press RETURN to preserve the original raster geometry If you only want to keep the new mirrored data enter Y 456 Availability GM or GMOVE GTX Raster Edit gt Move GTXlmage CAD GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon Function gMOVE moves selected raster data from one area to another on the drawing The displacement points define the relative distance and angle that the items will be moved from the original position Note Turn ORTHO mode ON to move objects in perfectly horizontal or vertical directions Options Base point Indicate the offset distance for the copy by selecting two points Displacem
256. e finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings you can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within the new layout LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature EE Command line leader Specify leader start point Specify next point A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are displayed Specify next point or Annotation Format Undo lt Annotation gt Specify a point enter an option or pressENTER Point Specification Point Specification Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and options Specify next point or Annotation Format Undo lt Annotation gt Specify a point enter an option or pressENTER 166 Annotation Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line The annotation can be single or multiple lines of text a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances or a block Enter first line of annotation text or lt options gt Enter text or pressENTER If you enter text at the Annotation prompt the text is inserted at the end of the leader line You are prompted for additional lines of text until you end the command by pressing ENTER twice If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first the following prompt is displayed Enter an annotation option Tolerance Copy Block None Mtext lt Mtext gt Enter an option or pressENTER Tolerance Creates a
257. e option descriptions provided earlier in this command Rotated Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions Specify angle of dimension line lt current gt Specify an angle or press ENTER Object Selection 98 Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object Select object to dimension For polylines and other explodable objects only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned You cannot select objects in a non uniformly scaled block reference If you select a line or an arc the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes See DIMSTYLE This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable offset from origin DIMEXO system variable CE i I object selected dimension line location designated If you select a circle the diameter endpoints are used as the origins of the extension line When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point a horizontal dimension is drawn When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point a vertical dimension is drawn DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate point dimensions Trd 2 00 e5 F ga a 1 05 an x
258. e prompts gACTIVE Active Image Type Menu Availability GTX Imaging gt Active Image All Products Icon EJ Every raster editing enhancing command requires an active image to be specified The gACTIVE command is invoked automatically when there is none specified so you will not explicitly invoke this command unless you are working on more than one image at a time and wish to switch from one to another gACTIVE sets active images to transparent Options Number of Images Note Invoke gINACTIVE to make an active image inactive and save memory CLIPPING only masks the DISPLAY of images When editing a clipped image the entire image is being edited selections include clipped portions of an image but after the edit the clipping is still active The behavior of gACTIVE varies depending on the number of images currently attached to the drawing One Image If there is only one image currently attached gACTIVE will automatically set it as the active raster image Two or More Images If there are two or more images a prompt will request that you select the one to edit Image Type gACTIVE behaves differently depending on the number of images attached Bi Tonal Bi tonal images are activated quickly and easily Color or Grayscale Color or grayscale images are reduced to bi tonal two colors before becoming active The color or grayscale image is not modified rather the command generates a bitonal version of the original
259. e text See TEXT for a description of the justification options Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text Currently loaded text styles are displayed To load or create a text style see STYLE Height Specifies the height of the attribute text Enter a value or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device The height is measured from the origin to the location you specify If you select a text style that has fixed height anything other than 0 0 or if you select Align in the Justification list the Height option is not available Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text Enter a value or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device The rotation angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list the Rotation option is not available Align Below Previous Attribute Definition Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute If you have not previously created an attribute definition this option is not available 53 Lock Position in Block Locks the position of the attribute within the block reference Note In a dynamic block an attribute s position must be locked for it to be included in an action s selection set ATTDISP Globally controls visibility of block attributes in a drawing View menu Display Attribute Display E Command line attdis
260. e text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup You can edit this text in the Plotter Configuration Editor Plot to File Plots output to a file rather than to a plotter or printer The default location for plot files is specified in the Options dialog box Plot and Publish tab under Default Location for Plot to File Operations If the Plot to File option is turned on when you click OK in the Plot dialog box the Plot to File dialog box a standard file navigation dialog box is displayed Partial Preview Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and printable area The tooltip displays the paper size and printable area 253 Paper Size Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device If no plotter is selected the full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection If the selected plotter doesn t support the layout s selected paper size a warning is displayed and you can select the plotter s default paper size or a custom paper size A default paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 file with the Add a Plotter wizard The paper size that you select in the Page Setup dialog box is saved with the layout and overrides the PC3 file settings The actual printable area of the page which is determined by the selected plotting device and paper size is indicated in the layout by a das
261. e this layer in advance in your drawing template and give it a color if you always want hatched data to appear the same Hatch angle lt 0 000 gt Pick 1 Type the hatch angle or type P to select two points designating the angle Parallel alignment offset lt 0 0 gt 2 Type the distance between hatches or select two points designating the distance Hatch angle lt 45 000 gt Pick When done press RETURN Parallel alignment offset lt 0 0 gt 423 Press RETURN again Linestyles When this is active lines that appear to have regular breaks in the raster image will be isolated on their own layer The name for this layer is established by the Linestyle_Layer_Name configuration parameter in GTXRAST CFG As with Hatch_Layer_Name you can create this layer in advance in your drawing template and give it a color and linestyle if you always want hatched data to appear the same Arrowheads Controls whether arrowheads 3 sided solids are generated during CAD type conversion Linear alignment Linear Alignment causes broken lines to be merged into unbroken lines as they are vectorized This is used to convert dashed geometry as a single entity then the entities can be moved toa dashed layer If this box is empty collinear geometry with gaps or breaks will be vectorized without closing the gaps The gap is established by the Gap Jump setting Gap Jump Sets the distance in pixels for Linear Alignment to jump when combining mul
262. e using acadr14 cfg PCP or PC2 files contain plot styles that are created from your AutoCAD Release 14 pen mappings Color dependent plot style tables also have color mapping tables Color mapping tables are used to map plot styles to colors and thus to objects of each color when opening pre AutoCAD 2000 drawings While the color mapping table exists you cannot add delete or rename plot styles in that plot style table If you delete a color mapping table plot styles cannot be automatically assigned to objects when pre AutoCAD 2000 drawings are opened for the first time If you delete the mapping table the plot style table becomes an ordinary plot style table and is no longer useful for applying plot styles to old drawings It continues to be useful for new drawings Table View and Form View Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right You can use either the Table View tab or the Form View tab to adjust plot style settings In general the Table View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles If you have a large number of plot styles the Form view is more convenient because the plot style names are listed at the left and the properties of the selected style are displayed to the right You don t have to scroll horizontally to view the style and its properties The first plot style in a named plot style table is NORMAL and represents an obje
263. e values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction MREDO Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands a Standard toolbar Command line mredo Enter Number of Actionsnumber of actions or All Last Specify an option enter a positive number or pressENTER Reverses the specified number of actions Reverses all previous actions Reverses only the last action MSPACE Switches from paper space to a model space viewport Command line mspace Commands operate in either model space or paper space You use model space the Model tab to do drafting and design work and to create two dimensional drawings or three dimensional models You use paper space a layout tab to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting When you are in a layout you can enter MSpace on the command line to make the last viewport in the layout current and then work in model space in that viewport within the layout You can switch to model space by double clicking a viewport and you can switch to paper space by double clicking an area of paper space 197 MTEXT Creates paragraphs of text as a single multiline text mtext object e Draw menu Text Multiline Text 0 Draw toolbar Pointing device Double click a multiline text object EE Command line mtext Current text style current Text height current Specify first corner Specify opposite corner or Height Justify Line spacing Rotation Style W
264. ea selection IOP s o window Implied Cutting area Pcrossing amp Pinside They are similar in operation to the Rectangular Window selections only you select a freehand polygon Clicking Right Mouse button closes the polygon Example of Pwindow 391 Element Selection OP s Line Circle amp Arc A Using IOP Line it is possible to pick or move a raster line which crosses other raster data The key benefit is that it leaves any crossing intersections intact amp you do not need to repair any intersecting raster Just select two points over the raster line you wish to select Similarly using IOP Circle it is possible to pick or move a raster circle which crosses other raster data Again it leaves the intersections intact amp can greatly reduce editing time There are two IOP circle options O Three Point IOP circle selection or Two Point IOP circle selection with bounding circle Below is a two point IOP Circle example y y 392 r In the same way using IOP arc it is possible to isolate or move a raster arc which crosses other raster information You need to select three points to identify the arc IOP Text Selection There are three IOP selections that will isolate text All commands use the text height settings in the GTX config file GTXRAST CFG or if you have the GTXRaster CAD PLUS module you can change the sizes in the TEXT Recognition Config dialog gT CONFIG rl IOP Textwin selects text w
265. eates and controls layout viewports View menu Viewports 1 Viewport 2 Viewports 3 Viewports 4 Viewports EZ Command line mview Specify corner of viewport or ON OFF Fit Shadeplot Lock Object Polygonal Restore 2 3 4 lt Fit gt Enter an option or specify a point In a layout you can create as many viewports as you want but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time see MAXACTVP Objects in model space are visible only in active viewports Viewports that are not active are blank Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active Corner of Viewport Corner of Viewport Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport Specify opposite corner On Makes a selected viewport active An active viewport displays objects in model space The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time If your drawing contains more viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP you must turn one off to make another one active Select objects Select one or more viewports Makes a selected viewport inactive Objects in model space are not displayed in an inactive viewport Select objects Select one or more viewports 199 Fit Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the printable area When the paper background and printable area are turned off the viewport fills the display Shadeplot Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts
266. ecify first corner Specify a point 1 Specify opposite corner Specify a point 2 before ZOOM Window after ZOOM Window Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the drawing area You can select objects before or after you start the ZOOM command Using the pointing device zooms interactively to a logical extent Press ESC or ENTER to exit or right click to display the shortcut menu The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus and minus signs See Zoom Shortcut Menu for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time 378 200M Realtime cursor The current drawing area is used to determine the zooming factor ZOOM uses half of the window height to move to a zoom factor of 100 Holding down the pick button at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the top of the window zooms in to 100 Conversely holding the pick button down at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the bottom of the window zooms out by 100 Note If you place the cursor at the bottom of the window hold down the pick button and move vertically to the top of the window the zoom in factor is 200 When you have reached the zoom in limit the plus sign in the cursor disappears indicating that you can no longer zoom in When you have reached the zoom out limit the minus sign in the cursor disappears indicating that you can no longer zoom out
267. ecify the elevation for rectangles lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The value becomes the current elevation for subsequent RECTANG commands Fillet Fillet Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle Specify fillet radius for rectangles lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The value becomes the current fillet radius for subsequent RECTANG commands Thickness Thickness Specifies the thickness of the rectangle Specify thickness for rectangles lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The value becomes the current thickness for subsequent RECTANG commands a F Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn Specify line width for rectangles lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The value becomes the current polyline width for subsequent RECTANG commands REDO Reverses the effects of revious UNDO or U command e Standard toolbar LEA e Edit menu Redo Shortcut menu With no commands active and no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Redo EE Command line redo 283 REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command REDO must immediately follow the U or UNDO command REDRAW Refreshes the display in the current viewport Command line redraw or redraw for transparent use When BLIPMODE is on marker blips left by editing commands are removed from the current viewport before REDRAW after REDRAW
268. ect assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block Whenever the block is inserted all objects inherit the block s linetype The CELTYPE system variable stores the linetype name Delete Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing You can delete only unused linetypes The BYLAYER BYBLOCK and CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be deleted Note Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards The deleted linetype definition remains stored in the acad lin or acadiso lin file and can be reloaded Show Details or Hide Details Controls whether the Details section of the Linetype Manager is displayed Current Linetype Displays the current linetype name List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters To quickly select all or clear all linetypes right click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes To rename a linetype select it and then click it again and enter a new name BYLAYER BYBLOCK CONTINUOUS and xref dependent linetypes cannot be renamed The linetype name can include up to 255 characters Linetype names can contain letters digits blank spaces and the special characters dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma colon equal sign question mark
269. ect it and immediately exit SPLINEDIT 308 Fit Data Edits fit data using the following options Enter a fit data option Add Close Delete Move Purge Tangents toLerance eXit lt eXit gt Enter an option or pressENTER Note If the selected spline is closed the Close option is replaced by the Open option Add Adds fit points to a spline Specify control point lt exit gt Specify a control point or pressENTER Specify new point lt exit gt Specify a point or pressENTER Specify new point lt exit gt Specify a point or pressENTER When you select a point SPLINEDIT highlights it and the next point and interprets the new point to go between the highlighted points Use the Undo option to remove the last point added Selecting the last point on an open spline highlights only that point and SPLINEDIT adds the new point after the last If you select the first point on an open spline you have the option of placing the new point before or after the first point Specify new point or After Before lt exit gt Specify a point enter an option or pressENTER Specify new point lt exit gt Specify a point or pressENTER The point is added and the spline is refitted through the new set of points new point selected point iti e a E result Close Open If the selected spline is closed the Close option is replaced by the Open option Close Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous smooth at its endpoints If the spline
270. ection of the rotation angle the Text Formatting control appears with the In Place Text Editor Begin adding text entries The keyboard Return key will add a new line for text entry Text Formatting Standard Fr Arial 37 IA wi 18001 i Mechanical 4 To end editing click the OK button on the Text Formatting toolbar or click outside the In Place Text Editor After closing the text editor the raster text will appear Raster text is created upon closure of the text editor Mechanical Raster text with a vector text overlay is created if the GTX gHybridmode command was enabled before initiating the gText command Mechanical 500 gTRACE Availability GT or GTRACE GTX Convert Trace Vectors GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon Function gTRACE traces over raster objects with vector entities For a straight line two points are picked to determine the extents of the raster line Circles and arcs can also be copied to vector by picking three points Note If vectorizing raster geometry depicted in a special linetype you might want to establish a current layer with that linetype first The resulting vector geometry is placed on the current CAD layer and is rendered in its linetype Vector entities will be created using the current image and linetype settings Options Line Default option Trace a raster line or series of lines with one vector line Intersections are preserved If points are p
271. ed Lists shapes and the files in which the shapes are defined If you enter a question mark the following prompt is displayed Enter shape name s to list lt gt Enter a name list or pressENTER If you enter a name the program lists the name of the file in which the shape definition exists and ends SHAPE If you enter an asterisk the program lists shape names and ends SHAPE SKETCH Creates a series of freehand line segments 300 EE Command line sketch The following information is based on the assumption that Tablet mode is on Record increment lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The record increment value defines the length of the line segments The pointing device must be moved a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line larger record increment smaller record increment Sketching is captured as a series of independent lines Setting the SKPOLY system variable to a nonzero value produces a polyline for each contiguous sequence of sketched lines rather than multiple line objects Sketch PeneXitQuitRecordEraseConnect Enter an option or press a pointer button Raises and lowers the sketching pen The pen must be raised before you can select menu items with the pointing device Records and reports the number of temporary lines sketched and ends the command Discards all temporary lines sketched since the start of SKETCH or the last use of the Record option and ends the command
272. ed STRETCH does not modify 3D solids polyline width tangent or curve fitting information Base Point Specify base point or Displacement lt ast displacement gt Specify a base point or enter displacement coordinates Specify second point or lt use first point as displacement gt Specify a second point or pressENTER to use the previous coordinates as a displacement Displacement Specify displacement lt ast value gt Enter displacement values for X Y and optionally Z 3 If you enter a second point the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the second point If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt the first point is treated as an X Y Z displacement STYLE 0 Format menu Text Style Command line style or style for transparent use Creates modifies or sets named text styles 316 Style Name Displays text style names adds new styles and renames and deletes existing styles The list contains defined style names and displays the current style by default To change the current style select another style from the list or choose New to create a new style Style names can be up to 255 characters long They can contain letters numbers and the special characters dollar sign underscore _ and hyphen New Displays the New Text Style dialog box and automatically supplies the name stylen where nis the number of the supplied style for th
273. een 1 and 100 representing the degree to hich a character matches those it has already seen Continuous curves that can be represented by the polyline or pline vector entities Typically found on topographical maps AY o rotate a raster image so that it is no longer skewed Despeckle o remove speckles or small marks that contain no meaningful information from a drawing Display Color he color in which unselected raster is displayed Dots Per Inch The number of dots per linear inch calibrating a raster image to real space A number built into your HASP key identifying your software license You can determine this number by running CUSTOMER EXE 510 IC Intelligent Character Recognition Conversion of raster text into ACAD text entities Integer A number evenly divisible by one 1 2 3 4 5 are integers 1 25 3 4 and 05 are not integers Intelligent Object Picking The proprietary method by hich GTXImage CAD series selects raster shapes from a canned drawing as if they were distinct vector entities MemoHASP Hardware lock that connects directly to the computer running GTXImage CAD series NetHASP Hardware lock that connects to a NetHASP license manager erver NetHASP keys have more than one license per key Object Snapping ACAD mode of snapping the cursor to a point relative to ector geometry Pixel Pixels or Plcture ELements are the tiny dots with which a canner portrays a drawing Polyline Smooth Index A numb
274. ees 532 PROGOSS FIOW RR M E EA he athe th son E tal Me cee ODIO A RN eet E ak 532 Configuration FOS ais 532 10 THE OSRMAP CF Gi FILE siiec xi ote hee E eh dled dae Ae acetate ON ta 533 Command Line ENIES 0 ta dae sbane ise E 536 INDEX O TINO 538 Introduction This manual describes the installation and use of Version 14 of the GTXImage CAD Series The Series consists of two software products GTXImage CAD amp GTXImage CAD PLUS GTXImage CAD loads raster images and allows image clean up restoration 8 comprehensive editing GTXImage CAD PLUS provides the same functionallity as GTXImage CAD with the added capability to convert binary raster into AutoCAD vector entities amp text Product Functionality Product Raster Raster CAD R2V ICR Text Batch Level Cleanup Editing Drafting Conversion Conversion Conversion GTXImage X X X CAD GTXImage X X X X X X CAD PLUS GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD provides capability to efficiently clean enhance and Edit raster images lt includes the following features e Raster Snapping that emulates AutoCAD object snapping to raster data e Intelligent Object Picking IOP makes selection of raster objects as easy as handling CAD entities Allows selection of complex raster data which preserve raster intersections instead of creating gaps e Intelligent Enhancement helps improve drawing quality and legibility while reducing raster file storage requirements by 20 30 over already
275. eeze available only from a layout tab Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports For example freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created layout viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in existing viewports If you later create a viewport that requires dimensions you can override the default setting by changing the current viewport setting Description Optional Describes the layer or the layer filter List View Shortcut Menu Provides options for modifying the list and modifying selected layers and layer filters Maximize Column Changes the width of the column to maximize display of the column content This option is available on the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right click a column heading Maximize All Columns Changes the width of all columns to maximize display of the column content This option is available on the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right click a column heading Show Filter Tree Displays the tree view Clear this option to hide the tree view Show Filters in Layer List Displays filters at the top of the list view The filters are listed in alphabetical order Clear the check mark to display only layers in the list view Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer CLAYER system variable New Layer Creates a new layer The list displays a layer named LAYER1 You can edit this lay
276. em Current 3D Graphics Display System 220 Lists the available 3D graphics display systems The default is the Heidi 3D graphics display system GSHEIDI10 Properties Displays a 3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box for the current 3D graphics display system In the 3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box you set options that affect the way objects are displayed and system resources are used in the 3D Orbit view The options you set also affect the way objects are shaded with SHADEMODE Current Pointing Device Controls options that relate to the pointing device Current Pointing Device Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers Current System Pointing Device Sets the system pointing device as current Wintab Compatible Digitizer Sets the Wintab compatible digitizer as current Accept Input From Specifies whether the program accepts input from both a mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set Layout Regen Options Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model and layout tabs For each tab the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch to that tab Changing these settings can improve performance LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable Note The effectiveness of changing these settings depends on several factors See LAYOUTRE
277. en Creating a New Layout Specifies that the Page Setup dialog box is displayed when a new layout tab is selected or a new layout is created You can reset this function by turning on the Show Page Setup Dialog for New Layouts option on the Display tab of the Options dialog box PAN Moves the view in the current viewport er e Standard toolbar e View menu Pan Realtime Shortcut menu With no objects selected right click in the drawing area and choose Pan Command line pan or pan for transparent use The following prompt is displayed you can pan the drawing display in real time Press ESC or ENTER to exit or right click to display a shortcut menu If you enter pan at the Command prompt PAN displays alternative prompts on the command line and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display 231 PARTIALOAD Loads additional geometry into a partially opened drawing File Menu Partial Load E Command line partiaload The Partial Load dialog box is displayed PARTIALOAD can be used only in a partially open drawing To partially open a drawing use OPEN and choose Partial Open in the Select File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box Any information that is loaded into the file using PARTIALOAD cannot be unloaded not even with UNDO If you enter partiaload at the Command prompt PARTIALOAD displays prompts on the command line Displays the views and layers available for specifying additio
278. en Layout The left half of the Batch Command Center displays the input and output files The right half controls the s GTX OSR V5 0 Remove E CAD Plus v5 0 mapderr E GTX Raster CAD Plus v5 0 gtxvbelt E GTX Raster CAD Plus v5 OVhybrid cs E GTX Raster CAD Plus v5 0 icat3 cq E GTX Raster ANA 4 Output Files 4 E GTX Raster CAD Plus v5 0 gtumech2 ca4 Bae Basic Advanced Type Units cp Om C Inch C mm Destination E GTX Raster CAD Plus v5 0 0S Output Format DXF y I Seperate Layers Filter Size 0 010 Max Line Width 0 080 Max char size 0 080 Vectorize Text W Arc amp Circle IV Arrow Heads M Rectify es ae IV Compose Segments Scheme Save As Delete M 524 parameters of each raster file s conversion The Convert button begins conversion once the Import Files list is completed An advanced pane allows detailed configuration of conversion results Import Files The Import Files window displays the raster files to be converted Click on the Import Files button in the upper left corner of the main screen to specify the raster files to convert A file dialog will open Look ix lo Seyis Select the file or files to be converted Use the shift and control keys to select multiple files In the main screen you can remove any raster file from the list with the Feny renter cot Remove button You can also import additional files Fisc
279. encounters another island within the island You can also set the Normal style by adding N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank You can also set the Outer style by adding O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them You can also set the Ignore style by adding I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable The anh Outer and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries Boundary Retention Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects and determines the object type applied to those objects Retain Boundaries 141 Creates boundary objects from the temporary hatch boundaries and adds them to the drawing Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object The resulting boundary object can be a region or a polyline object This option is available only if Retain Boundaries is checked Boundary Set Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to defin
280. engthen to meet the boundary the following message is displayed Object does not intersect an edge 473 gRESIZE Availability GRE or GRESIZE GTX Enhance gt Resize GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon gRESIZE changes the size of the raster work area You can increase the dimensions in both positive and negative directions This is useful to accommodate pasting in additional raster files scaling up the drawing or making edits that would move data beyond the existing limits You can also reduce the work area to reduce memory requirements for instance when the actual data you need occupies only a small portion of the work area Instructions 1 Select gRESIZE This command could fail in limited memory situations Do you want to save the raster image first Yes lt No gt 2 If you have not recently saved your data respond Yes You will be prompted for a file name and then returned to the command Select lower left corner of raster limits lt X XXX X XXX gt 3 Select a point with the mouse or type in the coordinates for the point to be the lower left corner of the work area Negative numbers are acceptable Select upper right corner of raster limits 4 Selecta point with the mouse or type in the coordinates for the point to be the upper right corner of the work area Make sure that all the existing raster data is enclosed in the resulting window Any raster data not included will be eliminated from the database
281. ent settings and names You can specify which OSR configuration file to use by means of the cfg option Except for RLC input files file names can have any extensions The program can read the file header to determine the raster format If the output file name does not have an extension that indicates the format the vof vector output format option must be used followed by the letters that indicate the vector format Configuration Files Configuration files are used with this program to customize and streamline the processing The files can be edited with a text editor The entry names and settings are not case sensitive The separator between the name and is not space and tab sensitive The separator between and the setting is also not space and tab sensitive lt CR gt is the delimiter of each character string If an entry is eliminated or the setting is blank or not valid you will get an error message and the default setting will be used The configuration file s used for a translation or conversion must be accessible for the program to operate The program will first search the current directory then the home directory For conversion the program will also check for the specific vector configuration file in the directory specified in the VectorPath of the OSR CFG file 532 If a needed configuration file cannot be found the Program will create one with the original default settings in the current working direct
282. ent Enter X and Y offset values to indicate copy placement Instructions 1 Invoke gMOVE Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster data to be moved The selected raster will be highlighted 3 When you have selected all the items to be moved press RETURN Base point or displacement There are two ways to respond You can either select the first of two points that will show the movement graphically or type in the offset values in the form X Y Since the system does not know whether the X Y value typed in is the base point or the displacement distance the response to the second prompt clarifies this Using Base Point a Select a point either by using the cursor or by typing the coordinates This will be a reference point for the moving process Base point or displacement Second point of displacement b A rubber banding line will appear attached at the base point Select a second point to define the relative distance and angle for the new placement of the data The data will appear in the designated location in the main raster color The raster will disappear from the original location The command will be terminated Using Displacement a Type in the X and Y values for the displacement in the same format used to enter coordinates You will see the same prompt as above Second point of displacement Press RETURN in response to the prompt to indicate that the original entry was the displacement The raster data
283. ent gt Specify a point 1 enter a value or press ENTER The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style does not have a fixed height Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Specify an angle or press ENTER Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text height 9 wer i 1 rotation angle Justify 324 Justify Controls justification of the text Enter an option Align Fit Center Middle Right TL T C T R ML MC MR BL BC BR You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt Align Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the endpoints of the baseline Specify first endpoint of text baseline Specify a point 1 Specify second endpoint of text baseline Specify a point 2 Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height The longer the text string the shorter the characters BUSHING FIT 4 REQ EQ EP Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify first endpoint of text baseline Specify a point 1 Specify second endpoint of text baseline Specify a point 2 Specify height lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text 212 7 FOR 48 AUSHIME PRESS FIl 4 REG P The height is the distance in drawing uni
284. enter a new name in the box above Then select RENAME to change the image name You can also add new images at this stage by selecting the NEW button Select Image Name p RED 2 Rename New You can now move onto select the colors for a particular binary image 484 GTX Color Seperation color mapema bf Feo abate fumgred l wer t nerwe New Acad Lever E gt gt gt Patruna J Edt maga nese dich Renaree button Saat Acad Layer E apobcable Laft raasta click ba select colors Lett mouse drag to select maultile colors Right raasta cick to dapiay colar properties Sah bo newt reaps Repeat stapa Okk Apply button to Meh Hp cored f toch Segeraticn Firstly highlight the image name you wish to work on Then using the cursor drag amp drop the required colors from the left Available payne into the right Assigned payne You can pick the colors individually or in blocks To select a block of colors hold down the left mouse button over the group of colors you wish to select Dialog operation instructions are Edit image name click Rename button Select Acad Layer if applicable Left mouse click to select colors Left mouse drag to select multiple colors Right mouse click to display color properties Switch to next image Repeat above steps Click Apply button to finish Colors with a notch in the bottom Right H
285. entifying the reference to edit and controls how the reference is selected Reference Name Displays the reference selected for in place editing and any references nested within the selected reference Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested reference If multiple references are displayed choose a specific xref or block to modify Only one reference can be edited in place at a time References that are inserted into a drawing using MINSERT cannot be selected for in place reference editing Dynamic blocks are not displayed in the list and are not available for editing through this dialog box Preview Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference The preview image displays the reference as it was last saved in the drawing The reference preview image is not updated when changes are saved back to the reference Path Displays the file location of the selected reference If the selected reference is a block no path is displayed Automatically Select All Nested Objects Controls whether nested objects are included automatically in the reference editing session If this option is checked all the objects in the selected reference will be automatically included in the reference editing session Prompt to Select Nested Objects Controls whether nested objects must be selected individually in the reference editing session If this option is checked after you close the Reference Edit dialo
286. ents of the Favorites folder in the content area The Favorites folder contains shortcuts to items you access often You can add items to Favorites either by right clicking the 36 content area or right clicking an item in the tree view and then clicking Add to Favorites To delete an item from Favorites use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu Note The DesignCenter folder is automatically added to Favorites This folder contains drawings with discipline specific blocks that you can insert in drawings Home Returns DesignCenter to your home folder On installation the home folder is set to Sample DesignCenter Change the home folder using the shortcut menu in the tree view Tree View Toggle Displays and hides the tree view Hide the tree view if you need more space in your drawing area When the tree view is hidden you can use the content area to navigate to containers and to load content The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you re using the History list in the tree view Preview Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below the content area If there is no preview image saved with the selected item the Preview area is empty Description Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a pane below the content area If a preview image is also displayed the description is displayed below it If there is no descripti
287. enu Press SHIFT while right clicking in the drawing area and choose Osnap Settings 0 Status bar Osnap ES Command line osnap or osnap for transparent use The Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed If you enter osnap at the Command prompt OSNAP presents options on the command line Current osnap modes current Enter list of object snap modes Enter names of object snap modes separated with commas or enter none or off PAGESETUP Controls the page layout plotting device paper size and other settings for each new layout File menu Page Setup Manager Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager Command line pagesetup The Page Setup Manager is displayed 229 Specifies the page setup for the current layout or drawing sheet You can also create named page setups modify existing ones or import page setups from other drawings Current Layout or Current Sheet Set Lists the current layout to which the page setup will be applied If the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager displays the name of the current sheet set If the Page Setup Manager is opened from a layout displays the name of the current layout Layout icon Displayed when the Page Setup Manager is opened from a layout Ep Sheet set icon Displayed when the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager a A Page Setups Displays the current page setup s
288. enu Availability GCR or GCREATE GTX Imaging gt Create Raster Area GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon gCREATE establishes an unnamed raster image entity on the current layer The raster data can be modified within the limits which can be changed later using the gRESIZE command The MaxNumPixels configuration parameter limits the number of pixels allowed in a new raster image The default value is MaxNumPixels 973440000 which at 400 dpi could generate an image measuring 78 x78 Instructions 1 Select gCREATE Enter raster resolution DPI lt 200 gt 2 Enter a positive integer select lower left corner of raster limits lt 0 000 0 000 gt 3 Normally you enter 0 0 for this value However you can select any point either by typing coordinates or selecting it graphically Select upper right corner of raster limits 4 Arubber banding box will appear attached at the first point Select the point for the upper right corner either with coordinates or graphically Warning When creating a new raster image in a hybrid environment consider the drawing s scale Raster images will normally be about the same size as paper media Create images at paper size and then scale them against your vector data You do not want to create a raster image the size of a house or a map it will take a long time if it works at all 5 The program will check whether there is sufficient memory for the work area you designate
289. er name immediately The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list color on or off state and so on Delete Layer Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition You can delete only unreferenced layers Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS layers containing objects including objects in block definitions the current layer and xref dependent layers Note Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards Change Description 164 Adds a description or changes the text in the description for the selected layer or filter The description for a filter is added to the filter and to all layers in the filter Remove from Group Filter Removes the selected layers from the group layer filter that is selected in the tree view Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view Clear All Removes selection from all items in the list view except the most recently selected layer or filter Select All but Current Selects everything displayed in the list view except the current layer Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the items that are currently selected Invert Layer Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property filter Layer Filters Displays a list of layer filters including All and All Used Layers Click a
290. er of objects maximum depth of the branch and average number of objects per node If REDRAW and object selection are very slow you can improve their performance For example if there are 50 megabytes of memory available and the current drawing has 50 000 objects with only 1 000 nodes in the index tree increase the TREEDEPTH value to improve performance Each node consumes about 80 bytes of memory The fewer objects per node of the oct tree the better the performance Trims objects at a cutting edge defined by other objects 0 Modify toolbar EZ 0 Modify menu Trim EE Command line trim Current settings Projection current Edge current Select cutting edges Select objects or lt select all gt Select one or more objects and press ENTER or press ENTER to select all displayed objects 334 selected cutting edge Select the objects that define the cutting edges to which you want to trim an object or press ENTER to select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges TRIM projects the cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system UCS Note To select cutting edges that include blocks you can use only the single selection Crossing Fence and Select All options Select object to trim Or shift select to extend or Fence Crossing Project Edge eRase Undo Select an object to trim hold down SHIFT and select an object to extend it instead or enter an option Spec
291. er representing the smoothness of polylines generated when vectorizing raster contours Pixel data from a scanned drawing stored as a file There is a wide range of standards and formats for raster files he ability to pick a point relative to raster geometry such as Snapping to the end of a raster line Accompanies a raster file and has the same filename Stores information about its scale orientation loadrotate etting or results of invoking gTURN units inch mm A device which converts a drawing into raster data by measuring and recording the intensity of light that is reflected Slightly rotated When a drawing is fed slightly crooked into a scanner the resulting raster image is skewed Transparent Zoom he ability to change your view of a drawing while in the middle of a command Type Z RETURN ACAD starts oom command Old command resumes upon completion 511 Definition Vectorize o convert raster data into vector format as used in a CAD environment 512 Appendix 2 Configuration The GTXImage CAD Series receives many of its default values from a configuration file GTXRAST CFG This ASCII file can be modified with a text editor such as Notepad The list below shows the default contents of GTXRAST CFG if you had installed it for using inches The entries can be listed in any order Here is a standard configuration file EM GTX Configuration REM Use REM or rem for comment lines b
292. er symbol in front of the tolerance value Click the box to insert the diameter symbol Second Box 329 Creates the tolerance value Enter a value in the box Third Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box in which you select a modifying symbol These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size Select the symbol you want to use The dialog box closes The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box Tolerance 2 Creates the second tolerance value in the feature control frame Specify the second tolerance value in the same way as the first go 1 MAX Datum 1 Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame The datum reference can consist of a value and a modifying symbol A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference used to establish the tolerance zone for a feature First Box Creates the datum reference value Enter a value in the box Second Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box in which you select a modifying symbol These symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference Select the symbol you want to use The dialog box closes The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box Datum 2 Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary dat
293. erence object s radius will appear in the angle brackets A rubber banding line stretches from the center of the reference object to the cursor Press RETURN to accept the value graphically select with the left mouse button the desired radius type a new desired radius value or type D and then enter a new diameter 410 gCARC Type Meu Availability GCARC GTX Edit gt Change Arc GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon GQ The gCARC command stretches arcs Change the radius of an arc by moving its circumference and endpoint This command also merges or smoothes fragmented and irregular arcs To smooth choose the raster entity and redraw it without changing its geometry Arc selection requires 5 point selection Command _gcarc Select start point of reference arc point 1 Select point on arc point 2 Select end of reference arc point 3 the selection is highlighted Select new circumference point point 4 keep or move the point Select new endpoint point 5 Select start point of reference arc The command is ready for a second arc selection Press the return key or escape key to terminate the command 411 gCCIRCLE Type Menu Availability GCCIRCLE GTX Edit gt Change Circle GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon 3 The gCCIRCLE command stretches raster circles Change the radius of a circle by moving its circumference This command also merges or smoothes fragmented and irregular circles To smooth choose the raster entity
294. ern end style join style and color screening from the front panel on the plotter Enter 0 or Automatic to specify that the program should make the virtual pen assignment from the AutoCAD Color Index The virtual pen setting in a plot style is used only by non pen plotters and only if they are configured for virtual pens If this is the case all the other style settings are ignored and only the virtual pen is used If a non pen plotter is not configured for virtual pens then the virtual and physical pen information in the plot style is ignored and all the other settings are used You can configure your non pen plotter for virtual pens under Vector Graphics on the Device and Document Settings tab in the PC3 Editor Under Color Depth select 255 Virtual Pens Screening Specifies a color intensity setting that determines the amount of ink placed on the paper while plotting The valid range is O through 100 Selecting O reduces the color to white Selecting 100 displays the color at its full intensity In order for screening to work the Enable Dithering option must be selected 321 Linetype Displays a list with a sample and a description of each linetype The default setting for plot style linetype is Use Object Linetype If you assign a plot style linetype the linetype overrides the object s linetype at plot time Adaptive Adjustment Adjusts the scale of the linetype to complete the linetype pattern If you don t select Adaptive Adju
295. es G TXlmageCAD series V11 OSR is on the system path then it will run 2 If the directory is not in the system path a file dialog will be displayed 3 Locate the GTX OSR executable OSR32 exe and select Open GTX OSR will run 459 gPASTE Availability GP or GPASTE GTX Raster Edit gt Paste GTXImage CAD GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon gPASTE inserts a saved raster image at a specified location on the graphics screen You can use this command to insert saved raster onto an existing image or onto a blank graphics screen to create a new image The image may be scaled or rotated as it is placed The default values for file format and name will be taken from the GTXRAST CFG file or the current database but can be overridden Raster files of any acceptable format can be used 1 Raster data cut from images is oriented relative to the raster file s coordinate system When cutting raster data from a rotated image entity the raster is not necessarily saved as displayed within GTXImage CAD Also when pasting raster data into a rotated image the raster data appears at the image entity s native rotation 2 If there is no active image gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gPASTE If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which raster data can be pasted Options Source Options File Insert raster data from a raster file Buffer Insert raster data from a temporary buffer previously cre
296. es based on the option or value that you last specified or based on the settings of certain system variables 31 Typically the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take Most command line prompts begin with the word enter select or specify These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt Terminology in command line prompts If the prompt starts with You can Select Select objects on the screen using your pointing device Enter Enter text on the command line Specify Use your pointing device or enter text on the command line to select a point location on the screen Selecting Options on the Command Line To select one of the options contained within the straight brackets you can enter the entire option name or only the capitalized letters and then press ENTER or SPACEBAR To select the default option enclosed in angle brackets lt gt if available press ENTER or SPACEBAR You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by right clicking in the drawing area while the command is active The options available on the command line appear in the shortcut menu Some prompts ask you to enter data rather than or as an alternative to choosing an option To do so enter the text on the command line and press ENTER or SPACEBAR However be aware that when the command line prompt requests an object name SPACEBAR inserts a space on the command line rather than acting as ENTER This allows
297. es eliminate wasted space Incremental saves are faster but they increase the size of your drawing If 215 you set Incremental Save Percentage to 0 every save is a full save For optimum performance set the value to 50 If hard disk space becomes an issue set the value to 25 If you set the value to 20 or less performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS commands slows significantly ISAVEPERCENT system variable File Safety Precautions Assists in avoiding data loss and in detecting errors Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you specify You can specify the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable SAVEFILE read only stores the name of the Autosave file Note Automatic save is disabled when the Block Editor is open Minutes Between Saves When Automatic Save is on specifies how often the drawing is saved SAVETIME system variable Create Backup Copy with Each Save pecifies whether a backup copy of a drawing is created when you save the drawing The backup copy is created in the same location as the drawing ISAVEBAK system variable Full Time CRC Validation Specifies whether a cyclic redundancy check CRC should be performed each time an object is read into the drawing CRC is an error checking mechanism If your drawings are being corrupted and you suspect a hardware problem or a software error turn this option on Maintain a Log File Writes the contents of the
298. es the color associated with the selected layers Clicking the color name displays the Select Color dialog box Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers Clicking the linetype name displays the Select Linetype dialog box Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers Clicking the lineweight name displays the Lineweight dialog box Plot Style Changes the plot style associated with the selected layers If you are working with color dependent plot styles the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1 you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer Clicking the plot style displays the Select Plot Style dialog box Plot Controls whether the selected layers are plotted If you turn off plotting for a layer the objects on that layer are still displayed Layers that are off or frozen are not plotted regardless of the Plot setting 163 Current VP Freeze available only from a layout tab Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports Current VP Freeze is an override to the Thaw setting in the drawing That is you can freeze a layer in the current viewport if it s thawed in the drawing but you can t thaw a layer in the current viewport if it s frozen or off in the drawing A layer is not visible when it is set to Off or Frozen in the drawing New VP Fr
299. es the original first point with the new point that you specify Specify first break point Specify second break point Z 4 cap before break after break The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify If the second point is not on the object the nearest point on the object is selected therefore to break off one end of a line arc or polyline specify the second point beyond the end to be removed To split an object in two without erasing a portion enter the same point for both the first and second points You can do this by entering to specify the second point Lines arcs circles polylines ellipses splines donuts and several other object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed The program converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point Y Y Y NJ ee 61 BROWSER Launches the default web browser defined in your system s registry 0 Web toolbar EE Command line browser Enter Web location URL lt current gt Press ENTER or enter a new location you don t need to enter http before the location Pressing ENTER displays your web browser which automatically connects to the location you specify Because BROWSER does not append http to web locations you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser Note BROWSER requires that you have Netscape Navigator
300. esh Selection If you select a polygon mesh the following prompt is displayed Enter an option Edit vertex Smooth surface Desmooth Mclose Nclose Undo Enter an option or press ENTERto end the command Mclose and Nclose are replaced by Mopen and Nopen if the polygon mesh is currently closed in the M or N direction Edit Vertex Edits individual vertices of a polygon mesh that can be seen as a rectangular M by N array where M and N are the dimensions specified in 3DMESH The SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 system variables store M and N values for RULESURF TABSURF REVSURF and EDGESURF Enter an option Next Previous Left Right Up Down Move REgen exit lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER Pressing ENTER accepts the current default which is either Next or Previous wenex to edit ETN N rightleft i f Nghe i NT M upidown repositioned in 30 space Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Left Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the N direction The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Right Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the N direction The marker does not wrap around from the end to t
301. ess ENTER to use the default name Paste Pastes a tool from the Clipboard to the current tab Properties Displays the Tool Properties dialog box where you can change the properties of the selected tool Rename Renames the selected tool Rename Tool Palette Renames the current tool palette Size Changes the cursor to a four direction arrow Drag the right edge or the bottom edge of the tool palette to change its size 332 Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box View Options Displays the View Options dialog box where you can control how tools are displayed TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Closes the Tool Palettes window Tools menu Tool Palettes Window Command line toolpalettesclose Closes the Tool Palettes window TRACE Creates solid lines E Command line trace Specify trace width lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify start point Specify a point 1 Specify next point Specify a point 2 Specify next point Specify a point 3 or press ENTER to end the command The endpoints of a trace are on the center line and are always cut square TRACE automatically calculates the correct bevels for connection to adjacent segments Each segment is drawn after you either specify the next segment or press ENTER Because of the way bevels are handled TRACE has no undo option Traces are solid filled when Fill mode is on When Fill mode is off only the outline of a trace is displayed TRANS
302. estores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system The origin can be changed from its default 0 0 0 position using the Move option of the UCS command To reset the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system right click the name in the list and choose Reset Origin from the shortcut menu The origin is restored to its default location 0 0 0 relative to the specified base coordinate system Depth Shortcut Menu or Double Click Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that 348 passes through the origin of the coordinate system In the Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box enter a value or choose the Select New Origin button to use the pointing device to specify a new depth or a new origin Settings Tab UCS Dialog Box Settings Tab UCS Dialog Box Displays and modifies UCS icon settings and UCS settings saved with a viewport UCS Icon Settings Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport Display at UCS Origin Point Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system in the current viewport If this option is cleared or if the origin of the coordinate system is not visible in the viewport the UCS icon is displayed at the lower left corner of the viewport Apply to All Active Viewports Applies the UCS icon settings to all active viewports in the current drawing UCS Sett
303. ets a different page setup as current creates a new page setup modifies an existing page setup and imports page setups from other drawings Current Page Setup Displays the page setup that is applied to the current layout Displays Not applicable if the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager because you cannot apply a page setup to an entire sheet set after it has been created Page Setup List Lists the page setups that are available to apply to the current layout or when you publish a sheet set If the Page Setup Manager is opened from a layout the current page setup is selected by default The list includes the named page setups and layouts that are available in the drawing Layouts that have a named page setup applied to them are enclosed in asterisks with the named page setup in parentheses for example Layout 1 System Scale to fit You can double click a page setup in this list to set it as the current page setup for the current layout If the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager only named page setups in the page setup overrides file a drawing template dwf file that have Plot Area set to Layout or Extents are listed The first page setup in the list is selected by default Any of these page setups can be applied temporarily for a PUBLISH operation The shortcut menu also provides options for removing and renaming page setups Set Current Sets the selected page setup as the c
304. etting is saved in the drawing To change the default for new drawings consider specifying this setting in the template files on which you base your new drawings VIEWRES command Segments in a Polyline Curve Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each polyline curve The higher the number the greater the performance impact Set this option to a low value such as 4 to optimize performance for drawing Values range from 32767 to 32767 The default setting is 8 This setting is saved in the drawing SPLINESEGS system variable Rendered Object Smoothness Controls the smoothness of shaded and rendered curved solids The value you enter for Rendered Object Smoothness is multiplied by the value you enter for Arc and Circle Smoothness to determine how to display solid objects To improve performance set Rendered Object Smoothness to 1 or less when drawing A higher number decreases display performance and increases rendering time The valid range is 0 01 to 10 The default setting is 0 5 This setting is saved in the drawing FACETRES system variable Contour Lines per Surface Sets the number of contour lines per surface on objects A higher number decreases display performance and increases rendering time The valid range is 0 to 2047 The default setting is 4 This setting is saved in the drawing ISOLINES system variable Display Performance Controls display settings that affect performance Pan and Zoom with Raster and
305. evel for the GTXImage CAD series to run Settings include ICAD ICADPLUS DemoMode Determines whether GTXImage CAD operates in demonstration mode Although GTXImage CAD will revert to demo mode if a HASP key is not present this process can take up to a few minutes If you install GTXImage CAD specifically for demonstration purposes DemoMode YES causes it to automatically enter demonstration mode without this delay DemoMode NO default setting causes GTXImage CAD to look for the HASP key when it first runs Zero_Pline Determines how polylines of zero width are rasterized 0 causes zero width plines to rasterized like other entities 1 causes them to rasterize at 1 pixel wide HaspTimeOut Determines the number of minutes idle time the GTXlmage CAD Series license server will allow before de activating an active license and making it available again Must be at least 120 Hasp_Type Specifies the type of HASP security key being used Available settings are Default Japan_IBM and Japan_NEC 518 RefDelLoad Specifies the behavior of gATTACH as it loads a raster file with an associated REF file If set to 1 the REF is deleted If set to 0 the REF file is kept DefaultRasterLayer Establishes the name of a layer on which images are placed when attached using gATTACH RasterColor defines the layer color for the layer named in the DefaultRasterLayer config parameter Any color from 0 255 can be used BkCompMode When set to 1 this override
306. ext 445 gHYBRIDMODE Availability GHYBRIDMODE GTXConvert gt Hybrid Mode GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS con O Enabling the hybrid mode will result in a vector overlay of raster that is drawn using any of the GTX raster drawing commands Hybrid mode value 1 is enabled and value 0 is disabled Command ghybridmode HYBRIDMODE lt 0 gt 1 Hybrid Hybrid gLine gLine2 Hybrid Hybrid gArc gCircle Hybrid Hybrid gRectangle gRotrectangle Hybrid gText Hybrid 446 Image Frame Availability ImageFrame GTX Imaging gt Modify Images gt Image Frame GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon ss ImageFrame sets frames for all image entities to on or off Sets the GTXImage CAD ImageFrame variable 447 Image Transparency Availability Transparency GTX Imaging gt Modify Images gt Image Transparency GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Transparency makes all images transparent when selected from the Imaging toolbar Otherwise lets you set the transparency mode for selected images Icon 448 gINACTIVE Availability GINA or GTX Imaging gt Deactivate Image GTXImage CAD GINACTIVE GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon ka gINACTIVE deactivates the active image entity freeing memory In order to edit the image you must reinvoke gACTIVE and choose the image 449 gINFO Icon Availability Glor GINFO GTX Imaging gt Raster Info GTXImage CAD GTXlmage CAD PLUS 1 gINFO displays details about
307. ext is on each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects QOTEXT off OTEST on QUICKCALC Opens the QuickCalc calculator 0 Standard toolbar e Tools menu QuickCalc Shortcut menu Right click and click QuickCalc E Command line quickcalc Displays the QuickCalc calculator QUIT Exits the prgram 280 O File menu Exit Command line quit Quits the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved If the drawing has been modified you are prompted to save or discard the changes before quitting You can quit a file that has been opened in read only mode if you have made no modifications or if you are willing to discard them To save modifications to a read only drawing use the SAVEAS command to save the drawing under another name RAY Creates a semi infinite line Draw menu Ray Command line ray Specify start point Specify a point 1 Specify through point Specify a point for the ray to pass through 2 The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point The prompt for a through point is redisplayed so you can create multiple tays Press ENTER to end the command ray RECOVER Repairs a damaged drawing File menu Drawing Utilities Recover Co
308. f the selected custom pattern Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied Type and Pattern Specifies the type of hatch and the pattern Type Sets the pattern type User defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path You can control the angle and scale of any pattern Predefined patterns are stored in the acad pat or acadiso pat files supplied with the product Pattern Lists the available predefined patterns The six most recently used predefined patterns appear at the top of the list HATCH stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predefined Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to help you make a selection Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern You can click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box When the SOLID pattern is selected you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select Color Dialog BoxSelect Color dialog box Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns The six most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list The name of the selected pattern is stored in the HPNAME system variable The Custom Pattern option is available only if y
309. feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog boxes see TOLERANCE You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes After you specify the geometric tolerance LEADER ends TEA r r 4 Copy Copies text a multiline text object a feature control frame with geometric tolerances or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line The copy is associated with the leader line meaning that if the copied object moves the end of the leader line moves with it The display of the hook line depends on the object copied Select an object to copy The object is inserted and LEADER ends The value of the current text gap see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable determines where the text and multiline text objects are inserted Blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances are attached to the end of the leader line Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line The prompts are the same as for INSERT The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line meaning that if the block moves the end of the leader line moves with it No hook line is displayed Enter block name or Enter a block name or enter to list all blocks in the drawing feds A None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line Mtext Creates text using
310. fies the name of the orthographic coordinate system Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE system variable The parallel plane of the UCSBASE coordinate system can be an XY YZ or XZ plane Note You can specify the depth or a new origin for the selected orthographic UCS See Depth option Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system You can also restore a selected coordinate system by double clicking its name in the list or by right clicking the name and choosing Set Current Details Displays the UCS Details dialog box which displays UCS coordinate data You can also view the details about a selected coordinate system by right clicking the name and choosing Details Relative To Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic UCSs By default WCS is the base coordinate system The list displays all the named UCSs in the current drawing Whenever you change the Relative To setting the origin of the selected orthographic UCS is restored to its default position If you save an orthographic coordinate system in a drawing as part of a viewport configuration or if you select a setting in Relative To other than World the orthographic coordinate system name changes to UNNAMED to distinguish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system Reset Shortcut Menu Only R
311. file The geometry on selected layers is loaded into the drawing including both model space and paper space geometry No layers are selected to load by default You can load geometry from multiple layers Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing Any information that is currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing Load Geometry 232 Specifies whether geometry from a layer is loaded into the drawing or not If Load Geometry is selected the geometry from the layer is loaded into the drawing Any information that is currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded Load All Selects Load Geometry for all layers You can also right click and choose Load All from the shortcut menu to load geometry from all layers Clear All Specifies that no geometry be loaded into the drawing clears the Load Geometry option for all layers It is recommended that you load geometry from at least one layer into the drawing If you do not select any layers to load no geometry is loaded at all including geometry from the selected view A warning is issued if you do not select any layers to load into the drawing You can also right click and choose Clear All from the shortcut menu to specify that no geometry is loaded from any layer Index Status Indicates whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index INDEXCTL cont
312. filter to apply it to the list view Save Layer States Displays the New Layer State to Save dialog box in which you save the layer state and layer property settings of all layers in a drawing Restore Layer State Displays the Layer States Manager in which you can select a named layer state to restore settings of all layers in the drawing Restores only those layer state and property settings that were selected when the named layer state was saved LAYOUT Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs i 0 Layouts toolbar 0 Insert Menu Layout E Command line layout Enter layout option Copy Delete New Template Rename SAveas Set lt set gt Note Many of these options are available by right clicking a layout tab name 165 LAYOUTWIZARD Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings Insert menu Layout Layout Wizard pe Tools menu Wizards Create Layout E Command line layoutwizard The Layout wizard is displayed The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new layout You can choose to create a new layout from scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout Depending on which plotting device is currently configured you can select a paper size from those available You can select a predefined title block to apply to your new layout The Preview area displays a preview image of the title block you select When you v
313. for the support of extended symbol names Just as default command options are often provided prompts may include default values enclosed in angle brackets lt gt when data is requested For example the POLYGON command displays the following prompt suggesting 4 as the number of sides for your polygon Command polygon Enter number of sides lt 4 gt To accept the default value press ENTER or SPACEBAR Using Wild Card Characters on the Command Line When the prompt directions ask for a name list such as a block name variable name named view and so on you can use wild card characters to specify names Repeating Commands If no command is active you can repeat the previous command by pressing ENTER or SPACEBAR or by right clicking in the drawing area and choosing the Repeat Command Name option from the shortcut menu 32 Accessing Recently Used Commands You can access the six most recently used commands from a shortcut menu by right clicking in the command window and choosing Recent Commands Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes Several GTXImage CAD commands display standard file selection dialog boxes in which you can navigate through your directory structure and select files to open These dialog boxes may include the following options Look In Displays the current folder or drive Click the arrow to view the hierarchy of the folder path and to navigate up the path tree Up One Level Navigates one level up
314. from scratch TOGGLE TRAIN STATUS Controls whether the selected dictionary file is being trained When you make corrections during gTCONVRT new words will be added to the dictionary file that is being trained These may later be edited with a standard text editor such as Windows Notepad CLOSE Closes the selected dictionary file SAVE Saves changes made to the selected dictionary file only if it was being trained Thresholds Verify Controls the likelihood that gr CONVRT will display the text verification dialog to verify its guess at what a given word was If the average confidence of all characters in the text string falls below this value the text verification dialog will appear ForceFit Controls how hard gTCONVRT will try to change characters to make a given string fit an existing dictionary file word or pattern Text Output 2 Text recognition works on one orientation of text at a time The default orientation is zero degrees To recognize at 90 degrees Delete 0 from the orientation list box type 90 in the orientation text box and press RETURN 3 To use a pre trained recognition file suffix is CR select Open The Open Character Recognition Training File dialog appears Choose the ICR recognition file and select OK 4 If you want to train this or any other opened recognition file on the new drawing select TRAIN The letter T will appear to the left of the training file Note When you train a cha
315. fy new default elevation lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The current elevation is the default Z value for new objects when you specify only X and Y values for a 3D point The elevation setting is the same for all viewports regardless of their user coordinate systems UCSs New objects are created at the specified Z value relative to the current UCS in the viewport Specify new default thickness lt current gt Specify a distance or press ENTER The thickness sets the distance to which a 2D object is extruded above or below its elevation A positive value is extruded along the positive Z axis a negative value is extruded along the negative Z axis 120 ae wiih elevation with thickness ELEV controls only new objects it does not affect existing objects The elevation is reset to 0 0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system WCS ELLIPSE Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc 0 Draw toolbar O Draw menu Ellipse E Command line ellipse Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or Arc Center Isocircle Specify a point or enter an option The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric ERASE Removes objects from a drawing 0 Modify toolbar a O Modify menu Erase Shortcut menu Select the objects to erase right click in the drawing area and click Erase E Command line erase Select objects Use an object selecti
316. g box in which you select a file to link or embed Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding it Display as Icon Displays the source application s icon in the drawing Double clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane Command line isoplane or isoplane for transparent use Enter isometric plane setting Left Top Right lt Top gt Enter an option or pressENTER N The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric If the snap style is Isometric Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL E or F5 157 Selects the left hand plane defined by the 90 degree and 150 degree axis pair Selects the top face of the cube called the top plane defined by the 30 degree and 150 degree axis pair Selects the right hand plane defined by the 90 degree and 30 degree axis pair JPGOUT Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format Command line jpgout The Create Raster File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the file name in the dialog box Select objects or lt all objects and viewports gt Press ENTERto select all objects and viewports or use an object
317. g box and enter the reference edit state you are prompted to select the specific objects in the reference that you want to edit Select nested objects Select objects within the reference that you want to edit Settings Tab Reference Edit Dialog Box 286 Settings Tab Reference Edit Dialog Box Provides options for editing references Create Unique Layer Style and Block Names Controls whether layers and other named objects extracted from the reference are uniquely altered If selected named objects in xrefs are altered names are prefixed with similar to the way they are altered when you bind xrefs If cleared the names of layers and other named objects remain the same as in the reference drawing Named objects that are not altered to make them unique assume the properties of those in the current host drawing that share the same name Display Attribute Definitions for Editing Controls whether all variable attribute definitions in block references are extracted and displayed during reference editing If Display Attribute Definitions for Editing is selected the attributes except constant attributes are made invisible and the attribute definitions are available for editing along with the selected reference geometry When changes are saved back to the block reference the attributes of the original reference remain unchanged The new or altered attribute definitions affect only subsequent insertions of the block the attribu
318. g box is displayed Shows the current point style and size Change the point style by selecting an icon Point Display Images Specifies the image used to display point objects The point style is stored in the PDMODE system variable Point Size Sets the point display size The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE system variable Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size The point display does not change when you zoom in or out Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size Points are displayed larger or smaller when you zoom in or out 78 DDVPOINT Sets the three dimensional viewing direction View menu 3D Views Viewpoint Presets Command line ddvpoint The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed Defines 3D view settings Set Viewing Angles Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system WCS or a user coordinate system UCS p N a i hs ene a k gt 225 44 as pes Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS From Specifies viewing angles X Axis Specifies the angle from
319. g of the first line segment which forms a closed loop of line segments You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments gt before entering after entering Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence Entering U more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them before entering alter entering LINETYPE Loads sets and modifies linetypes Format menu Linetype E Command line linetype or linetype for transparent use The Linetype Manager is displayed If you enter linetype at the Command prompt LINETYPE displays prompts on the command line Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref dependent or whether they are referenced by objects Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad lin file and add them to the linetype list 172 Current Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a particular layer Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an obj
320. g on a single pen plotter Under Physical Pen Characteristics you can specify settings for as many pens as you want You are prompted when you need to change pens Area Fill Correction Enables the program to compensate for pen widths when plotting filled areas and wide polylines Each polygon is shrunk by half of the width of the pen used to draw it This option prevents the plotter from oversizing the filled area when using a 263 wide pen and ensures precision Use this option if the plot must be accurate to half the pen width such as in printed circuit artwork Pen Optimization Level Reduces plot time and increases the efficiency of the pens by optimizing the pen motion For example you can prevent pens from retracing duplicate lines If your drawing uses many colors or widths you can reduce the time needed to change pens by selecting Adds Pen Sorting Every object that uses a particular pen will be plotted before switching to another pen Each method in the list includes the optimization methods preceding it in the list except for No Optimization Physical Pen Characteristics To plot your drawing correctly on a pen plotter you need to provide information about the pens in your plotter For each pen in your plotter specify a color and width To optimize pen performance you can specify a speed Note This information is required the physical pen information cannot be detected automatically Color Specifies the colors of
321. g on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable Polar Angle Settings Sets the alignment angles for polar tracking POLARANG system variable Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths You can enter any angle or select a common angle of 90 45 30 22 5 18 15 10 or 5 degrees from the list POLARANG system variable Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG system variable Note Additional angles are absolute not incremental List of Angles If Additional Angles is selected lists the additional angles that are available To add new angles click New To remove existing angles click Delete POLARADDANG system variable New Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment angles Note Before adding fractional angles you must set the AUPREC system variable to the appropriate decimal precision to avoid undesired rounding For example if the value of AUPREC is 0 the default value all fractional angles you enter are rounded to the nearest whole number Delete Deletes selected additional angles Object Snap Tracking Settings Sets options for object snap tracking Track Orthogonally Only Displays only orthogonal horizontal vertical object snap
322. ge will scale itself so that the geometry it portrays is to scale with GTXImage CAD s model space Note Raster line widths will also scale along with raster images Orienting and Rotating Image Entities Often paper drawings are scanned sideways If you used the Image gt Attach command to import a raster image it may end up sideways The best way to rotate the complete image is using the gTURN command gTURN Command A The gTURN command can be used to rotate an image but it preserves the insertion point as the lower left point Advantages of using this command are e The raster is turned inside the image entity maintaining the lower left point insertion point 20 e Because the raster turns rather than the image entity the entity hasn t moved about any base point If the image was in the right position before invoking gTURN then it requires no further moving or adjusting gROTATE Command The gROTATE command can also rotate raster data within the raster image It is useful for local rotation when raster editing but is not recommended as an ideal tool for registering images within CAD drawings Creating New Raster Images The gCREATE command allows you to create a new raster image Just like scanned images that were captured from paper or mylar drawings new images should be drawn at some drawing scale New raster images are limited to realistic sizes Create new raster images that are approximately paper sized and then sc
323. ger is closed NotFound No longer exists in the valid search paths Unresolved Cannot be read by this program Orphaned Attached to another xref that is unresolved or not found 374 Size Shows the file size of the corresponding reference drawing The size is not displayed if the xref is unloaded not found or unresolved Type Indicates whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay Date Displays the last date the associated drawing was modified This date is not displayed if the xref is unloaded not found or unresolved Saved Path Shows the saved path of the associated xref this is not necessarily where the xref is found Tree View Displays a hierarchical representation of the xrefs displaying the relationships between xref definitions Tree view shows the level of nesting relationship of the attached xrefs whether they are attached or overlaid and whether they are loaded unloaded marked for reload or unload or not found or unresolved Attach Displays the External Reference dialog box if an external reference is selected or displays the Select Reference File dialog box if no external reference is selected See XATTACH Detach Detaches one or more xrefs from your drawing erasing all instances of a specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the definition table Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current drawing can be detached nested xrefs cannot be detached
324. ght isoplane 30 and 90 degree angles 303 Type Specifies the snap type Polar Sets the snap to polar tracking angles that are set in the POLARANG system variable Grid Sets the snap to grid SPELL Checks spelling in a drawing Tools menu Spelling Command line spell or spell for transparent use Select objects Use an object selection method and pressENTERwhen you finish If you enter all at the Select Objects prompt the spelling in all text objects in the Model tab and all layout tabs is checked The Check Spelling dialog box is displayed if an unknown word is found in the selected text Corrects the spelling in text objects created with TEXT MTEXT LEADER and ATTDEF The Check Spelling dialog box is displayed only if an unknown word is found in the selected text Spell checking in attributes is limited to attribute values only The spelling in text objects within block references and nested block references is checked but spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated block reference has been selected Current Dictionary Displays the name of the current dictionary Current Word Displays the word being checked Suggestions Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary Select a replacement in the list or enter a replacement word in the box Ignore Skips the current word Ignore All Skips all remaining words that match the current word Change
325. h a light gray background that is not plotted When this option is cleared fields are displayed with the same background as any text FIELDDISPLAY system variable Field Update Settings Displays the Field Update Settings dialog box FIELDEVAL system variable Priority for Coordinate Data Entry Controls how the program responds to input of coordinate data OSNAPCOORD system variable Running Object Snap Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate entry at all times You can also select this option by setting OSNAPCOORD to 0 Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps at all times You can also select this option by setting OSNAPCOORD to 1 Keyboard Entry Except Scripts 223 Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps except in scripts You can also select this option by setting OSNAPCOORD to 2 Associative Dimensioning Controls whether associative dimension objects or legacy style nonassociative dimension objects are created Make New Dimensions Associative When selected creates associative dimensions which automatically adjust their locations orientations and measurement values when the geometric objects associated with them are modified DIMASSOC system variable Hyperlink Controls settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks Display Hyperlink Cursor Tooltip and Shortcut Menu Displays the hyperlink cursor and tooltip whene
326. h bee CEF cot GTX OSR may be minimized while it is converting files The Halt button will pause the conversion process GTX OSR then prompts as to whether it should resume the conversion process No cancels the operation retaining the original selection of imported files Jobs that have already been processed prior to selecting Halt will be saved Note It can be helpful if you create your own directories for raster images especially if you are using a raster format other than TIFF G4 or CG4 The List Files of Type field in the Import Files dialog assigns the filter to the listed files GTX OSR internally recognizes the actual format of a raster file regardless of the file s suffix List files of type to see PCX files Raster File Formats GTX OSR uses most of the same raster formats as GTXImage CAD Formats exclusive to AutoCAD are not available Table 2 Raster File Formats Raster Format Ext Read Write Boeing Bedmics pa x GTX Uncompressed Runlength om x dsi x Xx dsi JEDMICS Tiled G4 fc 525 Raster Format E Ext Read Write Cals G4 MIL STD 28002A 28002 Type supported 28002 Type II not supported tif TIFF Uncompressed tif TIFF Version 6 Tiled TIFF Packbits Fuji Xerox MMR CA Intergraph cit Output Files The Output Files window displays conversion results To select a file click its name To display the vector output select the output file to displ
327. h correlations Cancel Fixed Line Width Select the Fixed radio button Type a value in mm or inch as the width to be used for all the vector lines to be rasterized or use the value in the Fixed Width text field If you enter a value it will remain the default line width during this editing session 465 Note If you defined the width previously in this session with a typed value or the box option that value will appear as the default Using the LineWidth Configuration Table a Select the Table radio button and the Table Setup button The LineWidth Configuration Table appears correlating CAD color numbers and line widths expressed in current units b To change the width associated with a particular color select that ACAD Color row Enter the value in the Width text field Select OK to close the dialog or select another row to change DefautWidh 000 its width Select to change width Vector Color Hs Width in Inches Color name Enter width lt XX gt 1 Color 1 Red 3 Com 3 00 freen c Enter the value for the width in the units being used and Color t press RETURN The Width Table will reflect the changes S Eaa S 70 wine 8 Color_8 Modify value Color 5 d Select another color number to change its width or press 0 and RETURN to continue the command Cancel The entities will be changed to raster with the widths defined by their colors Using Box a
328. hanges the linetype scale factor of the selected objects Specify new linetype scale lt current gt Lweight Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects Lineweight values are predefined values If you enter a value that is not a predefined value the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects Enter new lineweight lt current gt Thickness Thickness Changes the Z direction thickness of 2D objects Specify new thickness lt current gt Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline dimension or layout viewport object has no effect e Plotstyle Plotstyle Changes the plot style of the selected objects A plot style is a collection of property settings that is saved in a plot style table This option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles Enter Plot Style or lt current gt Enter a name or enter Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects When you plot the drawing objects are plotted with the properties defined in the designated plot style Plot styles assigned to objects can be overridden by other plot style assignments List Plot Styles Lists all the plot styles defined in the drawing CIRCLE Creates a circle 0 Draw toolbar e Draw menu Circle EE Command line circle Specify center point for circle or 3P Three Points 2P Two Points Ttr tan tan radius Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Cen
329. he editable text in the following images is the word BRACKET That word was framed using the baseline and height selection The two text lines at the bottom of this example were subsequently highlighted using an IOP selection in this case the Inside selection This is the sequence gCtext command responses that complete this example Command gctext Select insert point of baseline Select end point of baseline Select rectangle height CNG NAMIE MAT QUAN NOTES tor BRACKET cul 1 po a EE 103 SHAFT STe i oa Gand A os PULLEY Janja iee BUSHING deroj if The word BRACKET was framed by a baseline and height point io eean Jenja 5 430 Select raster lt INSIDE gt Select opposite corner of window The last two lines of text were selected and highlighted by the Inside IOP Select raster lt INSIDE gt Multiple IOP choices on other sections of raster data are allowed Press the keyboard Return to escape further picking choices Specify new text height The In Place Text Editor opens and the word BRACKET is edited To end editing click the OK button on the Formatting toolbar or click outside the In Place Text Editor 431 PONG NAME MAT QUAN NOTES SEAR CT tT The word BRACKET has been changed and all IOP selected raster data is removed 432 gCUT Type Menu Availability GCU or GCUT GTX RasterEdit gt Cut GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS
330. he output file when this is inactive If a piece of raster is between these sizes but is not actually text it is still treated as text Arc amp Circle Arc amp Circle is available under CAD mode only and determines whether arcs and circles are output If inactive arcs and circles will be interpreted and output as lines Arrow Heads Arrow Heads is available under CAD mode only and determines whether arrowheads 3 sided solids are output If inactive arrowheads are dropped from the output Rectify Basic Advanced Rectify is available under CAD mode only and corrects the angle of aon aes output vector data Lines that are close to orthogonal 0 or 90 degrees will be snapped to 0 and 90 degrees When disabled lines remain at their original orientations I Connect broken lines Maximum line gap 0 010 inch Smoothness Smoothness is available under MAP mode only and specifies how close together polyline vertices are drawn The smoothest value is 1 and the least smooth value is 9 528 Advanced Pane The Advanced Pane configures detailed conversion settings These settings determine line width maximum line gap jump and output settings Line Width Table This table specifies up to eight widths for recognized lines All entities having line width attributes are snapped to the nearest setting in the table The entries must range from smallest to largest and be positive real numbers between 0 and 2 inches or 0 and 50 8 mm
331. he selected objects are displayed in the Properties palette You can then modify the properties of the selected objects in the Properties palette or you can make other changes to the selected objects by entering an editing command Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box Use Quick Select to create selection sets based on filtering criteria The following shortcut menu options are available when you right click the title bar Move Displays a four headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the palette The palette does not dock Size Displays a four headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or a corner to make the palette smaller or larger Close Closes the Properties palette 273 Allow Docking Controls whether the Properties palette docks when you drag it over a docking area at the side of the drawing Auto hide Controls display of the Properties palette When this option is checked only the palette title bar is displayed when the cursor moves outside the palette When this option is not checked the full palette is displayed when the cursor moves Description Controls display of the description area at the bottom of the Properties palette When this option is checked descriptions are displayed When this option is not checked the description area is not displayed PROPERTIESCLOSE Closes the Properties palette Command line propertiesclose The Properties palette is closed PSETUPIN
332. he selected entities will all be converted to raster with the designated width 408 Using the LineWidth Configuration Table a If you type in T or Table the LineWidth Configuration Table appears The listing correlates CAD color numbers and line widths expressed in current units b If you defined the width previously in this session with a typed value or the box option that value will appear as the default You can press RETURN to accept this value or enter a number to represent the new width The selected entities will all be converted to raster of the designated width Note The original default option is to use the Width Table set up by colors This allows you to set different widths for entities being rasterized according to their color If you press RETURN or T the Width Table will be displayed The widths will be in inches or millimeters according to the unit set in GTXRAST CFG LINEWIDTH CONFIGURATION TABLE To change a line width for different CAD colors enter the number for the entry When you are satisfied with the settings enter 0 to continue GTXImage CAD To Continue 0 Ta Enter the NoUPWNHE Color Color Color Color Color Color Color 1 2 3 4 5 6 Lo col Color s Red 01 Yellow Green 02 Cyan 02 Blue 03 Magenta White 04 lor number Width in Inches 01 03 1 7 of the width to change lt 0 gt c Enter the number
333. he single letter representing the compass point is displayed Clockwise Calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction The default direction for positive angles is counterclockwise When prompted for an angle you can point in the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the setting specified for Clockwise Insertion Scale Controls the unit of measurement for blocks and drawings that are inserted into the current drawing A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted The insertion scale is the ratio of the units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target drawing Select Unitless to insert the block without scaling it to match the specified units Note In the Options dialog box User Preferences tab the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when either in the source block or the target drawing Insertion Scale is set to Unitless Sample Output Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles Direction Displays the Direction Control Dialog BoxDirection Control dialog box 352 VIEW Saves and restores named views View menu Named Views EE Command line view The View dialog box is displayed If you enter VieW at the Command prompt VIEW displays prompts on the command line Note The VIEW command cannot be used transparently Saves and restores n
334. he start of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Up Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the M direction The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Down Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the M direction The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh even if the mesh is closed Move Repositions the vertex and moves the editing mark Specify new location for marked vertex Specify a point Regen 250 Regenerates the polygon mesh Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode Smooth Surface Fits a smooth surface The SURFTYPE system variable controls the type of surface this option fits The types of surfaces include quadratic B spline cubic B spline and Bezier original polygon quadratic B spline Desmooth Restores the original control point polygon mesh Mclose Closes the M direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the M direction closed M direction Mopen Opens the M direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the M direction Nclose Closes the N direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N direction closed M direction Nopen Opens the N direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the N direction Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session 251 PLINE Creates two dimensional polylines e Draw toolbar 0 Draw menu Polyl
335. he tab is read only Plotter Configuration File Name Displays the file name you assigned in the Add a Plotter wizard 261 Description Displays information you want to include about the plotter Driver Information Displays the following information Plotter driver type system or nonsystem name model and location HDI driver file version number AutoCAD specialized driver files UNC name of the network server if the plotter is connected to a network server I O port if the plotter is connected locally Name of the system printer if the configured plotter is the system printer PMP Plot Model Parameters file name and location if a PMP file is attached to the PC3 file Ports Changes communication settings between the configured plotter and your computer or network system You can specify whether you want to plot through a port plot to a file or use AutoSpool If you plot through a parallel port you can specify the timeout value If you plot through a serial port you can change the baud rate protocol flow control and input and output timeout values Plot to the Following Port Sends the drawing to the plotter through the selected port Plot to File Sends the drawing to the file specified in the Plot dialog box AutoSpool Uses the AutoSpool utility to plot the drawing AutoSpool is specified on the Files tab in the Options dialog box Port List Displays a list and description of available p
336. hed line If you are plotting a raster image such as a BMP or TIFF file the size of the plot is specified in pixels not in inches or millimeters Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies to plot This option is not available when you plot to file Plot Area Specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted Under What to Plot you can select an area of the drawing to be plotted Layout Limits When plotting a layout plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size with the origin calculated from 0 0 in the layout When plotting from the Model tab plots the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits If the current viewport does not display a plan view this option has the same effect as the Extents option Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects All geometry in the current space is plotted The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the selected Model tab or the current paper space view in the layout View Plots a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command You can select a named view from the list If there are no saved views in the drawing this option is unavailable When the View option is selected a View list is displayed that lists the named views that are saved in the current drawing You can select a view from this list to plot Window
337. hich you specify with a point Specify right endpoint of text baseline Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AUTOCAR 1 TL Top Left Left justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify top left point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AUTOCAD TC Top Center Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify top center point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text 1 AUTOCAD TR Top Right Right justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify top right point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt 326 Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AUTOCAD ML Middle Left Left justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify middle left point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt cu
338. his reflects the format of the last raster file saved with gSAVE or the setting in GTXRAST CFG if no file has been saved yet Undo store size Number of raster undo s being recorded Image modified Flag identifying whether image has been changed since the last save TRUE or FALSE Version Shows GTX program version number and ARX version of the GTX program that is running 450 gINVERT Availability GIN or GINVERT GTX Enhance gt Invert All Products Icon HH gINVERT Reverses the background and main raster colors of the current raster image Use it on files scanned in reverse light on dark This does not just invert the display of an image it truly inverts the raster image itself Instructions The color of the background and the color of the data will be switched You can then edit the raster data with any of the GTXImage CAD commands Undo gINVERT by invoking the command again 451 gISOLAY Availability GISL or ISOLAY GTX Vector Clean gt Isolate Layer GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon Z gISOLAY freezes all layers except that of the selected object effectively isolating its layer Instructions Select objects Select objects on the layer or layers you want to isolate Press RETURN The layers of the objects chosen in step 1 are isolated by freezing all other layers 452 gJOIN Availability GJO or GJOIN GTX Vector Clean gt Join GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon oy gJOIN joins vector lines together
339. hould select the named plot style table that was converted from the color dependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space and to all layouts Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style from the converted plot style table that has the same plot properties that their color dependent plot style had Drawing objects that had the same color dependent plot style as their layer are assigned the named plot style BYLAYER Drawing objects that had a color dependent plot style that was different from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same properties that their color dependent plot style had After a drawing is converted to named plot styles you can change the named plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model space or layouts You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects Converting Drawings from Named to Color Dependent Plot Styles Converting Drawings from Named to Color Dependent Plot Styles A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached After a drawing is converted to color dependent plot styles you can assign a color dependent plot style table Plot styles will be applied by color COPY Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction B 0 Modify toolba
340. ia graphics physical pen configuration custom properties initialization strings calibration and user defined paper sizes You can drag these configuration options from one PC3 file to another You can start the Plotter Configuration Editor with any of the following methods Double click a PC3 file in Microsoft Windows Explorer or right click the PC3 file and click Open By default PC3 files are stored in the Plotters folder To find the location of your plotter files on the Tools menu click Options In the Options dialog box Files tab click the plus sign to the left of Printer Support File Path Click the plus sign to the left of the Printer Configuration Search Path file Under Printer Configuration Search Path click the path name to view the location of your plotter files Choose Edit Plotter Configuration from within the Add a Plotter wizard Choose Properties in the Page Setup dialog box Choose Properties in the Plot dialog box Depending on your configured plotting device additional options may be available on the Device and Document Settings tab For example when you configure a nonsystem plotter you can modify the pen characteristics The Plotter Configuration Editor includes the following tabs General Ports Device and Document Settings General Contains basic information about the plotter configuration PC3 file You can add or modify the information in the Description area The remainder of t
341. iaa Ecetia 271 PROPERTIES wade cisch iiae E REEE EIEE AE EE TE EE AEE 272 PROPERTIESCLOSE conurbano mune EA E ARE 274 PSETUPIN neras a eee it A NE A RE 274 PSPAGE mrret RE e E ra A A AE A 274 PURGE suscritas o 275 OD IMicisunaat di ii E Es A EE R 276 QLEADER surta a A R ETER 277 OSAV E scsi inicio EA E E A eb EART 278 OSELE O ueno wie A Nemeth derousuiuimesin 279 OTE usted id E Es Seer ee iio 280 QUICKCAL G sion EEEE 280 QUiTivistunia midi E E E iia 280 PRAY aran A A de qc 281 RECOVER sinici aamini eo i rol iii dla leidas R lcd 281 RECTANG visas isscscdssci ces carvstescnechcnscovevessasehsss ri ofi 282 REDO vivos iio ro diodo EA EEES 283 REDRAW nonis niini inici oi iii 284 REDRAWAL Lsi niii aonni iieo rai ido iia drid 284 REFCLOSE mnisi sormia i oia iii 284 A A sescnaonsthvescvseseen EE AN E E AOE EEE SEEEN 285 REESE Tesna NN 287 REGEN recne ssvscsasscsives rior h eare E diosa KER EEEE 288 REGENALL ci n anmha rod iia e Ei A E E A A E E EEES 288 REGENAUTO imini aonni iais rociar Ei I EE AE KERKEE 288 REGION veviii cornas iia a aasa a eii coca ads 289 REN Iosis ido A Ido tice ERRARTE vies 289 RENAME cuicos Ia SA a AER evans EA 290 RESUME ten E EER TER E AA EA ld 290 ROTAT Errana vaca ETEA TER E E T A ATE A E Edd 290 RSCR Pi AETR E E E EE AA AAA dde 291 SAVE aT E rated EA RE E TE E TOR ERR A A EET il 291 SCALE iaa 294 SCALE PEX Mi cosviuts tether ENN E A NNN N buce eed 295 SORIP lianas T O A NIR a 296 SELECT a 296 SETVAR ai aia
342. ialog Box Controls the drawing index and display of custom objects and specifies the default file format for saving drawings Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects If you save to an earlier drawing file type or the drawing contains custom objects from another application you can select Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects to save images of the custom objects in the drawing file If you do not choose this option a frame is saved for each custom object in the drawing file PROXYGRAPHICS system variable Index Type Determines whether layer or spatial indexes are created when you save a drawing The indexes are used to improve performance during demand loading Using indexes may slightly increase the time required to save a drawing If a partially open drawing does not already contain spatial and layer indexes this option is not available None Creates neither layer nor spatial indexes when you save a drawing Layer Loads only layers that are on and thawed Spatial Loads only the portion of the drawing within a clipped boundary Layer amp Spatial Optimizes performance by specifying that the program loads only layers that are on thawed and within a clipped boundary area Save All Drawings As Specifies the default file format that drawings are saved to If you change the specified value all subsequent uses of SAVE and QSAVE save the drawing to the new file format You can also set this option on the Open and Save tab in the O
343. ical circuit2 dwg UNC universal naming convention network path server1 campus_project DesignCenter is displayed with the Folder tab active and the path or drawing file that you specified is loaded ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter 38 APERTURE Controls the size of the object snap target box ES Command line aperture or aperture for transparent use Object snap target height 1 50 pixels lt current gt Enter a value 1 50 or press ENTER Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box The APBOX system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size of the object snap box The higher the number the larger the target box You can also change this setting in the Options dialog box Drafting tab ra al n Pp p target box 1 l r targel box y ku el APERTURE controls the object snap target box not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX system variable ARC Creates an arc 0 Draw toolbar Fal e Draw menu Arc ES Command line arc Specify start point of arc or CEnter Specify a point enter ce or press ENTER tostart tangent to last line arc or polyline 39 Start Point Specifies the starting point of the arc Note
344. icates that limits checking is set to 0 Model or Paper Space Uses Displays the drawing extents which includes all objects in the database and can exceed the grid limits The first line shows the XY coordinate of the lower left corner of the extents The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper right corner The notation Over to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that the drawing extends outside the grid limits Display Shows Lists the portion of the drawing extents visible in the current viewport The first line shows the XY coordinate of the display s lower left corner The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper right corner Insertion Base Is Displays the insertion point of the drawing stored in the INSBASE system variable and expressed as an X Y Z coordinate Snap Resolution Is Displays the snap spacing in the X and Y directions stored in the SNAPUNIT system variable 314 Grid Spacing Is Displays the grid spacing in the X and Y directions stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable Current Space Shows whether model space or paper space is active Current Layout Displays Model or the name of the current layout Current Layer Lists the current layer of the drawing stored by the CLAYER system variable Current Color Lists the current color stored by the CECOLOR system variable Current Linetype Lists the current linetype stored by the CELTYPE system variable Current
345. icked beyond the endpoints of a line it will not be extended Circle Trace a raster circle or series of arcs with a vector circle A raster circle or arc selected with the circle option will be traced as a vector circle Arc Trace a raster arc or series of arcs with a vector arc If points are picked on a portion of a line or raster arc only the portion between the points will be traced You can use the arc option to trace part of a circle part of an arc or a whole arc Instructions 1 Select gTRACE Select raster lt LINE gt 2 The default mode begins as line Select another from the menu or type the first letter of the name and press RETURN You will be prompted to select points Using Line a Select the first point at one end of the line or line segments to be traced Select other end of reference line b Select the second point on the opposite end of the line or line segments that you are tracing c Continue to trace another line or select another option Press RETURN to exit the command Using Circle a Atthe prompt select circle or type it followed by RETURN You will be prompted to select three points to define the circle to be copied Select point on circumference of circle b Select a point on the circumference of the circle 501 Select second point for circle Select another point on the circumference of the circle Select third point for circle Select a third point on the
346. idth After you specify the point for the opposite corner the in place text editor is displayed If you specify one of the other options or if you enter mtext at the Command prompt MTEXT bypasses the in place text editor and displays additional prompts on the command line Creates or modifies multiline text objects Imports or pastes text from other files to use in multiline text Display menu options Display ruler Text Formatting Standard MET ejjozo00 w e z uo mv m o first line indent Ea user set tab stops la Ez 311181250 0000 2 afio e 1 0000 2 Save changes and close aller irtainta Jura ini ara faon ini rra foqol ara ari rni fora fano ariicl orir iaa g A E paragraph indent ruler Set width of multiline text objects The In Place Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a menu of options When a table cell is selected for editing the In Place Text Editor displays column letters and row numbers If the text you enter overflows the bounding box you defined a dashed line indicates the defined width and height 198 MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled E Command line multiple Enter command name to repeat The command that you enter is repeated until you press ESC Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name any parameters must be specified each time MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes MVIEW Cr
347. ients the work area and image by 90 180 or 270 90 degrees Traces raster to vector lines arcs and circles Deskews vector data Corrects distortions in an image 384 E ImageFrame Configures the Image Frame ImageTransparency Controls image transparency 385 Raster Picking Options Most commands affect a subset of the raster image To gMOVE a raster circle you need to first pick that circle The GTXRaster CAD series uses Intelligent Object Picking IOP to pick raster entities from the drawing as if they were intelligent CAD entities These options can be typed found in the GTX Edit gt Raster Pick the toolbar or the screen menu Ta Add data to the selection set after using remove Remove Remove selected data from the selection set ALL Select all raster on the current raster image aow Select all raster within a rectangular window selected by two pick points Bel window Select all raster within a polygon window selected by three or more vertices Bl kosin Select connected raster objects that are completely contained by or crossing the edge of a window selected by two pick points Bel crossing Select raster that is completely contained by or crossing the edge of a polygon window selected by three or more vertices ol Inside Select raster objects completely contained by a window selected by two pick points o Select all raster outside a rectangular window selected by two pick points A
348. ies The default setting is 1 Valid entries are integers 1 through 100 MaxSpaceSize sets the initial value for the Max Space Size dialog WordVerifyLevel Sets the initial value for the word mode verification level WordForceLevel sets the initial value for the word mode force fit level TouchingCR controls whether ICR splits touching characters 0 means OFF 1 means ON CRMode controls whether ICR is performing Character recognition or Word recognition 0 means word mode CR 1 means character mode CR SimFile establishes the character similarity file to use for word recognition Gtxtext sim is hardcoded into GTX but if another file is loaded it will override the default similarity settings WordFile establishes the dictionary file s to load on startup Raster to Vector Conversion Parameters GAP_SIZE_TO_JUMP sets the default GAP JUMP size HATCH_LAYER_NAME sets the layer name to be created during hatch recognition LINESTYLE_LAYER_NAME sets the layer name to be created during linestyle recognition PColor Establishes a value in the line width configuration table Pcolor Color Value 0 050 Line Width PCIrUnit Determines behavior of linewidth color table when rasterizing or vectorizing with a scaled image Set PclrUnit 0 if you want to multiply your pcolor setting by the scale of the Image Set PclrUnit 1 if you do NOT want to multiply your pcolor setting by the scale of the image Other Parameters ProductLevel sets the product l
349. iew to match the layer visibility in the current model space or layout viewport Edit Boundaries Displays the selected named view centered and zoomed out and with the rest of the drawing area in a lighter color to show the boundaries of the named view You can specify opposite corners of a new boundary repeatedly until you press ENTER to accept the results Details Displays the View Details dialog box Delete Deletes the selected named view Rename Shortcut Menu Only Renames the selected named view You can also press F2 Delete Layer Information Shortcut Menu Only Deletes the layer visibility information that was saved with the selected named view Detach from Viewport Shortcut Menu Only Removes the association between the selected named view and its viewport in the Sheet Set 354 Manager Orthographic and Isometric Views Tab View Dialog Box Orthographic and Isometric Views Tab View Dialog Box Restores orthographic or isometric views Current View Displays the name of the current view The default value is CURRENT View Names Lists the orthographic and isometric views A pointer indicates the current orthographic or isometric view The views are relative to the UCS listed in the Relative To list Set Current Restores the selected orthographic view You can also restore a selected view by double clicking its name in the list or by right clicking the name and choosing Set Current When an orthographic
350. ify an object selection method to select the objects to trim If more than one trim result is possible the location of the first selection point determines the result Object to Trim Object to Trim Specifies the object to trim The prompt for selecting the object to trim repeats so you can trim multiple objects Press ENTER to exit the command abjects to trim Shift Select to Extend Shift Select to Extend Extends the selected objects rather than trimming them This option provides an easy method to switch between trimming and extending Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points The selection fence does not form a closed loop Specify first fence point Specify the starting point of the selection fence Specify next fence point or Undo Specify the next point of the selection fence or enter u Specify next fence point or Undo Specify the next point of the selection fence enteru or press ENTER 335 Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points Specify first corner Specify a point Specify opposite corner Specify a point at a diagonal from the first point Note Some crossing selections of objects to be trimmed are ambiguous TRIM resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in a clockwise direction from the first poi
351. iline The previous prompt is displayed Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments lt A Justification 193 Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify Enter justification type Top Zero Bottom lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER Top Draws the multiline below the cursor so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points En Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0 0 is at the specified points E zero Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor so that the line with the most negative offset is at the specified points bation Scale Controls the overall width of the multiline This scale does not affect linetype scale Enter mline scale lt current gt Enter a scale or press ENTER The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line the smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value A scale factor of 0 collapses the multiline into a single line For information about the multiline style definition see MLSTYLE scale al 1 l scale al 2 194 Style Specifies a
352. iline style from an xref the current style New Displays the Create New Multiline Style dialog box in which you can create a new multiline style Modify 195 Displays the Modify Multiline Style dialog box in which you can modify a selected multiline style You cannot modify the default STANDARD multiline style Note You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any multiline style that is being used in the drawing To edit an existing multiline style you must do so before you draw any multilines that use the style Rename Renames the currently selected multiline style You cannot rename the STANDARD multiline style Delete Removes the currently selected multiline style from the Styles list It does not delete the style from the MLN file You cannot delete the STANDARD multiline style the current multiline style or a multiline style that is in use Load Displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file Save Saves or copies a multiline style to a multiline library MLN file If you specify an MLN file that already exists the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased The default file name is acad m n MODEL Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab EE Command line model On the Model tab you can create drawings in model space The Model tab automatically sets the T
353. in the current path tree Create New Folder Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify List Displays the contents of the Files list in a multicolumn list Details Displays the contents of the Files list in a single column list with file details Search the Web Displays the Browse the Web dialog box from which you can access and store GTXImage CAD Series files on the Internet Look in Favorites Sets the Look In path to your system s Favorites folder Add to Favorites Creates a shortcut to the selected file or folder and adds that shortcut to your system s Favorites folder Files List Displays the files and folders present in the current path and of the selected file type File Name Displays the name of the file selected in the Files list If you select multiple files File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks If you enter a file name in the File Name box GTXImage CAD clears any selection You must use quotation marks when entering multiple file names You can use wild card characters to filter files displayed in the Files list Files of Type Filters the list of applications by file type Preview Displays a preview image of the selected file The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file Find File Displays the Browse Search dialog box You can browse through preview images of DWG files or search for files both locally and on a network Locate Uses the
354. ine E Command line pline Specify start point Specify a point 1 Current line width is lt current gt Specify next point or Arc Close Halfwidth Length Undo Width Specify a point 2 or enter an option The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline Setting PLINEGEN to 1 generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the completed polyline Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polyline with a dash at each vertex PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered segments re t A j es 7 pe E Sn P Loy E Fi ul P E i PLINEGEN set to 0 PLINEGEN set to 1 PLOT Plots a drawing to a plotter printer or file yA 0 Standard toolbar Le e File menu Plot Shortcut menu Right click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Plot E Command line plot The Plot dialog box is displayed Click OK to begin plotting with the current settings If you enter plot at the Command prompt PLOT displays prompts on the command line Specifies device and media settings and plots your drawing The title of the Plot dialog box indicates the name of the current layout You can display more options in the Plot dialog box by clicking the More Options button 252 Page Setup Displays a list of any named and saved page setups in the drawing You can base the current page setup on a named page setup saved in the drawing
355. ine a length with two points SCALETEXT Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations R e Text toolbar 0 Modify menu Object Text 3 Scale EE Command line scaletext Select objects Use an object selection method and pressENTERwhen you finish Enter a base point option for scaling Existing Align Fit Center Middle Right TL TC TR ML MC MR BL BC BR lt Existing gt Specify a location to serve as a base point for scaling With the base point prompt you choose one of several locations to serve as base points for scaling which is used individually for each selected text object The base point for scaling is established on one of several insertion point locations for text options but even though the options are the same as when you choose an insertion point the justification of the text objects is not affected The base point options shown above are decribed in the TEXT command The base point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text except that the Align Fit and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom left BL multiline text attachment point Specify text height or Match object Scale factor lt 0 5000 gt Specify a text height or enter an option Match Object Match Object Scales the text objects that you originally selected to match the size of a selected text object Select a text object with the desired height Select a text object to match Scale Factor
356. ine location Or Mtext Text Angle Horizontal Vertical Rotated Specify a point or enter an option First Extension Line Origin 95 First Extension Line Origin Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first Specify second extension line origin Specify a point 2 1 2x paint specification Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines After you specify the location the dimension is drawn dimension line location designated Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements Text Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text
357. ined size not a standard size Filter Paper Sizes Filters the list of paper sizes displayed for the plotting device selected in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes The list of paper sizes is displayed on the Plot Settings tab in the Plot dialog box and on the Layout Settings tab in the Page Setup dialog box Select the paper sizes you want to display for this device Check All Hides all the paper sizes for the device Uncheck All Displays all the paper sizes for the device Plotter Calibration Starts the Plotter Calibration wizard If you need to correct scaling discrepancies you can adjust the plotter calibration using the Plotter Calibration wizard Note You should perform a plotter calibration only if your drawings must be exactly to scale and your plotter or printer produces inaccurate plots Plotter Calibration causes the program to rescale all plots sent to your plotter If your plotter provides a calibration utility it is recommended that you use it instead of the utility supplied with this program PMP File Attaches a PMP file to or detaches a PMP file from the PC3 file you are editing Use the Detach button to break the association between the PMP file and the PC3 file Attach Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file You can reuse calibration and custom paper size data stored in the PMP file Save PMP Saves a PMP file to a new file in the AutoCAD 2006 drv folder Detach Detaches the PMP file associated with th
358. inetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object s scale factor LIST Displays database information for selected objects 0 Inquiry toolbar i Tools menu Inquiry 3 List EE Command line list Select objects Use an object selection method The text window displays the object type object layer and X Y Z position relative to the current user coordinate system UCS and whether the object is in model space or paper space LIST reports color linetype and lineweight information if these items are not set to BYLAYER The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero Z coordinate information defines the elevation If the extrusion direction of the entry differs from the Z axis 0 0 1 of the current UCS LIST also reports the extrusion direction in UCS coordinates LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected LOAD Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command EE Command line load The Select Shape File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the shape file name or select a file name from the list You must load a shape SHP file the first time you need it it is loaded automatically thereafter The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing 174 LOGFILEOFF Closes the log file opened by LOGFILEON E Command line logfileoff The program stops recording
359. ing Tooltip Appearance Controls the color size and transparency of drafting tooltips Settings Displays the Tooltip Appearance dialog box e Selection Sets options for selecting objects Pickbox Size Controls the display size of the pickbox The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in editing commands PICKBOX system variable Selection Preview Highlights objects as the pickbox cursor rolls over them The PREVIEWEFFECT system variable controls the appearance of the highlighted objects When a Command Is Active Displays selection previewing only when a command is active and the Select Objects prompt is displayed SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable When No Command Is Active Displays selection previewing when no commands are active SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable Visual Effect Settings Displays the Visual Effect Settings dialog box Selection Modes Controls settings that relate to object selection methods 226 Noun Verb Selection Allows you to select an object before starting a command The command affects the previously selected object or objects PICKFIRST system variable You can use many editing and inquiry commands with noun verb selection including ALIGN DVIEW PROPERTIES BLOCK EXPLODE SCALE CHPROP MIRROR WBLOCK Use SHIFT to Add to Selection Adds an object to or removes it from the selection set when you press SHIFT and select an object To clear a selection set quickly draw a se
360. ing the coordinates from the original drawing Edit menu Paste to Original Coordinates Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Paste to Original Coordinates Command line pasteorig The object copied to the Clipboard is pasted into the drawing at the same coordinates used in the original drawing PASTEORIG functions only when the Clipboard contains AutoCAD data from a drawing other than the current drawing 237 PASTESPEC Inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the data Edit menu Paste Special E Command line pastespec The Paste Special dialog box is displayed Sets file formats and linking options for pasted files Source Displays the name of the document that contains the information you copied lt may also show the specific section of the document you copied Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing as an embedded object Paste Link Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing If the source application supports an OLE link a link is created to the original file As Displays applicable formats in which you can paste the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing If you select AutoCAD Entities the metafile graphics in the Clipboard are converted to AutoCAD objects If the metafile graphics are not converted the metafile is displayed as an OLE object Display as Icon Inserts a picture of
361. ings Specifies UCS behavior when the UCS setting is updated Save UCS with Viewport Saves the coordinate system setting with the viewport This option sets the UCSVP system variable If this option is cleared the viewport reflects the UCS of the viewport that is current Update View to Plan When UCS Is Changed Restores Plan view when the coordinate system in the viewport is changed UCSFOLLOW system variable UNDO Reverses the effect of commands T e Standard toolbar EE Command line undo Enter the number of operations to undo or Auto Control BEgin End Mark Back Enter a positive number enter an option or press ENTER fo undo a single operation UNDO displays the command or system variable name on the command line to indicate that you have stepped past the point where the command was used Note UNDO has no effect on some commands and system variables including those that open close or save a window or a drawing display information change the graphics display regenerate the drawing or export the drawing in a different format 349 Number Undoes the specified number of preceding operations The effect is the same as entering U multiple times Auto Groups the actions of a single command making them reversible by a single U command When the Auto option is on starting a command groups all actions until you exit that command You can undo the group of actions as if it were one action UNDO Auto is not av
362. inimum recommended hardware configuration The following GTXImage CAD parameters can also optimize display and editing speed Automatic Save Interval GTXImage CAD saves modified raster images every time an Automatic Save is performed You can increase the time interval between automatic saves and minimize this kind interruption by increasing the SAVETIME system variable Swap Space Larger paging files can help performance when working with large raster images Aerial View The aerial view maintains a second copy of the image in memory To save memory you can keep this view closed Additional processing time is taken when the Aerial View is set to automatically update Turn off the automatic update option after loading the drawing Current View Zoom Redrawing images takes extra time Performing a command generally takes longer if you are zoomed to extents than if you are zoomed in on a small area of the drawing Image Quality Set the Image Quality to Draft to save additional time High quality slows processes Raster plotting occurs at high quality even when images are displayed in draft mode Multiple Images GTXImage CAD easily handles multiple overlaid or tiled images However attaching multiple images can slow editing response 25 Working with Color Images The GTXlmage CAD series has been designed to work predominantly with binary Black amp White images and cannot directly edit color images like photos or high color pi
363. int or Hor Ver Ang Bisect Offset Specify a point or enter an option Point Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it passes Specify through point Specify the point 2 through which you want the xline to pass or press ENTER to end the command The xline is created through the specified point 369 Hor Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point Specify through point Specify the point 1 through which you want the xline to pass or press ENTER to end the command The xline is created parallel to the X axis Ver Ver Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point Specify through point Specify the point 1 through which you want the xline to pass or press ENTER to end the command The xline is created parallel to the Y axis 370 Ang Creates an xline at a specified angle Enter angle of xline 0 or Reference Specify an angle or enter r 4 angle Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line Specify through point Specify the point through which you want the xline to pass An xline is created through the specified point using the specified angle Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line Select a line object Select a line polyline ray or xline Enter angle of xline lt 0 gt Specify through point Specify the point through which you
364. intersections 527 On the left intersecting lines are shown with Compose Segments enabled On the right the same lines with Compose Segments disabled are shown Filter Size GTX OSR only converts raster elements above a certain size The Filter Size specifies the maximum size for objects omitted during conversion Any object exceeding this length in any direction will be retained any object equal or smaller will be discarded The entry must be a positive real number in the range of 0 to 2 inches or 0 to 50 8 mm Note The Filter Size serves as the filter only if OSR is set to Vectorize Text Otherwise the Maximum Character Size limits the size of the smallest converted raster elements Maximum Line Width Raster areas wider than the Maximum Line Width are recognized as filled polygons or solids This must be a positive real number between 0 and 2 inches or 0 to 50 8 mm Maximum Character Size Any raster elements larger than the Maximum Character Size is converted as normal geometry Any elements between the Filter Size and the Maximum Character Size are considered text even if they are geometric dashes dashed lines or other small text sized geometry Whether they appear in the converted file depends on the Vectorize Text setting Vectorize Text Text sized raster elements between the Filter Size and the Maximum Character Size are converted and placed on a text layer when this is active Text sized elements are omitted from t
365. ion and accepts additional through points Undo Reverses the previous offset Erase Erases the source object after it is offset Erase source object after offsetting Yes No lt current gt Enteryom Layer Determines whether offset objects are created on the current layer or on the layer of the source object Enter layer option for offset objects Current Source lt current gt Enter an option OOPS Restores erased objects E Command line oops OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command 205 f TN F di in i y erased objects before OOPS after OOPS You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can erase the selected objects after creating a block However you cannot use OOPS to restore parameters actions or grips in the Block Editor You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command OPEN 0 Standard toolbar Al 9 File menu Open ES Command line open Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry to load into the selected drawing When working with large drawing files you can select the minimal amount of geometry you need to load when opening a drawing When a drawing is partially open all named objects as well as the specified geometry are loaded into the file Named objects include blocks dimension styles layers layouts linetypes text styles UCSs views and viewport configuratio
366. ir component objects Blocks with unequal X Y and Z scales nonuniformly scaled blocks might explode into unexpected objects When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded they are collected into an anonymous block named with a E prefix and referenced with the nonuniform scaling If all the objects in such a block cannot be exploded the selected block reference will not be exploded Body 3D Solid and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references xrefs and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded Body Explodes into a single surface body nonplanar surfaces regions or curves Circle 122 If within a nonuniformly scaled block explodes into ellipses Leaders Explodes into lines splines solids arrow heads block inserts arrow heads annotation blocks multiline text or tolerance objects depending on the leader Multiline Text Explodes into text objects Multiline Explodes into lines and arcs Polyface Mesh Explodes one vertex meshes into a point object Two vertex meshes explode into a line Three vertex meshes explode into 3D faces Region Explodes into lines arcs or splines EXPORT Saves objects to other file formats File menu Export E Command line export The Expor
367. irst mline Select a multiline Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The open cross intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed first mline selected second mline selected result Undo Undoes the open cross intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Merged Cross Creates a merged cross intersection between two multilines The order in which you select the multilines is not important l Select first mline Select a multiline Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The merged cross intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed Select first mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed ee y EE al i i i L b He i i first mline selected second mline selected result Undo Undoes the merged cross intersection The Select First Mline prompt is displayed Closed Tee Creates a closed tee intersection between two multilines The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline 187 Select first mline Select the multiline to trim Select second mline Select the intersecting multiline The closed tee intersection is completed and the following
368. is line If you want to select another type of object select it from the menu or type the first letter of the name Using Line a Select a point on the raster line to serve as the endpoint that will NOT change Then select a point to indicate the rest of the line that will be altered The raster line will be highlighted and a rubber banding reference line will appear attached at the first point used to pick the line If the first point was outside the raster line the endpoint closest to that point is selected Select new endpoint Note If you choose points to change a raster line drawn in a broken or dashed line style all the segments will be selected but the new line will be redrawn as a smoothed solid line Turn on the Ortho Mode ON if you want to change lines so they are perfectly horizontal or vertical or so they snap to a specified angle b Move the cursor The reference line will rubber band as it follows the cursor Press SELECT to select the new point where the line should end The reference line will disappear and the raster line will be redrawn at the new orientation and length Using Arc a Select the endpoint that will NOT change Then select a point on the circumference of the arc and the other endpoint of the arc These three points define the raster arc and the selected arc will be highlighted 415 Select new circumference point b You will see a rubber banding line extending from the first endpoint sele
369. is displayed first Drag it to the location you want and click The zooming view box is then displayed Resize it and press ENTER to zoom or click to return to the panning view box Press ENTER to fill the current viewport with the area currently enclosed by the view box Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible display of all the objects Note If you change the shading with the SHADEMODE command the view is changed If you enter ZOOM Previous after changing the shading it restores the previous view which is shaded differently but not zoomed differently 377 Zooms the display at a specified scale factor Enter a scale factor nX or nXP Specify a value Enter a value followed by X to specify the scale relative to the current view For example entering 5X causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen Enter a value followed by XP to specify the scale relative to paper space units For example entering BXP displays model space at half the scale of paper space units You can create a layout with each viewport displaying objects at a different scale Enter a value to specify the scale relative to the limits of the drawing This option is rarely used For example entering 2 displays objects at twice the size they would appear if you were zoomed to the limits of the drawing Zooms to display an area specified by two opposite corners of a rectangular window Sp
370. isplay of the hyperlink cursor tooltips and shortcut menu Command line hyperlinkoptions Display hyperlink cursor tooltip and shortcut menu Yes No lt Yes gt Note Access to hyperlinks is not available if you choose No ID Displays the coordinate of a location Tools menu Inquiry ID Point E command line id or id for transparent use Point Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate of the location is displayed on the command line ID lists the X Y and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point You can reference the last point by entering at the next prompt that requests a point If you snap to an object in 3D space the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object IMAGE Manages images e Reference toolbar 0 Insert menu Image Manager Shortcut menu Select an image right click in the drawing area and choose Image Image Manager ES Command line image 145 The Image Manager is displayed If you enter image at the Command prompt IMAGE displays prompts on the command line Image Manager Lists all the image files attached to the current drawing You can view image details such as pixel width color depth and resolution of the selected image You can attach new image files and detach locate reload and unload attached images List of Images Displays the names of all image files a
371. ist of model space views available in the selected drawing Enter a view name Enter layers to load or lt none gt Enter a layer name enter or press ENTER Layers to Load Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing To load geometry from multiple layers into the drawing use a comma between layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded nto the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter yes no external references are loaded into the drawing If you enter no all external references are loaded into the drawing List Layers A list of layer names available in the current drawing is displayed Enter one or more layer names lf no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y orn or press ENTER If you enter yes no external references are loaded into the drawing If you enter no all external references are loaded into the drawing 235 PARTIALOPEN Loads geometry and named objects from a selected view or layer into a drawing E Command line partialopen Note It is recommended that you partially open a drawing by using OPEN and choosing Partial Open in the Select File dialog box to display the Partial Open dialog box When you are running a
372. istinguishes the output file from normal DXF files 55 Select Objects Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with attributes When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens Number Found shows the number of objects you selected Number Found Indicates the number of objects you selected using Select Objects Template File Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats Enter the file name in the box or choose Template File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box The default file extension is txt If you select DXF under File Format the Template File option is not available Output File Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data Enter the path and file name for the extracted attribute data or choose Output File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box The txt file name extension is appended for CDF or SDF files and the dxx file name extension for DXF files ATTREDEF Redefines a block and updates associated attributes Command line attredef Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine Select objects for new block Select objects Insertion base point of new block Specify a point New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values Any old attributes that are
373. ithin a given window ee BB cc es pp iz IOP Textline selects text intersecting a drawn two point line 7 l 7 l ip UNC 2A X17 T4 UNC 24 X15 HEX HB CAP SEREWH HEX HD CAP SCREW DRILL SPOTFACE 5 DRILL SPOTFACE 2 Diad DEEP SREOD F DRI DEEP SREO D 393 123 IOP Alltext is a very powerful selection that identifies text over the whole drawing with just one pick WOODRUFF KEY GOb IREQ D AT EACH END 2 18 UNF 3B SEMIFIN JAM NUT 1 REQ D AT EACH END K 6 00 Other useful IOP selections W IOP Fence is very useful for selecting drawing data when converting amp smoothing With careful use of IOP Fence you can quickly pick complete views but not select text Ideal for selecting parts lists amp drawing borders IN N IOP Object allows you to pick a single connected piece of raster data with one pick eb 394 El IOP Segment is ideal for picking free running raster lines The selection stops at logical intersections This can be very useful when working on maps to isolate specific contour lines J 395 Raster Object Snapping Options The GTXImage CAD series provides transparent raster snaps While using a CAD or Raster command select Control Right mouse button to choose raster snaps from a pop up menu In addition to transparent raster snaps the GTXlmage CAD series includes the gAUTOSNAP command enabling Endpoint Intersection Nearest and Node AutoSnap
374. ities will all be converted to raster of the designated width Note The original default option is to use the Width Table set up by colors This allows you to set different widths for entities being rasterized according to their color If you press RETURN or T the Width Table will be displayed The widths will be in inches or millimeters according to the unit set in GTXRAST CFG c Enter the number and press RETURN Enter width lt XX gt d Enter the value for the width in the units being used and press RETURN The Width Table will reflect the changes e Select another color number to change its width or press 0 and RETURN to continue the command Note The width settings you change will remain in effect until you change them or you exit GTXImage CAD The entities will be changed to raster with the widths defined by their colors Using Box 467 a At the prompt type B or select Box from the menu Select first corner of box b Select a point Select opposite corner of box c As you move the cursor a rubber banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected Move the cursor until the box is the desired width and the length exceeds the width Select the point The best way to use this feature is to pick a point on the edge of an existing horizontal or vertical raster line and stretch the box along the line You can then easily match the width The length of the
375. ition file for specified characters or orientations of characters and displays these in the Character Verification dialog It displays each raster text sample allowing you to keep change or discard each character sample Changes are stored to the recognition file when it is saved and closed within gTCONFIG Note If you select both of these options gTRAIN will search for the specified characters at the specified orientations Search Options Training Characters Searches for specified characters Orientations Searches for characters at specified orientations Editing Options Correct Replace the identity displayed by the Character Verification dialog with a new character identity an F was trained as P typing F will correct the typo Keep Accepts the character evaluation of the sample raster text Discard Discards the current sample raster text Cancel Cancels the gTRAIN command making no further changes Changes before selecting Cancel are made to the CR file Instructions If no search criteria is entered all the training characters 1 Se ec t gT c ON F l G aa a Search is based on Training Characters Search criteria 2 The Text Configuration dialog appears X Training Characters 3 Open a recognition file or select one that is already loaded 4 Set the file to Train ON appears below the Train button 1X Orientations 5 Select OK eee 6 Invoke gTRAIN The Text Training dialog
376. ject to that of the source object Available for all objects Thickness Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object Available only for arcs attributes circles lines points 2D polylines regions text and traces Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object If you are working in color dependent plot style mode PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1 this option is unavailable Available for all objects 177 Dimension In addition to basic object properties changes the dimension style of the destination object to that of the source object Available only for dimension leader and tolerance objects Polyline In addition to basic object properties changes the width and linetype generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source polyline The fit smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline If the source polyline has variable width the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline Text In addition to basic object properties changes the text style of the destination object to that of the source object Available only for single line and multiline text objects Viewport In addition to basic object properties changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport on off display locking standard or custom s
377. jects in drawings even when the ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable Check Web for Live Enablers Checks the Autodesk website for object enablers Maximum Number of Unsuccessful Checks Specifies the number of times to check for object enablers if unsuccessful 222 User Preferences Controls options that optimize the way you work Windows Standard Behavior Controls keystroke and right click behavior Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area Displays a shortcut menu in the drawing area when you right click the pointing device If this option is cleared right click is interpreted as ENTER Right Click Customization Displays the Right Click Customization dialog box This dialog box provides further definition for the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area option SHORTCUTMENU system variable Insertion Scale Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing Source Content Units Sets the units used for an object being inserted into the current drawing when no insert units are specified with the INSUNITS system variable If Unspecified Unitless is selected the object is not scaled when inserted INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable Target Drawing Units Sets the units used in the current drawing when no insert units are specified with the INSUNITS system variable INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable Fields Sets preferences related to fields Display Background of Fields Displays fields wit
378. jects in wireframe regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen Hidden Plots objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen Rendered Plots objects as rendered regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen Quality Specifies the resolution at which shaded and rendered viewports are plotted You can select from the following options Draft Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe e Preview Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the current device resolution to a maximum of 150 dpi Normal Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the current device resolution to a maximum of 300 dpi Presentation Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device resolution to a maximum of 600 dpi Maximum Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device resolution with no maximum Custom Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at the resolution setting that you specify in the DPI box up to the current device resolution DPI Specifies the dots per inch for shaded and rendered views up to the maximum resolution of the current plotting device This option is available if you select Custom in the Quality box Plot Options Specifies options for lineweights plot styles shaded plots a
379. k or a rotated baseline and height pick on the raster 388 N Using the IOP Window Cutting option the raster selection would pick It only selects the cut rectangular window area Al the IOP Crossing Window the raster selection would highlight The Crossing IOP extends to include all crossing raster elements This is ideal for quickly picking up large areas of the drawing especially views 8 sections Isolating text is often an advantage 8 note how the text is not selected ol Using the IOP Inside Window the raster selection would select 389 Inside is great for only picking elements totally within the selected Window It s Ideal for selecting text broken lines amp parts list items SS IOP Rwindow to select all raster contained within a rotatable rectangular window selected by two baseline points and a height point Select two points of baseline Select Rwindow height SS IOP Rcrossing Select raster that is completely contained by or crossing the edge of a rotatable rectangular window selected by two baseline points and a height point 390 KE SX Si yS YA Select two points of baseline Select Rcrossing height IOP Rinside Select raster objects completely contained by a rotatable rectangular window selected by two baseline points and a height point ES Select two points of baseline Select Rinside height Polygon Window IOP s Next there are three Polygon Ar
380. lank lines e ok M Defines inch or millimeter measurement standard rawingUnits lInch 1 H Gl R a R D REM Defines the default path for saving raster files RasterPath CURRENT DIRECTORY REM Used with gCreate and color images when gActivated RasterFormat TIF M Defines the available raster file formats that will be loaded with an AutoCAD M open when a raster file with the same name is in the same directory RasterLoadExt TIF CG4 RLC BMP PCX PNG REM The maximum size an image can be created or actived REM Number of pixels DPI DPI ImageHeight ImageWidth REM This limit 973440000 could create a 400DPI 78 X 78 image REM If set to 0 it s unlimited warning could exceed memory capacity MaxNumPixels 973440000 REM Defines the marking color for selected raster in editing Can use any color from 0 255 HighlightColor GREEN REM Defines the width of rasterized vector objects RasterWidth 0 01 REM Yes option creates a backup of the original raster file BackupRas NO REM Yes option saves the vector entity when doing Gburn or Graster SaveVector NO REM Defines the Backup Raster Extension for the BackupRas variable You must put a before the extension BackupRasExt GTX M Defines the Dot Per Inch resolution within the raster limits M Used for gcreate Resolution 200 REM Set the number of undos that are stored Not available at
381. lar tracking you can draw lines along angles Polar angles are 90 degree divisors such as 45 30 and 15 degrees You can disable Display Polar Tracking Vector by setting TRACKPATH to 2 Display Full Screen Tracking Vector Controls the display of tracking vectors Tracking vectors are construction lines from which you can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects If this option is selected alignment vectors are displayed as infinite lines You can disable Display Full Screen Tracking Vector by setting TRACKPATH to 1 225 Display AutoTrack Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoTrack tooltip The tooltip is a label that displays the tracking coordinates AUTOSNAP system variable Alignment Point Acquisition Controls the method of displaying alignment vectors in a drawing Automatic Displays tracking vectors automatically when the aperture moves over an object snap Shift to Acquire Displays tracking vectors when you press SHIFT and move the aperture over an object snap Aperture Size Sets the display size for the AutoSnap aperture When Display AutoSnap Aperture Box is selected or when APBOX is set to 1 the aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object The aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point Values range from 1 to 50 pixels APERTURE system variable Draft
382. layed in Path Browse Choose Browse to display the Select a Reference dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can select new xrefs for the current drawing Found In Displays the path where the xref was found If no path was saved for the xref or if the xref is no longer located at the specified path the program searches for the xref in the following order Current folder of the host drawing Project search paths defined on the Files tab in the Options dialog box and in the PROJECTNAME system variable Support search paths defined on the Files tab in the Options dialog box Start in folder specified in the Microsoft Windows application shortcut Saved Path Displays the saved path if any that is used to locate the xref This path can be an absolute fully specified path a relative partially specified path or no path Reference Type Specifies whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay Path Type Specifies whether the saved path to the xref is the full path a relative path or no path You must save the current drawing before you can set the path type to Relative Path For a nested 365 xref a relative path always references the location of its immediate host and not necessarily the currently open drawing The Relative Path option is not available if the referenced drawing is located on a different local disk drive or on a network server Insertion Point Specifies the insertion
383. le Type in a value in current drawing units Using the 0 0 value which is always the default means no grid snapping for this angle First point for snap angle e You can define another reference angle and grid or press RETURN if you do not want to use another one When you are finished defining the angles press RETURN 5 After you respond to the last prompt the conversion will take place and you will see the message Processing Image 491 gSPECKL a a a Availability GSP or GSPECKL GTX Enhance gt Speckle All Products Icon gSPECKL filters and removes speckles from the raster image gSPECKL can also fill in small holes in solid raster Options Pick Options gSPECKL allows only Window PWindow or View raster picking to and to add or remove raster data to from the selection set Mode Options Delete Remove speckles from the raster Fill Fill in small holes in the raster Instructions Select gSPECKL Speckle size lt 0 00 gt Box Pick There are two ways to respond to this prompt You can enter a value or you can use the Box option to graphically specify the speckle size Entering a Value Specify an absolute value and hit RETURN This value will represent one side of a square area The speckles or holes to be affected must be within this tolerance Using a Box To use the graphics method type B or select Box from the menu Using Pick Single click with the left mous
384. le factor for the xref instance Z Scale Factor Specifies the Z scale factor for the xref instance Uniform Scale Ensures that the Y and Z scale factors are equal to the X scale factor Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the xref instance Specify On Screen 366 Displays prompts on the command line and makes the Angle option unavailable You are prompted for a rotation angle as described in INSERT Angle Specifies the rotation angle at which an xref instance is inserted into the current drawing Block Unit Displays information about the block units Unit Displays the specified INSUNITS value for the inserted block Factor Displays the unit scale factor which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units XBIND Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing pe Reference toolbar 0 Modify menu Objecti External Reference 3 Bind EE Command line xbind The Xbind dialog box is displayed If you enter xbind at the Command prompt XBIND displays prompts on the command line Note The Bind option of XREF binds the xref file Use XBIND for individual dependent definitions XCLIP Defines an xref or block clipping boundary and sets the front and back clipping planes a 0 Reference toolbar Shortcut menu Select an xref right click in the drawing area and choose Xref Clip EE Command line xclip Select objects Use an object selection
385. le s appearance Decreasing the zoom percentage has the opposite effect 355 DO Q VIEWRES VIEWRES ai 500 ai 15 Note Increasing the zoom percentage in VIEWRES may increase the time it takes to regenerate the drawing When a paper space layout is made current for the first time and a default viewport is created in the layout the viewing resolution for this initial viewport is the same as the viewing resolution for the Model tab viewport The VIEWRES setting is saved in the drawing To change the default for new drawings consider specifying the VIEWRES setting in the template files on which you base your new drawings VPCLIP Clips viewport objects and reshapes the viewport border Shortcut menu Select the viewport to clip right click in the drawing area and choose Viewport Clip ES Command line vpclip Select viewport to clip Select clipping object or Polygonal Delete lt Polygonal gt Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary Objects that are valid as clipping boundaries include closed poly lines circles ellipses closed splines and regions Draws a clipping boundary You can draw line segments or arc segments by specifying points The following prompt is displayed Specify start point Specify next point or Arc Close Length Undo The descriptions of the Next Point Arc Close Length and Undo options match the descriptions of the corresponding options in the PLINE command Deletes the clipping boun
386. lection window in a blank area of the drawing PICKADD system variable Press and Drag Draws a selection window when you select a point and dragging the pointing device toa second point If this option is cleared you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate points with the pointing device PICKDRAG system variable Implied Windowing Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside an object Drawing the selection window from left to right selects objects that are entirely inside the window s boundaries Drawing from right to left selects objects within and crossing the window s boundaries PICKAUTO system variable Object Grouping Selects all objects in a group when you select one object in that group With GROUP you can create and name a set of objects for selection You can also set this option by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 1 Associative Hatch Determines which objects are selected when you select an associative hatch If this option is selected boundary objects are also selected when you select an associative hatch You can also set this option by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 2 Grip Size Controls the display size of grips GRIPSIZE system variable q ia E E El grip sizes Grips Controls the settings that relate to grips Grips are small squares displayed on an object after it has been selected 227 Unselected Grip Color Determines the col
387. less Less than 256 colors For images with colors less that 256 colors either before or after using reduction you can use the gSEPARATE command This allows you to accurately select colors or groups of colors amp break then out into separate binary color images These separate binary images can if required be further processed using the full range of GTX capabilities amp commands detailed elsewhere in this help file For more detailed information about each command s operation refer to the respective section in the Command Reference Supported Color file formats When working with color images in GTX you can only save in tif uncompressed TIFF bmp Uncompressed Bitmap png Portable Network Graphics tga Taga amp pcx PC Paintbrush formats Also if you originally loaded a jpg JFIF JPEG file you will additionally be offered the option of saving in jog JPEG format JPEG Format files Although GTX can load 8 save jpg JPEG files it is not an ideal operating format for GTX work This is because JPEG is a format intended to work with pictures amp photographs amp when saving in JPEG format colors can automatically be added amp removed from the color pallet As such you can actively lose data by working amp saving in JPEG format If possible we recommend that you save JPEG files in TIF or PNG format to avoid losing image definition Anti Aliasing Some color images are scanned with th
388. line positions For example if the rotation should bring a certain line to a vertical position you could draw the base line over that line and then type 90 for the new angle The default angle will then be 90 minus the angle of the base line 5 Respond yes if you do not want to retain the original data in addition to the rotated copy Notes 1 If raster data is placed so that it is outside of the set raster drawing limits the portion outside the drawing limits will be lost If this happens use UNDO use gRESIZE to extend the raster limits as necessary then use gROTATE to rotate the data Nothing will be lost because all raster is within the new raster limits 2 Rotating raster data may distort it somewhat The line arc and circle intelligent raster object picking methods may not work on raster data that has been rotated several times 3 gROTATE can rotate raster right off the image To rotate an entire raster image 90 degrees rotate the image entity using the ROTATE command or use gTURN so that the image is automatically resized 4 Positive values rotate raster in a counter clockwise direction As soon as the rotation angle has been defined by whatever method is used the highlighted data will rotate as specified about the base point The command terminates 476 eee Type Availability GROTRECTANGLE GTX Edit gt Draw GTXImage CAD Rotated Rectangle GTXlmage CAD PLUS Icon Draw a ras
389. line or enter u Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again mline selected result Undo Restores the deleted vertex The Select Mline prompt is displayed Cut Single Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline lial Select mline Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point and the following prompt is displayed Select second point Specify the second cut point on the multiline The element is cut and the following prompt is displayed Select mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Mline 190 Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again fl al ee ce os all ha co os os a al first mline selected second paint selected result Undo Undoes the cut The Select Mline prompt is displayed Cut All Creates a visual break through the entire multiline alll II Select mline Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point and the following prompt is displayed Select second point Specify the second cut point on the multiline All elements of the multiline are cut and the following prompt is displayed Select mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again L J Lim M Lis M L JJ first mline selected second point selected result Undo Und
390. lose to the offset distance are snapped to that distance Cancel 1 Select Reference First point for snap angle 2 Select the first point for the angular line Second point for snap angle 3 Select the second point to define the angle Reference angle lt XX XXXXX gt 4 You can type in a new value for the angle or press RETURN if it is satisfactory You cannot redefine it by selecting points Parallel alignment offset lt 0 0 gt 5 This value determines the distance between the imaginary grid lines parallel to the given reference angle Type in a value in current drawing units Using the 0 0 value which is always the default means no grid snapping for this angle 422 First point for snap angle 6 You can define another reference angle and grid or press RETURN if you do not want to use another one When you are finished defining the angles press RETURN The command then continues as above Note If you use the Reference Angle option orthogonal rectification will not occur automatically However you can enter 0 and 90 reference angles to achieve orthogonal rectification None converts raster exactly as it appears without any rectification Vector Color Vector entities do not have any width You can preserve information stored in the line width of the raster image you can assign a color to vectors resulting from different line widths By Width causes the values in the line width configura
391. ls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon View menu Display UCS Icon EE command line ucsicon The UCS icon represents the orientation of the user coordinate system UCS axes and the location of the current UCS origin It also represents the current viewing direction relative to the XY plane A UCS can be stored with a viewport if the UCSVP system variable is set to 1 for that viewport Different coordinate system icons are displayed in paper space and model space In both cases a plus sign appears at the base of the icon when it is positioned at the origin of the current UCS The letter W appears in the Y portion of the icon if the current UCS is the same as the world coordinate system 345 With the 3D UCS icon a square is displayed in the XY plane at the origin when the UCS is the same as the world coordinate system A box is formed at the base of the icon if you are viewing the UCS from above the positive Z direction The box is missing if you are viewing the UCS from below With the 3D UCS icon the Z axis is solid when viewed from above the XY plane and dashed when viewed from below the XY plane If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel to the viewing plane that is if the XY plane is edge on to the viewer the 2D UCS icon is replaced by a broken pencil icon The 3D UCS icon does not use a broken pencil icon Enter an option ON OFF All Noorigin ORigin Properties lt current gt Enter an op
392. ly between the layout viewports you are configuring Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup When you select 2D the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports When you select 3D a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list You can choose a named view or if you have selected 3D setup you can select from the list of standard views Use the Preview area to see the choices Named Viewports Tab Layouts Viewports Dialog Box Named Viewports Tab Layouts Viewports Dialog Box Displays any saved and named model space viewport configurations for you to use in the current layout You cannot save and name a layout viewport configuration WBLOCK Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file EE Command line wblock The Write Block dialog box is displayed Entering wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file followed by prompts on the command line If FILEDIA is set to 0 the standard file selection dialog box is suppressed Saves objects or converts a block to a file The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected a single block is selected or objects other than blocks are selected Source Spe
393. m variable is set to 0 the following prompt is displayed instead of the dialog box Enter image file name to attach lt ast gt Enter an image name The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the default To avoid errors when entering an image name it is recommended that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows imagename path name long file name bmp or imagename path name ong file name bmp If you enter a valid image name without a file extension the program searches for the file in this order first an existing image definition in the drawing and second an image file in the folders in order of the search path The program searches for all the image files with the specified name regardless of extension and uses the first name found If no image name or image file is found the message Image Not Found is displayed and the prompt is repeated To specify a long file name that does not conform to this program s naming rules enter the name as follows imagename filename You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the imagename filename convention on the command line Enter a tilde at the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt If you press ESC after the dialog box opens the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed IMAGEATTACH Attaches a new image to the current drawing 0 Reference toolbar 0 Insert menu Raster Image E Command line imageattach
394. matches the specified criteria The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points 72 CLOSE Closes the current drawing File menu Close EE Command line close The current drawing is closed If you modified the drawing since it was last saved you are prompted to save or discard the changes You can close a file that has been opened in read only mode if you have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes To save changes to a read only file you must use the SAVEAS command COLOR Sets the color for new objects Format menu Color EE Command line color or color for transparent use The Select Color dialog box is displayed If you enter color at the Command prompt COLOR displays prompts on the command line COMPILE Compiles shape files and PostScript font files into SHX files Command line compile The Select Shape or Font File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box The compiled file is assigned this name with the file extension shx CONVERTPSTYLES Converts the current drawing to either named or color dependent plot styles ES Command line convertpstyles A drawing can use either named or color dependent plot styles but not both CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color dependent plot styles to named plot styles or from named plot styles to c
395. ment graphically or type in the offset values in the form X Y Since the system does not know whether the X Y value typed in is the base point or the displacement distance the response to the second prompt clarifies this Using Base Point 1 Select the reference point for the moving process Second point of displacement Note 1 If you skew the same file several times the raster data could become distorted If this happens re load the raster image and deskew it again using gDESKEW once 435 2 If the image needs to be rotated more than 5 degrees you should re scan the drawing Deskewing the entire image more than a few degrees can distort the raster data 3 Large files may take several minutes to complete the operation Using transparent zoom or the end or int raster snapping methods can help you more accurately pick your reference line 2 Arubber banding line will appear attached at the base point Select a second point to define the relative distance and angle for the new placement of the deskewed raster It will appear in the designated location The command will be completed Using Displacement 1 Type in the X and Y values for the displacement in the same format used to enter coordinates You will see the same prompt as above Second point of displacement 2 Press RETURN in response to the prompt to indicate that the original entry was the displacement The deskewed raster will appear in the new location
396. milar to the Add option but subtracts areas and perimeters K selected area to be subtracted remaining area ARRAY 0 Modify toolbar ENE 0 Modify menu Array EE Command line array Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern Use the Rectanqular Array option to create an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object Use the Polar Array option to create an array by copying the selected objects around a center point Other options Select Objects Preview Area Preview Rectangular Array 46 Rectangular Array Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object a Oooo distance between O Oooo object selected distance between columns Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array If you specify one row you must specify more than one column If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array it might take a while to create the copies By default the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100 000 The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry To reset the limit to 200 000 for example enter setenv MaxArray 200000 at the Command prompt Columns Specifies the number of columns in the array If you specify one column you must specify more than one row If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array it might take a while to create the copies By default the maximum n
397. mmand line recover In the Select File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file Results are displayed in the text window When FILEDIA is set to 0 zero RECOVER displays the following prompt on the command line Enter name of drawing file to recover Enter tilde at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Recover Drawing dialog box Note The RECOVER command performs recoveries or audit operations on DWG files only Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file 281 RECTANG Draws a rectangular polyline Eo Draw toolbar Eo Draw menu Rectangle E Command line rectang or rectangle Current settings Rotation 0 Specify first corner point or Chamfer Elevation Fillet Thickness Width Specify a point or enter an option First Corner Point First Corner Point Specifies a corner point of the rectangle Specify other corner point or Area Dimensions Rotation Specify a point or enter an option Other Corner Point 2 Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width If the Chamfer or Fillet option is active the area includes the effect of the chamfers or fillets on the corners of the rectangle Enter area of rectangle in current units lt 100 gt Enter a positive value Calculate rectangle dimensions based on Length Wi
398. mple but important parameter It determines how frequently the gl CONVRT command asks you to validate its guess at characters If the confidence level of a recognized character is below this Auto Convert Threshold then the Character Verification dialog will appear allowing you to see the character for yourself and override the program s attempt at recognizing the character Notes 1 The Auto Convert Threshold is the Confidence Level above which a character must be recognized for it to be automatically converted to text without using the verification dialog This is set by the CharThreshold parameter in GTXRAST CFG 2 With a trained recognition file gTCONVRT should accurately recognize legible characters Recognition of text in messy drawings may be unreliable 3 gTCONVRT assigns a Confidence Level from 0 to 100 to each character Confidence measures the degree to which a raster character matches those on which the recognition file has trained Text Sizes Lists the sizes allowed for text resulting from raster text recognition during gTCONVRT Resulting text will be snapped to the nearest perceived text size The default list is established by the TextHeight parameter in GTXRAST CFG Save Raster If deactivated gJTCONVRT will delete raster text as it is converted to CAD text We recommend you normally leave this parameter on so the original raster text remains for final text checking purposes QA 497 gTCONVRT Availability GTC or
399. mpts on the command line Defines the unit and angle formats Length Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units Type Sets the current format for units of measure The values include Architectural Decimal Engineering Fractional and Scientific The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet and inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch The other formats can represent any real world unit Precision Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurements 351 Angle Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display Type Sets the current angle format Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display The following conventions are used for the various angle measures decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers grads appear with a lowercase g suffix and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix The degrees minutes seconds format uses d for degrees for minutes and for seconds for example 123d45 56 7 Surveyor s units show angles as bearings using N or S for north or south degrees minutes seconds for how far east or west the angle is from direct north or south and E or W for east or west for example N 45d0 0 E The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the degrees minutes seconds format If the angle is precisely north south east or west only t
400. n File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter or select a customization file name When you press ENTER or choose Open the named file is loaded A customization file is an XML based file containing the menus toolbars tool palettes and other interface elements that you can customize You can create a customized menu file and use MENU or CUI to load the file 179 MINSERT Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array EE Command line minsert Enter block name or Enter a name enter to list the currently defined blocks in the drawing or enter to display the Select Drawing File dialog box Note You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the block s objects during insertion as you can with INSERT an option Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or O If you enter one of the options respond to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded Scale Sets the scale factor for the X Y and Z axes The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor Specify scale factor for XYZ axes Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Specify rotation angle lt 0 gt The rotation angle
401. n should begin Specify second point for arc length dimension Specify a point on the arc where the arc length dimension should end Leader 88 Leader Adds a leader object This option is displayed only if the arc or arc segment is greater than 90 degrees The leader is drawn radially pointing towards the center of the arc being dimensioned Specify arc length dimension location or Mtext Text Angle Partial No leader Specify a point or enter an option The leader is created automatically The No Leader option cancels the Leader option before the leader is created To remove a leader delete the arc length dimension and recreate it without the leader option DIMBASELINE Creates a linear angular or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a selected dimension 0 Dimension toolbar E 0 Dimension menu Baseline E Command line dimbaseline If no dimension was created in the current session you are prompted to select a linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension Select base dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Otherwise the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session If the base dimension is linear or angular the following prompt is displayed Specify a second extension line origin Or Undo Select lt Select gt Specify a point enter an option or press ENTERto select a ba
402. n the drawing and the layers in each xref Layer filters defined in xref files are not displayed Tree View Shortcut Menu Provides commands for items selected in the tree view Visibility Changes the visibility state of all the layers in the selected filter or All or All Used Layers if selected On Objects on the layer are displayed plotted and regenerated and hide other objects when you use HIDE Off Objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE The drawing is not regenerated when you turn the layer on Thawed Objects on the layer are displayed and plotted and hide other objects when you use HIDE Frozen Objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer Lock Controls whether the objects on the layers in the selected filter can be modified Lock None of the objects on the layer can be modified You can still apply object snaps to objects on a locked layer and perform other operations that do not modify those objects Unlock Objects on the layer can be modified Viewport In the current layout viewport controls the VP Freeze setting of the layers in the selected layer filter This option is not available for model space viewports Freeze Sets Current VP Freeze for layers in the filter In the current viewport objects on the layer are not displayed and
403. n use 402 gBITONAL The gBITONAL command has been optimized to operate on a broad range of color images amp works well where an image has a clear cut distinction between dark amp light data However the gBITONAL threshold may not give the exact results that you desire by including or omitting important data from the binary image In these instances it may be better to use the gREDUCE amp gSEPARATE commands where you have greater control of the color separation amp threshold gREDUCE If you have an image with greater than 256 colors you can firstly use gREDUCE to bring the image down to 256 colors or less gSEPARATE For images with colors less that 256 colors either before or after using reduction you can use the gSEPARATE command This allows you to accurately select colors or groups of colors amp break then out into separate binary color images These separate binary images can if required be further processed using the full range of GTX capabilities amp commands detailed elsewhere in this help file For more detailed information about each command s operation refer to the respective gBITONAL gREDUCE amp gSEPARATE section in the Command Reference Cancel Cancel does no pre processing amp just loads the image into AutoCAD In this state you cannot work on the color image using GTX commands 403 gAUTOSNAP Type Menu Availability GAS GASP GASNAP or GTX Raster Edit gt Raster GTXImage CAD
404. nal geometry to load into a partially open drawing You can select and load geometry from a view or a selected area and from layers You cannot unload any information that is currently loaded in the drawing If the drawing contains attached xrefs that were not loaded at the time that the drawing was partially opened you can reload the xrefs by using the Xref Manager See XREF View Geometry to Load Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing Views available for loading include only views defined in model space You can load paper space geometry by loading the layer on which the paper space geometry is drawn View Name Displays the currently selected view Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing View List Displays all the model space views available in the selected drawing file When a view is selected only the geometry in the selected view is loaded The default view is Extents You can select to load geometry from only one view Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing Any information currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded Pick Window Prompts you to use the pointing device to specify an area using window selection The selected area becomes the view to load and is displayed in the View Geometry to Load list as New View Layer Geometry to Load Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing
405. nce of drafting tooltips Enable Pointer Input Turns on pointer iput When pointer input and dimensional input are both turned on dimensional input supersedes pointer input when it is available DYNMODE system variable Pointer Input Displays the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor When a command prompts for a point you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of on the command line Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input Settings Displays the Pointer Input Settings dialog box Enable Dimension Input Turns on dimensional input Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point DYNMODE system variable Dimension Input Displays a dimension with tooltips for distance value and angle value when a command prompts for a second point or a distance The values in the dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line Preview Area Shows an example of dimensional input Settings Displays the Dimension Input Settings dialog box Dynamic Prompts Displays prompts in a tooltip near the cursor when necessary in order to complete the command You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line Preview Area Shows an example of dynamic prompts Show Command Prompting and Command Input near the Crosshairs Displays prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips DYNPROM
406. nd line lt next gt Select another line or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Diameter Select arc or circle lt next gt Select an arc or a circle or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Leader Specify leader association point lt next gt Specify an object snap location or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Ordinate Specify feature location lt next gt Specify an object snap location or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Radius Select arc or circle lt next gt Select an arc or a circle or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Note DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions Command line dimregen The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in three cases After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model space active update associative dimensions created in paper space After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version of the program update associative dimensions if the dimensioned objects have been modified 103 After opening a drawing containing external references that are dimensioned in the current drawing
407. nd the order in which objects are plotted Plot in Background Specifies that the plot is processed in the background BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable Plot Object Lineweights Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted Plot with Plot Styles Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are plotted When you select this option Plot Object Lineweights is automatically selected also Plot Paperspace Last Plots model space geometry first Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry Hide Paperspace Objects Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in the paper space viewport This option is available only from a layout tab The effect of this setting is reflected in the plot preview but not in the layout Plot Stamp On 257 Turns on plot stamping Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and or logs it to a file Plot stamp settings are specified in the Plot Stamp dialog box in which you can specify the information that you want applied to the plot stamp such as drawing name date and time plot scale and so on To open the Plot Stamp dialog box select the Plot Stamp On option and then click the Plot Stamp Settings button that is displayed to the right of the option You can also open the Plot Stamp dialog box by clicking the Plot Stamp Settings button on the Plot and Publish tab of the Options dialog box Plot Stamp Set
408. ndpoint If the chord length is positive the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point If the 40 chord length is negative the major arc is drawn counterclockwise Specify length of chord Specify a length E 2 y 1 fength of chord End Specifies the endpoint of the arc Specify end point of arc Specify center point of arc or Angle Direction Radius Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point 3 through the second point specified 2 imaginary uai i 2 st Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to an endpoint 2 with a specified included angle If the angle is negative a clockwise arc is drawn Specify included angle Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise angle 2 Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction It creates any arc major or minor clockwise or counterclockwise beginning with the start point 1 and ending at an endpoint 2 The direction is determined from the start point Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc x w a direction Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point 1 to the endpoint 2 If the radius is negative the major arc is drawn Specify radius of arc N 1 2 oy radius 41 Center Specifies the cente
409. need to reduce your image DPI to stay within the above limit For example at 400 DPI 32K pixels equals approximately to an 80 inches 2 meter square drawing The maximum raster limits are also restricted by the available memory and your system s swap file size 13 Installation System Requirements Minimum requirements to run GTXImage CAD are outlined below CPU Intel Pentium 4 processor 2 2 GHz Recommended Operating System Windows 7 32 Bit amp 64 Bit Windows Vista 32 Bit amp 64 Bit or XP 32 Bit amp 64 Bit Drive space 500 MB free hard disk space for installation Virtual memory 2 GB swap file or greater Memory 2 GB RAM Display 1024 X 768 VGA with True Color Manipulating raster images is very RAM hungry and the more RAM and virtual memory you have the better the program will perform Installing the Software To install your software Installation Steps 1 Run SETUP from GTX CD and install the GTXImage CAD series V14 software During installation ensure that you select the product that you have purchased GTXImage CAD or GTXlmage CAD PLUS 2 Select the correct license mode either Software license or Hardware lock license 3 Read README PDF and other files to see any recent changes to the installation Note To install icons in common Windows folders log in as the administrator to install To install icons in a personal program group log in as the person who will be usi
410. nerates the linetype starting and ending with a dash at each vertex Ltype Gen does not apply to polylines with tapered segments Enter polyline linetype generation option ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or press ENTER 245 T PA el L Liype Gen set to Off Ltype Gen set to On Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session 3D Polyline Selection 246 3D Polyline Selection If you select a 3D polyline the following prompt is displayed Enter an option Close Edit vertex Spline curve Decurve Undo Enter an option or press ENTER If the polyline you select is closed Open replaces the Close option in the prompt Close Creates the closing segment of the polyline connecting the last segment with the first The polyline is considered open unless you close it with Close Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline The polyline is considered closed unless you open it with Open Edit Vertex Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments that follow it Enter a vertex editing option Next Previous Break Insert Move Regen Straighten eXit lt current gt Enter an option or pressENTER Pressing ENTER accepts the current default which is either Next or Previous Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Previous Moves the X marker to the p
411. nes are added as needed to extend one or both lines The arc is always less than 180 degrees angle displayed depends On cursor position Three Point Specification Three Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify Specify angle vertex Specify a point 1 Specify first angle endpoint Specify a point 2 Specify second angle endpoint Specify a point 3 The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints If you need extension lines the endpoints are used as origin points 135 fe 3 1 The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line Dimension Arc Line Location Dimension Arc Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines After you specify the location DIMANGULAR ends Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets
412. nfl file Names can contain up to 18 characters Delete Current Filter List Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default filter file 132 Apply Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt where you create a selection set The current filter is used on the objects you select FIND Finds replaces selects or zooms to specified text Edit menu Find Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Find Command line find The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed Specifies the text you want to find replace or select and controls the scope and results of the search Find Text String Specifies the text string you want to find Enter a text string including any wild card characters or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text Enter a string or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list Search In Specifies whether to search the entire drawing or only the current selection If something is already selected Current Selection is the default value If nothing is selected Entire Drawing is the default value You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog box and create or modify the selection set Select Objects Button Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select objects in your drawing Press ENTER
413. ng X after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval Turns on the grid using the current spacing GRID tumed on Turns off the grid GRID tumed aff Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions Specify the horizontal spacing X lt current gt Enter a value or press ENTER Specify the vertical spacing Y lt current gt Enter a value or press ENTER Entering X following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the drawing units The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric 135 GRID set to Aspect GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups ES Command line group The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed If you enter group at the Command prompt GROUP displays prompts on the command line Displays identifies names and changes object groups Group Name Displays the names of existing groups Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable When a group is selectable selecting one object in the group selects the whole group Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0 no groups are selectable Group Identification Displays the name and description if any of the group selected in the Group Name list Group Name Specifies
414. ng performed characters with a confidence above the Auto Convert Threshold are automatically converted into text Characters with a confidence below that threshold are presented in the Character Verification dialog 3 When Word Recognition is performed the Auto Convert Threshold is not used Instead characters are formed into strings which are then compared to words and patterns in the dictionary files DCT These files contain words and patterns that are likely to appear in converted drawings If a recognized word is close to one found in the dictionary but a character is missing or perhaps incorrectly recognized that character can be changed so the word matches the one found in the dictionary One threshold Force Fit controls how close a word has to be to a dictionary term for it to be changed Another threshold Verify determines how likely the user will be interrupted 4 When using character recognition not word recognition ambiguous characters are shown to the user so that 0 and O 1 and I 5 and S and other pairs of ambiguous characters appear correctly in the CAD text Regardless of the conversion method ICR generates AutoCAD text at user specified size using the font of the current text style z Raster Input The Raster Input pane contains parameters that control the interpretation of incoming raster text characters and space recognition mn ee IOP ther ose Pa Sets the minimum and maximum size raster text blobs
415. ng the software Running SETUP 1 Insert the installation CD 2 If your AutoRUN is active on your system a dialog will appear Select GTXImage CAD Series and then GTXImage CAD series V14 select Install 3 If AutoRUN is not active the dialog will not appear when you insert the CD Run D VCADV1401 ICADV140 SETUP EXE Assuming D is your CD ROM drive to start the installation 4 Click OK SETUP will initialize and after a few seconds the software license agreement will appear 5 The Choose Destination Location dialog appears To install the program in a custom directory select Browse to establish the new destination Once the correct Destination 14 Directory is displayed Select Next 6 If you are installing as the administrator SETUP will create a common program folder which will be visible to any users logged in on the computer 7 SETUP installs the program files from the installation CD 8 Setup prompts you to choose the program folder in which the program icons will appear within the start menu 9 The Configure GTXImageCAD Series V14 dialog appears This sets the configuration parameters in the GTXImage CAD configuration file gtxrast cfg Notes 1 If you purchased this product select LICENSED If you are installing a demonstration version select DEMONSTRATION 2 A lengthy delay in the startup of the GTX program is normal if a HASP hardware key or Flex software license are not found and the variable DE
416. ngent snap mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles the first point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline point polyline ray spline or xline Apparent Intersection Snaps to the visual intersection of two objects that are not in the same plane but may appear to intersect in the current view Extended Apparent Intersection is not available as a running object snap Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids Note You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time Parallel Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever you are prompted for the second point of a vector After specifying the first point of a vector if you move the cursor over a straight line segment of another object the point is acquired When the path of the object you create is parallel to the line segment an alignment path is displayed which you can use to create the parallel object Select All Turns on all object snap modes Clear All Turns off all object snap modes Dynamic Input Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box 117 Dynamic Input Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Controls pointer input dimension input dynamic prompting and the appeara
417. nit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance 182 Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array Specify rotation angle lt 0 gt Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ lt 1 gt Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets the X scale factor Enter Y scale factor lt use X scale factor gt Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance Corner Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block insertion point Specify opposite corner Specify a point Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no
418. not be write protected The TEMPPREFIX system variable read only also stores the current location of temporary drawing files Temporary External Reference File Location Specifies the location of external reference xref files This location is used for the copy of the xref when you select Enabled with Copy in the Demand Load Xrefs list on the Open and Save tab XLOADPATH system variable Texture Maps Search Path Specifies the folders to search for rendering texture maps i drop Associated File Location Specifies the location of data files associated with i drop content When the location is not specified the location of the current drawing file is used Browse Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box depending on what you selected in the List of Folders and Files Add Adds a search path for the selected folder Remove Removes the selected search path or file Move Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path Move Down Moves the selected search path below the following search path Set Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current Display Customizes the display 212 Window Elements Controls display settings specific to the drawing environment Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window Displays scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area Display Screen Menu Displays the screen menu on the right side of the drawing
419. ns View Geometry to Load Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing Only model space views are available for loading You can load paper space geometry by loading the layer that the paper space geometry is drawn on View Name Displays the currently selected view Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing View List Displays all the model space views available in the selected drawing file When a view is selected the program loads only the geometry in the selected view The default view is Extents Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing You can load geometry from only one view You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open drawing Note When a drawing is partially open named objects are still loaded into the file along with the specified geometry from the selected view All views are still available in the partially open drawing but only geometry from the view specified to load is displayed in the drawing 206 Layer Geometry to Load Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file The geometry on selected layers is loaded into the drawing including both model space and paper space geometry The default loads no layer geometry into the drawing but you can load geometry from one or more layers If you specify to load no layer geometry into the drawing
420. nt gt Enter an option or press ENTER Pressing ENTER accepts the current default which is either Next or Previous ESA beginning vertex Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Break Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex Enter an option Next Previous Go eXit lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline the result is one truncated polyline If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint you cannot use Break Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed 241 saved marked vertex next marked vertex Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode Edt segment deleted Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode Insert Adds
421. nt or enter an option For a description of the insertion options see INSERT Command Line If None is selected on the Annotation tab no annotation prompts are displayed Settings Displays the Leader Settings dialog box QSAVE Saves the current drawing using the file format specified in the Options dialog box 0 Standard toolbar al 0 File menu Save ES Command line qsave The QSAVE command is equivalent to clicking Save on the File menu If the drawing is named the program saves the drawing using the file format specified on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog box and does not request a file name If the drawing 278 is unnamed the Save Drawing As dialog box see SAVEAS is displayed and the drawing is saved with the file name and format you specify If the drawing is read only use the SAVEAS command to save the changed file under a different name QSELECT Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria Tools menu Quick Select Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Quick Select E Command line qselect The Quick Select dialog box is displayed Specifies the filtering criteria and how you want to create the selection set from that criteria Apply To Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to the current selection set if one exists To select a group of objects to which you want to apply the filtering criteria use the Select Objects button
422. nt to the first object encountered 336 Project Specifies the projection method used when trimming objects Enter a projection option None Ucs View lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER None Specifies no projection The command trims only objects that intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space object not intersecting with cutting edge in SD space object intersecting with cutting edge in SD space UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS The command trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space projection of objects onto current UCS intersecting with cutting edge View Specifies projection along the current view direction The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view 337 Edge Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object s extrapolated edge or only to an object that intersects it in 3D space Enter an implied edge extension mode Extend No extend lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER object to trim selected edge Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space ae Extend No Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space Note When trimming hatches do not set Edge to Extend If you do gaps in the trim boundaries will not be bridged when trimming hatches even when the gap toler
423. o all objects All other object properties are specific to the type of object Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects When more than one object is selected the Properties palette displays only those properties common to all objects in the selection set When no objects are selected the Properties palette displays only the general properties of the current layer and layout the name of the plot style table attached to the layer the view properties and information about the UCS You can specify a new value to modify any property that can be changed Click the value and use one of the following methods Enter a new value Click the down arrow at the right and select a value from the list Click the Pick Point button to use the pointing device to change a coordinate value Click the QuickCalc calculator button to calculate a new value Click the left or right arrow to increase or decrease the value Click the button and change the property value in a dialog box Object Type Displays the type of object that is selected Toggle Value of PICKADD Sysvar Turns the PICKADD system variable on 1 and off 0 When PICKADD is on each object selected either individually or by windowing is added to the current selection set When PICKADD is off selected objects replace the current selection set Select Objects Selects desired objects using any selection method The properties common to t
424. object copied with COPYBASE it is placed relative to the specified base point COPYCLIP Copies objects or command line text to the Clipboard 0 Standard toolbar 0 Edit menu Copy Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Copy E Command line copyclip Select objects COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object Note You can also use CTRL C to run COPYCLIP If the cursor is in the drawing area the selected objects are copied to the Clipboard If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window the selected text is copied to the Clipboard 75 COPYHIST Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard E Command line copyhist The text is copied to the Clipboard e Tools menu Customize Interface E Command line cui Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces toolbars menus shortcut menus and keyboard shortcuts The Customize User Interface dialog box is displayed COPYLINK Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications Edit menu Copy Link E Command line copylink COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object CUSTOMIZE Customizes tool palettes Tools menu Customize Tool Palettes Shortcut menu Right
425. oes the cut The Select Mline prompt is displayed Weld All Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut III Select mline Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the start of the weld and the following prompt is displayed Select second point Specify the end of the weld on the multiline The multiline is welded and the following prompt is displayed Select mline or Undo Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline The Select Mline prompt is displayed again 191 Ld YL O PL eee a a ol Da a first mline selected second point selecied result Undo Undoes the weld The Select Mline prompt is displayed again 192 MLINE Creates multiple parallel lines Draw menu Multiline EE Command line mline Current settings Justification current Scale current Style current Specify start point or Justification Scale STyle Specify a point or enter an option Start Point Start Point Specifies the next vertex of the multiline Specify next point Specify next point or Undo Specify a point or enter u If you create a multiline with two or more segments the prompt includes the Close option Specify next point or Close Undo Specify a point or enter an option Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the mult
426. of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right clicking in the Aerial View window Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport automatically when multiple viewports are displayed When Auto Viewport is off the Aerial View window is not updated to match the current viewport Dynamic Update Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the drawing When Dynamic Update is off the Aerial View window is not updated until you click in the Aerial View window Realtime Zoom Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom using the Aerial View window 119 DWGPROPS Sets and displays the properties of the current drawing File menu Drawing Properties E Command line dwgprops The Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed Displays read only statistics or general information about your drawing assigns summary properties and assigns names and values to custom properties These custom properties can help you identify your drawing Document properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog box DXBIN Imports specially coded binary files Insert menu Drawing Exchange Binary EE Command line dxbin The Select DXB File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed Enter the name of the file to import ELEV Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects E Command line elev or elev for transparent use Speci
427. olor dependent plot styles depending on which plot style method the drawing is currently using Converting drawings from color dependent plot styles to named plot styles e Converting drawings from named plot styles to color dependent plot styles When you convert a drawing CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system variable to the appropriate setting 1 named 0 color dependent 73 For example a drawing using color dependent plot styles assigns plot properties to objects and layers by color In other words all objects with the same color have the same plot properties CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent of color assignment In other words all objects with the same color can have different plot properties Converting Drawings from Color Dependent to Named Plot Styles Converting Drawings from Color Dependent to Named Plot Styles A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing s plot style tables before converting the drawing You can convert the color dependent plot style tables assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB The Select File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the converted drawing CONVERTPSTYLES requires you to select a named plot style table that was converted using CONVERTCTB or created from a PC2 or PCP file Normally you s
428. olor or monochrome output for vector drawings When printing raster images on a plotter with limited memory you can improve performance by making some changes to the quality of the printed output If you use a nonsystem plotter that supports varying amounts of installed RAM you can provide that information to improve performance Installed Memory Provides the program with the amount of total memory RAM installed on a nonsystem plotter This option is only available for nonWindows system printers that accept optional memory If your plotter has extra memory specify the total amount of memory Total Installed Memory Specifies the total installed memory in megabytes The plotter driver uses the memory information to determine whether banding or image quality degradation is required to prevent the system from running out of memory Vector Graphics 264 Provides options for specifying the color depth resolution and dithering of vector output Some of the Vector Graphics options are closely interrelated changing an option can affect other available options Color Depth Displays a list for choosing color depth for the configured plotter The color depth options change as you change the resolution and dithering values More color depth uses more memory and takes longer to plot You can specify either color or monochrome output Resolution Adjusts the DPI dots per inch resolution of the configured plotter Changing the DPI resolu
429. ommand Using Rotate 1 Enter r or select Rotate from the menu to change the orientation of the reference box The pasted data will be highlighted Base point 2 Select a point for the center of rotation Rotation Angle lt 0 0 gt Reference 3 Arubber band line will extend from the base point The rotation point is the lower left corner of 461 the box The rotation is counter clockwise from the X axis if a positive angle is entered There are several ways to respond You can accept the default angle by pressing RETURN or use either of the two options The default angle initially zero degrees reflects the value used for a previous gPASTE operation Rotation Angle Using rotation angle you can specify the angle with reference to the X axis by typing in a value in degrees or by rubber banding the reference line When you designate the angle by either method the raster will be redrawn in the new orientation Using Reference Angle Using reference angle you must enter r or select Reference from the menu You then indicate a different base line not the X axis for the graphic angle Reference angle lt 0 0 gt e You can either enter a degree value to define the new base line in relation to the X axis or you can define it graphically by selecting the first point for the base line Reference angle lt 0 0 gt Second point e Select the second point for the base line New angle e Indicate
430. ommand To rename or delete a customized UCS right click the UCS name in the list and use the shortcut menu Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system You can also restore a selected coordinate system by double clicking its name in the list or by right clicking the name and choosing Set Current The Current UCS text is updated Details Displays the UCS Details dialog box which displays UCS coordinate data You can also view the details about a selected coordinate system by right clicking the name and choosing Details Rename Shortcut Menu Only Renames a customized UCS You cannot rename the World UCS You can also rename a UCS by double clicking its name in the list Delete Shortcut Menu Only Deletes a customized UCS You cannot delete the World UCS Orthographic UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box 347 Orthographic UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box Changes the UCS to one of the orthographic UCS settings Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS If the UCS has not been saved and named it is listed as UNNAMED Orthographic UCS Names Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS specified in the Relative To list The Depth column lists the distance between the orthographic coordinate system and the parallel plane passing through the origin of the UCS base setting stored in the UCSBASE system variable Name Speci
431. on When you select a feature location the continued dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed To end the command press ESC To select another linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension press ENTER Select continued dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Select a base dimension or press ESC to end the command Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session Select Prompts you to select a linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension After you select a continued dimension the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed To end the command press ESC DIMDIAMETER Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs 0 Dimension toolbar S 0 Dimension menu Diameter EE midi EE Command line dimdiameter Select arc or circle DIMDIAMETER measures the diameter of the selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a diameter symbol in front of it Specify dimension line location or Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text Mtext Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or
432. on configuration or license authorization is required System Requirements GTX OSR requires the following configuration CPU Pentium Il or better Operating System Windows 98 SE NT 4 0 2000 XP Drive space 4 MB free hard disk space Virtual memory 100 MB swap file Memory 64 MB RAM Using GTX OSR GTX OSR reads a list of raster files and converts the raster data to vector data This raster to vector conversion occurs in a batch process yet the parameters for each drawing can be set independently Conversion Process Your original paper drawings need to be scanned producing a raster file GTX OSR performs best on a raster image without speckles The GTXImage CAD series can be used to clean up the raster images before running them through GTX OSR Note Contact your GTX sales representative for additional information on compatible scanning and raster editing products The conversion process begins by compiling a list of raster files by using the Open dialog Setting the parameters before importing images establishes a global configuration Setting the parameters after importing images configures each image independently The conversion process begins and GTX OSR begins creating the vector conversion file of the scanned drawings When GTX OSR is finished converting the raster files you will see a list of Output Files that can be imported by other viewing and or editing software Main Scre
433. on saved with the selected item the Description area is empty Views Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the content area You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button repeatedly to cycle through the display formats The default view varies for the type of content currently loaded in the content area Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon format Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon format List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded content You can sort the items by name size type and other properties depending on the type of content that is loaded in the content area Refresh Shortcut Menu Only Refreshes the display in the content area to reflect any changes you have made Right click the content area background and click Refresh on the shortcut menu Tree View DesignCenter 37 Tree View DesignCenter Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives a list of open drawings custom content and a history of the last locations you accessed Select an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area Note In the sample designcenter folder are drawings containing discipline specific blocks that you can insert in drawings These drawings are called symbol library drawings Use
434. on method and pressENTERwhen you finish selecting objects The objects are removed from the drawing an i O 5 i object selected object erased 121 EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects ra Modify toolbar z 0 Modify menu Explode E Command line explode Select objects Use an object selection method and pressENTERwhen you finish The color linetype and lineweight of any exploded object might change Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you re exploding See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each Note If you re using a script or an ObjectARX function you can explode only one object at a time 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information For wide polylines the resulting lines and arcs are placed along the center of the polyline 3D Polyline Explodes into line segments Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment 3D Solid Explodes planar surfaces into regions Nonplanar surfaces explode into bodies Arc If within a nonuniformly scaled block explodes into elliptical arcs Block Removes one grouping level at a time If a block contains a polyline or a nested block exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects Blocks with equal X Y and Z scales explode into the
435. on relative to the current origin Specify new origin point or Zdepth lt 0 0 0 gt Specify a point or enter z New Origin Changes the origin of the UCS Zdepth Specifies the distance along the Z axis to move the UCS origin Specify Zdepth lt 0 gt Enter a distance or press ENTER If you have multiple viewports active and you change viewports to specify a new origin or Z depth the change is applied to the UCS of the viewport that was current when the command was started and that viewport becomes current once the command has finished Note The UCS Move option does not add a UCS to the Previous list Orthographic Orthographic Specifies one of the six orthographic UCSs provided These UCS settings are typically used when viewing and editing 3D models Enter an option Top Bottom Front BAck Left Right lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER right By default the orthographic UCS settings orient the current UCS relative to the world coordinate system WCS origin and orientation The UCSBASE system variable controls the UCS upon which the orthographic settings are based The origin or Z depth of the orthographic UCS settings can be changed using the Move option of the UCS command Prev 343 Prev Restores the previous UCS The program retains the last 10 coordinate systems created in paper space and the last 10 coordinate systems created in model space Repeating the Prev option steps back through one
436. on when you want to modify the current clipping boundary using PEDIT and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary use the Off option New Boundary 368 New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline If a boundary already exists the following prompt is displayed Delete old boundary Yes No lt Yes gt The command continues only if all previous boundaries are deleted Specify clipping boundary s Select polyline Polygonal Rectangular lt Rectangular gt Specify a clipping boundary option or press ENTER Select Polyline Defines the boundary using the selected polyline The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself The boundary created using this method is parallel to the user coordinate system UCS plane on which the polyline lies Polygonal Defines a polygonal boundary by using the points you specify for the vertices of a polygon The clipping boundary is applied in the current UCS regardless of the current view Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary by using the points you specify for opposite corners The clipping boundary is applied in the current UCS and is independent of the current view XLINE Creates an infinite line 0 Draw toolbar 0 Draw menu Construction Line EE Command line xline Specify a po
437. one layer name Hold down SHIFT and select the first and last layer names in a sequence to select all layers in the sequence Convert to Group Filter Converts the selected layer property filter to a layer group filter Changing the properties of the layers in a layer group filter has no effect on the filter Rename Renames the selected filter Enter a new name Delete Deletes the selected layer filter You cannot delete the All All Used Layers or Xref filters This option deletes the layer filter but not the layers in the filter Properties Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box where you can modify the definition of the selected layer property filter This option is available only when a layer property filter is selected Select Layers Temporarily closes the Layer Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select objects in the drawing This option is available only when a layer group filter is selected Add Adds the layers of the selected objects to the layer group filter that is selected in the tree view Replace Replaces the layers of the selected layer group filter with the layers of the objects that are selected in the drawing 162 List View Displays layers and layer filters and their properties and descriptions If a layer filter is selected in the tree view the list view displays only the layers in that layer filter The All filter in the tree view displays all layers and layer filters in the dr
438. onverts selected vector entities to raster Draws a raster rectangle Reduces a multi color image to a more Mirrors the entire image in either the X or Y axis replacing the original image Combines trim and extend for lines Resizes the image entity Adds or removes pixels without scaling the image entity Rotates selected raster data Draws a raster rectangle at any rotated orientation Erases raster data under selected vector data Saves the raster image 383 R T i y gt AX Sy Oo gSCALE gSEPARATE gSETLAY gSLICE gSMOOTH gSPECKL gTCONFIG gTCONVRT gTEXT gTRACE gTRAIN gTRANS_ON gTURN gVECTOR gVSKEW gWARP GS GSEP GSL GSM GSP GTCFG GTC GT GTR GTU GV GVS GW Scales selected raster data Separates colors to discrete bitonal images Sets the current layer to that of a specified entity Creates a 2 pixel wide gap between raster objects Smoothes selected raster Perform raster object speckle removal to selectively erase background noise or fill in holes in the raster image Configures Text Window IOP Text Line IOP and the gTCONVRT gTRAIN commands Converts raster text to CAD text entities Types raster text aided by the text formatting control Traces vector lines arcs and circles over selected raster geometry raster is preserved Previews and edits text recognition files used by gTCONVRT Makes all images transparent Reor
439. oosseesseeseeeeoeecoeeeoeeooeseessecsseeseesoeeeose 513 CONFIGURATION ENTRY DESCRIPTIONS c cccscesscesscesecssecssecssecssecsseeesesesesecesscsecusecssecssecsaccsesesesestesaeees 516 Basic Configuration Parameters souspren eiar e EN EE EENS 516 Text Configuration PAFAMECTELS usisikie e E R e E IE EA E O EE NS 517 Raster to Vector Conversion Parameters 0ccccccccccccccccccescecsccseseecssccesseecssesessesessesesseecsseeeseesseees 518 ONE Parameters nntu ana aaa Aden a a a aA 518 tine Width GONTIQUIALION iteveeistasvedentea a a a a 519 APPENDIX 3 RASTER FILE FORMATS ssccssccsssscsscessccssccecssccssececsescssccecsescsseeecseecesceecseccesees 520 RASTRANS RASTER FORMAT TRANSLATOR V5 0 cccccsccsseesscessecssesseesscesscessceaecssecnsecssecssecsesesesesseeeseseeees 520 Windows GUI VES SION EEE ANT N AE AAAA AES AAI EELE 520 APPENDIX 4 GTX OSR V5 0 nccesrisessossoeresteississespeereeesbr dati acde ccaucene dees saveceascusachseasecusteutawesstuveceesocanvesses 524 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ice a osere da norrena r deus bois E E E sous docs Sake Gud vena EEEE AEE 524 USING GTXA OSR cui iaa aa ala 524 Conversion ProceSS iiii ita ios 524 ES RO 524 BASIC PAE A A es Ean A E a ed ER 527 ADVICE A Be he Po ES 529 VECTOR ENTITY TRANSLATION vicodin italia Or es cv cbestadh cou OE EE EEEE SE E ETEak 530 COMMAND LINE VERSION OF OSR ccccsssssesssesscesecesecssecssecssecssecsssesessesesssesscessceseceaecnaecssecssecsaseseseasesae
440. option You can average each raster element s width or you can set up a Table of LineWidths to which raster elements are snapped Using a Fixed Line Width a The value shown in the prompt is the value used last or the one set for RasterWidth in the configuration file To accept the default value press RETURN Type a number that represents the width in current size units Using Box a At the prompt type B or select Box from the menu Select first corner of box b Selecta point on the edge of a horizontal or vertical raster line Select opposite corner of box c As you move the cursor a rubber banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected Stretch the box along the line and match the width The length of the rectangle can be any size that is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width measurement Select the second point Using The Average Width a Atthe prompt for width type A or select Average from the menu Each element will be smoothed to its average width If parts of a line are significantly different in width they will be averaged separately Using The LineWidth Table At the prompt for width type T or select Table from the menu The LineWidth Table will be displayed The widths will be displayed in the units set in GTXRAST CFG This allows you to set up to seven different widths to which the lines snap Note The colors do not affect raster smoothing In
441. or of an unselected grip If you choose Select Color from the color list the Select Color dialog box is displayed An unselected grip is displayed as a small filled square GRIPCOLOR system variable unzelected grips B B E selected grip Selected Grip Color Determines the color of a selected grip If you choose Select Color from the color list the Select Color dialog box is displayed A selected grip is displayed as a small filled square GRIPHOT system variable Hover Grip Color Determines the color a grip displays when the cursor rolls over the grip If you choose Select Color from the color list the Select Color dialog box is displayed GRIPHOVER system variable Enable Grips Displays grips on an object when you select it You can edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu Displaying grips in a drawing significantly affects performance Clear this option to optimize performance GRIPS system variable Enable Grips within Blocks Controls how grips are displayed on a block after you select it If this option is selected all grips are displayed for each object in the block If this option is cleared one grip is displayed at the insertion point of the block You can edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu GRIPBLOCK system variable Ai E hd Lr Enable Grips Within Enable Grips Within Blocks off Blocks on GRIPBLOCKS 0 GRIPBLOCKS 11
442. or the FilterSize LineWidth TextSize and TextWidth parameters Acceptable entries are INCH and MM FilterSize Specifies the maximum size for objects to be deleted during raster to vector conversion Any object exceeding this length in any dimension will be retained any object equal to or smaller will be discarded The entry must be a positive real number in the range of O to 2 inches or 0 to 50 8 mm ArcCircle GTX OSR CAD Only Specifies whether the system will perform arc circle recognition NO means convert arcs and circles as lines not arc circle entities Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N Arrowheads GTX OSR CAD Only Specifies whether filled polygons with three vertices should be recognized as arrowheads YES indicates arrowheads will be recognized as arrowheads NO indicates that such polygons will be recognized just as polygons Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N Smoothing GTX OSR Contours Only Specifies how tightly the small deviations in the lines are followed Valid entries are 1 2 or 3 Option follows the lines the most accurately Option 3 provides a smoother less jagged line Option 2 the default is a balance between the two ComposeSegments Specifics how a line that intersects with another object will be processed during raster to vector conversion If set to YES the segments on either side of the intersection will be combined into one line NO indicates that each segment will be a separa
443. or transparent use Enter new value ON OFF Auto lt current gt Enter an option or pressENTER Permits dragging but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging DRAGMODE on Ignores all dragging requests including those embedded in menu items Turns on dragging for every command that supports it Dragging is performed whenever it is possible Entering drag each time is not necessary DRAWORDER Changes the draw order of images and other objects 22 mr O Draw Order toolbar pe Tools menu Draw Order Shortcut menu Select an object right click and then click Draw Order EE Command line draworder 109 Select objects Use an object selection method Enter object ordering option Above objects Under objects Front Back lt Back gt Enter an option or press ENTER Moves the selected object above the specified reference objects Select reference objects Use an object selection method Moves the selected objects below the specified reference objects Select reference objects Use an object selection method Moves the selected objects to the top of the order of objects in the drawing Moves the selected objects to the bottom of the order of objects in the drawing When you change the draw order display and plotting order of multiple objects the relative draw order of the selected objects is maintained By default when you create new objects from existing ones fo
444. or transparent use The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed Selects edits and names filters for object selection Filter Property List Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter The current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area Select Filter Adds filter properties to the current filter Object Types and Logical Operators Lists object types that you can filter and logical operators AND OR XOR and NOT for grouping the filter expressions If you use logical operators make sure that you pair and balance them correctly in the filter list The number of operands you can enclose depends on the operation Logical operators Starting operator Encloses E ing operator Begin AND One or more operands End AND Begin XOR Two operands End XOR For example the following filter selects all circles except the ones with a radius greater than or equal to 1 0 Object Circle Begin NOT Circle Radius gt 1 00 End NOT X Y Z Parameters Define additional filter parameters depending on the object For example if you select Line Start you can enter the X Y and Z coordinate values that you want to filter 131 In the filter parameters you can use relative operators such as lt less than or gt greater than For example the following filter selects all circles with center points greater than or equal to 1 1 0 and radii greater than o
445. or you can create a new named page setup based on the current settings in the Plot dialog box by clicking Add Name Displays the name of the current page setup Add Displays the Add Page Setup dialog box in which you can save the current settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup You can modify this page setup through the Page Setup Manager Printer Plotter Specifies a configured plotting device to use when plotting layouts If the selected plotter doesn t support the layout s selected paper size a warning is displayed and you can select the plotter s default paper size or a custom paper size Name Lists the available PC3 files or system printers from which you can select to plot the current layout An icon in front of the device name identifies it as a PC3 file or a system printer PC3 file icon Indicates a PC3 file 3 System printer icon Indicates a system printer 24 Properties Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor PC3 editor in which you can view or modify the current plotter configuration ports device and media settings If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter Configuration Editor the Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog box is displayed Plotter Displays the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup Description Displays descriptiv
446. ore viewports and press ENTER Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only 357 Reset Sets the visibility of layers in specified viewports to their current default setting Enter layer name s to reset Enter one or more layer names Enter an option All Select Current lt Current gt Enter an option or press ENTER All Applies the changes in all viewports Select Applies the changes in selected viewports Select objects Select one or more viewports and press ENTER Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only Newfrz New Freeze Newfrz New Freeze Creates new layers that are frozen in all viewports Enter name s of new layers frozen in all viewports Enter one or more layer names Vpvisdflt Viewport Visibility Default Vpvisdflt Viewport Visibility Default Thaws or freezes the specified layers in subsequently created viewports Enter layer name s to change viewport visibility Enter one or more layer names Enter a viewport visibility option Frozen Thawed lt current gt Enter f or t or press ENTER VPOINT Sets the viewing direction for a three dimensional visualization of the drawing View menu 3D Views Viewpoint EE Command line vpoint Current view direction VIEWDIR current Specify a view point or Rotate lt display compass and tripod gt Specify a point enter r or press ENTERto display a compass and axis tripod Using the X Y Z coordinate you enter creates a vecto
447. orts both local and network If the port is a network port the name of the network printer is also displayed Show All Ports Shows all available ports on the computer regardless of the ports available on the plotter Browse Network Displays the network choices so you can connect to another instance of a nonsystem plotter Configure Port Displays either the Configure LPT Port dialog box or the Settings for COM Port dialog box e Device and Document Settings Controls many of the settings in the PC3 file Click the icon for any of the nodes to view and change the specific settings When you change a setting your changes appear in angle brackets lt gt next to the setting name A check mark is also displayed over the icon of the node with a changed value 262 Note Only the settings available for the configured device are displayed in the tree view In addition you might not be able to edit some settings if the device handles the setting through Custom Properties or doesn t support the capability Media Node Specifies a paper source size type and destination Available settings depend on the supported features of your configured plotter For Windows system printers you must configure the media settings using the Custom Properties node Source and Size Specifies the paper source and size Source Specifies the paper source for example sheet fed or roll fed If you specify a tray you can select the type of tray
448. ory and allow the user to accept or reject this substitution The command is cancelled if the user does not want to use the program s default settings If the needed configuration files are available but have invalid entries the user will be prompted that OSR is using the default settings for these and the command is carried out The OSR CFG File The configuration files for GTX OSR contain information used by the program during the conversion process such as the units used for measurement input and output file formats and storage locations and conversion parameters and filter tolerances The following tables list the information maintained in the configuration files The values shown are the program s default values OSR CFG Table 4 Default OSR CFG File Contents VETE Default Value yes LineWidth 08_ Textsize 08 The OSRMAP CFG File Table 5 Default OSRMAP CFG File Contents Variable Default Value LineWidthMax 08 TextSize 08 533 TextWidth TextString A brief description of the entries in the OSR CFG and OSRMAP CFG files follows Entries specific to each are noted RasterPath Specifies the default location for raster input files Entry can be any valid path The default is the current directory VectorPath Specifies the default location for vector output files Entry can be any valid path The default is the current directory Units Specifies the unit inch or millimeter used f
449. ot Style Manager Right click a CTB or STB file in the Plot Style Manager and then choose Open from the shortcut menu Choose Plot Style Table Editor from the Finish screen in the Add Plot Style Table wizard In the Page Setup dialog box under Plot Style Table Pen Assignments select a plot style and click the Edit button In the Current Plot Style and Select Plot Style dialog boxes choose Editor The Plot Style Table Editor includes the following tabs General Table View and Form View General Lists the plot style table file name description version number location path name and table type You can modify the description and you can apply scaling to non ISO linetypes and fill patterns 319 Plot Style Table File Name Displays the name of the plot style table file you are editing Description Provides a description area for a plot style table File Information Displays information about the plot style table you are editing number of plot styles path and version number of the Plot Style Table Editor Apply Global Scale Factor to Non ISO Linetypes Scales all the non ISO linetypes and fill patterns in the plot styles of objects controlled by this plot style table Scale Factor Specifies the amount to scale non ISO linetypes and fill patterns Delete R14 Color Mapping Table Deletes color mapping tables that are used when you open pre AutoCAD 2000 drawings Named plot style tables that you creat
450. ou can add edit or delete user defined fields 259 Plot Stamp Parameter File Stores plot stamp information in a file with a pss extension Multiple users can access the same file and stamp their plots based on company standard settings Two PSS files are provided Mm pss and Inches pss which are located in the Support folder The initial default plot stamp parameter file name is determined by the regional settings of the operating system when the program is installed Path Specifies the location of the plot stamp parameter file Load Displays the Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can specify the location of the parameter file you want to use Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file Advanced Displays the Advanced Options dialog box in which you can set the location text properties and units of the plot stamp You can also create a log file and set its location PLOTSTYLE the current plot style for new objects or assigns a plot style to selected objects E Command line plotstyle To use the PLOTSTYLE command the drawing must be configured to use named plot styles If a drawing is in Color Dependent mode you can convert it to use named plot styles using the CONVERTPSTYLES command To configure a new drawing to use named plot styles set PSTYLEPOLICY to O before creating the new drawing If no selection set exists the
451. ou set Type to Custom Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help you make a selection 139 Angle and Scale Specifies an angle and a scale for the selected hatch pattern Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS HATCH stores the angle in the HPANG system variable Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern HATCH stores the scale in the HPSCALE system variable This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined or Custom Double For user defined patterns draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines creating a crosshatch This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined on the Hatch tab HPDOUBLEsystem variable Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units Using this option you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout This option is available only from a layout Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user defined pattern HATCH stores the spacing in the HPSPACE system variable This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns
452. ous point The point marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the spline even if the spline is closed Select Point Selects a point from the set of control points Specify fit point lt exit gt Specify a point or pressENTER Exit Returns to the main Refine prompt 313 Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt Reverse Reverse Reverses the spline s direction This option is intended primarily for third party applications Undo Cancels the last editing action STATUS Displays drawing statistics modes and extents Tools menu Inquiry Status EE Command line status or status for transparent use All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified by UNITS STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing This includes graphical objects such as arcs and polylines and nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes and block definitions When used at the DIM prompt STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system variables In addition STATUS displays the following information Model or Paper Space Limits Are Displays the grid limits defined by LIMITS The first line shows the XY coordinate of the limit s lower left corner stored in the LIMMIN system variable The second line shows the XY coordinate of the limit s upper right corner stored in the LIMMAX system variable The notation Off to the right of the Y coordinate value ind
453. owheads and contours in the final vector file Type Type can be set to CAD or Map CAD mode converts raster data into vector lines arcs and circles It is effective for mechanical drawings and line diagrams MAP mode converts raster data into vector polylines and is more effective for mapping applications and other drawings in which the preservation of contours is important Units Units can be set to Inches or Millimeters This unit applies to the Filter Size Max Line Width and Max Char Size settings Note Because GTX OSR uses inches internally choosing millimeters will use millimeters as the vector file s units and also scale the output by 25 4 Destination The Destination directory is the location where converted files are written This field defaults to the current directory Output Format The Output Format determines the vector file format Choices include DXF IGES CGM or MTF DXF Drawing eXchange Format Autodesk IGES Initial Graphics Exchange Standard ANSI CGM Computer Graphics Metafile ANSI amp ISO MTF Metafile GTX Separate Layers Because DXF files have no linewidth for lines arcs and circles there needs to be some way of preserving that information Checking Separate Layers separates DXF file output onto different layers by raster linewidth Otherwise all vectors are placed on the same layer Compose Segments Compose Segments controls whether intersecting elements are continued across or broken at
454. p or attdisp for transparent use Enter attribute visibility setting Normal ON OFF lt current gt The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility unless REGENAUTO which controls automatic regeneration is off The current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE system variable Retains the current visibility of each attribute Visible attributes are displayed Invisible attributes are not displayed Makes all attributes visible Makes all attributes invisible My ying iy mM E 3 5 3 ATTEDIT 0 Modify menu Object Attribute Single Command line attedit 54 Edits the attributes in a block To change attribute properties such as position height and style use ATTEDIT Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block Edit the attribute values If the block contains additional attributes use Previous and Next to navigate through the list You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers To use a field as the value right click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box Previous Displays the previous eight attribute values Previous is available only if the selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display the additional attributes
455. p modes to make the spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects Press ENTER to calculate default tangents Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline fit polylines to equivalent splines and depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable deletes the polylines Select objects to convert to splines Select objects Select 2D or 3D spline fit polylines and press ENTER when you finish 307 SPLINEDIT Edits a spline or spline fit olyline ra Modify Il toolbar pe 0 Modify menu Object Spline Shortcut menu Select a spline to edit right click in the drawing area and choose Spline Edit Command line splinedit Select spline When you select a spline object or spline fit polyline grips appear at the control points If the selected spline is closed the Close option changes to Open If the selected spline has no fit data the Fit Data option is not available Fit data consists of all fit points the fit tolerance and tangents associated with splines created with the SPLINE command A spline can lose its fit data if you Use the Purge option while editing fit data Refine the spline by elevating the order adding a control point or changing the weight of a control point Change the fit tolerance Move a control point Trim break stretch or lengthen the spline Note SPLINEDIT automatically converts splined polylines to spline objects A splined polyline is converted even if you sel
456. pe scale factor of the selected objects Specify new linetype scale lt current gt Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects Lineweight values are predefined values If you enter a value that is not a predefined value the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects Enter new lineweight lt current gt Thickness Changes the Z direction thickness of 2D objects Specify new thickness lt current gt Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline dimension or layout viewport object has no effect Plotstyle Changes the plot style of the selected objects A plot style is a collection of property settings that is saved in a plot style table Enter Plot Style or lt current gt Enter a name or enter Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects When you plot the drawing objects are plotted with the properties defined in the designated plot style Plot styles assigned to objects can be overridden by other plot style assignments List Plot Styles Lists all the plot style names defined in the drawing CHPROP Changes the color layer linetype linetype scale factor lineweight thickness and plot style of an object Command line chprop 68 Select objects Enter property to change Color LAyer LType ItScale LWeight Thickness PLotstyle Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles If you select several objects with diffe
457. pecifies the search path for device drivers for the video display pointing devices printers and plotters Project Files Search Path Specifies a project name for the drawing The project name corresponds to a search path for external reference xref files associated with the project You can create any number of project names with associated folders but each drawing can have only one project name PROJECTNAME system variable Customization Files Specifies the names and locations of various types of files Main Customization File Specifies the default location of the main customization file acad cul Enterprise Customization File Specifies the location of an enterprise customization file Help and Miscellaneous File Names Specifies the names and locations of various types of files Help File Specifies the location of the Help file Default Internet Location Specifies the default Internet location used by both the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web button on the Web toolbar Configuration File Specifies the location of the configuration file used to store hardware device driver information This value is read only and can be changed only by using the c command line switch 209 Text Editor Dictionary and Font File Names Specifies a number of optional settings Text Editor Application Specifies the text editor application to use for editing multiline text objects MTEXTED system variable Main Dictionar
458. ports at the Command prompt VPORTS displays prompts on the command line Creates new viewport configurations or names and saves a model space viewport configuration The options available in this dialog box depend on whether you are configuring model space viewports on the Model tab or layout viewports on a layout tab Tabs for model space viewports New Viewports Model Space Named Viewports Model Space Tabs for layout viewports New Viewports Layouts Named Viewports Layouts New Viewports Tab Model Space Viewports Dialog Box 360 New Viewports Tab Model Space Viewports Dialog Box Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures model space viewports New Name Specifies a name for the new model space viewport configuration you are creating If you do not enter a name the viewport configuration you create is applied but not saved If a viewport configuration is not saved it cannot be used in a layout Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations including CURRENT which is the current configuration Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration Apply To Applies the model space viewport configuration to the entire display or to the current viewport Display Applies the viewport configuration to the entire Model tab display Display is the default setting C
459. ppears where you specify a point BLIPMODE is off by default fey N k i A KA AN NA NN LA NA Ne objects drawn with objects drawn with BUPMODE on BLIPMODE aff To remove marker blips use REDRAW REGEN ZOOM PAN or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing BLOCK e Draw toolbar 0 Draw menu Block Make EE Command line block Defines and names a block Name Names the block The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters numbers blank spaces and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1 The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing 57 Note You cannot use DIRECT LIGHT AVE_ RENDER RM_SDB SH_SPOT and OVERHEAD as valid block names Base Point Specifies an insertion base point for the block The default value is 0 0 0 xX Specifies the X coordinate value Y Specifies the Y coordinate value z Specifies the Z coordinate value Pick Insertion Base Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing Objects Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block When
460. ptions dialog box see OPTIONS Set the Save As option to AutoCAD 2004 Drawing to optimize performance while saving DXF Options Tab Saveas Options Dialog Box 293 DXF Options Tab Saveas Options Dialog Box Sets drawing interchange file output options Format Specifies whether the program creates an ASCII or a binary DXF file ASCll format DXF files can be read with a text editor and are compatible with a wider range of applications Binary format DXF files contain all of the information of an ASCII DXF file but in a more compact form You can read and write to binary format files faster than to ASCll format files For more information about DXF files see the DXF Reference in the Help system Select Objects Controls whether the DXF file consists of selected objects or the entire drawing When you select this option the output file includes only selected objects and the block reference portions of any included blocks The output file does not include the block definition tables Save Thumbnail Preview Image Specifies whether an image of the drawing is displayed in the Preview area of the Select File dialog box Save Thumbnail Preview Image is also controlled by the RASTERPREVIEW system variable Decimal Places of Accuracy Saves the file using the specified number of bits of precision The default precision is adequate in most cases however you might need to increase this value for certain drawings and for certain applications If
461. quality setting based on the type of OLE object OLEQUALITY system variable Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects Launches the application used to create the OLE object when plotting a drawing with OLE objects You can use this option to optimize the quality of plotted OLE objects This setting is saved in the drawing OLESTARTUP system variable Hide System Printer Controls whether Windows system printers are displayed in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes This option hides standard Windows system printers only lt does not hide Windows system printers that have been configured using the Add a Plotter wizard You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes by moving a device s PC3 file out of the Plotters folder and its subfolders Specify Plot Offset Relative To Specifies whether the offset of the plot area is from the lower left corner of the printable area or from the edge of the paper PLOTOFFSET system variable Printable Area Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the printable area Edge of Paper Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the edge of the paper Plot Stamp Settings Opens the Plot Stamp dialog box Plot Style Table Settings Opens the Plot Style Table Settings dialog box System Controls system settings Current 3D Graphics Display Controls settings that relate to system properties and configuration of the 3D graphics display syst
462. r 2 0 Modify menu Copy Shortcut menu Select the objects to copy and right click in the drawing area Click Copy Selection ES Command line copy Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point or Displacement lt Displacement gt Specify a base point or enter d 74 The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the copied objects are to be moved and in what direction If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point prompt the first point is interpreted as a relative X Y Z displacement For example if you specify 2 3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt the objects are copied 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position The COPY command repeats for convenience To exit the command press ENTER Displacement Specify displacement lt ast value gt Enter coordinates to represent a vector The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction COPYBASE Copies objects with a specified base point Edit menu Copy with Base Point Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Copy with Base Point E Command line copybase Specify base point Select objects The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document When you paste an
463. r the number of times each is attached to the drawing and the path where the image is stored Images are listed in alphabetical order regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system variable Images to list lt gt Enter to list all images or enter an image name Detach Detaches the named image from the drawing marks it for deletion and erases all occurrences of the image Enter list of images to detach Enter an image name or enter to detach all images U Cal Updates the path name including file name associated with a particular image This option is useful if you change the location of an image file rename the file or replace an old image file with a new file for instance you can update image01 pcx and save it as image02 pcx Enter list of images for path modification Enter an image name or enter to list all images If you enter an asterisk the following prompt is displayed Old path Lists the current path name for each image Enter New path Enter the new path name for the specified image Reload Reload Reloads the selected images making that information available for display and plotting Enter list of images to reload Enter an image name or enter to reload all images Reloading Reload image lt image name gt lt hard coded path name gt lt image name gt loaded and relinked Unload Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed thus improving performanc
464. r which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units Explode Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block When Explode is selected you can specify a uniform scale factor only Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer Objects having color BYBLOCK are white Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype INSERTOBJ Inserts a linked or embedded object ap 0 Insert toolbar E 0 Insert menu OLE Object E Command line insertobj 156 The Insert Object dialog box is displayed Inserts a linked or embedded object Options vary depending on whether you select Create New or Create from File Create New Opens the application that s highlighted in the Object Type list so that you can create a new object to insert Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and embedding To create an object to embed double click an application to open it On the application s File menu the Save option is replaced with a new Update option Choosing Update inserts the object into the drawing or updates it Display as Icon Displays the source application s icon in the drawing Double clicking the icon displays the embedded information Create from File Specifies a file to link or embed File Specifies the path and name of the file to be embedded or linked Browse Displays the Browse dialog box a standard file selection dialo
465. r BOUNDARY detects internal closed boundaries called islands Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object BOUNDARY creates the boundary as a region or a polyline object Boundary Set Defines the set of objects BOUNDARY analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents Selecting this option discards any current boundary set New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set BOUNDARY includes only the objects that can be used to create a region or closed polyline when it constructs the new boundary set For more information about the options in this dialog box see HATCH BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points O Modify toolbar Cy 0 Modify menu Break 60 EE Command line break Select object Use an object selection method or specify the first break point 1 on an object The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object If you select the object by using your pointing device the program both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point At the next prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point Specify second break point or First point Specify the second break point 2 or enter f Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object First Point Overrid
466. r banding box anchored at the base point will appear Select original size b Rubber band a reference rectangle from the base point representing the original size of the raster data being scaled 481 Select new size c Rubber band a new reference rectangle from the base point representing the new size of the raster data The Fit option generates scale factors based on the size ratio between the reference rectangles Notes 1 gSCALE can scale raster data right outside the image entity and the data is lost To avoid this choose the base point to avoid rotating the data outside the limits of the image 2 After scaling you can easily re select the rotated data and reposition it with gMOVE previous if necessary this even works if the rotated data overlaps with preexisting raster 3 To expand the image save the file and then use gRESIZE to enlarge the raster work area 4 Scaling a raster image with different X and Y factors will cause raster arcs and circles to become elliptical The resulting shapes cannot be selected using the intelligent raster object arc and circle picking methods 5 The data is scaled to the dimensions indicated by the scaling factors The command is terminated 482 gSEPARATE Availability gSEPARATE GTX Convert gt Separate Color image All Products gSEP Icon gSEPARATE separates out individual colors or selected groups of colors from a color image amp re
467. r configuration files PC3 found in the plotter configuration search path and any system printers that are configured in the system Use Last Successful Plot Settings Sets the plotting settings to match those of the last successful plot Add or Configure Plotters Displays the Plotter Manager a Windows system window You can add or configure a plotter with the Plotter Manager Plot To File Specifies the default location for plot to file operations You can enter a location or click the button to specify a new location Background Processing Options Specifies options for background plotting and publishing You can use background plotting to start a job you are plotting or publishing and immediately return to work on your drawing while your job is plotted or published as you work Backround plot and publish details are available through the Plot and Publish status bar icon shortcut menu You can plot or publish jobs in the background even if the program is not running by entering acad pl lt DSD file name gt at the Windows Command Prompt Enable Background Plotting When Specifies whether or not background plotting is turned on for plotting and publishing Plotting Specifies that plot jobs are processed in the background This setting is also affected by the BACKGROUNDPLOT system variable Publishing Specifies that published jobs are processed in the background This setting is also affected by the BACKGROUNDPLOT system
468. r equal to 1 Object Circle Circle Center X gt 1 0000 Y gt 1 0000 Z gt 0 0000 Circle Radius gt 1 0000 Select Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified type in the drawing Select the items to filter For example if you select the object type Color Select displays a list of colors to choose for the filter Add to List Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter remain available during the current work session unless you manually delete them Substitute Replaces the filter property selected in the filter property list with the one displayed in Select Filter Add Selected Object Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list Edit Item Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing To edit a filter property select it and choose Edit Item Edit the filter property and choose Substitute The edited filter replaces the selected filter property Delete Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter Clear List Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter Named Filters Displays saves and deletes filters Current Displays saved filters Select a filter list to make it current The named filter and its list of properties are loaded from the default file filter nfl Save As Saves a filter and its list of properties The filter is saved in the filter
469. r example FILLET or PEDIT the new objects are assigned the draw order of the original object you selected first By default while you edit an object for example MOVE or STRETCH the object is displayed on top of all objects in the drawing When you are finished editing your drawing is partially regenerated so that the object is displayed according to its correct draw order This can result in some edit operations taking slightly longer You can use DRAWORDERCTL to change the default draw order settings TEXTTOFRONT changes the draw order of all text and dimensions in the drawing DSETTINGS Specifies settings for Snap mode grid polar and object snap tracking and Dynamic Input Tools menu Drafting Settings Shortcut menu Right click Snap Grid Polar Osnap Otrack or Dyn on the status bar Click Settings Command line dsettings or dsettings for transparent use The Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids in four categories Snap and Grid Polar Tracking Object Snap and Dynamic Input Options Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box You cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box if you are running DSETTINGS transparently Snap and Grid Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box 110 Snap and Grid Tab Drafting Settings Dialog Box Specifies Snap and Grid settings Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off You can also turn Snap
470. r image clipping option ON OFF Delete New boundary lt New gt Enter an option or press ENTER The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object On Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined boundary Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off clipping is automatically turned back on You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image New Boundary 152 New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal and consists only of straight line segments When defining a clipping boundary specify vertices within the image boundary Self intersecting vertices are valid Rectangular is the default option If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt the point is interpreted as the first corner of a rectangle Enter clipping type Polygonal Rectangular lt Rectangular gt Enter p or pressENTER Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary Specify first point Specify a point Specify next point or Undo Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or Undo Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or Close Undo Specify a point or enter c or
471. r of the circle of which the arc is a part Specify center point of arc Specify start point of arc Specify end point of arc or Angle chord Length End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 2 to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point 1 through a specified point 3 Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point 2 using a center point 1 with a specified included angle If the angle is negative a clockwise arc is drawn Specify included angle included at Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint If the chord length is positive the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point If the chord length is negative the major arc is drawn counterclockwise Specify length of chord length of chord Tangent to Last Line Arc or Polyline 42 Tangent to Last Line Arc or Polyline Draws an arc tangent to the last line arc or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at the first prompt k Specify end point of arc Specify a point 1 AREA Calculates the area and i of objects or of defined areas 0 Inquiry toolbar 0 Tools menu Inquiry Area E Command line area Specify first corner point or Object Add Subtract Specify a point 1 or enter an option First Corner Point First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you defin
472. r of the file should be placed The raster data of the file will appear at that location in the main raster color The gPASTE menu will replace the GTXRAST menu Loading raster filename ext Move Rotate Scale 4 If you are satisfied with the default settings and the present location of the raster press RETURN to exit from the command To change the location rotation or scale select the desired option Options can be selected in any order and any number of times until you press RETURN to exit from the command The same data can be selected for further raster editing with the previous option of the editing command For instance if you want to have more than one copy of the pasted data at the same size and orientation you can select gCOPY and previous Using Move 1 Select Move by entering m or selecting Move from the menu The pasted data will be highlighted You will be prompted to indicate a base point for the move Base point or displacement 2 Select a reference point This may be a significant point such as the center of a cross Second point of displacement A rubber band line will extend from the base point 3 Select a second point to indicate the distance and angle that the base point should move The raster data will move to the new location and be un highlighted The reference line disappears Move Rotate Scale 4 You can continue to select options or press RETURN to terminate the c
473. r that defines a direction from which the drawing can be viewed The view defined is as if the viewer is looking from the point back at the origin 0 0 0 358 Ns beet az seen by viewer Specifies a new viewing direction using two angles Enter angle in XY plane from X axis lt current gt Specify an angle The first angle is specified with respect to the X axis in the XY plane Enter angle from XY plane lt current gt Specify an angle The second angle is specified up or down from the XY plane viewing direction angle from plane f este an ease at Displays a compass and axis tripod which you use to define a viewing direction in the viewport compass i Y axis tripod X The compass is a two dimensional representation of a globe The center point is the north pole 0 0 n the inner ring is the equator n n 0 and the entire outer ring is the south pole 0 0 n You can move the small crosshairs on the compass to any portion of the globe with your pointing device As you move the crosshairs the axis tripod rotates to conform to the viewing direction indicated on the compass To select a viewing direction move your pointing device to a location on the globe and click 359 VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space 0 Layouts toolbar Hj Eo View menu Viewports E Command line vports The Viewports dialog box is displayed If you enter v
474. r verification dialog appear every time Valid entries are integers from 0 to 100 CharMinSize sets the initial value for the Min Char Size setting in the gTCONFIG dialog determining the minimum value for raster text characters when using Text IOP or gTCONVRT The default value is 04 CharMaxSize sets the initial value for the Max Char Size setting in the gTCONFIG dialog determining the maximum value for the raster characters when using Text IOP or gTCONVRT The default value is 4 CharSpaceSize sets the initial value for the Space Size setting in the gTCONFIG dialog defining the distance between raster characters in terms of a typical character s width necessary for gTCONVRT to insert a space character The default value is 1 0 Valid entries are any positive real number CharAlign sets the initial value for the Alignment Offset setting in the gTCONFIG dialog determining the minimum vertical distance relative to the text strings orientations between separate lines of text in terms of a percentage of a typical character s height The default setting is 0 Valid entries are any real number TextHeight sets the initial value for the TextHeight value in the text configuration dialog MaxSpaceSize sets the initial value for the Max Spaces setting in the gTCONFIG dialog 517 determining the maximum number of spaces that can be inserted into a text string by gTCONVRT before it breaks the text string into two separate CAD text entit
475. racter recognition file you will need to save it afterwards To save go back into the text configuration dialog select the Character Recognition pane and Save THE FILE IS SAVED ONLY AFTER YOU CLOSE OUT OF THE TEXT CONFIGURATION DIALOG After selecting SAVE select OK to make the dialog save the file 5 If training a new recognition file set the Auto Convert Threshold to 100 to force the Character Validation dialog to appear for every character If working with an existing recognition file a value of 70 to 90 will be preferable so the dialog only appears for uncertain characters pS 6 Set the values for IOP minimum and maximum character size to Pane iene tapo Paro tet oo limit the raster selected with Text lOP e 7 The String Formation parameters should work well at the gt default settings am 8 Leave the Save Raster button un selected to keep raster text as simian it is being converted to AutoCAD text 9 Select OK tiem Pat Fee i gt j s 496 Orientation Sets the text orientations allowed to be recognized from raster text characters The default list is established by the CharOrient parameter in GTXRAST CFG Ambiguous Characters Lists characters that could be easily misrecognized for another i e the letter O could easily be drawn the same way as the numeral 0 Therefore it is common for each of these characters to be included in this list Auto Convert Threshold This is a si
476. ram reports how many objects were selected and of those how many objects cannot be exploded If you select more than one valid object the following prompt is displayed Enter an option Individually Globally lt Globally gt Enter i enter g or press ENTER i ey O jf O Y o_O 10 0 O i es block before component XPLODE objects after APLODE Individually 372 Individually Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time The following prompt is displayed for each object Enter an option All Color LAyer LType Inherit from parent block Explode lt Explode gt Enter an option or press ENTER All Sets the color linetype lineweight and layer of the component objects after you explode them The prompts associated with the Color Linetype Lineweight and Layer options are displayed Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them New color Truecolor COlorbook lt BYLAYER gt Enter a color name or number from1through255 enter t enterco enterbylayerorbyblock or pressENTER Entering bylayer causes the component objects to inherit the color of the exploded object s layer Entering byblock causes the component objects to inherit the color of the exploded object Enter t for a true color to be used for the selected object Red Green Blue Enter three integer values from0to255separated by commas to specify a true color Enter CO for a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object Enter
477. raster file name lt cut_data ext gt The default file name is cut_data with the extension indicated in the GTXRAST CFG file If you have previously used gCUT the name of that file will be the default shown in brackets Accept the default file name by pressing RETURN or type a new name for the raster file and press RETURN If you do not include the extension the format and extension set in the GTXRAST CFG by RasterFormat and RasterSaveExt entries will be used If no path is indicated the file is saved using the path defined in the GTXRAST CFG RasterPath entry If no path was defined it is saved in the current directory If a file already exists with the same name you typed as a new name you will be asked whether to replace it If you respond yes the new file will overwrite the old one If you accept the default No you will again be prompted for a raster file name The request is repeated until an acceptable name is entered or you cancel the command without saving a file When a file has been saved the highlighting will disappear If the erase mode was selected the highlighted data will also disappear Otherwise the raster data remains as it was before the command was invoked Raster file FILENAME EXT saved 434 gDESKEW Type Ss Menu Availability GD or GDESKEW GTX Enhance gt Deskew GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon a Drawings are often scanned in slightly rotated yD
478. raster the gSMOOTH command can snap raster data to the closest line width listed in this table The format for listing a color linewidth listing is Pcolor Color LineWidth In which Color is the AutoCAD color number to be associated with the raster linewidth LineWidth is the width of the raster line this can be measured using the Dist command 519 Appendix 3 Raster File Formats The following table shows the read and write raster formats which GTXImage CAD Series can load and save CALS I Mil R Raster PF E Note The PCX file writer provided by AutoCAD does not facilitate the saving of the resolution of the file Files of this type are loaded without a resolution and the gINFO command cannot report a resolution The GTXImage CAD Series software can save a PCX file into any of the other GTX supported file formats with a resolution of 200 dpi When saved to another format the file will always have a default resolution of 200 dpi Rastrans Raster Format Translator V5 0 The Raster Format Translator RASTRANS is a stand alone utility included with the GTXImage CAD Series the same input output formats as GTXImage CAD Rastrans translates raster files from one raster format to another It can scale translated files separately in the X and Y axes GTXImage CAD series includes both Windows and DOS versions of GTX Rastrans The DOS version lets you create DOS batch scripts IEJRASTRANS V4 0 ME E Windows GUI Version E The
479. raster within image entities Image entities do not store the image data they only refer or link to raster files already residing on disk You can set properties for an image entity in a drawing but these properties are only stored in the CAD drawing and only affect the appearance of the image and do not directly affect the raster file at all GTXImage CAD will let you copy move rotate resize and clip a raster image object within a CAD drawing The Image Adjust feature adjusts the display of an image s brightness contrast fade and transparency A GTXImage CAD drawing provides an excellent framework for managing and modifying one or more related raster images It also lets you display images to scale with the CAD vector drawing coordinates Product Functionality Loading Raster Images into GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD provide you with several ways of importing raster images To load a raster image into GTXImage CAD the software attaches it within a CAD drawing This CAD drawing can be saved in a number of AutoCAD formats such as DWG DWF 8 DXF normally DWG The image is not stored in the DWG file but is viewed through it When attaching an image be sure of whether you are putting it in paper space or model space Although the raster is only an image of a paper drawing you can attach an image in model space and then scale the image entity so that it is to scale with the CAD coordinate system Learn to use GTXImage CAD
480. rate the layer names with a comma Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt N gt Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Does not load any external references into the drawing No Loads all external references into the drawing 236 PASTEBLOCK Pastes copied objects as a block Edit menu Paste as Block Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Paste as Block Command line pasteblock Specify insertion point Specify a point The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing as a block at the specified insertion point PASTECLIP Inserts data from the Clipboard e Standard toolbar Bi e Edit menu Paste Shortcut menu End any active commands right click in the drawing area and choose Paste E Command line pasteclip Specify insertion point If the Clipboard contains ASCII text the text is inserted as a multiline text mtext object using the MTEXT defaults A spreadsheet is inserted as a table object All other objects except AutoCAD objects are inserted as embedded or linked OLE objects You can edit these OLE objects by double clicking them in the drawing to open the application in which they were created Note You can also use CTRL V to run PASTECLIP If the cursor is in the drawing area PASTECLIP behaves as described If the cursor is on the command line text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current prompt PASTEORIG Pastes a copied object in a new drawing us
481. remove those files manually yourself 18 Using the GTXImage CAD Series The Purpose of This Section This section describes the use of the GTXImage CAD Series software The GTXImage CAD is based upon the AutoCAD 2010 OEM engine amp where possible GTXImage CAD commands follow the same convention as AutoCAD commands As such AutoCAD users will find GTXImage CAD very similar amp easy to use For example in AutoCAD the command for moving a CAD entity is MOVE In the GTXImage CAD Series the command for moving raster data is gMOVE Both commands use similar prompts to accomplish similar tasks Raster and Vector The GTXImage CAD Series lets you draw and edit a combination of both CAD Vector and scanned Raster data Raster images are made up of dots pixels which represent pictures by forming an electronic mosaic If you zoom close to a raster image you will see each pixel as a square CAD drawings are made up of vector entities in which coordinates and other measurements are expressed mathematically in the CAD drawing For example a line is defined mathematically as the X and Y coordinates of each of its endpoints A circle is defined as the X and Y coordinates of its center point and the length of its radius Load a sample drawing into GTXImage CAD window some of the entities and type LIST You will see a barrage of entity types and coordinates GTXImage CAD lets you Attach raster images within vector drawings displaying the
482. rent values for the property you want to change varies is displayed as the current value Color Color Changes the color of the selected objects Enter new color Truecolor COlorbook lt current gt Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255 enter t enter co enter bylayer or byblock or press ENTER For example to change a color to red enter Fed or 1 If you enter bylayer the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located If you enter byblock the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object Red Green Blue Enter three integer values from O to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object Enter Color Book name Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as PANTONE If you enter a color book name the following prompt is displayed Enter color name Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as PANTONE573 Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects Enter new layer name lt current gt Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects Enter new linetype name lt current gt If the new linetype is not loaded the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file acad lin If this procedure fails use LINETYPE to load the linetype Ltscale C
483. rets raster as polyline contours Ortho improves the drawing by snapping lines to horizontal or vertical Conversion Type CAD C Contour None smoothes the data exactly as it appears without Rectity any rectification Ortho C Ret Nore r Line width Reference snaps lines close to any reference angle to E C Table C Ered that angle and parallel lines at this angle separated by a distance close to the offset distance will snap to the Seip Bor offset distance rick Line Width Options il lh i Box defines a value graphically to be used for the width Smoothness E Io me o of the data selected to be smoothed Cancel Value applies a literal value to use for the width of the selected data to be smoothed Note Be sure to enter values in current units mm or inches The graphically defined width will also be translated to mm or inches when it appears as the default Average smoothes raster geometry to an average of that segment s width Table snaps the lines to the nearest value listed in the Width Table GTXImage CAD Prompts 1 Select gSMOOTH Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster to be smoothed When all the data to be converted is highlighted press RETURN Width Box Table lt Average gt 0 01 489 3 There are several ways to respond to the prompt You can enter a value to be the fixed line width for all selected data or you can select this value graphically with the Box
484. revious vertex The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Break Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex Enter an option Next Previous Go eXit lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline the polyline is truncated If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint you cannot use Break mode 247 Insert Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex Specify location for new vertex Specify a point Move Moves the marked vertex Specify new location for marked vertex Specify a point Regen Regenerates the polyline Straighten Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex Enter an option Next Previous Go eXit lt current gt Enter an option or press ENTER
485. right click and then click Exit on the shortcut menu Apply to Layout Saves the current Plot dialog box settings to the current layout More Options Controls display of additional options in the Plot dialog box Plot Style Table Pen Assignments Shaded Viewport Options Plot Options Drawing Orientation Plot Style Table Pen Assignments Sets the plot style table edits the plot style table or creates a new plot style table Name Unlabeled Displays the plot style table that is assigned to the current Model tab or layout tab and provides a list of the currently available plot style tables If you select New the Add Plot Style Table wizard is displayed which you can use to create a new plot style table The wizard that is displayed is determined by whether the current drawing is in color dependent or named mode Edit Displays the Plot Style Table Editor in which you can view or modify plot styles for the currently assigned plot style table Shaded Viewport Options Specifies how shaded and rendered viewports are plotted and determines their resolution level and dots per inch dpi Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted To specify this setting for a viewport on a layout tab select the viewport and then on the Tools menu click Properties From the Model tab you can select from the following options As Displayed Plots objects the way they are displayed on the screen 256 Wireframe Plots ob
486. ring with two backslashes Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing Enter the attribute tag using any combination of characters except spaces Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition If you do not enter a prompt the attribute tag is used as a prompt If you select Constant in the Mode area the Prompt option is not available 52 Value Specifies the default attribute value Insert Field Button Displays the Field dialog box You can insert a field as all or part of the value for an attribute Insertion Point Specifies the location for the attribute Enter coordinate values or select Specify On screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with Specify On Screen Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes Use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with X Specifies the X coordinate of the attribute s insertion point Y Specifies the Y coordinate of the attribute s insertion point z Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute s insertion point Text Options Sets the justification style height and rotation of the attribute text Justification Specifies the justification of the attribut
487. rols whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the drawing file A spatial index organizes objects based on their location in space A layer index is a list showing which objects are on which layers PARTIALOAD Command Line Specify first corner Or View Specify a point or enter v 233 First Corner Specifies the first corner of a user defined view Specify opposite corner Specify a point Geometry from the defined view is loaded into the partially open drawing Enter layers to load or lt none gt Enter a layer name enter or press ENTER Layers to Load Loads geometry from the selected layers into the current drawing including both model space and paper space geometry To load geometry from multiple layers into the drawing use a comma between layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y orn or press ENTER Yes Does not load any external references into the drawing No Loads all external references into the drawing List Layers Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing Enter one or more layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt Yes gt Enter y orn or press ENTER Yes Does not load any extern
488. rom a selection set A TEXTLine Select text sized raster elements that are intersected by a reference line Separates text from touching raster elements O exrwindow Select raster text elements that are within a rectangular window Separates text from touching raster elements 387 2L nDer Pick raster under selected vector objects f Undo Remove data from the selection set added by the last pick made Mview Select all raster data within the present view Working with GTX s Intelligent Object Picking IOP s Although GTX s IOP s are not commands in their own right they are operators that allow you to precisely select the raster data that you wish to work with IOP s are fundamental to the effective use of GTX and users should spend time to understand how the various IOP s work To better understand the IOP operation we have highlighted some of the ways in which you can use the IOP s for practical raster selection The GTX IOP s work with most of the raster commands but for this example we have used the raster erase command gERASE Start by loading the GTX sample file called GTXVBELT CG4 then initiate the gERASE command amp try the following IOP selections Note that in these examples RED is the normal passive Raster amp GREEN is the selected areas Window IOP s Firstly there are six Window selection OP s Window Implied Cutting Window Crossing Window amp Inside Window Using rectangular pic
489. rrent UCS with the specified name List UCSs Lists the names of currently defined UCSs UCS name s to list lt gt Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all UCSs Del Removes the specified UCS from the list of saved user coordinate systems Enter UCS name s to delete lt none gt Enter a name list or press ENTER If you delete a named UCS that is current the current UCS is renamed UNNAMED gt ke 2 lt 344 Apply Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport The UCSVP system variable determines whether a UCS is saved with a viewport Pick viewport to apply current UCS or All lt current gt Specify a viewport by clicking inside it enter a or press ENTER Viewport Applies the current UCS to the specified viewport and ends the UCS command All Applies the current UCS to all active viewports List UCSs List UCSs Lists names of user coordinate systems and provides the origin and X Y and Z axes for each saved UCS relative to the current UCS If the current UCS is unnamed it is listed as WORLD or UNNAMED depending on whether it s the same as the WCS UCS name s to list lt gt Enter a name list World Sets the current user coordinate system to the world coordinate system The WCS is the basis for all user coordinate systems and cannot be redefined before UCSICON Contro
490. rrent gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text PAUTOCAD MC Middle Center Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify middle center point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height of text lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text The MC option differs from the Middle option in that it uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters The Middle option uses the midpoint of all text including descenders 1 AUTRCAD MR Middle Right Right justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify middle right point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AU TOCAT BL Bottom Left Left justifies text at a point specified for the baseline Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify bottom left point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AUTOCAD 1 BC Bottom Center 327 Centers text at a point specified for the baseline Available for horizon
491. rresponding options under Rotate U Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview X scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ lt 1 gt Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate U Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview Y scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ lt 1 gt Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate Re Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview Z scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Enter X scale factor specify opposite corner or Corner XYZ lt 1 gt Enter a value enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor Corner and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate PRotate 184 PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position Specify preview rotation angle
492. rtes ett eto isa dl de Men ert atado art e trado LE 410 JCAR A A AO at 411 JEGIRGEES rea a ta is a od fa ados ad 412 JE GIR GEE DREN rs amazon ca aio et Id edo cerda dla o Make ado MO s 413 ELE Vte ld tt ls a od a e fa ados s 414 AAI GE tata nana tet ea aio eo td do ce cerda dla do tooo at at 415 AT EA O AA 417 JOR CEE tas a ett nd a tac tt da ed ese toa Ms acd dpto dera 418 OGLE EA NI Pas dt e o ld Na od a es adas o tt 419 JCLIN E Setas ad lt dt o a ost ases MU den dol a A 420 IE ONCEN tartas ad Na BaP a ate es a oli Ba 8 421 ICONVR si A a Mie Ne oes Mean ise dd 422 OC ORY A RN 425 JEREATE oi A IA A A A ita 426 JOER O Pisos ni a ER RT PT ee A AA ARI ADE ATs RE id 427 JCTEX IRM ence A AS A li init 428 GS Teh act RO 433 ODE SKEW sists oct 2 sk ce ata IR A eg Bs LE cE Ma ES En aha 435 ODETAC Ario ia EA E PT eRe A PGE Ea EB AE To Mat 437 Draw Order Bakio E ceed od A a wes IR ESE Bn ens oe 438 GE CON VR Toetoe esiet AA E Eee A AAA I I he 439 JEDGE iia IA E AA A Ma he Ss POS ii de 440 QERA SE a teh ce Ss EE REE SN Re Bt NL ON eo a te 44 PERLA A a dia acta atts Men 442 HEER ig ea E A cine Beets eis ia a id be 443 Ig FB eat GD ean ee oe ne eS 444 GHY BRIDMODE vwtek 0 A A as 446 Ma a de ed 447 MIST AENA ias 448 GINA GT IVE siecle cet eS 449 INO Bie ih ea a Bact atts Meck 450 OINVER ST Es 451 OI SORA A NS 452 LOIN cs hist ses ee ed ld y te A A 453 UNE eco EE eee hes aoc iS 454 QLINE eo O A DS 455 MIRROR oia A A A E 456 OMOVE oiire re A
493. ry extension line or arc to be displayed when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects so you can specify points on the extension Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute a block a shape or text Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline ray region solid spline or xline Deferred Perpendicular snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one perpendicular snap You can use a line arc circle polyline ray xline multiline or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point an AutoSnap tooltip and marker are displayed selection point nS ae RO snap point Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc or spline Deferred Tangent snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap For example you can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs polyline arcs or circles When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip are displayed selection point f snap point ae 116 Note When you use the From option in conjunction with the Ta
494. s signs Dragging the cursor toward the top of the screen while holding down the pick button enlarges the preview image Dragging toward the bottom of the screen reduces the preview image The Preview window toolbar provides the following buttons Plot Plots the drawing as it is displayed in the full sheet preview and then exits Plot Preview Pan Displays the pan cursor a hand cursor that you can use to pan the preview image Hold down the pick button and drag the cursor in any direction The pan cursor stays active until you click another button ut La Zoom Displays the zoom cursor a magnifying glass cursor that you can use to enlarge or reduce the preview image To enlarge the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the top of the screen To reduce the image hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of the screen Q Zoom Window Zooms to display a specified window Zoom Window works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor al Zoom Original Restores the initial full sheet preview Zoom Original works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor a 271 Close Preview Window Closes the Preview window Preview Shortcut Menu Preview Shortcut Menu Controls Plot Preview options To access this menu right click in the preview area Exit Exits the preview Plot Plots the drawing as it is displayed in the full sheet preview and then exits Plot Preview P
495. s Space Size Sets the distance between two characters in terms of the percentage of a character s width required before a space character is inserted between the two text strings Max Spaces Sets the maximum number of the above mentioned space characters allowed before gTCONVRT separates the text into separate ASCII text entities If two text strings are far enough apart they will exceed this breaking point and be portrayed by two separate CAD text entities ST s Alignment Offset arera fot amma na Sets the minimum vertical distance relative to both of the TE text strings orientations between separate lines of text in terms of a percentage of a typical character s height By Ere mso j default this parameter is set to 0 meaning that the top of o one character could be level with the bottom of another e aate and they would still be merged into the same CAD text uf string AAA Character Recognition man Recognition Files Lists the CR files being used by P EREN RERA REAR TESEN A gTCONVRT to recognize raster text eS Open New Opens a recognition file or creates a new recognition file and sets it for training ar Close Closes the selected recognition file peor N Train Sets the selected recognition file for training a 495 Save Saves a trained recognition file Word Recognition Dictionary Files OPEN or NEW Opens an existing ASCII dictionary file dct or creates a new one
496. s RETURN when all the raster data to be saved in the new file has been highlighted You will next be prompted to define the image limits Select lower left corner of raster limits 5 Type in the coordinates for the point or position the cursor and press SELECT A rubber 433 a b banding box will appear attached at the point Select upper right corner of raster limits Select the point for the upper right corner of the limits The two points you have selected are stored as the upper and lower limits of the image File lt Buffer gt Enter B to copy the data to a temporary raster buffer The selected data within the rectangle will be copied to a raster buffer for later insertion using gPASTE Enter F to save the selected data to a raster file Continue with step 8 Dialogs After specifying F or File gCUT will save the selected data to a raster file gCUT will display the SAVE Raster File dialog Enter the desired file name and select the appropriate path for the new file To change the default file type select the scroll box labelled List Files of Type and select the desired file format The file name entered does not need to include the extension The file type extension displayed in the List Files of Type box will be used Click OK to return to the drawing editor Prompts After specifying F or File gCUT will save the selected data to a raster file gCUT will display the following prompts Enter
497. s GTXImage CAD s normal behavior to make it behave more like earlier versions of the GTXlmage CAD Series When a drawing containing attached images is opened any image that does not have the same name as the drawing is detatched deleting its image entities Any raster file with the same name as the drawing will then be attached using any REF files to register the raster in the vector drawing 3P_APP_EDIT This should be set to Yes when another 3rd party application will also be editing raster images This will cause more overhead to keep RCAD in sync with the 3rd party application raster edits When set to YES RCAD will not perform transparent saving of edited raster images 3P_APP_SAVING This is used when another 3rd party application will also be performing transparent saving GACTIVE_ON_GATTACH Controls whether a raster image attached with the gATTACH command should automatically become active gACTIVE Line Width Configuration The line width configuration table is important to several functions of the GTXlmage CAD Series Because CAD vector entities have no line width the GTXImage CAD lets you assign raster line widths to CAD vector colors When converting raster to vector gCONVRT can assign different colors to vectors resulting from different raster line widths The gRASTER command converts vector data to raster When rasterizing CAD vector entities of different colors can be rasterized to different line widths When smoothing
498. s IMAGE gt Attach Image command before using any other methods GTXImage CAD also supports dragging and dropping raster files of TIFF or CAL raster formats GTXImage CAD provides the gATTACH command to quickly attach images without prompting for insertion point scale and orientation Instead it makes certain assumptions about how to place scale and orient raster images Command Benefits IMAGE gt Attach Command supported by GTXImageCAD Offers full control of insertion point scale amp orientation Drag and Drop Easy to specify file just drag it gATTACH One step image import Scaling and Aligning Attached Raster Images Once an image has been imported into GTXImage CAD it should be scaled and aligned to fit the drawing Learn how to use the SCALE command to properly scale the drawing If you are working with line diagrams without a scale factor you will probably want to attach images at a scale of 1 duplicating the original paper drawing Use the scale factor of scanned drawings to determine how to scale its image E i entity to match your CAD model space coordinates For example S MM k lt i Having attached SIDE CG4 from the GTX tutorial files at 0 0 orientation at af SE AN pa eth Mk scale of 1 the drawing would look like this PAN The dimensions in the raster image indicate the required size of the raster if MA it were a drawing represented within GTXImage CAD s model space A The raster ima
499. s are fit into the selected area Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area 3 Divides the specified area into three viewports Enter viewport arrangement Horizontal Vertical Above Below Left lt Right gt Enter an option or press ENTER The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds The other options split the area into three viewports one large viewport and two smaller ones The Above Below Left and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed Specify first corner or Fit lt Fit gt Specify a point or press ENTER 3iright First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method the viewports are fit into the selected area Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area 202 4 Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size Specify first corner or Fit lt Fit gt Specify a point or press ENTER 4 First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method he viewports are fit into the selected area Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area MVSETUP Sets up the specifications of a drawing command line mvsetup When you enter mvsetup at the command line the prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the Model tab model space or on a layout tab paper space On the Model tab you set the units type drawing scale factor and paper size
500. s attached to the area 51 Object Attaches a URL to the selected object Select objects Use an object selection method and pressENTERto end selection Enter hyperlink lt current drawing gt Enter a URL When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object ATTDEF e Draw menu Block 3 Define Attributes Command line attdef Defines the mode attribute tag prompt and value insertion point and text options for an attribute Mode Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the block in a drawing The default values are stored in the AFLAGS system variable Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert the block ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute Attribute Sets attribute data You can enter up to 256 characters If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value start the string with a backslash To make the first character a backslash start the st
501. s based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command To use object snap tracking you must turn on one or more object snaps AUTOSNAP system variable Object Snap Modes Lists object snaps that you can turn on as running object snaps Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc elliptical arc line multiline polyline segment spline region or ray or to the closest corner of a trace solid or 3D face selection paint ee a snap point Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline segment region solid spline or xline selection paint i aa A A snap point Center Snaps to the center of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc selection mm Snap poini Node Snaps to a point object dimension definition point or dimension text origin 115 Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc snap point selection point Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline ray region spline or xline Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids e E Note You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time Extension Causes a tempora
502. s checkbox is empty raster data is converted into lines arcs and circles Save Raster Retains raster after conversion to vector If this box is empty the raster is erased during conversion Elevation Sets the elevation at which resulting vectors will be created The default value is 0 To create contours at different elevation set this value before converting raster to vector Instructions 1 Invoke gECO NVRT Edge Convert Setup Conversion Type Specify raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the desired raster and press RETURN The Edge Conn canis Convert Setup dialog will appear falle aa CAD C Contour Width Recognition Elevation 0 000000 M Save Raster The edge of a solid raster area has no width so this option is disabled Proceed to the conversion type i Cancel CAD or Contour Conversion 3 Checking the Contour box will cause lines and polylines to be generated Leaving this box un checked will cause only lines arcs and circles to be generated a Ifthe Contour option is checked the Polyline Smooth Index input window will contain a value between 1 and 9 A value of 1 would follow the contours least smoothly and 9 results in the closest match to the contour With lower resolution images you may want to choose values lower than 8 or 9 so that the polylines do not follow the square contours of individual pixels 4 Set the Elevation to the desired level at which resulting vectors will be create
503. s sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects To change the sample text enter characters in the box below the character preview image Preview Text Provides text to be displayed in the preview image Preview Button Updates the sample text in the character preview image according to any changes you ve made in the dialog box Note The preview image does not reflect the text height Apply Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the text of the current style in the drawing Close Applies changes to the current style Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options under Style Name Changing renaming or deleting the current style and creating a new style are actions that take place immediately and cannot be canceled Cancel Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options under Style Name 318 STYLESMANAGER 0 File menu Plot Style Manager E Command line stylesmanager The Plot Style Manager is displayed In the Plot Style Manager you can double click the Add a Plot Style Table wizard to add plot style tables Double click a plot style table STB or CTB file to start the Plot Style Table Editor Adds new plot style tables Plot style tables contain and define plot styles which can be assigned to objects When complete the wizard produces an STB or CTB file depending on the type of table you are creating You can edit these files in th
504. s two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer Enter trim method Distance Angle lt current gt Multiple Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects CHAMFER displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects E Command line change Select objects Except for zero thickness lines the objects selected must be parallel to the current user coordinate system UCS If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set you get varying results depending on the object selection sequence The easiest way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set 66 Properties Modifies properties of existing objects Enter property to change Color Elev LAyer LT ype ItScale LW eight Thickness PLotstyle Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change varies is displayed as the current value You can change several properties at a time The Enter Property to Change prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed Color Changes the color of the selected objects Enter new color Truecolor COlorbook lt current gt Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255 enter t enter co en
505. s you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Row Offset Pick Column Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between columns ARRAY prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Column Offset Pick Angle of Array Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or using the pointing device to specify two points You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays Polar Array 48 Polar Array Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point Specifies the center point of the polar array Enter coordinate values for X and Y or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location 4 O Center Point Pick Center Point Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the center point in the drawing area Method and Values Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array Method Sets the method used to position objects This setting controls which of the Method and Value fields are available for specifying values For example if the method is Total Number of Items amp
506. sassociate Select one or more dimensions and then press ENTER 93 DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers and that are not in a different space than the current space for example if model space is active associative dimensions in paper space are excluded DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and the number that are disassociated Edits dimension text and extension lines on dimension objects 0 Dimension toolbar EE Command line dimedit Enter type of dimension editing Home New Rotate Oblique lt Home gt Enter an option or pressENTER Moves rotated dimension text back to its default position Select objects Use an object selection method to select dimension objects a gt Ld before Home a er Home The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style Changes dimension text using the In Place Text Editor aa pa before New after Mew The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets lt gt To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the
507. script and using PARTIALOPEN FILEDIA can be set to 0 or 1 When FILEDIA is set to 0 and you enter partialopen or partialopen at the Command prompt PARTIALOPEN displays prompts on the command line Enter name of drawing to open Enter a drawing name and press ENTER Enter tilde at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dialog box In the Select File dialog box select a file and choose Partial Open to display the Partial Open dialog box If you enter a file name at the prompt prompts are displayed on the command line Enter view to load or lt Extents gt Enter a view name enter or press ENTER fo load the Extents view List Views Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing Enter a view name Enter layers to load or lt none gt Enter a layer name enter or press ENTER Layers to Load Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing To load geometry from multiple layers use a comma between layer names If no layer geometry is specified no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing including geometry specified to load from a view Unload all Xrefs on open Yes No lt N gt Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Does not load any external references into the drawing No Loads all external references into the drawing List Layers Displays a list of layers available in the selected drawing Enter one or more layer names To enter multiple layers sepa
508. se dimension If the base dimension is ordinate the following prompt is displayed Specify feature location Or Undo Select lt Select gt To end the command press ENTER twice or press ESC The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text Second Extension Line Origin 89 Second Extension Line Origin By default the first extension line of the base dimension is used as the extension line origin for the baseline dimension To override this default behavior explicitly select the base dimension the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection When you select a second point the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed To end the command press ESC To select another linear ordinate or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension press ENTER Select base dimension Select a linear ordinate or angular dimension Select a base dimension or press ESC to end the command dimension spacing angular baseline cimensioning linear baseline dimensioning Feature Location Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline dimension you are prompted for the next feature location When you select a feature location the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed To end the command press ESC To
509. selection Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points If the rectangle s points are specified from right to left Box is equivalent to Crossing Otherwise Box is equivalent to Window Specify first corner Specify a point Specify opposite corner Specify a point Selects all objects on thawed layers 297 seleci all Selects all objects crossing a selection fence The Fence method is similar to CPolygon except that that the fence is not closed and a fence can cross itself Fence is not affected by the PICKADD system variable First fence point Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or Undo Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point gt AX O gt V NDAS f fence selection Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times WPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable es i O 7 First polygon point Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or Undo Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point x fs sy O a 7 O a xx gt EA A A AF Ni O WFolygon selection Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times CPolygon is not affe
510. sen will be the lower left point of the first text character of the replacement raster text 2 Select end point of baseline This point defines the width of the existing raster data that will be replaced by either new raster text or blank space ta Second Point 428 3 Select rectangle height This point completes the frame of raster data that will be replaced by new raster text or blank space All raster data contained within the framed area will be highlighted All highlighted raster data will be removed and replaced by the following steps 4 Specify new text height Enter a numeric value that will set the height of the new raster text The height of the existing raster text may be determined ahead of time by using the Dist command 5 The Text Formatting control with the In Place Text Editor will appear Type over the raster text that was highlighted in step 3 429 6 To end the editing click the OK button on the Text Formatting toolbar or click outside the In Place Text Editor scare FULL SIZE Mo gCtext Advanced Instructions The change text command provides the choice of multiple IOP intelligent object picking selections on any part of the raster data in the current image object however only the area of the data highlighted by the baseline and height framing is subject to editing of raster text Any other highlighted raster will be erased when the gCtext command has completed In this example t
511. sesesesesersesesee 30 GENERAL INFORMATION minina a le ee 30 Using GTXImage CAD Series Documentation 0 0 cece cceceeseseeseeeeseeseeecseeseeeseeseecseeseeecaeeaeeeeaeeeeaee 30 USING THIS REFERENCE me sc caco See cuss cata trio aan 30 EXECUTING COMMANDS 5 03 lt seeccuas cis beccstay e e da 30 STARTING COMMANDS scott A ao 30 USING TRANSPARENT COMMANDS cescicisuniaco rito gitano dro inte ie 31 SUPPRESSING DIALOG BOXES cui id da ias 31 RESPONDING TO PROMPTS cocido led dbs al piedra il a des 31 SELECTING OPTIONS ON THE COMMAND LINE o coooccccccccocononononocnoncononononocnnnco conocio no cn oncnnonono no cnon cn nonono na cnoncnnnos 32 USING WILD CARD CHARACTERS ON THE COMMAND LINE eccccesseseseeseseeseecesecseeceeeceeeaeseceeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeees 32 REPEATING COMMANDS 3 i504 sevesci pha E E EE E E avd oi aed Reise Ara sie Hise as 32 ACCESSING RECENTLY USED COMMANDS qu cecceesseseceescnseseseececsenseseseseeecsenseasaesesesecnseasaesesessenseaneesenees 33 STANDARD FILE SELECTION DIALOG BOXES uu ccscccssseseseesescnseseseecscsenseavseseescaesasasseeesecsenasasseeesecasaeeeees 33 REFERENCES TO OTHER SECTIONS pinsos aoned i aneii ch sua ai A EN E daria iria 33 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS i ccssscessesceccscssvecsssascacei Aaaa denied EE Ra EA i n 33 COMMAND OVERVIEW suiriri iirrainn itn a E EA EE AEEA E EE E ah 35 ABRO Di a 35 ADOGCLOSE Storni daa Ena Sion setae E a tia Etica in iii 35 ADEENTE este det ways ess ette lidades coses 35 ADE NAVIG
512. set or the other depending on which space is current If you have saved different UCS settings in individual viewports and you switch between viewports the different UCSs are not retained in the Previous list However if you change a UCS setting within a viewport the last UCS setting is retained in the Previous list For example changing the UCS from World to UCS1 would retain World at the top of the Previous list If you then switch viewports with Front as the current UCS and then change the UCS to Right the Front UCS is retained at the top of the Previous list If you then choose the UCS Previous option twice in this viewport the UCS setting changes to Front and then back to World See the UCSVP system variable Restore Restore Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS Restoring a saved UCS does not reestablish the viewing direction in effect when the UCS was saved Enter name of UCS to restore or Enter a name or enter Name Specifies a named UCS List UCSs Lists the names of currently defined UCSs Enter UCS name s to list lt gt Enter a name list or press ENTER fo list all UCSs o E lt O Saves the current UCS to a specified name The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters numbers blank spaces and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and this program for other purposes Enter name to save current UCS or Enter a name or enter Name Saves the cu
513. solution sets resulting raster output at the same Resolution as the input file New DPI specifies an override resolution for output files Translate Begins translating input files into files of the output file format in the specified output directory Quit Exits Rastrans Restart After translating the Translate button is renamed Restart Clears the Input Files List allowing you to do another batch conversion if desired Rastrans wri For additional documentation refer to Rastrans wri located in the GTX directory 521 SUPPORTED FORMATS Raster Format Ext Read Write Preserve Headers Adobe PostScript PS X Boeing Bedmics B4 X X X GTX Uncompressed Runlength RNL X X CalComp Raster Format CRF X CCITT G3 TIFF header TIF X X X CCITT G4 TIFF header TIF X X X Clmage Corp DSI X JEDMICS Tiled G4 C4 X X X FileNET G4 Tiled IMG X X FileNET G3 Tiled IMG X FileNET G4 Banded IMG X FileNET G3 Banded IMG X GraphTEC RLC RLC X HP Printer Control Language PCL X HP Raster Transfer Language RTL X HP Graphics Language Std 2 HPG X PC Paint format PCX X X Image Systems Runlength RLC X X Image Systems Runlength 2 RLC X Japan Digital Labs 4000E JD4 X Japan Digital Labs JDL X CCITT G3 GTX G3 X X CCITT G4 GTX G4 X X Cals G4 MIL STD 28002A CG4 X X Oce Graphics NKK Japan OCE X Optigraphics TIFF OPT X Raster Graphi
514. splayed in the list and can also be used to make changes to more than one layer at a time New Property Filter Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box where you can create a layer filter based on one or more properties of the layers New Group Filter Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select and add to the filter Layer States Manager Displays the Layer States Manager in which you can save the current property settings for layers in a named layer state and then restore those settings later New Layer Creates a new layer The list displays a layer named LAYER1 The name is selected so that you can enter a new layer name immediately The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list color on or off state and so on Delete Layer Marks selected layers for deletion Layers are deleted when you click Apply or OK You can delete only unreferenced layers Referenced layers include layers O and DEFPOINTS layers containing objects including objects in block definitions the current layer and xref dependent layers Layers in a partially opened drawing are also considered referenced and cannot be deleted Note Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards Set Current 159 Sets the selected layer as the current layer Objects that you create are drawn on the current layer CLAYER s
515. spline definition Enter a refine option Add control point Elevate order Weight eXit lt eXit gt Enter an option or pressENTER Add Control Point Increases the number of control points that control a portion of a spline Specify a point on the spline lt exit gt Specify a point or pressENTER SPLINEDIT adds a new control point close to the point you select between the two control points affecting that portion of the spline ee A a gt o ob O q O io a O AE selecied point AD new paint O oO Elevate Order Increases the number of control points on the spline Enter new order lt current gt Enter an integer or pressENTER Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of control points uniformly across the spline for more localized control The maximum value for order is 26 Weight Changes the weight at various spline control points A larger weight value pulls the spline closer to the control point Enter new weight current current or Next Previous Select point eXit lt N gt Enter a value enter an option or pressENTER New Weight Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value at the selected control point The larger the integer value the more the spline is pulled toward the control point Next Moves selection to the next point The point marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the spline even if the spline is closed Previous Moves selection to the previ
516. ssociativity rehatch the region REINIT Reinitializes the digitizer digitizer input output port and program parameters file EE Command line reinit The Re initialization dialog box is displayed Defines the I O port and the device file for reinitialization 289 1 0 Port Initialization Reinitializes the I O port for the digitizer Device File Initialization Reinitializes the digitizer and the acad pgp file RENAME Changes the names of named objects Format menu Rename Command line rename The Rename dialog box is displayed If you enter rename at the Command prompt RENAME displays prompts on the command line Renames named objects Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category blocks dimension styles layers linetypes plot styles table styles text styles UCSs views and model space viewport configurations Select the objects you want to rename Items Displays named objects of the type specified in Named Objects Select the name you want to change Old Name Specifies the named object to be renamed Enter a name or select a name from the Items list You can use the wild card characters and to rename groups of objects You can t rename some standard objects such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS linetype Rename To Specifies the new name you want to assign to the object Enter a name and choose Rename To to apply the name change RESUME Continues an interrupted script E Comm
517. ster image Changes circles and arcs to have the same radius as a selected circle or arc 380 Z E ek eb Pb ea gCARC gCCIRCLE gCCIRCLE2P gCELEV gCHANGE gCHGLAY gCIRCLE gCLEANIOP gCLINE gCONCEN gCONVRT gCOPY gCREATE gCROP gCTEXT GCE GCH GCHL GC GCONC GCO GCP GCR GCRO The gCARC command stretches arcs The gCCIRCLE command stretches raster circles Change circle two point pick Assigns incremental elevations to multiple polylines Changes the size or position of a line arc or circle Changes the layer of objects to that of a specified object Draws a raster circle in the current raster image Automatically deskews the active image and places speckles and other noise in a selection set The gCLINE command stretches raster lines Moves circles and arcs to be concentric about a location or about the centerpoint of a specified circle or arc Converts selected raster data to vector Copies selected raster data to a new location on the image retaining the original Creates a new raster database or flush the current raster database Deletes all information outside of a specified window Change raster text 381 SSex54RrGQGHKRm ab HX Xv Be gCUT gDESKEW gDETACH gDRO_BK gECONVRT gEDGE gERASE gFRZLAY gHELP gHTEXT gHYBRIDMODE gINACTIVE gINFO gINVERT glISOLAY gJOIN gLINE GCU GD GEC
518. stment the line might end in the middle of a pattern Turn off Adaptive Adjustment if linetype scale is important Turn on Adaptive Adjustment if complete linetype patterns are more important than correct linetype scaling Lineweight Displays a sample of the lineweight as well as its numeric value You can specify the numeric value of each lineweight in millimeters The default setting for plot style lineweight is Use Object Lineweight If you assign a plot style lineweight the lineweight overrides the object s lineweight at plot time Line End Style Provides the following line end styles Butt Square Round and Diamond The default setting for Line End Style is Use Object End Style If you assign a line end style the line end style overrides the object s line end style at plot time Line Join Style Provides the following line join styles Miter Bevel Round and Diamond The default setting for Line Join Style is Use Object Join Style If you assign a line join style the line join style overrides the object s line join style at plot time Fill Style Provides the following fill styles Solid Checkerboard Crosshatch Diamonds Horizontal Bars Slant Left Slant Right Square Dots and Vertical Bar The default setting for Fill Style is Use Object Fill Style If you assign a fill style the fill style overrides the object s fill style at plot time Add Style Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table The plot st
519. suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete the text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension text D gt x lt is Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes gt 5 a D Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 After you specify the angle the Dimension Line Location prompt is redisplayed DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions EE Command line dimdisassociate Select dimensions to di
520. t specified areas from the total area Specify first corner point or Object Subtract Specify a point 1 or enter an option 2 1 a defined area ta be added new area First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you define by selecting points All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total ADD mode Specify a point 2 Specify points to define a polygon 3 Press ENTER AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on If you do not close the polygon the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first When the perimeter is calculated that line length is added Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object ADD mode Select objects AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on If you select an open polyline the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter calculations Subtract Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you subtract specified areas 45 Subtract Si
521. t Data dialog box a standard file selection dialog box is displayed In Files of Type select the format type to export objects to In File Name enter the name of the file to create The objects are exported to the specified file format using the specified file name The following output types are available WMF Microsoft Windows Metafile see WMFOUT SAT ACIS solid object file see ACISOUT STL Solid object stereolithography file see STLOUT EPS Encapsulated PostScript file e DXX Attribute extract DXF file see ATTEXT BMP Device independent bitmap file see BMPOUT 3DS 3D Studio file see 3DSOUT DWG drawing file see WBLOCK EXTEND Extends an object to meet another object 0 Modify toolbar 0 Modify menu Extend 123 EE Command line extend Select boundary edges Select objects Or lt select all gt Select one or more objects and press ENTER or press ENTER to select all displayed objects Select object to extend Or shift select to trim Or Fence Crossing Project Edge Undo Select objects to extend or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim or enter an option Boundary Object Selection Boundary Object Selection Uses the selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to extend an object Object to Extend Object to Extend Specifies the objects to extend Press ENTER to end the command Shift Select to Trim Shift Select to Trim Trims the
522. t Layer current OFFSETGAPTYPE current Specify offset distance or Through Erase Layer lt current gt Specify a distance enter an option or press ENTER polyline polyline with offset The OFFSET command repeats for convenience To exit the command press ENTER Offset Distance Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object Select object to offset or Exit Undo lt exit gt Select one object enter an option or press ENTER to end the command Specify point on side to offset or Exit Multiple Undo lt exit or next object gt Specify a point 1 on the side of the object you want to offset or enter an option 1 oo el offset distance oe E object selected side selected object offset Exit Exits the OFFSET command Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode which repeats the offset operation using the current offset distance Undo Reverses the previous offset 204 Through Through Creates an object passing through a specified point Select object to offset or lt exit gt Select one object or press ENTER to end the command Specify through point or Exit Multiple Undo lt exit or next object gt Specify a point 1 through which you want the offset object to pass or enter a distance 1 object selected a e a through point object offset Exit Exits the OFFSET command Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode which repeats the offset operat
523. t another row to change its width Line Width Configuration Dialog Enter width lt XX gt c Enter the value for the width in the units being used and press RETURN The Width Table will reflect the changes d Select another color number to change its width or press 0 and RETURN to continue the command The entities will be changed to raster with the widths defined by their colors The highlighted entities will be converted to raster Some residual vector markings overlay the raster until you redraw the image Prompts 1 Invoke gBURN Raster width Box Pick lt Table gt 01 2 There are three ways to respond to this prompt You can 1 type in a value as the width to be used for all vector lines to be rasterized for plotting 2 use the LineWidth Configuration Table to correlate CAD color numbers with line widths or 3 use the Box or Pick options to specify a standard linewidth graphically as described above Fixed Line Width a You can type in a value in mm or inch as the width to be used for all the vector lines to be rasterized The value in parentheses is the default value or one previously used If you enter a value it will remain the default line width during this editing session Note If you defined the width previously in this session with a typed value or the box option that value will appear as the default You can press RETURN to accept this value or enter a number to represent the new width T
524. t as a block Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box where you can select a block or drawing file to insert Path Specifies the path to the block Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert A lightning bolt icon in the lower right corner of the preview indicates that the block is dynamic Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the block Specify On Screen Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device X Sets the X coordinate value Y Sets the Y coordinate value Sets the Z coordinate value Scale Specifies the scale for the inserted block Specifying negative values for the X Y and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block Specify On Screen 155 Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device X Sets the Xscale factor Y Sets the Yscale factor Sets the Zscale factor Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X Y and Z coordinates A value specified for Xis also reflected in the Yand Zvalues Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS Specify On Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block Block Unit Displays information about the block units Unit Specifies the INSUNITS value for the inserted block Factor Displays the unit scale facto
525. t block Explode lt Explode gt Enter an option or press ENTER The descriptions of the All Color Layer LType Inherit from Parent Block and Explode options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Individually XREF Controls external references to drawing files pe Reference toolbar id 0 Insert menu Xref Manager Shortcut menu Select an xref right click in the drawing area and choose Xref Manager E Command line xref The Xref Manager is displayed If you enter xref at the Command prompt XREF displays prompts on the command line Attaches overlays lists binds detaches reloads unloads renames and modifies paths to external references xrefs in the current or host drawing List of External References Displays the xrefs in the drawing in a tree view or a list view You can use the F3 and F4 keys to switch between list view and tree view Selecting any field selects the xref List View Displays a flat listing of the attached xrefs and their associated data You can sort the list of references by name status type file date file size or the saved path and file name Reference Name Lists the names of the xrefs as stored in the definition table for the drawing Status Shows whether the xref is loaded unloaded not found unresolved orphaned or marked for unloading or reloading Loaded Currently attached to the drawing Unloaded Marked to be unloaded from the drawing once the Xref Mana
526. t from the set of fit points Specify fit point lt exit gt Specify a fit point or press ENTER Exit Returns to the Enter a Fit Data Option prompt Purge Removes a spline s fit data from the drawing database After purging the spline s fit data the main SPLINEDIT prompt is displayed without the Fit Data option 310 Tangents Edits the start and end tangents of a spline Specify start tangent or System default Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER Specify end tangent or System default Specify a point enter an option or press ENTER If the spline is closed the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or System Default The System Default option calculates the default tangents at the ends You can specify a point or use the Tangent or Perpendicular object snap mode to make the spline tangential or perpendicular to existing objects Tolerance Refits the spline to the existing points with new tolerance values Enter fit tolerance lt current gt Enter a value or pressENTER WA zero tolerance positive tolerance Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt Close Open Close Open If the selected spline is closed the Close option changes to Open Close Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous smooth at its endpoints If the spline s start point and endpoint are the same this option makes the spline tangent continuous at both points Open Opens a closed spline If the spline s start point
527. t from true B splines produced with the SPLINE command If the original polyline included arc segments they are straightened when the spline s frame is formed If the frame has width the resulting spline tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last vertex All intermediate width information is ignored Once spline fit the frame if displayed is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype Tangent specifications on control point vertices have no effect on spline fitting When a spline fit curve is fit to a polyline the spline fit curve s frame is stored so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving You can turn a spline fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve option This option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on splines Spline frames are not usually displayed on the screen If you want to see them set the SPLFRAME system variable to 1 Next time the drawing is regenerated both the frame and the spline curve are drawn i A f D A E K j LA d SPLFRAME set to D SPLFRAME sel to 1 Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline fit polylines or fit curves MOVE ERASE COPY MIRROR ROTATE and SCALE operate on both the spline curve and its frame whether the frame is visible or not EXTEND changes the frame by adding a new vertex where the initial or final line of the frame intersects the boundary geometry BREAK and TRIM generate
528. t point of the leader line None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point Exit Exits the Format options Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line The previous prompt is displayed 168 LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs Modify menu Lengthen Command line lengthen Select an object Or DElta Percent Total DYnamic Select one object or enter an option Object Selection Object Selection Displays the length and where applicable the included angle of the object LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system UCS Current length lt current gt included angle lt current gt Select an object or DElta Percent Total DYnamic Select one object enter an option or pressENTERto end the command Delta Changes the length of an object by a specified increment measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point Delta also changes the angle of an arc by a specified increment measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point A positive value extends the object a negative value trims it Enter delta length or Angle lt current gt Specify a distance enter a or pressENTER Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment Select an object to change or Undo Select one object
529. tally oriented text only Specify bottom center point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AUTOCAD y BR Bottom Right Right justifies text at a point specified for the baseline Available for horizontally oriented text only Specify bottom right point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text AUTOCAD Style Specifies the text style which determines the appearance of the text characters Text you create uses the current text style Enter style name or lt current gt Enter a text style name or enter to list all text styles Entering lists the current text styles associated font files height and other parameters AUTOCAD AUTOCAD AUTOCAD various styles TEXTSCR Opens the text window View menu Display Text Window Command line textser or textser for transparent use TEXTSCR displays the command line in a separate window You can press F2 to toggle between the drawing area and the text window This command is ignored on dual screen systems When the command line is hidden you can turn it back on by entering commandline in the text window 328 TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing Tools menu Inquiry Time ES
530. te line Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N Layering Specifies whether only layers with geometry should be kept COMPRESS or whether the number of layers shown should be kept constant FILL Acceptable entries are COMPRESS and FILL LineWidth Specifies the maximum width for an entity to be recognized as a line Lines wider than the maximum will be recognized as filled polygons The entry must be a positive real number in the range of 0 to 2 inches or 0 to 50 8 mm LineWidthTable Specifies up to eight widths for recognized lines All entities having line width attributes are snapped to the nearest setting in the table The entries must go from the smallest to the largest The entries must be positive real numbers separated by commas in the range of 0 to 2 inches or 0 to 50 8 mm Text Specifies whether data classified as text should be discarded DISCARD or vectorized CLASSIFY When set to CLASSIFY the data will appear as UTEXT in GTX Metafiles will be vectorized as lines on a TEXT layer for DXF and IGES and vectorized as lines on the drawing image for CGM Acceptable entries are DISCARD and CLASSIFY 534 TextSize Specifies the maximum height or width for data to be considered text Data equal to or below this size but larger than the filter size is classified as text TextWidth Specifies the text width for vectorized text This only affects DXF IGES and CGM output TextString Specifies whether a group of te
531. ter Point Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius Specify radius of circle or Diameter Specify a point enter a value enter d or press ENTER Radius Defines the radius of the circle Enter a value or specify a point 2 The distance between this point and the center point determines the radius of the circle 2 radius Diameter Draws a circle using the center point and a specified distance for the diameter Specify diameter of circle lt current gt Specify a point 2 enter a value or press ENTER diameter 3P Three Points 71 3P Three Points Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference Specify first point on circle Specify a point 1 Specify second point on circle Specify a point 2 Specify third point on circle Specify a point 3 1 3P 2P Two Points 2P Two Points Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter Specify first endpoint of circle s diameter Specify a point 1 Specify second endpoint of circle s diameter Specify a point 2 2P TTR Tangent Tangent Radius TTR Tangent Tangent Radius Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects Specify point on object for first tangent of circle Select a circle arc or line Specify point on object for second tangent of circle Select a circle arc or line Specify radius of circle lt current gt tan lan radius Sometimes more than one circle
532. ter bylayer or byblock or press ENTER For example to change a color to red enter Fed or 1 If you enter bylayer the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located If you enter byblock the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object Red Green Blue Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object Enter Color Book name Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as PANTONE If you enter a color book name the following prompt is displayed Enter color name Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as Pantone 573 Elev Changes the Z axis elevation of 2D objects Specify new elevation lt current gt You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same Z value zZ zZ Y lt o gt Ped Y Xx X Elw 0 Elev 2 Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects Enter new layer name lt current gt 67 Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects Enter new linetype name lt current gt If the new linetype is not loaded the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file acad lin If this procedure fails use LINETYPE to load the linetype a an pa i my ee Ltscale Changes the linety
533. ter in Description You can use up to 64 characters for a description name Explode Deletes the definition of the selected group The group s objects remain in the drawing Selectable Specifies whether the group is selectable HATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern solid fill or gradient fill e Draw toolbar e Draw menu Hatch EE Command line hatch The Hatch and Gradient dialog box is displayed If you enter hatch at the Command prompt HATCH displays prompts on the command line Note By default the program will not create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10 000 hatch segments The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry To reset the limit to 50 000 for example enter setenv MaxHatch 50000 at the Command prompt The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10 000 000 138 Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns The dialog box organizes patterns on four tabs with images arranged alphabetically on each tab Click an image to select a pattern and click OK ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the product ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the product Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with the product Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the search path which is set in the Options dialog box Files tab Preview Displays a preview image o
534. ter rectangle at any rotated orientation in the current raster image by defining the rectangle s baseline and height Instructions Command grotrectangle Line width lt 0 010 gt Box Pick 1 Enter a line width for the raster lines of the rectangle 2 Select insert point of baseline Select or type the first corner point of the baseline 3 Select end point of baseline Select or type the second corner point of the baseline 4 Select rectangle height The raster rectangle is drawn when the height point is selected ga Second point of baseline o First point of baseline Height of rectangle y 477 gRUB Availability GRU or GRUB GTX Raster Edit gt Rub GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS g gRUB erases raster data after it has been converted or traced to vector entities You select the vector entities overlying the raster that is to be erased This lets you use the raster to evaluate the conversion and then erase it easily Icon Instructions 1 Select gRUB Select objects 2 Select the vector entities over the raster to be erased When all the desired entities are highlighted press RETURN You will see a message indicating the percent of rub completed Note The width at which gRUB erases is determined by the linewidth configuration table Automatically generated polylines have no actual width so they are not very effective for erasing underlying raster yERASE can be more effective in this situation
535. tes in existing block instances are not affected Xrefs and block references without definitions are not affected by this option Lock Objects Not in Working Set Locks all objects not in the working set This prevents you from accidentally selecting and editing objects in the host drawing while in a reference editing state The behavior of locked objects is similar to objects on a locked layer If you try to edit locked objects they are filtered from the selection set REFSET Adds or removes objects from a working set during in place editing of a reference an xref or a block Tools menu Xref and Block In place Editing Add to Working Set or Xref and Block In Place Editing gt Remove from Working Set E Command line refset Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing Enter an option Add Remove lt Add gt Enter an option or pressENTER Objects that are part of the working set are visually distinct from other objects in the current drawing All objects in the current drawing except objects in the working set appear faded Adds objects to the working set Select objects Select the objects you want to add An object that is part of the working set is added to the reference when changes are saved back and the object is removed from the current drawing The Add to Workset button on the Refedit toolbar prompts you to add objects to the working set without using REFCLOSE 287 REGEN Regenerates the en
536. tes the backup option 516 BackupRasExt Sets the file extension for backup raster files Resolution Defines the default resolution for new raster images MaxUndo Sets the number of raster undos that are stored Tiffformat Sets the subformat to be used when saving TIFF files TIFF G3 1 GIFF G4 2 TIFF UNCOMPRESSED 3 Disable Disables a specified command Enter a single command name i e gMOVE after the word Disable The software will not allow the user to invoke the specified command To disable multiple commands add more Disable Command Name lines to the configuration file Text Configuration Parameters CharFile sets a recognition file for GTXlmage CAD PLUS to automatically load when it is run If you want the program to load multiple recognition files add more CharFile Recognition File lines to the configuration file AmbigChar sets a character to be listed in the ambiguous characters list box in the gTCONFIG dialog upon starting GTXImage CAD PLUS CharOrient sets the initial values for the Orientation list in the gTCONFIG dialog determining the allowed orientations for building CAD text entities The default setting is 0 Valid entries are any angle between 360 and 360 degrees CharThreshold sets the initial value of the AutoConvert Threshold setting in the gTCONFIG dialog This is the character confidence level above which the character verification dialog appears The default value is 100 which makes the characte
537. text window to a log file To specify the location and name of the log file use the Files tab in the Options dialog box You can also set the log file location by using the LOGFILEMODE system variable The LOGFILENAME system variable read only stores the log file name of the current drawing File Extension for Temporary Files Specifies a unique extension for temporary save files The default extension is ac Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when you save a file Display Digital Signature Information Presents digital signature information when a file with a valid digital signature is opened SIGWARN system variable File Open Controls settings that relate to recently used files and open files Number of Recently Used Files to List Controls the number of recently used files that are listed in the File menu for quick access Valid values are 0 to 9 Display Full Path In Title Displays the full path of the active drawing in the drawing s title bar or in the application window title bar if the drawing is maximized 216 External References Xrefs Controls the settings that relate to editing and loading external references Demand Load Xrefs Controls demand loading of xrefs Demand loading improves performance by loading only the parts of the referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current drawing XLOADCTL system variable Disabled Turns off demand loading
538. th fill property Polyline Lines on TEXT layer 531 Command Line Version of OSR GTX OSR is accompanied by a DOS command line version Running osrc exe from the command line without arguments will display usage notes on the screen and also generate an empty OSR ERR error file log in the same directory if not present Running OSR with only an input and output file specified will cause the program to produce a configuration file This file can then be customized using a normal text editor and specified as the desired configuration file for further OSR conversions Different configuration files will be produced based on the type of output file specified Process Flow The raster to vector conversion consists of the following steps 1 Read raster input file 2 Convert to GTX metafile format 3 Translate to indicated vector format 4 Write vector output file The parameters used for the conversion from raster to GTX metafile are defined in the OSR CFG configuration file The parameters are contained in the OSRMAP CFG file for GTX OSR Contours An appropriate configuration file also defines the translation from GTX MTF format to another vector format The command line entry must include the names of the input file and the output file You can include paths if you want to override the settings for the input and output paths specified in the OSR CFG configuration file You may create several different configuration files with differ
539. th fill property Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N DefaultDelimiters YES indicates that default delimiters should be output in string format IH and IH in the global section of the IGES file NO indicates that the delimiters should be ignored Acceptable entries are YES Y NO N RecordLength Acceptable entries are 80 82 If the setting is 82 lt CR gt and lt LF gt line feed are appended to each record CALSClass Specifies what CALS compliance is required Acceptable entries are 0 1 and 2 A 535 0 setting indicates that CALS compliance is not required The DXF CFG File The confirmation file for conversion to AutoCAD s DXF format has only three entries Table 7 Default DXF CFG File Contents VEUF LIG Default Value OutlinePoly Widths no The terms are explained below OutLinePoly YES specifies that filled polygons will be converted as closed polylines NO specifies that they will be converted into closed areas with fill property Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N Scale Specifies the scale factor used to multiply both X and Y dimensions It must be a positive real number Widths YES specifies that the conversion should retain the line widths NO indicates that all lines will translate with a width attribute of 0 When this is set to YES it also translates arcs and circles as polylines with width Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N The CGM CFG File
540. the In Place Text Editor when you specify an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary 167 Enter the characters for the text Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets lt gt Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets The units settings and the current text style determine how the text is displayed The multiline text is vertically centered and horizontally aligned according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line The text is offset from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New Modify or Override Dimension Style dialog box If the offset specified is negative the multiline text is enclosed in a box as a basic dimension TRUE POSITION PER DATUM REFERENCE After you specify the text LEADER ends Format Controls the way the leader is drawn and whether it has an arrowhead Enter leader format option Spline STraight Arrow None lt Exit gt Enter an option or pressENTERto return to the previous prompt After each option the Specify Next Point prompt is redisplayed eo Roll spline leader line straight leader line sample arrowheads no arrowhead Spline Draws the leader line as a spline The vertices of the leader line are the control points each of equal unit weight Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the star
541. the X axis XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles The black arm indicates the new angle The gray arm indicates the current angle Specify an angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half circle Selecting the bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that region If you select the inner arc or an area inside it the angle is not rounded off and the result may be a fractional number Set to Plan View Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view XY plane relative to the selected coordinate system 79 DETACHURL Removes hyperlinks in a drawing EE Command line detachurl Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER to end selection Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects If an area is selected the polyline is deleted You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer DIM Accesses Dimensioning mode Command line dim or dim1 Dim Enter a Dimensioning mode command The Dim prompt indicates that you re in Dimensioning mode in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the Command prompt To exit Dimensioning mode enter e or exit or press E
542. the application icon instead of the data To view or edit the data double click the icon PCINWIZARD Displays a wizard to import PCP and PC2 configuration file plot settings into the Model tab or current layout Tools menu Wizards Import Plot Settings E command line pcinwizard PCINWIZARD displays the Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard Information that can be imported from PCP or PC2 files includes plot area rotation plot offset plot optimization plot to file paper size plot scale and pen mapping The wizard prompts you for the name of the PCP or PC2 configuration file from which you want to import settings You can view and modify the plot settings prior to importing them The imported settings can be applied to the current Model tab or layout tab 238 PEDIT Edits polylines and three dimensional polygon meshes 0 Modify II toolbar 0 Modify menu Object Polyline Shortcut menu Select a polyline to edit right click in the drawing area and choose Polyline Edit E Command line pedit Select polyline or Multiple Use an object selection method or enter m The remaining prompts depend on whether you have selected a 2D polyline a 3D polyline Or 3D polygon mesh If the selected object is a line or an arc the following prompt is displayed Object selected is not a polyline Do you want it to turn into one lt Y gt Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter y the object is converted into a single segment 2
543. the binary images will be put on the current AutoCAD layer 483 2 Use User defined image name as Acad layer name This option will use the layer name to create a new layer with that name amp the image will be placed upon that layer 3 Select from existing Acad Layers This prompts the user to select the layer from the existing list of defined layers for every new binary image created Next you can select the file format for the new binary images Click on the down arrow to see amp select the image format Select NEXT to move to the Color Separation dialog GTX Color Separation color mapdemo tif a xl Select Image Name Available Assigned Properties Preview a color by placing the cursor over the color and click the right mouse button Rename New gt gt Acad Layer gt gt 0 Instructions 27 lt lt Edit image name click Rename button Select Acad Layer if applicable Left mouse click to select colors Left mouse drag to select multiple colors A OE Right mouse click to display color the currently selected image file Selected pixels will show as white on a presentes black background Switch to mext image Repeat steps Click Apply button to finish Help Apply Separation Cancel You can rename your binary image amp layer in the top left hand corner of the dialog By default the image names are numbers 1 2 3 etc Highlight the layer number amp you can
544. the current raster image and the software license lt includes the default values for raster file name and format as well as the resolution the raster limits and data extents in current drawing units The file name and format will be that of the last raster file loaded or saved Instructions 1 Select gINFO You will see a listing on the text screen display similar to the following The values shown are sample values only Resolution Shows the resolution of the current raster database in terms of dots per inch DPI This value is obtained from the resolution from the file unless overridden by the GTXRAST CFG Resolution setting or by a resolution established using gCREATE Raster data limits Defines the rectangular area indicating the size of the present raster image including bounding white space set with gCREATE or gRESIZE or by the limits of the raster drawing that was loaded The values are given in current drawing units Raster data extents Defines smallest rectangular area that can enclose the raster data in terms of CAD units It is defined by the X and Y coordinates of the lower left corner followed by the X and Y coordinates of the upper right corner of the rectangle The extents determine where raster data is currently drawn Drawing limits Defines the CAD drawing limits Source FileName The name of the raster file to which the image refers Active FileName The filename to which gSAVE will save Raster File type T
545. the group name Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters numbers and the special characters dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ but not spaces The name is converted to uppercase characters Description Displays the description of the selected group if there is one Find Name Lists the groups to which an object belongs Pick a member of a group Select one object The Group Member List dialog box is displayed showing the groups to which the object belongs Highlight Shows the members of the selected group in the drawing area Include Unnamed Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed When this option is cleared only named groups are displayed 136 Create Group Specifies properties of new groups New Creates a new group from the selected objects using the name and description under Group Name and Description desk computer and telephone selected The group name is displayed in the Group Name list Selectable Specifies that a new group is selectable Unnamed Indicates that a new group is unnamed A default name An is assigned to unnamed groups The n represents a number that increases with each new group Change Group Modifies existing groups Remove Removes objects from the selected group To use this option clear the Selectable option Remove objects Use an object selection method The selected objects are removed from the group The Object Grouping dialog box
546. the installation and configuration process not yet documented by this manual Program Groups Folders SETUP creates a GTXImage CAD V14 program folder containing the icons used for running GTXImage CAD and its accompanying programs The GTXImage CAD V14 program folder contains a folder for HASP License containing icons for setting up and configuring your HASP license Licensing your GTX Software There are two types of licensing offered for the GTXImage CAD Series V14 program One is an Aladdin hardware license key and the other is a Flexera software license A benefit of the hardware key is portability A hardware key may be attached to any computer and may be moved to any other computer Whereas a software license will remain dedicated to the individual computer it was registered to serve Hardware license key resources 32 bit only An installed GTXImageCAD Series program includes a subfolder named License All files contained in the License folder pertain to setup authorization and diagnostics of a hardware license key Among the files in the License folder is a tutorial Help file named Start chm Explore to GTXImageCAD Series V14 License Start chm and double click that file name to display instructions and information which cover the following topics 1 The license authorization process which includes useage information for the Customer exe program The Customer exe program is your interface with the hardware license key allowing
547. the names of externally referenced drawings containing images The names of the images attached to the externally referenced drawings appear nested within the drawing at the next tree level To insert a copy of an already attached image select it and then choose Attach Tree view lists the image names only not file names and lists the image name just once regardless of how many times the image is attached insert You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again or by selecting it and then pressing F2 However you cannot select more than one image at a time Attach Displays the Select Image File dialog box See IMAGEATTACH When you unload and then reload an image that image is drawn on top For more information see DRAWORDER Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing session to the next 146 Detach Removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases all the associated image objects from the drawing and from the display Reload Loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was previously unloaded Reloading does not control whether the image is displayed but it ensures display of the most current image Unload Unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image objects from the drawing It is recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing to improve performance An unloaded image cannot be displayed or plotted You
548. the pens in your plotter The pen color that closely matches the object s color is selected You can assign colors to your pens that correspond to each object s color Use the Color list to select one of the following settings No Pen Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta Black or Other If you choose Other the Select Color dialog box is displayed providing access to the full color palette Use No Pen to indicate that there is no pen in a particular position Speed Adjusts pen speed on a pen by pen basis This feature is useful for example for slowing down pens that are skipping Each pen manufacturer recommends a pen speed for each type of media For best results use those values You can specify a pen speed in millimeters or inches per second Width Specifies the width of your pens so the program can determine if multiple pen strokes are needed to draw wide lines You can specify the pen width in inches or millimeters Be sure to select the pen width to match the actual width of the pen The list provides a set of common pen widths Specifying pen characteristics here doesn t replace the pen tables you might have imported from PCP PC2 or CFG files from AutoCAD Release 14 AutoCAD LT 98 or earlier releases Graphics Node Specifies settings for printing vector graphics raster graphics and TrueType text Depending on the capabilities of the plotter you can modify color depth resolution and dithering You can select either c
549. this command they only determine the title under which a line width is defined c Enter the value for the width in the size units being used inches or millimeters and press RETURN The Width Table will reflect the new value d Select another color number to change its width or type O leee steme in s ae woen uit and RETURN to continue the command You can set up to seven dieren widths Rectify lt Ortho gt None Reference 4 There are several ways to respond to the prompt The default is orthogonal rectification You can create reference angles to snap lines to a particular non orthogonal angle such as hatching or you can use no rectification Using Orthogonal Rectification a If Ortho is the default mode just press RETURN to accept the default of orthogonal rectification Otherwise type O and RETURN All lines within a few degrees of 0 and 90 490 degrees will be rectified to O and 90 degrees Using Reference Angle s a Type R or select Reference from the menu The option will prompt you to draw a line showing the reference angle to which lines will be snapped First point for snap angle b Select the first point to define the angular line Second point for snap angle c Select the second point to define the angle Parallel alignment offset lt 0 0 gt d This value determines the distance between the imaginary grid lines parallel to the given reference ang
550. this time REM MAXUndo 3 REM Sets the subformat to be used when saving TIFF files REM Subformat Value REM TIFF G3 1 REM TIFF G4 2 REM TIFF Uncompressed 3 TiffFormat 2 513 REM Disables a specific command Multiple variables can be set but must be on separate lines REM disable gattach REM disable gload REM Text Configuration REM Sets a recognition file for GTXImage CAD PLUS to automatically load when it runs REM CharFile c program files gtximage cad series V14 g_u_0 icr REM Sets a character to be listed in the ambiguous characters list box in the gTConfig dialog REM Ambigchar I REM Sets the initial value for the Orientation list in the gTConfig dialog CharOrient 0 REM Sets the initial value of the AutoConvert Threshold setting in the gTConfig dialog CharThreshold 100 REM Sets the initial value for the Min Char Size in the gTConfig dialog CharMinSize 0 04 REM Sets the initial value for the Max Char Size in the gTConfig dialog CharMaxSize 0 4 REM Sets the initial value for the Space Size setting in the gTConfig dialog CharSpaceSize 1 0 REM Sets the initial value for Alignment Offset setting in the gTConfig dialog CharAlign 0 REM Sets the initial value for Text Height setting in the gTConfig dialog TextHeight 0 2 REM Sets the initial value for Max Spaces setting in the gTConfig dialog MaxSpaceSize 1 REM Sets the initial value
551. tings button Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box when the Plot Stamp On option is selected in the Plot dialog box asf Save Changes to Layout Saves changes that you make in the Plot dialog box to the layout Drawing Orientation Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait orientation The paper icon represents the media orientation of the selected paper The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on the page Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page Plot Upside Down Orients and plots the drawing upside down Icon Indicates the media orientation of the selected paper and represents the orientation of the drawing on the page as a letter on the paper Note Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable Less Options Hides the following options in the Plot dialog box Plot Style Table Pen Assignments Shaded Viewport Options Plot Options Drawing Orientation 258 PLOTSTAMP E Command line plotstamp Specifies the information for the plot stamp Plot Stamp Fields Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp The selected fields are separated by commas and a space Drawing Name Includes the drawing name and p
552. tion changes the options available in the Dithering list A higher resolution setting uses more memory and takes longer to plot than a lower resolution setting Dithering Specifies a dithering choice for non pen based plotters Some dithering choices cause slower plotting Raster Graphics Non Pen Plotters Only Specifies trade offs between plotting speed and output quality when plotting raster objects If you reduce the image quality you increase output speed If your system resources are limited reducing image quality can reduce the chance of running out of memory while plotting These options are available only for raster devices not pen plotters Raster and Shaded Rendered Viewports Specifies a position on the slider that balances output quality with memory and plotting speed when plotting raster images and shaded rendered viewports Position the slider at None to disable raster image printing Degrading the image quality lets you plot in less time Position the slider at Best for the best output at the expense of memory and plotting speed OLE Specifies a position on the slider that balances output quality with memory use and plotting speed when plotting OLE objects Position the slider at None to disable OLE object printing Degrading the image quality lets you plot in less time Position the slider at Best for the best output at the expense of memory and plotting speed Trade off Specifies where to compromise quality if you
553. tion or press ENTER 0 0 o 0 0 0 All No origin Origin UCSMAN 0 UCS toolbar 0 Tools menu Named UCS EE command line ucsman Displays and modifies defined and unnamed user coordinate systems restores named and orthographic UCSs and specifies UCS icon and UCS settings for viewports The UCS dialog box includes the following tabs e Named UCSs e Orthographic UCSs e Settings Named UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box 346 Named UCSs Tab UCS Dialog Box Lists user coordinate systems and sets the current UCS Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS If the UCS has not been saved and named it is listed as UNNAMED UCS Names List Lists the coordinate systems defined in the current drawing If there are multiple viewports and multiple unnamed UCS settings the list includes only the unnamed UCS of the current viewport Unnamed UCS definitions that are locked to other viewports when the UCSVP system variable is set to 1 in that viewport are not listed in the current viewport A pointer indicates the current UCS UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed World is always listed and cannot be renamed or deleted If you define other coordinate systems for the active viewport during the current editing session a Previous entry is next You can step back through these coordinate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly To add a UCS name to this list use the Save option of the UCS c
554. tion table will be used to determine the color of the vector entities Table Setup displays the table and values can be changed if desired If several colors are given the same width value only the lowest number color will be used for that line width 1 Select the No Widths check box to render resulting vectors in the current layer s color or select the Table Setup button to color code resulting vectors for up to 16 different line widths Line Width Configuration Table Dialog 2 Click on the color to modify a color s width value Enter the new value in the Width input window at the lower right corner Note If you set your GTXImage CAD display options so that the background of the screen is white the Line Width Configuration Table s white color color 7 Line width configuration will refer to black vectors Detakwidh E r Select to change width _____ 3 Select another color to change or click OK to exit the Vector Color s Width in Inches Color name Line Width Configuration dialog ee ieee ae Red 3 Color 3 0 030 4 Color 4 0 040 Leaving By Width inactive causes resulting vectors to A inherit the color and linestyle of their layers Aa vreal Modify value Coo po A won TI Cancel Hatches When this is active vectors generated from hatched areas will be isolated on their own layer The name for this layer is established by the Hatch_Layer_Name configuration parameter in GTXRAST CFG You can creat
555. tiple collinear lines into single lines as in recognizing dashed linestyles This can be set by manually entering the distance or by selecting Pick Gap and then graphically showing a gap distance Other Options Save Raster preserves raster data after converting it to vector If this box is empty the raster will be erased after conversion Elevation sets the elevation at which resulting vectors will be created The default value is 0 To create contours at different elevation set this value before converting raster to vector Elevation Set the Elevation to the level at which resulting vectors should be created normally you want this to be 0 When all parameters are set as desired click OK to launch the conversion process Prompt Mode gCONVRT also works exclusively with GTXImage CAD prompts when the CMDDIA variable is set to 0 424 Type Menu Availability GCP or GCOPY GTX Raster Edit gt Cut Copy GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon Se gCOPY copies raster data from one location to another location in the image entity Options Movement Options Base Point Indicate the offset distance for the copy by selecting two points Note Turn the ORTHO Mode ON to place copies in a perfectly horizontal vertical or specified direction from the last position Displacement Enter X and Y offset values to indicate copy placements Instructions 1 Select gCOPY Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster to
556. tire drawing from the current viewport View menu Regen Command line regen REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in the current viewport It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance O before REGEN a er REGEN REGENALL Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports View menu Regen All E Command line regenall REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in all viewports It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance df al before REGENALL after REGENALL REGENAUTO Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing E command line regenauto or regenauto for transparent use Enter mode ON OFF lt current gt Enter on or off or press ENTER Regenerates the drawing immediately if any suppressed regenerations exist in the queue and continues to regenerate automatically whenever you perform an action that requires regeneration 288 Inhibits regeneration of the drawing until you use the REGEN or REGENALL command or set REGENAUTO to on If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is irrevocable such as thawing layers the following message is displayed Regen queued If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is revocable the following message is displayed
557. tle blocks 427 TOLERANCE 329 TOOLBAR 331 TOOLPALETTES 331 TOOLPALETTESCLOSE 333 TRACE 333 Tracing raster with vector gTRACE 501 TRANSPARENCY 333 TREESTAT 334 TRIM 334 U 339 UCS 339 UCSICON 345 UCSMAN 346 UNDO 349 UNITS 351 VIEW 353 VIEWRES 355 VPCLIP 356 VPLAYER 356 VPOINT 358 VPORTS 360 Warping raster gWARP 508 WBLOCK 362 WMFIN 364 WMFOPTS 364 WMFOUT 364 XATTACH 365 XBIND 367 XCLIP 367 XLINE 369 XPLODE 372 XREF 374 ZOOM 376 542
558. to Override prompt is redisplayed If you press ENTER you are prompted to select the dimensions Select objects Use an object selection method to select the dimensions The overrides to the selected dimensions are applied Clears any overrides on selected dimensions Select objects Use an object selection method to select the dimensions The overrides are cleared and the dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style DIMRADIUS Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs e Dimension toolbar e Dimension menu Radius EE Command line dimradius Select arc or circle DIMRADIUS measures the radius of the selected arc or circle and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it Specify dimension line location Or Mtext Text Angle Specify a point or enter an option Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text 101 Displays the In Place Text Editor which you can use to edit the dimension text To add a prefix or a suffix enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols See Control Codes and Special Characters To edit or replace the generated measurement delete text enter the new text and then click OK If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display them by entering square brackets The
559. tor Specify Y scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Specify rotation angle lt 0 gt The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell the following prompt is displayed Specify distance between columns Enter a value or specify a distance 181 Z Sets the Z scale factor Specify Z scale factor Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point Specify rotation angle lt 0 gt The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array Enter number of rows lt 1 gt Enter a positive value Enter number of columns lt 1 gt Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row the following prompt is displayed Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell Enter a value or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no u
560. ts are displayed as wireframes This option also controls whether mesh is drawn or suppressed when a 3D solid object is hidden This setting is saved in the drawing Clear this option to optimize performance DISPSILH system variable Reference Edit Fading Intensity Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in place reference editing With in place reference editing you can edit a block reference or external reference from within the current drawing While references are being edited in place objects that are not being edited are displayed at a lesser intensity than objects that can be edited The valid range is 0 through 90 percent The default setting is 50 percent XFADECTL system variable e Open and Save Controls options that relate to opening and saving files File Save Controls settings related to saving a file Save As Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with SAVE SAVEAS and QSAVE The file format selected for this option is the default format that all drawings are saved as when you use SAVE SAVEAS and QSAVE Note AutoCAD 2004 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD 2004 AutoCAD 2005 and AutoCAD 2006 releases Thumbnail Preview Settings Displays the Thumbnail Preview Settings dialog box which controls whether thumbnail previews are updated when the drawing is saved Incremental Save Percentage Sets the percentage of potentially wasted space in a drawing file Full sav
561. ts of a find or replace search Although model space and all layouts defined for the drawing are searched you can only zoom to text in the current Model or layout tab When zooming to text found in a multiline text object in some cases the found text string may not be displayed in a visible area of the drawing Object Type Specifies the type of object the text was found in Context Displays and highlights the currently found text string in its surrounding context If you click Find Next the Context area is refreshed and displays the next found text string in its surrounding context Status Displays confirmation of find and replace searches GOTOURL Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object Command line gotourl Select an object that has an attached hyperlink The file or web page URL that is associated with the hyperlink opens GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area Command line graphscr or graphscr for transparent use GRAPHSCR closes the text window You can also press F2 to open or close the text window This command is ignored on dual screen systems 134 GRID Displays a dot grid in the current viewport that is not plotted Status bar Grid E Command line grid or grid for transparent use Specify grid spacing X or ON OFF Snap Aspect lt current gt Specify a value or enter an option Sets the grid to the specified value Enteri
562. ts that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify The longer the text string the narrower the characters The height of the characters remains constant r Center Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline which you specify with a point Specify center point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text baseline with respect to the center point You can designate the angle by specifying a point The text baseline runs from the start point toward the specified point If you specify a point to the left of the center point the text is drawn upside down AUTOCAD 1 Middle Alians text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the height you 325 specify Middle aligned text does not rest on the baseline Specify middle point of text Specify a point 1 Specify height lt current gt Specify rotation angle of text lt current gt Enter text in the In Place Text Editor for single line text The Middle option differs from the MC option in that it uses the midpoint of all text including descenders The MC option uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters AUT CAD Right Right justifies the text at the baseline w
563. ttached to the drawing You can use F3 and F4 to toggle between list view and tree view List View Lists the image definitions attached to the drawing Each image name appears only once regardless of how many times the image is attached inserted You can sort the list of images by name status loaded unloaded or not found type TIFF for example date size or the saved path and file name By default the list is alphabetical by image name To select multiple images hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specific column click that column s heading To change the width of the column drag the line between the column headings to the right or left The settings are saved and restored when you reopen the dialog box To change an image name select it and then click it again or select it and then press F2 You cannot edit names of images that reside in external references xrefs Image names can include up to 255 characters and can contain letters digits spaces and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program The image name can be identical to the file name but changing the image name does not change the file name Tree View Displays all the image definitions and the levels of nesting of images within xrefs The top level of the tree view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing images nested in block references and
564. u can use this manual to learn about the software in several ways Using the GTXImage CAD Series provides an overview of working with raster images and general principles about using GTX software Page 19 Getting Started demonstrates features and functions of the software in step by step lessons Page 28 The Command Reference describes each GTXImage CAD command and feature in an alphabetical list Page 380 Use the Index to look up any term for which you need more information Other Sources of Help Use the Windows Help file You can launch this from the GTX program group help icon by typing gHelp from the command prompt by selecting HELP from the GTX ICAD pull down menu or by pressing F1 at a GTX command line prompt These execute our online help file ICAD chm from the GTX program folder The GTX Web site at http www gtx com contains product information frequently asked questions FAQ and technical notes Technical Support Always contact your authorized reseller first for technical support issues A maintenance agreement is available for purchase from GTX Corporation Contact your GTX reseller for details E mail questions to GTX at support qtx com 12 Installing the Software The Installation section describes how to install and configure both levels of the GTXImage CAD Series The Security section describes how to authorize your software license with the HASP key attached to your computer s parallel or USB port
565. um reference Datum 3 Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference pa 4 Height Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame A projected tolerance zone controls the variation in height of the extended portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the tolerance to that specified by positional tolerances Enter a value in the box 330 1 000 Projected Tolerance Zone Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol after the projected tolerance zone value e Datum Identifier Creates a datum identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the location and tolerance zones of other features A point line plane cylinder or other geometry can serve as a datum Enter the letter in the box TOOLBAR Displays hides and customizes toolbars View menu Toolbars Shortcut menu Right click any toolbar and choose Customize Command line toolbar The Customize User Interface dialog box see CUI is displayed If you enter toolbar at the Command prompt TOOLBAR displays prompts on the command line TOOLPALETTES Opens the Tool Palettes window EN 0 Standard toolbar E 0 Tools menu Tool Palettes Window E Command line toolpalettes The Tool Palettes window opens You can click the Properties button or right click the title bar the
566. umber of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100 000 The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry To reset the limit to 200 000 for example enter setenv MaxArray 200000 at the Command prompt Offset Distance and Direction Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array s offset Row Offset Specifies the distance in units between rows To add rows downward specify a negative value To specify row spacing with the pointing device use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button Column Offset Specifies the distance in units between columns To add columns to the left specify a negative value To specify column spacing with the pointing device use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation This angle is normally 0 so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to set the row 47 and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a rectangle Pick Row Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows ARRAY prompt
567. urrent Viewport Applies the viewport configuration to the current viewport only Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup When you select 2D the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports When you select 3D a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list You can choose a named view or if you have selected 3D setup you can select from the list of standard views Use the Preview area to see the choices Named Viewports Tab Model Space Viewports Dialog Box Named Viewports Tab Model Space Viewports Dialog Box Displays any saved viewport configurations in the drawing When you select a viewport configuration the layout of the saved configuration is displayed in Preview Current Name Displays the name of the current viewport configuration New Viewports Tab Layouts Viewports Dialog Box 361 New Viewports Tab Layouts Viewports Dialog Box Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout viewports Standard Viewports Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout viewports Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to app
568. urrent dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements After you choose OK the Leader Endpoint prompt is redisplayed Customizes the dimension text on the command line The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets Enter dimension text lt current gt Enter the dimension text or pressENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement use angle brackets lt gt to represent the generated measurement If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style you can display alternate units by entering square brackets Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New Modify and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes After you press ENTER the Leader Endpoint prompt is redisplayed Changes the angle of the dimension text Specify angle of dimension text 100 Enter an angle For example to rotate the text 45 degrees enter 45 After you specify the angle the Leader Endpoint prompt is redisplayed DIMOVERRIDE Overrides dimensioning system variables Dimension menu Override EE Command line dimoverride Enter dimension variable name to override Or Clear overrides Enter the name of a dimension variable or enter e Overrides the value of the dimensioning system variable you specify Enter new value for dimension variable lt current gt Enter a value or pressENTER If you enter a new value the Dimension Variable Name
569. urrent page setup for the current layout You cannot set the current layout as the current page setup Set Current is not available for sheet sets New Displays the New Page Setup dialog box in which you can enter a name for the new page setup and specify the page setup to use as a starting point Modify 230 Displays the Page Setup dialog box in which you can edit the settings for the selected page setup Import Displays the Select Page Setup From File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can select a drawing format DWG DWT or drawing interchange format Ti DXF file from which to import one or more page setups If you select DWT as the file type the Template folder opens automatically in the Select Page Setup From File dialog box When you click OK the Import Page Setups dialog box is displayed Selected Page Setup Details Displays information about the selected page setup Device Name Displays the name of the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup Plotter Displays the type of plot device specified in the currently selected page setup Plot Size Displays the plot size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup Display Wh
570. use the Pick or Box option to Cy e graphically specify the width Using Box a Select the Box button Select first corner of box b Select a point Select opposite corner of box c As you move the cursor a rubber banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected Move the cursor until the box is the desired width and the length exceeds the width Select the point 407 The best way to use this feature is to pick a point on the edge of an existing horizontal or vertical raster line and stretch the box along the line You can then easily match the width The length of the rectangle can be any size that is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width measurement A reference rectangle is used instead of a square to make it easier to see As soon as the second point has been selected the rasterization takes place Using Pick a Select Pick Select raster lt WIDTH gt b Select a piece of raster data of the desired raster width The width of the selected raster will be entered in the Fixed text box Using the LineWidth Configuration Table a Select the Table radio button and the Table Setup button The LineWidth Configuration Table appears correlating CAD color numbers and line widths expressed in current units b To change the width associated with a particular CAD color select that ACAD Color row Enter the value in the Width text field Select OK to close the dialog or selec
571. ved with the drawing affects only the current drawing An option saved in the registry and not displayed with a drawing file icon affects all drawings in a work session Options that are saved in the registry are saved in the current profile Current Drawing Displays the name of the current drawing above the tabs DWGNAME system variable The Options dialog box includes the following tabs Files Display e Open and Save e Plot and Publish System e User Preferences Drafting Selection Profiles Files 208 Lists the folders in which the program searches for support driver menu and other files Also lists optional user defined settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling Browse Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box in which you can specify a new location for the folder or file selected in the list Support File Search Path Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts customization files plug ins drawings to insert linetypes and hatch patterns that are not in the current folder Working Support File Search Path Displays the active directories that the program searches for support files specific to your system The list is read only and displays valid paths from the Support Files Search Path that exist within the current directory structure and network mappings Device Driver File Search Path S
572. ver the pointing device pauses over an object that contains a hyperlink The shortcut menu provides additional hyperlink options when you select an object that contains a hyperlink and then right click in the drawing area If this option is cleared hyperlinks in the drawing are ignored Undo Redo Controls Undo and Redo for Zoom and Pan Group Zoom and Pan Commands When selected groups multiple consecutive zoom and pan commands as a single action for undo and redo operations Hidden Line Settings Displays the Hidden Line Settings dialog box where you can change the display properties of hidden lines Lineweight Settings Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box Use this dialog box to set lineweight options such as display properties and defaults and also to set the current lineweight Edit Scale List Displays the Edit Scale List dialog box Use this dialog box to manage the list of scales displayed in several dialog boxes associated with layout viewports and plotting Drafting Specifies a number of general editing options AutoSnap Settings Controls settings that relate to the visual aids called AutoSnaps that are displayed when you use object snaps AutoSnap settings are saved in the registry When the cursor or aperture 224 box is on an object you can press TAB to cycle through all the snap points available for that object Marker Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker The marker is a geometri
573. want the xline to pass or pressENTERto end the command An xline is created through the specified point using the specified angle Bisect Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second line Specify angle vertex point Specify a point 1 Specify angle start point Specify a point 2 Specify angle end point Specify a point 3 or press ENTER to end the command The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points 371 Offset Creates an xline parallel to another object Specify offset distance or Through lt current gt Specify an offset distance enter t or press ENTER Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object Select a line object Select a line polyline ray or xline or press ENTER to end the command Specify side to offset Specify a point and press ENTER fo exit the command Through Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through a specified point Select a line object Select a line polyline ray or xline or press ENTER to end the command Specify through point Specify the point through which you want the xline to pass and press ENTER to exit the command XPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects EE Command line xplode Select objects to XPlode Select objects Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects The prog
574. wer left corner of the drawing raster limits is set as the insertion point to be used when the file is loaded or pasted Always save when leaving for any length of time and before loading new files If performing many tasks on a single drawing it is a good idea to save the files periodically 4 Select OK 479 Saving Color Images There is a difference in the way the gSAVE operates depending upon if you are saving a color or black amp white binary image Color images have a more restricted number of file saving formats Supported Color file formats When working with color images in GTX you can only save in tif uncompressed TIFF bmp Uncompressed Bitmap png Portable Network Graphics pcx PC Paintbrush formats Also if you originally loaded a jpg JFIF JPEG file you will additionally be offered the option of saving in jog JPEG format 480 gSCALE Availability GS orGSCALE GTX Raster Edit gt Scale GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon gSCALE changes the size of raster geometry within an image entity You may scale the data about a reference point by entering X axis and Y axis scaling factors or you may scale the raster data graphically Instructions 1 Select gSCALE Select raster lt WINDOW gt 2 Select the raster data to be scaled When all of the data to be scaled is highlighted press RETURN Base point 3 Select a point near the data selected This point is the reference
575. wheel mouse Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions The prompts for the different types of dimensions are Linear 102 Specify first extension line origin or Select object lt next gt Specify an object snap location enter s and select a geometric object or press ENTERto skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin lt next gt Specify an object snap location or press ENTER o skip to the next dimension object if any Aligned Specify first extension line origin or Select object lt next gt Specify an object snap location enter s and select a geometric object or press ENTERto skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin lt next gt Specify an object snap location or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Angular Three Point Specify angle vertex or Select arc or circle lt next gt Specify an object snap location enter s and select an arc or a circle or press ENTERto skip to the next prompt Specify first angle endpoint lt next gt Specify an object snap location or press ENTERto skip to the next prompt Specify second angle endpoint lt next gt Specify an object snap location or press ENTERto skip to the next dimension object if any Angular Two Line Select first line lt next gt Select a line or press ENTERto skip to the next prompt Select seco
576. will be the location in the raster image that will be stretched to a new destination position Warp Point gt A rubber banding line will stretch from the source point to the cursor Select or enter the coordinates of the destination point This will be the location to which the source point is to be stretched Source point on the drawing 2 Continue entering source and destination point pairs until all the warp points are done Now warping image 509 Appendix 1 Glossary of Terms Active Image he image currently prepared by the GTXImage CAD series or raster editing or conversion ASCII American Standard Code for Information Exchange Pronounced Ask ee The code used by most computers to represent text Attach Lets you attach an image within a drawing The raster data is not stored in the image instead an image entity points O the raster file on disk Authorize ou must give GTX your HASP ID number to receive the license for full use of your software Auto Convert Threshold The confidence level above which gTCONVRT will automatically convert a raster character into ACAD text ithout using the Character Verification Dialog AutoSnap AutoCAD s method of dynamically snapping the crosshair to ector objects Character Verification he QA process that lets the user verify that ICR correctly creates ACAD text entities even if it guesses the character rong Confidence Level A number betw
577. xt characters will be formed as a string This only affects MTF output If set to YES each group will be considered a string NO indicates that each character will be vectorized as a single character entity Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N The IGES CFG File The IGES CFG file is used to customize the way entities are translated so they will fit the parameters of your particular version of IGES The following shows the default contents of the IGES CFG file Table 6 Default IGES CFG File Contents Variable Default Value RecordLength 80 The entries are explained below Units Specifies the unit of measurement for parameters Acceptable entries are INCH or MM SystemID The name or identifier of the receiving program This identifier is for operator identification only and has no bearing on the file conversion It can be a character string of up to 10 characters OutlinePoly YES specifies that filled polygons will be converted as closed polylines NO specifies that they will be converted into closed areas with fill property Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N FilledCircle_flash YES specifies that filled circles will be converted to flash entities NO specifies that they will be converted to circles with fill property Acceptable entries are YES or Y NO or N FilledCircle_circle YES specifies that filled circles will be converted to circles NO specifies that they will be converted to circles wi
578. y HELP Help gt Help GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon HELP starts the GTXImage CAD Help file The Help window functions as any other Windows application Help file including search for keyword capabilities For more information on available sources of help refer to the Introduction 443 gHTEXT Availability GHTEXT GTXConvert gt Edit Hybrid Text GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS A Icon Hybrid text is raster text with a vector text overlay created by using the gText command while the qHybridmode function is enabled Edited hybrid text will be oriented at the same angle as the text that is chosen to be edited The gHtext command initiates a vector text editor aided by the Text Formatting control Instructions Command ghtext 1 Select text object Mouse click on the vector text to be edited 2 Selection of a vector text string opens the Text Formatting control with the In Place Text Editor Standard v F Aral 7 4 020 B FT U O eA a Sseee i gt i BS Aa aA G Edit Text 3 Place the cursor at the point where text is to be added or deleted Type new text or swipe over existing text to delete IE R Il ih Il sr BS Aa aA Edit testT ext 444 4 When editing is complete click the OK button on the Text Formatting control or click somewhere outside of the In Place Text Editor The changed hybrid text is completed Edit this T
579. y If you select Fit you will be prompted to select the original size Select original size 462 Select two corners of a box representing the size of the original image Select new size Draw the window to show the relative size of the desired image to the reference box The data that filled the original rectangle will be enlarged or compressed to fit into the new rectangle The X and Y dimensions can be different After you indicate the scale by either method the pasted data is redrawn at the new size and un highlighted Move Rotate Scale You can select another option to change or press RETURN to terminate the command You can further adjust the image after you have placed it with the previous option in the desired command gMOVE gSCALE etc 463 gRAHEAD Availability GRAH or GRAHEAD GTX Vector Clean gt Remove Arrow Heads GTXImage CAD PLUS Icon x Function gRAHEAD erases arrowheads three sided solids Instructions Filter Arrow heads Al1 lt Select objects gt Type A for all or press RETURN to select a group of objects If you typed A then all 3 sided solids are erased If you chose to select objects the following prompt is shown Select objects Window or pick objects Press RETURN when done arrowheads are highlighted Press RETURN to erase them 464 gRASTER Availability GRA or GRASTER GTX Convert gt Rasterize GTXImage CAD GTXImage CAD PLUS VoR
580. y Specifies the dictionary to use for checking spelling DCTMAIN system variable Custom Dictionary File Specifies a custom dictionary to use if you have one DCTCUST system variable Alternate Font File Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file If you click Browse the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed from which you can choose an available font FONTALT system variable Font Mapping File Specifies the location of the file that defines how to convert fonts that cannot be found FONTMAP system variable Print File Spooler and Prolog Section Names Specifies settings related to plotting Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier The default name is the drawing name plus the plf file extension The default name used with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawings is the drawing name layout name plus the pit file name extension Some plotting device drivers however use a different plot file extension This option affects only the default plot file name used for plotting scripts created with earlier versions of AutoCAD Print Spool Executable Specifies the application to use for print spooling You can enter the executable file name as well as any command line arguments you want to use For example
581. y converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height Resolution Displays information about the vertical and horizontal resolution of the selected image Current AutoCAD Unit Displays information about the default units of the selected image The image is displayed at the default width and height in pixels Image Size in Pixels Displays information about the width and height in pixels of the selected image Image Size in Units Displays information about the default size in units of the selected image The image size is automatically converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height IMAGEADJUST Controls the image display of the brightness contrast and fade values of images Ex 0 Reference toolbar 0 Modify menu Object Image Adjust Shortcut menu Select an image to adjust right click in the drawing area and choose Image Adjust E Command line imageadjust Select image s Select one or more images The Image Adjust dialog box is displayed If you enter imageadjust at the Command prompt IMAGEADJUST displays prompts on the command line 151 IMAGECLIP Uses clipping boundaries to define a subregion of an image object 50 Reference toolbar E O Modify menu Clip Image Shortcut menu Select an image to clip right click in the drawing area and choose Image 3 Clip ES Command line imageclip Select image to clip Select an edge of an image Ente
582. yle is based on Normal which uses an object s properties and doesn t apply any overrides by default You must specify the overrides you want to apply after you create the new plot style You cannot add a new plot style to a color dependent plot style table a color dependent plot style table has 255 plot styles mapped to color You also cannot add a plot style to a named plot style table that has a translation table Delete Style Deletes the selected style from the plot style table Objects assigned this plot style retain the plot style assignment but plot as Normal because the plot style is no longer defined in the plot style table You cannot delete a plot style from a named plot style table that has a translation table or from a color dependent plot style table Edit Lineweights Displays the Edit Lineweights dialog box There are 28 lineweights available to apply to plot styles in plot style tables If the lineweight you need doesn t exist in the list of lineweights stored in the plot style table you can edit an existing lineweight You can t add or delete lineweights from the list in the plot style table 322 Save As Displays the Save As dialog box and saves the plot style table to a new name SYSWINDOWS Arranges windows and icons when the application window is shared with external applications E Command line syswindows Enter an option Cascade tile Horizontal tile Vertical Arrange icons Enter an option
583. yline they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one segment If they re separated by another polyline segment CHAMFER deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the chamfer If you select an edge on a 3D solid you must indicate which one of the two surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface Base surface selection Enter surface selection option Next OK current lt OK gt Enter n or o or press ENTER Entering O or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface Entering N selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge Specify base surface chamfer distance lt current gt Specify other surface chamfer distance lt current gt After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances select the edges of the base surface to chamfer You can select edges individually or all the edges at once Select an edge or Loop Select an edge enter L or press ENTER first edge selected first base surface second base surface Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer V E E select edge edge selected chamfered edge Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode Select an edge loop or Edge Select an edge enter e or press ENTER Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface 63 selecting edge loop edge loop selected aes edge pop Switches to Edge mode Undo Reverses the previous action in the command Polyline Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D
584. you finish selecting objects press ENTER to redisplay the Block Definition dialog box Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box which defines a selection set Retain Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the block Delete Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects Settings Specifies settings for the block Block Unit Specifies the insertion units for the block reference Scale Uniformly Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non uniformly scaled Allow Exploding Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded 58 Description Specifies the text description of the block Hyperlink Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box which you can use to associate a hyperlink with the block definition Open in Block Editor Opens the current block definition in the Block Editor when you click OK BLOCKICON Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter File menu Drawing Utilities Update Block Icons EE Command line blockicon Enter block names lt gt Specify block names or press ENTER fo update all blocks Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release You can enter a series of
585. you intend to run The installation sets this variable If this variable is not listed the program will default to PLUS For GTXImage CAD set ProductLevel ICAD For GTXlmage CAD PLUS set ProductLevel ICADPLUS Note If the product level listed is different from the product you purchased your program will only run in demo mode If you keep running in demo mode although you bought the product make sure your product level is set to the correct level in the configuration file HASP Timeout Determines the number of minutes of idle time the GTXImage CAD Series license server will allow before de activating an inactive license and making it available again Demo Mode Controls whether GTXImage CAD series runs in demo mode or attempts to find the HASP key and run as the product level specified by the ProductLevel configuration parameter In Demo mode the GTXImage CAD series allows you to try all functionallity except you cannot save cut 8 paste plot or print edited files Valid entries Yes No Uninstalling the Software To remove the GTXImage CAD Series software from your system use Add and Remove 17 Programs from the Control Panel Alternatively you may run the ImageCAD setup program from the CD ROM and select Uninstall Removing the GTX Application Files Note Uninstall may not remove files that were not placed on your system by SETUP including modified configuration files AutoCAD drawings or raster images You may need to
586. you to activate your GTXImageCAD Series license for single user and networked floating license multiple user hardware license keys 2 Networked floating license setup and configuration Information includes installation of the License Manager 3 Hardware key device driver installation 4 Hardware key diagnostics and Help file information including error message description 16 Software license resources 32 bit or 64 bit A software based license is provided by GTX in the form of a license file named GTXnet lic for floating licenses and GTX lic for single user licenses Application for a software based license begins by running a registration program on the Windows computer that will host the license The main GTXImageCAD Series V14 file folder contains the software based license tutorial Help file named GTX_Flex_Licensing chm Double click that file name to display instructions and information which cover the following topics Initiating the registration process for single user and floating licenses Descriptions of single user and multiple user floating license files Floating license administration tool setup Resource links to floating license options and error code description PONS Critical Configuration File Parameters Three configuration parameters are located in the configuration file GTXRAST CFG These are ProductLevel HASPTIMEOUT DEMOMODE Product Level ProductLevel specifies the software level
587. ys When creating a rectangular array gARRAY arranges multiple copies of the selected raster in rows and columns When creating a polar array the command arranges copies of the selected raster placed about a circle Instructions 1 Invoke gARRAY Select raster lt Window gt 2 Select the raster data to be copied Use any valid raster selection method 3 Press RETURN Rectangular or Polar array R P lt R gt 4 Enter R for rectangular or P for polar Rectangular If using a rectangular array you must specify the number of rows and columns to be copied Number of rows lt 1 gt a Enter the number of rows you desire Number of columns lt 1 gt b Enter the number of vertical columns you desire Unit cell or distance between rows c You may enter a vertical distance numerically or draw a unit cell representing the distances between rows and columns graphically If you enter a distance numerically then press RETURN you will receive the following prompt Distance between columns d Enter the distance that will separate the columns The selected raster is copied Note Positive x or y distances places copies to the right or above the original Negative distances places them to the left or below the original If you drew a unit cell instead of typing a distance a rectangular box will rubber band from the anchor point Drag the box to represent the distance between both the rows and
588. ystem variable Current Layer Displays the name of the current layer Search for Layer Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters This filter is not saved when you close the Layer Properties Manager Status Line Shows the name of the current filter the number of layers displayed in the list view and the number of layers in the drawing Invert Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property filter Indicate Layers in Use Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use In a drawing with many layers clear this option to improve performance SHOWLAYERUSAGE system variable Apply to Layers Toolbar Controls the display of layers in the list of layers on the Layers toolbar by applying the current layer filter Apply Applies changes that have been made to layers and filters but does not close the dialog box The Layer Properties Manager has two panes o Tree view e List view 160 Tree View Displays a hierarchical list of layers and filters in the drawing The top node All displays all layers in the drawing Filters are displayed in alphabetical order The All Used Layers filter is read only Expand a node to see nested filters Double click a property filter to open the Layer Filter Properties dialog box and view the definition of the filter If there are xrefs attached to the drawing an XREF node displays the names of all the xrefs i
589. ze If the selected output device cannot plot to this paper size the program displays a warning message and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file PC3 or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer You can also select this option by setting PAPERUPDATE to 0 Use the Plot Device Paper Size Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file PC3 or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer You can also set this option by setting PAPERUPDATE to 1 System Printer Spool Alert Controls whether you are alerted when the plotted drawing is spooled through a system printer because of an input or output port conflict Always Alert And Log Errors Alerts you and always logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer 219 Alert First Time Only And Log Errors Alerts you once and always logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer Never Alert And Log First Error Never alerts you and logs only the first error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer Never Alert Do Not Log Errors Never alerts you or logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer OLE Plot Quality Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects The options are Monochrome Low Graphics High Graphics and Automatically Select The automatic option assigns a plot

User Manual - GTX Corporation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents